RMX 2000 Administrator'

Polycom® RMX®
1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide
Version 7.2.2 | August 2011 | DOC2612C
Trademark Information
Polycom®, the Polycom “Triangles” logo, and the names and marks associated with Polycom’s
products are trademarks and/or service marks of Polycom, Inc., and are registered and/or
common-law marks in the United States and various other countries.
All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Patent Information
The accompanying product is protected by one or more U.S. and foreign patents and/or pending
patent applications held by Polycom, Inc.
© 2011 Polycom, Inc. All rights reserved.
Polycom, Inc.
4750 Willow Road
Pleasanton, CA 94588-2708
USA
No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means,
electronic or mechanical, for any purpose, without the express written permission of Polycom, Inc.
Under the law, reproducing includes translating into another language or format.
As between the parties, Polycom, Inc., retains title to and ownership of all proprietary rights with
respect to the software contained within its products. The software is protected by United States
copyright laws and international treaty provision. Therefore, you must treat the software like any
other copyrighted material (e.g., a book or sound recording).
Every effort has been made to ensure that the information in this manual is accurate. Polycom, Inc.,
is not responsible for printing or clerical errors. Information in this document is subject to change
without notice.
Regulatory Notices
United States Federal Communication
Commission (FCC)
Part 15: Class A Statement. This equipment has
been tested and found to comply with the limits for a
Class A digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC
Rules. Test limits are designed to provide reasonable
protection against harmful interference when the
equipment is operated in a commercial environment.
This equipment generates, uses and can radiate
radio-frequency energy and, if not installed and used
in accordance with the instruction manuals, may
cause harmful interference to radio communications.
Operation of this equipment in a residential area is
likely to cause harmful interference, in which case the
user will be required to correct the interference at his
or her own expense.
Part 68: Network Registration Number. This
equipment is registered with the FCC in accordance
with Part 68 of the FCC Rules. This equipment is
identified by the FCC registration number.
If requested, the FCC registration Number and REN
must be provided to the telephone company.
Any repairs to this equipment must be carried out by
Polycom Inc. or our designated agent. This
stipulation is required by the FCC and applies during
and after the warranty period.
•
•
United States Safety Construction Details:
All connections are indoor only.
Unit is intended for RESTRICTED ACCESS
LOCATION.
•
Unit is to be installed in accordance with the
National Electrical Code.
•
The branch circuit overcurrent protection shall
be rated 20 A for the AC system.
•
This equipment has a maximum operating
ambient of 40°C, the ambient temperature in
the rack shall not exceed this temperature.
To eliminate the risk of battery explosion, the battery
should not be replaced by an incorrect type.
Dispose of used batteries according to their
instructions.
CE Mark R&TTE Directive
Polycom Inc., declares that the Polycom RMX™
2000 is in conformity with the following relevant
harmonized standards:
EN 60950-1:2001
EN 55022: 1998+A1:2000+A2:2003 class A
EN 300 386 V1.3.3: 2005
Following the provisions of the Council Directive
1999/CE on radio and telecommunication terminal
equipment and the recognition of its conformity.
Canadian Department of Communications
This Class [A] digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
Notice: The Industry Canada label identifies certified
equipment. This certification means that the
equipment meets telecommunication network
protective, operational and safety requirements as
prescribed in the appropriate Terminal Equipment
Technical Requirements document(s). The
Department does not guarantee the equipment will
operate to the user's satisfaction.
Before installing this equipment, users should ensure
that it is permissible to be connected to the facilities
of the local telecommunications company. The
equipment must also be installed using an acceptable
method of connection. The customer should be
aware that compliance with the above conditions may
not prevent degradation of service in some situations.
Repairs to certified equipment malfunctions, may give
the telecommunications company causes to request
the user to disconnect the equipment.
Users should ensure for their own protection that the
electrical ground connections of the power utility,
telephone lines and internal metallic water pipe
system, if present, are connected together. This
precaution may be particularly important in rural
areas.
Caution: Users should not attempt to make such
connections themselves, but should contact the
appropriate electric inspection authority, or
electrician, as appropriate.
Regulatory Notices
RMX 2000: Chinese Communication Certificate
Singapore Certificate
RMX 2000 complies with IDA standards G0916-07
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Table of Contents
Conference Profiles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Conferencing Modes .............................................................................. 1-3
Standard Conferencing .................................................................. 1-3
Supplemental Conferencing Features ......................................... 1-5
Viewing Profiles ..................................................................................... 1-6
Profile Toolbar ................................................................................ 1-8
Defining Profiles ..................................................................................... 1-8
Modifying an Existing Profile ..................................................... 1-35
Deleting a Conference Profile ..................................................... 1-36
Additional Conferencing Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Video Session Modes ............................................................................. 2-1
Line Rates for CP and VSW .......................................................... 2-2
Dynamic Continuous Presence (CP) Mode ................................ 2-3
Continuous Presence (CP) Conferencing ............................................ 2-3
Video Resolutions in CP ................................................................ 2-4
Video Resource Usage ........................................................... 2-4
Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates ............................ 2-5
Additional Video Resolutions in MPM+/MPMx Card
Configuration Mode ....................................................................... 2-6
Additional Intermediate Video Resolutions ............................... 2-6
Video Display with CIF, SD and HD Video Connections ....... 2-7
Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing ... 2-7
CP Conferencing with H.263 4CIF ............................................... 2-8
H.263 4CIF Guidelines ........................................................... 2-9
H.264 High Profile .......................................................................... 2-9
Guidelines ................................................................................ 2-9
H.264 High Profile System Flags ........................................ 2-10
Microsoft RTV Video Protocol .................................................... 2-12
Guidelines .............................................................................. 2-12
Participant Settings ............................................................... 2-13
Monitoring RTV .................................................................... 2-15
Resolution Configuration ............................................................ 2-16
i
Table of Contents
Guidelines .............................................................................. 2-16
Accessing the Resolution Configuration dialog box ....... 2-16
Modifying the Resolution Configuration in MPM
or MPM+ Card Configuration Mode ................................. 2-17
Modifying the Resolution Configuration in MPMx
Card Configuration Mode ................................................... 2-21
Video Switching .................................................................................... 2-24
Guidelines ...................................................................................... 2-26
Enabling Video Switching ........................................................... 2-26
Modifying the Video Switching Threshold Bit Rate ....... 2-26
Creating a Video Switching Profile .................................... 2-27
Monitoring Video Switching Conferences ................................ 2-28
H.239 / People+Content ..................................................................... 2-29
H.239 ............................................................................................... 2-29
People+Content ............................................................................ 2-29
Guidelines ...................................................................................... 2-29
Content Transmission Modes ..................................................... 2-30
Content Protocol ........................................................................... 2-31
Endpoint Capabilities .......................................................... 2-32
Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference ........ 2-34
Modifying the Threshold Line Rate for HD Resolution
Content ........................................................................................... 2-35
Disabling HD Resolution Content ............................................. 2-36
Sending Content to Legacy Endpoints ...................................... 2-37
Guidelines for Sending Content to Legacy Endpoints .... 2-37
Content Display on Legacy Endpoints .............................. 2-38
Interoperability with Polycom CMA and DMA .............. 2-39
Enabling the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints Option ....... 2-40
Changing the Default Layout for Displaying Content
on Legacy Endpoints ............................................................ 2-41
Stopping a Content Session ........................................................ 2-44
Video Preview ....................................................................................... 2-45
Video Preview Guidelines .......................................................... 2-45
Workstation Requirements ......................................................... 2-46
Testing your Workstation ................................................... 2-46
Previewing the Participant Video .............................................. 2-48
Gathering Phase .................................................................................... 2-50
ii
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Gathering Phase Guidelines ....................................................... 2-51
Gathering Phase Duration ................................................... 2-52
Enabling the Gathering Phase Display .............................. 2-53
Closed Captions .................................................................................... 2-54
Enabling Closed Captions ........................................................... 2-55
Message Overlay .................................................................................. 2-55
Guidelines ...................................................................................... 2-56
Enabling Message Overlay .......................................................... 2-57
Audio Algorithm Support ................................................................... 2-60
Guidelines ...................................................................................... 2-60
Mono ....................................................................................... 2-61
Stereo ...................................................................................... 2-62
Audio algorithms supported for ISDN ..................................... 2-63
Monitoring Participant Audio Properties ................................. 2-65
Media Encryption ................................................................................. 2-66
Media Encryption Guidelines ..................................................... 2-66
Conference Access ................................................................ 2-67
Entry Queue Access ............................................................. 2-69
Move Guidelines ................................................................... 2-71
Encryption Flag Settings .............................................................. 2-71
Enabling Encryption in the Profile ............................................. 2-72
Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level .......................... 2-72
Monitoring the Encryption Status .............................................. 2-74
LPR – Lost Packet Recovery ................................................................ 2-76
Packet Loss .................................................................................... 2-76
Causes of Packet Loss .......................................................... 2-76
Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences ............................... 2-76
Lost Packet Recovery ................................................................... 2-76
Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines ....................................... 2-77
Enabling Lost Packet Recovery .......................................... 2-77
Monitoring Lost Packet Recovery .............................................. 2-78
Telepresence Mode ............................................................................... 2-79
RMX Telepresence Mode Guidelines ........................................ 2-80
System Level .......................................................................... 2-80
Conference Level .................................................................. 2-80
Room (Participant/Endpoint) Level .................................. 2-81
iii
Table of Contents
Automatic detection of Immersive Telepresence
(ITP) Sites ............................................................................... 2-81
Striping Options ........................................................................... 2-82
Horizontal Striping .............................................................. 2-82
Symmetric Letter box Cropping ......................................... 2-82
Gathering Phase with ITP Room Systems ........................ 2-83
Aspect ratio for standard endpoints .................................. 2-83
Video Fade is enabled for all Telepresence conferences . 2-83
RPX and TPX Video Layouts ...................................................... 2-83
Enabling Telepresence Mode ...................................................... 2-87
Conference Level .................................................................. 2-87
Room (Participant/Endpoint) Level .................................. 2-88
Saving an Ongoing Conference as a Template ................ 2-90
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template ......... 2-90
Monitoring Telepresence Mode ................................................. 2-92
Monitoring Ongoing Conferences ..................................... 2-92
Monitoring Participant Properties ..................................... 2-93
Lecture Mode ........................................................................................ 2-94
Enabling Lecture Mode ............................................................... 2-94
Enabling the Automatic Switching .................................... 2-94
Selecting the Conference Lecturer ..................................... 2-95
Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer ........................ 2-96
Content Broadcast Control .................................................. 2-96
Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership ........................ 2-97
Lecture Mode Monitoring ........................................................... 2-98
Permanent Conference ...................................................................... 2-101
Guidelines .................................................................................... 2-101
Enabling a Permanent Conference ........................................... 2-102
Cascading Conferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Video Layout in Cascading conferences ..................................... 3-1
Guidelines ................................................................................ 3-2
Flags controlling Cascade Layouts ...................................... 3-3
DTMF Forwarding ................................................................. 3-4
Play Tone Upon Cascading Link Connection .................... 3-4
Basic Cascading ...................................................................................... 3-5
Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link ................................... 3-5
Dialing Directly to a Conference .......................................... 3-6
iv
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Dialing to an Entry Queue .................................................... 3-6
Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link ................ 3-7
Basic Cascading using ISDN Cascaded Link ............................. 3-7
Network Topologies Enabling H.239 Content Over ISDN
Cascaded Links ....................................................................... 3-7
Guidelines ................................................................................ 3-8
Gateway to Gateway Calls via ISDN Cascading Link ...... 3-9
Gateway to MCU Calls via ISDN Cascading Link .......... 3-10
MCU to MCU Calls via ISDN Cascading Link ................ 3-11
RMX Configuration Enabling ISDN Cascading Links .... 3-12
Suppression of DTMF Forwarding .................................... 3-17
Star Cascading Topology .................................................................... 3-18
Master-Slave Cascading .............................................................. 3-18
Cascading via Entry Queue ........................................................ 3-26
Enabling Cascading .............................................................. 3-27
Creating the Cascade-enabled Entry Queue .................... 3-27
Creating the Dial-out Cascaded Link ................................ 3-29
Enabling Cascaded Conferences without Password ....... 3-31
Monitoring Star Cascaded Conferences .................................... 3-32
Creating the Dial-out Link from a Conference Running
on the MGC to the Conference Running on the RMX ............ 3-33
Cascading Conferences - H.239-enabled MIH Topology ............... 3-34
MIH Cascading Levels ................................................................. 3-35
MIH Cascading Guidelines ................................................. 3-36
H.239 Content Sharing ......................................................... 3-38
Setting up MIH Cascading Conferences ................................... 3-38
RMX to RMX Cascading ...................................................... 3-39
MGC to RMX Cascading ..................................................... 3-46
Meeting Rooms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Meeting Rooms List ............................................................................... 4-2
Meeting Room Toolbar & Right-click Menu .............................. 4-5
Creating a New Meeting Room ............................................................ 4-6
Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories . . . . . . . . 5-1
Entry Queues ........................................................................................... 5-1
Defining a New Entry Queue ....................................................... 5-4
Listing Entry Queues ..................................................................... 5-8
Modifying the EQ Properties ........................................................ 5-9
v
Table of Contents
Transit Entry Queue ....................................................................... 5-9
Setting a Transit Entry Queue .............................................. 5-9
IVR Provider Entry Queue (Shared Number Dialing) ............ 5-10
Call Flow ................................................................................ 5-10
Guidelines .............................................................................. 5-11
RMX Configuration .............................................................. 5-11
SIP Factories .......................................................................................... 5-12
Creating SIP Factories .................................................................. 5-13
SIP Registration & Presence for Entry Queues and SIP Factories . 5-15
Guidelines .............................................................................. 5-16
Monitoring Registration Status .................................................. 5-16
Ad Hoc Conferencing .......................................................................... 5-17
Gateway to Polycom® Distributed Media Application™
(DMA™) 7000 ............................................................................... 5-18
Address Book . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Viewing the Address Book ................................................................... 6-2
Displaying and Hiding the Address Book .......................... 6-2
Adding a Participant to the Address Book ......................................... 6-3
Adding a new participant to the Address Book Directly ......... 6-4
Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to
the Address Book ......................................................................... 6-13
Modifying Participants in the Address Book ........................... 6-14
Deleting Participants from the Address Book .......................... 6-15
Searching the Address Book ....................................................... 6-15
Filtering the Address Book ......................................................... 6-16
Participant Groups ............................................................................... 6-18
Adding a New Group to the Address Book ............................. 6-18
Deleting a Group from the Address Book ................................ 6-19
Modifying a Group in the Address Book ................................. 6-20
Importing and Exporting Address Books ......................................... 6-21
Exporting an Address Book ........................................................ 6-21
Importing an Address Book ........................................................ 6-22
Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the RMX .... 6-23
Reservations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Guidelines ................................................................................................ 7-1
System ...................................................................................... 7-1
Resources ................................................................................. 7-2
vi
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Reservations ............................................................................ 7-3
Using the Reservation Calendar ........................................................... 7-4
Toolbar Buttons ....................................................................... 7-5
Reservations Views ........................................................................ 7-5
Week View ............................................................................... 7-6
Day View ................................................................................. 7-6
Today View ............................................................................. 7-6
List View .................................................................................. 7-7
Changing the Calendar View ....................................................... 7-8
Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation Calendar ............. 7-10
Creating a New Reservation ....................................................... 7-10
Managing Reservations ....................................................................... 7-18
Guidelines ...................................................................................... 7-18
Viewing and Modifying Reservations ....................................... 7-18
Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations
Calendar ................................................................................. 7-18
Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations .......................... 7-20
Deleting Reservations .................................................................. 7-22
Searching for Reservations using Quick Search ...................... 7-23
Operator Assistance & Participant Move . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Operator Conferences ............................................................ 8-2
Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance ....... 8-4
Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator
Assistance Options ................................................................. 8-4
Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator
Assistance Options ................................................................. 8-7
Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator
Conference ............................................................................... 8-9
Defining an Ongoing Operator Conference ..................... 8-16
Saving an Operator Conference to a Template ................ 8-20
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template ......... 8-22
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants
Requiring Assistance .................................................................... 8-23
Requesting Help ................................................................... 8-23
Participant Alerts List .......................................................... 8-25
Audible Alarms ............................................................................ 8-25
Using Audible Alarms ......................................................... 8-25
vii
Table of Contents
Moving Participants Between Conferences .............................. 8-26
Moving Participants ............................................................. 8-27
Conference Templates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
Guidelines ................................................................................ 9-1
Using Conference Templates ................................................................ 9-3
Toolbar Buttons ....................................................................... 9-4
Creating a New Conference Template ................................................ 9-4
Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch .................. 9-5
Saving an Ongoing or Operator Conference as a Template ... 9-12
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template ......................... 9-13
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template ......... 9-14
Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference Template ................ 9-15
Deleting a Conference Template ........................................................ 9-17
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook® . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
Setting up the Calendaring Solution ................................................. 10-3
Calendaring Guidelines ............................................................. 10-10
Creating and Connecting to a Conference ...................................... 10-12
Creating a Conference ............................................................... 10-12
Connecting to a Conference ...................................................... 10-14
RMX Standalone Deployment .......................................... 10-15
RMX and Polycom DMA System Deployment .............. 10-15
Polycom Solution Support ........................................................ 10-16
Conference and Participant Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
General Monitoring .............................................................................. 11-2
Conference Level Monitoring ............................................................. 11-2
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants
Requiring Assistance .................................................................. 11-14
Requesting Help ................................................................. 11-14
Request to Speak ................................................................. 11-16
Participant Alerts List ........................................................ 11-17
Participant Level Monitoring ........................................................... 11-17
IP Participant Properties ................................................... 11-19
Monitoring ISDN/PSTN Participants ............................. 11-32
Monitoring Telepresence Participant Properties ........... 11-40
Recording Conferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS ............... 12-2
Configuring the RMX to Enable Recording ...................................... 12-2
viii
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Defining the Recording Link ...................................................... 12-3
Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR
Service ............................................................................................ 12-5
Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile .................. 12-6
Recording Link Encryption ......................................................... 12-8
Managing the Recording Process ..................................................... 12-10
Recording Link Layout .............................................................. 12-11
Using the RMX Web Client to Manage the Recording
Process .......................................................................................... 12-13
Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process ........ 12-15
Conference Recording with Codian IP VCR .................................. 12-15
Users, Connections and Notes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
RMX Users ............................................................................................. 13-1
Listing Users .................................................................................. 13-2
Adding a New User ..................................................................... 13-3
Deleting a User .............................................................................. 13-4
Changing a User’s Password ...................................................... 13-4
Disabling a User ............................................................................ 13-5
Enabling a User ............................................................................. 13-6
Renaming a User .......................................................................... 13-6
Connections ........................................................................................... 13-7
Viewing the Connections List ..................................................... 13-7
User and Connection Management in Ultra Secure Mode ............ 13-8
Managing the RMX Users ......................................................... 13-10
User Types ........................................................................... 13-10
Disabling/Enabling Users ................................................. 13-10
Renaming Users .................................................................. 13-10
Disabling Inactive Users .................................................... 13-10
Managing the User Login Process ........................................... 13-11
Implementing Strong Passwords ..................................... 13-11
Implementing Password Re-Use / History Rules ......... 13-12
Defining Password Aging ................................................. 13-13
Defining Password Change Frequency ........................... 13-13
Forcing Password Change ................................................. 13-14
Temporary User Lockout .................................................. 13-14
User Lockout ....................................................................... 13-14
User Login Record .............................................................. 13-15
ix
Table of Contents
Controlling RMX User Sessions ............................................... 13-16
Management Sessions per System ................................... 13-16
Sessions per User ................................................................ 13-16
Connection Timeout ........................................................... 13-16
Session Timeout .................................................................. 13-17
Erase Session History After Logout ................................. 13-17
Notes .................................................................................................... 13-17
Using Notes ................................................................................. 13-17
Network Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
IP Network Services ............................................................................. 14-2
Management Network (Primary) ............................................... 14-2
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service) ................................ 14-3
Modifying the Management Network ...................................... 14-3
Modifying the Default IP Network Service ............................ 14-13
Ethernet Settings ......................................................................... 14-30
IP Network Monitoring ............................................................. 14-33
Using IPv6 Networking Addresses for RMX Internal
and External Entities .................................................................. 14-39
RMX Internal Addresses ................................................... 14-39
External Entities .................................................................. 14-39
IPv6 Guidelines ........................................................................... 14-39
LAN Redundancy .............................................................................. 14-40
Guidelines .................................................................................... 14-41
Configuration Requirements .................................................... 14-41
Hardware Monitor Indications ............................................... 14-42
RMX Network Port Usage ................................................................ 14-43
ISDN/PSTN Network Services ........................................................ 14-46
Adding/Modifying ISDN/PSTN Network Services ............ 14-47
Obtaining ISDN/PSTN required information ............... 14-48
Modifying an ISDN/PSTN Network Service ......................... 14-56
Network Security ............................................................................... 14-58
RMX 1500/4000 .......................................................................... 14-58
RMX 2000 ..................................................................................... 14-59
Multiple Network Services ............................................................... 14-59
Guidelines .................................................................................... 14-60
Resource Allocation and Capacity ................................... 14-62
First Time Installation and Configuration .............................. 14-63
x
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Upgrading to Version 7.2.x and Multiple Services ................ 14-64
Gather Network Equipment and Address Information - IP
Network Services Required Information ................................ 14-66
RMX Hardware Installation ...................................................... 14-67
RMX 4000 Multiple Services Configuration ................... 14-67
RMX 2000 Multiple Services Configuration ................... 14-69
RMX 1500 Multiple Services Configuration ................... 14-70
RMX Configuration .................................................................... 14-71
System Flags and License Settings ................................... 14-71
IP Network Service Definition .......................................... 14-71
Setting a Network Service as Default .............................. 14-80
Ethernet Settings ................................................................. 14-81
Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK
Indications ........................................................................... 14-81
Video/Voice Port Configuration and Resolution
Configuration ...................................................................... 14-81
Conference Profile .............................................................. 14-82
Gateway Profiles ................................................................. 14-83
Hardware Monitor ..................................................................... 14-84
Signaling Monitor ....................................................................... 14-84
Conferencing ............................................................................... 14-85
Defining Dial Out Participants ......................................... 14-85
Reserving Video Resources for a Conference ................. 14-86
Monitoring Conferences .................................................... 14-86
Resource Report .......................................................................... 14-87
Port Gauge Indications ...................................................... 14-87
IVR Services . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
IVR Services List ................................................................................... 15-2
IVR Services Toolbar .................................................................... 15-4
Adding Languages ............................................................................... 15-4
Defining a New Conference IVR Service .......................................... 15-9
Defining a New Conference IVR Service ................................ 15-10
IVR Tone Notifications ...................................................... 15-22
Entry Queues IVR Service ................................................................. 15-30
Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service .............................. 15-30
Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR
Service as the Default Service ................................................... 15-37
xi
Table of Contents
Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service
Properties ..................................................................................... 15-38
Replacing the Music File ................................................................... 15-39
Adding a Music File ........................................................... 15-39
Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides .................................... 15-40
Recording an Audio Message ................................................... 15-40
Creating a Welcome Video Slide .............................................. 15-44
Default IVR Prompts and Messages ................................................ 15-45
Volume Control of IVR Messages, Music and Roll Call ............... 15-48
The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16-1
The CDR File ......................................................................................... 16-2
CDR File Formats ......................................................................... 16-2
CDR File Contents ........................................................................ 16-3
Viewing, Retrieving and Archiving Conference Information ....... 16-4
Viewing the Conference Records ............................................... 16-4
Refreshing the CDR List .............................................................. 16-6
Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records .............. 16-7
Gateway Calls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17-1
Gateway Functionality ........................................................................ 17-1
Call Flows .............................................................................................. 17-2
IP Participants ............................................................................... 17-2
Direct Dialing ........................................................................ 17-3
Gateway IVR ......................................................................... 17-7
ISDN Participants ......................................................................... 17-9
Gateway IVR ......................................................................... 17-9
Direct Dial-in to Endpoints or DMA VMR using
Automatically Generated Destination Numbers ........... 17-11
Interoperability with CMA ............................................... 17-12
Configuring the Gateway Components on the RMX .................... 17-13
Defining the IVR Service for Gateway Calls .......................... 17-13
Defining the Conference Profile for Gateway Calls .............. 17-17
Defining the Gateway Profile ................................................... 17-18
System Configuration ................................................................ 17-23
Displaying the Connection Information ......................... 17-23
Enabling PSTN dial-in using GK prefix .......................... 17-24
Monitoring Ongoing Gateway Sessions ......................................... 17-24
Connection Indications .............................................................. 17-24
xii
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Gateway Session Parameters .................................................... 17-25
Connected Participant Parameters ........................................... 17-26
Dialing to Polycom® DMA™ 7000 .................................................. 17-26
Calling a DMA Direct with Automatically Generated
Destination Dial Strings ............................................................. 17-27
Calling the DMA via Gateway IVR ......................................... 17-28
Manual Dial String Entry .......................................................... 17-28
Automatic Dial String Generation ........................................... 17-29
PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix .......................................... 17-30
Direct Dialing from ISDN/PSTN Endpoint to IP Endpoint
via a Meeting Room ........................................................................... 17-31
RMX Manager Application . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18-1
Installing the RMX Manager ............................................................... 18-1
Starting the RMX Manager Application ........................................... 18-7
Connecting to the MCU ............................................................... 18-8
RMX Manager Main Screen ...................................................... 18-11
MCUs Pane .......................................................................... 18-12
Conferences Pane ................................................................ 18-13
RMX Management .............................................................. 18-14
List Pane ............................................................................... 18-15
Status Bar ............................................................................. 18-15
Address Book ...................................................................... 18-16
Conference Templates ........................................................ 18-17
Adding MCUs to the MCUs List ...................................................... 18-17
Starting a Conference ......................................................................... 18-19
Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane ................ 18-20
Starting a Reservation ................................................................ 18-22
Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From
a Template ................................................................................... 18-23
Monitoring Conferences .................................................................... 18-24
Grouping the Participants by MCU ......................................... 18-25
Start Monitoring/Stop Monitoring .......................................... 18-26
Modifying the MCU Properties ........................................................ 18-27
Disconnecting an MCU ...................................................................... 18-27
Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane ...................................... 18-28
Changing the RMX Manager Language ......................................... 18-29
Import/Export RMX Manager Configuration ............................... 18-30
xiii
Table of Contents
Installing RMX Manager for Secure Communication Mode ....... 18-32
Using an Internal Certificate Authority .................................. 18-37
RMX Administration and Utilities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19-1
System and Participant Alerts ............................................................ 19-1
System Alerts ................................................................................ 19-2
Participant Alerts .......................................................................... 19-4
System Configuration .......................................................................... 19-5
Modifying System Flags .............................................................. 19-5
Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags ....................... 19-21
JITC_MODE System Flag .......................................................... 19-38
Auto Layout Configuration ...................................................... 19-41
Customizing the Default Auto Layout ............................ 19-41
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag
Values ........................................................................................... 19-45
CS_ENABLE_EPC Flag ............................................................. 19-46
Automatic Password Generation Flags ................................... 19-47
Guidelines ............................................................................ 19-47
Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords ....... 19-48
RMX Time ............................................................................................ 19-52
Guidelines ............................................................................ 19-52
Altering the clock ....................................................................... 19-52
Resource Management ...................................................................... 19-54
Resource Capacity ...................................................................... 19-54
Resource Capacity Modes ................................................. 19-56
Resource Usage ................................................................... 19-57
Video/Voice Port Configuration ............................................. 19-59
Flexible Resource Capacity Mode .................................... 19-59
Fixed Resource Capacity ................................................... 19-59
Configuring the Video/Voice Resources in
MPM Mode ......................................................................... 19-60
Configuring the Video/Voice Resources in
MPM+ and MPMx Mode .................................................. 19-61
Flexible Resource Capacity ............................................... 19-62
Fixed Resource Capacity ................................................... 19-62
Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution . 19-66
Resource Report .......................................................................... 19-68
Displaying the Resource Report ....................................... 19-68
xiv
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Resource Report Display in Flexible Resource
Capacity Mode™ ................................................................ 19-69
Resource Report in Fixed Resource Capacity Mode™ . 19-71
ISDN/PSTN ........................................................................ 19-72
RMX Resource Management by CMA and DMA ................. 19-73
Guidelines ............................................................................ 19-73
Port Usage Threshold ................................................................ 19-75
Setting the Port Usage Threshold ..................................... 19-75
SIP Dial-in Busy Notification ............................................ 19-76
Port Usage Gauges ..................................................................... 19-77
Port Gauges in Flexible/Fixed Capacity Modes ............ 19-78
System Information ............................................................................ 19-78
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol) .......................... 19-82
MIBs (Management Information Base) ................................... 19-82
Traps ............................................................................................. 19-82
Guidelines ............................................................................ 19-82
MIB Files ...................................................................................... 19-83
Private MIBs ........................................................................ 19-83
Support for MIB-II Sections .............................................. 19-83
The Alarm-MIB ................................................................... 19-83
H.341-MIB (H.341 – H.323) ............................................... 19-83
Standard MIBs ..................................................................... 19-84
Traps ............................................................................................. 19-86
Status Trap Content ............................................................ 19-87
Defining the SNMP Parameters in the RMX .......................... 19-88
Hot Backup .......................................................................................... 19-95
Guidelines .................................................................................... 19-96
Enabling Hot Backup ................................................................. 19-97
Modifications to the Master MCU Requiring System Reset 19-98
Audible Alarms .................................................................................. 19-99
Using Audible Alarms ............................................................... 19-99
Audible Alarm Permissions .............................................. 19-99
Stop Repeating Message .................................................. 19-100
Configuring the Audible Alarms ........................................... 19-100
User Customization .......................................................... 19-100
Replacing the Audible Alarm File .................................. 19-101
Multilingual Setting ......................................................................... 19-103
xv
Table of Contents
Customizing the Multilingual Setting ................................... 19-103
Banner Display and Customization ............................................... 19-104
Customizing Banners ............................................................... 19-104
Banner Display .......................................................................... 19-105
Login Screen Banner ........................................................ 19-105
Main Screen Banner ......................................................... 19-107
Software Management ..................................................................... 19-108
Backup and Restore Guidelines ............................................. 19-108
Using Software Management ......................................... 19-109
Ping RMX ........................................................................................... 19-109
Guidelines .................................................................................. 19-110
Using Ping ................................................................................. 19-110
Notification Settings ......................................................................... 19-111
Logger Diagnostic Files ................................................................... 19-113
Auditor ............................................................................................... 19-115
Auditor Files .............................................................................. 19-116
Auditor Event History File Storage ............................... 19-116
Retrieving Auditor Files .................................................. 19-117
Auditor File Viewer ................................................................. 19-118
Audit Events .............................................................................. 19-122
Alerts and Faults ............................................................... 19-122
Transactions ...................................................................... 19-124
ActiveX Bypass ................................................................................. 19-126
Installing ActiveX ..................................................................... 19-126
Resetting the RMX ............................................................................ 19-127
RMX Hardware Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20-1
Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components ......................... 20-1
HW Monitor Pane Tool bar ................................................. 20-3
Viewing Hardware RMX 1500 Component’s Properties ................ 20-3
Viewing Hardware RMX 2000 Component’s Properties .............. 20-12
Viewing Hardware RMX 4000 Component’s Properties .............. 20-21
Diagnostic Mode (RMX 1500/2000/4000) ...................................... 20-30
Performing Basic Mode Diagnostics ........................................ 20-33
Performing Advanced Mode Diagnostics .............................. 20-38
Diagnostics Monitoring ............................................................. 20-44
MCU Monitor ...................................................................... 20-44
Cards Monitor ..................................................................... 20-45
xvi
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Error Buffer .......................................................................... 20-46
Temperature Thresholds ........................................................... 20-47
MPM+ Card Properties ...................................................... 20-50
Appendix A - Disconnection Causes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
IP Disconnection Causes. ..................................................................... A-1
ISDN Disconnection Causes ................................................................ A-9
Appendix B - Alarms and Faults . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
Alarms ..............................................................................................B-1
Appendix C - CDR Fields - Unformatted File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
The Conference Summary Record ...................................................... C-2
Event Records ........................................................................................ C-3
Standard Event Record Fields ..................................................... C-4
Event Types .................................................................................... C-5
Event Specific Fields ................................................................... C-16
Disconnection Cause Values .............................................................. C-55
MGC Manager Events that are not Supported by the RMX ......... C-59
Appendix D - Ad Hoc Conferencing and External Database
Authentication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
Ad Hoc Conferencing without Authentication ................................ D-2
Ad Hoc Conferencing with Authentication ...................................... D-3
Entry Queue Level - Conference Initiation Validation
with an External Database Application ..................................... D-4
Conference Access with External Database Authentication ........... D-6
Conference Access Validation - All Participants (Always) ..... D-7
Conference Access Validation - Chairperson Only (Upon
Request) .......................................................................................... D-9
System Settings for Ad Hoc Conferencing and External
Database Authentication .................................................................... D-10
Ad Hoc Settings ........................................................................... D-10
Authentication Settings .............................................................. D-11
MCU Configuration to Communicate with an
External Database Application .......................................... D-12
Enabling External Database Validation for Starting
New Ongoing Conferences ................................................ D-14
Enabling External Database Validation for Conferences
Access .................................................................................... D-15
xvii
Table of Contents
Appendix E - Participant Properties Advanced Channel
Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
Appendix F - Secure Communication Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Switching to Secure Mode ............................................................. F-1
Purchasing a Certificate ......................................................... F-1
Installing the Certificate ........................................................ F-3
Creating/Modifying System Flags ...................................... F-4
Enabling Secure Communication Mode ..................................... F-5
Alternate Management Network ......................................... F-6
Securing an External Database ..................................................... F-7
Appendix G - Configuring Direct Connections to RMX . . . . . . . . G-1
Management Network (Primary) ....................................................... G-1
Alternate Management Network ........................................................ G-1
Configuring the Workstation ....................................................... G-2
Connecting to the Management Network ................................. G-7
Connecting to the Alternate Management Network ................ G-9
Connecting to the RMX via Modem ......................................... G-10
Procedure 1: Install the RMX Manager ............................ G-10
Procedure 2: Configure the Modem ................................. G-10
Procedure 3: Create a Dial-up Connection ...................... G-11
Procedure 4: Connect to the RMX ..................................... G-16
Appendix H - Setting the RMX for Integration Into Microsoft
Environment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H-1
Overview ................................................................................................ H-1
Conferencing Entities Presence ................................................... H-2
Multiple Networks ........................................................................ H-3
Interactive Connectivity Establishment (ICE) ........................... H-4
ICE Guidelines ....................................................................... H-4
Connecting to the RMX in ICE Environment .................... H-5
Dialing Methods .................................................................... H-5
Integrating the RMX into the Microsoft Office Communications
Server Environment .............................................................................. H-7
Setting the Matched URI Dialing Method ................................. H-7
Configuring the Office Communications Server for RMX
Systems ................................................................................... H-8
Setting the Trusted Host for RMX in the Office
xviii
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Communications Server ....................................................... H-9
Setting the Static Route for RMX in the OCS ................... H-11
Optional. Setting the Static Route & Trusted Host for
RMX in the Load Balancer Server ..................................... H-13
Configuring the RMX System ............................................ H-14
Dialing to an Entry Queue, Meeting Room or
Conference Using the Matched URI Method .................. H-14
Setting the Numerical Dialing Method .................................... H-15
Setting the Numerical Dialing for RMX Meeting
Rooms .................................................................................... H-15
Optional. Removing the RMX from the Host
Authorization List ............................................................... H-17
Configuring the RMX as a Routable Gateway ................ H-18
Establishing a Voice Route to the RMX “Voice”
Gateway ................................................................................ H-19
Configuring Office Communicator Users for
Enterprise Voice ................................................................... H-23
Starting a Conferencing Call from the MOC ................... H-28
Setting Simultaneous Numerical Dialing and Matched URI
Routing .......................................................................................... H-28
PFX Method - Creating the Security (TLS) Certificate
in the OCS and Exporting the Certificate to the
RMX Workstation ........................................................................ H-29
Retrieving the Certificate from the OCS to be sent
to the RMX Workstation ..................................................... H-35
Optional. Creating the Certificate Password File
(certPassword.txt) ................................................................ H-38
Supporting Remote and Federated Users in Office
Communications Server ICE Environment ............................. H-39
Creating an Active Directory Account for the RMX ...... H-39
Enabling the RMX User Account for Office
Communication Server ....................................................... H-42
Configure the RMX for ICE dialing .................................. H-44
RMX Integration into Microsoft Lync Server 2010
Environment ......................................................................................... H-45
Configure the Polycom RMX FQDN Name in the DNS ........ H-45
Setting the Routing for the Polycom RMX System ................. H-47
Creating a Trusted Application Pool and Setting
the RMX as Trusted Application ....................................... H-51
xix
Table of Contents
Optional. Configuring the Lync Server Registrar
for Encryption .............................................................................. H-53
Creating a Security Certificate for the Polycom RMX
System ........................................................................................... H-53
Methods for Creating the Certificates .............................. H-54
Method I: Using IIS Manager 7 and Microsoft Management
Console .......................................................................................... H-54
Creating the Certificate Request for the Polycom RMX
System using IIS Manager 7 ............................................... H-54
To use the Microsoft Management Console to Export
the Created Certificate ........................................................ H-56
Method II: Creating the Certificate Request in Microsoft
Lync Server .................................................................................. H-57
Creating a Temporary Certificate File .............................. H-58
Creating the Certificate File for the RMX ......................... H-59
Retrieving the CA Account Information .......................... H-66
Sending the Certificate to the RMX .................................. H-69
Supporting Remote and Federated Users in Microsoft
Lync Server 2010 ICE Environment .......................................... H-69
Deployment Considerations .............................................. H-69
Deployment Process for the RMX Systems ..................... H-69
Task 1: Ensuring SIP Signaling Domains are Allowed .. H-70
Task 2: Creating an Active Directory Account for
the RMX ................................................................................ H-71
Task 3: Enabling the RMX User Account for Lync
Server ..................................................................................... H-74
Task 4: Enable the RMX Account for Remote Access and
Federation ............................................................................. H-78
Task 5: Configuring the RMX for ICE Dialing ................ H-79
Configuring the RMX 1500/2000/4000 for Microsoft
Integration ............................................................................................ H-80
Modify the RMX Management Network Service to
Include the DNS Server .............................................................. H-80
Defining a SIP Network Service in the RMX and Installing
the Security Certificate ................................................................ H-82
The Security Certificate ...................................................... H-82
Configuring the RMX IP Network Service ...................... H-83
Polycom RMX System Flag Configuration .............................. H-92
xx
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide
Adding Presence to Conferencing Entities in the Buddy List ...... H-94
Guidelines ..................................................................................... H-95
Enabling the Registration of the Conferencing Entities ......... H-96
Creating an Active Directory Account for the
Conferencing Entity ............................................................ H-96
Enabling the Conferencing Entity User Account for
Office Communication Server or Lync Server ................ H-99
Defining the Microsoft SIP Server in the IP Network
Service ................................................................................. H-101
Enabling Registration in the Conference Profile ........... H-101
Verifying the RMX Conferencing Entity Routing
Name and Profile ............................................................... H-103
Monitoring the Registration Status of a Conferencing
Entity in the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager
Application ................................................................................. H-104
Conferencing Entity List ................................................... H-104
Conferencing Entity Properties ....................................... H-106
Click-to-Conference .......................................................................... H-107
Guidelines ................................................................................... H-107
Enabling the Click-to-Conference Mode in the Microsoft
Office Communications Server and Lync Server .................. H-108
Running the Configuration Files on the Office
Communications Server/Lync Server ............................ H-110
Checking the Installation on the Lync Server ............... H-114
Checking the Installation on the Office
Communications Server ................................................... H-115
Configuring the RMX for Federated (ICE) Dialing ...................... H-116
Monitoring the Connection to the STUN and Relay
Servers in the ICE Environment .............................................. H-118
Monitoring the Participant Connection in ICE
Environment ............................................................................... H-119
Active Alarms and Troubleshooting .............................................. H-122
Active Alarms ............................................................................ H-122
ICE Active Alarms ..................................................................... H-125
Troubleshooting ......................................................................... H-127
Known Issues ............................................................................. H-128
Polycom Solution Support ....................................................... H-128
Appendix I - SIP RFC Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I-1
xxi
Table of Contents
xxii
1
Conference Profiles
Profiles stored on the MCU enable you to define all types of conferences.
Profiles include conference parameters such as Bit Rate, Video Layout,
Encryption, etc.
The maximum of Conference Profiles can that be defined is:
•
RMX 1500 - 40
•
RMX 2000 - 40
•
RMX 4000 - 80
Conference Profiles are saved to Conference Templates along with all
participant parameters, including their Personal Layout and Video Forcing
settings, enabling administrators and operators to create, save, schedule
and activate identical conferences. For more information see Chapter 9,
“Conference Templates” .
The RMX is shipped with a default Conference Profile which allows users
to immediately start standard ongoing conferences. Its settings are as
follows:
Table 1-1
Default Conference Profile Settings
Setting
Value
Profile Name
Factory Video Profile
Bit Rate
384Kbps
H.239 Settings
Graphics
High Definition Video
Switching
Disabled
Operator Conference
Disabled
Encryption
Disabled
1-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-1
Default Conference Profile Settings (Continued)
Setting
Value
LPR
Enabled for CP Conferences
Auto Terminate
•
•
After last participant quits - Enabled
When last participant remains - Disabled
Echo Suppression
Enabled
Keyboard Noise Suppression
Disabled
Video Quality
Sharpness
Video Clarity™
Enabled
Content Video Definition
•
•
Content Settings: Graphics
Content Protocol: Up to H.264
Send Content to Legacy
Endpoints
Enabled
Layout
Auto Layout - Enabled
Same Layout - Disabled
Skin
Polycom
IVR Name
Conference IVR Service
This Profile is automatically assigned to the following conferencing
entities:
Name
ID
Meeting Rooms
Maple_Room
1001
Oak_Room
1002
Juniper_Room
1003
Fig_Room
1004
Entry Queue
1-2
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Name
ID
Default EQ
1000
Conferencing Modes
Standard Conferencing
When defining a new video Profile, you select the parameters that
determine the video display on the participant’s endpoint and the quality
of the video. When defining a new conference Profile, the system uses
default values for standard conferencing. Standard conferencing enable
several participants to be viewed simultaneously and each connected
endpoint uses its highest video, audio and data capabilities up to the
maximum bit rate set for the conference.
The main parameters that define the quality of a video conference are:
•
Bit Rate - The transfer rate of video and audio streams. The higher
the bit rate, the better the video quality.
•
Audio Algorithm - The audio compression algorithm determines the
quality of the conference audio.
•
Video protocol, video format, frame rate, annexes, and interlaced
video mode - These parameters define the quality of the video
images. The RMX will send video at the best possible resolution
supported by endpoints regardless of the resolution received from
the endpoints.
— When Sharpness is selected as the Video Quality setting in the
conference Profile, the RMX will send 4CIF (H.263) at 15fps
instead of CIF (H.264) at 30fps.
— H.264 protocol provides better compression of video images in
bit rates lower than 384 Kbps and it will be automatically
selected for the endpoint if it supports H.264.
— When working with RMXs at low bit rates (128, 256, or 384Kbps),
HDX endpoints will transmit SD15 resolution instead of 2CIF
resolution.
When using 1x1 conference layout, the RMX transmits the same
resolution it receives from the endpoint.
1-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) - LPR creates additional packets that
contain recovery information used to reconstruct packets that are lost
during transmission.
•
Video Clarity - Video Clarity feature applies video enhancing
algorithms to incoming video streams of resolutions up to and
including SD.
•
Operator Conferences - Offers additional conference management
capabilities to the RMX users, enabling them to attend to participants
with special requirements and acquire participant details for billing
and statistics. This service is designed usually for large conferences
that require the personal touch. Operator assistance is available in
MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration Modes. For more
information, see Chapter 8, “Operator Assistance & Participant Move”
on page 8-1.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
•
Supported resolutions:
— H.261 CIF/QCIF – Is supported in Continuous Presence (CP)
conferences at resolutions of 288 x 352 pixels (CIF) and
144 x 176 pixels (QCIF). Both resolutions are supported at frame
rates of up to 30 frames per second.
— H.263 4CIF - A high video resolution available to H.263
endpoints that are not H.264 enabled. It is only supported for
conferences in which the video quality is set to sharpness and for
lines rates of 384kbps to 1920kbps.
— Standard Definition (SD) - A high quality video protocol which
uses the H.264 video algorithm. It enables HD compliant
endpoints to connect to Continuous Presence conferences at
resolutions of 720X576 pixels for PAL systems and 720X480
pixels for NTSC systems. Bit rates for SD range from 256Kbps to
2Mbps. For more information, see "Video Resolutions in CP” on
page 2-4.
— High Definition (HD) – HD is an ultra-high quality video
resolution. Depending on the RMX’s Card Configuration mode,
compliant endpoints are able to connect to conferences at
resolutions ranging from 720p (1280 x 720 pixels) to 1080p (1920
x 1080 pixels) (in MPM+ and MPMx Modes) at bit rates ranging
1-4
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
from 1024 Kbps to 4 Mbps (6 Mbps with MPMx). For more
information, see "Video Resolutions in CP” on page 2-4.
Supplemental Conferencing Features
In addition to Standard Conferencing the following features can be enabled:
•
H.239 – Allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive two
simultaneous streams of conference data to enable Content sharing.
H.239 is also supported in cascading conferences. Both H.263 and
H.264 Content sharing protocols are supported. If all endpoints
connected to the conference have H.264 capability, Content is shared
using H.264, otherwise Content is shared using H.263.
For more information, see "H.239 / People+Content” on page 2-29.
•
Lecture Mode – The lecturer is seen by all participants in full screen
while the lecturer views all conference participants in the selected
video layout.
For more information, see "Lecture Mode” on page 2-94.
•
•
•
Presentation Mode – When the current speaker’s speech exceeds a
predefined time (30 seconds), the conference layout automatically
changes to full screen, displaying the current speaker as the
conference lecturer on all the participants’ endpoints. During this
time the speaker’s endpoint displays the previous conference layout.
When another participant starts talking, the Presentation Mode is
cancelled and the conference returns to its predefined video layout.
Presentation mode is available with Auto Layout and Same Layout.
— If the speaker in a video conference is an Audio Only participant,
the Presentation Mode is disabled for that participant.
— Video forcing works in the same way as in Lecture Mode when
Presentation Mode is activated, that is, forcing is only enabled at
the conference level, and it only applies to the video layout
viewed by the lecturer.
Telepresence Mode - enables the connection of numerous high
definition telepresence rooms and of different models (such as TPX
and RPX) into one conference maintaining the telepresence
experience. This mode is enabled by a special license.
Encryption – Used to enhance media security at conference and
participant levels. For more information, see "Message Overlay” on
page 2-55.
1-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Conference Recording - The RMX enables audio and video recording
of conferences using Polycom RSS 2000 recording system.
•
Packet Loss Concealment (PLC) - for Siren audio algorithms
improves received audio when packet loss occurs in the network.
PLC is enabled by the SET_AUDIO_PLC System Flag in system.cfg
•
•
— PLC for Audio is supported with MPM+ and MPMx cards only.
— The speaker’s endpoint must use a Siren algorithm for audio
compression.
— The following audio algorithms are supported:
• Siren 7 (mono)
• Siren 14 (mono/stereo)
• Siren 22 (mono/stereo)
Auto Brightness - detects and automatically adjusts the brightness of
video windows that are dimmer than other video windows in the
conference layout.
— Auto Brightness is supported with MPM+ and MPMx cards only.
— Auto Brightness only increases brightness and does not darken
video windows.
Audio Clarity - improves received audio from participants connected
via low audio bandwidth connections, by stretching the fidelity of the
narrowband telephone connection to improve call clarity.
— Audio Clarity is supported with MPM+ and MPMx cards only.
— Audio Clarity is applied to the following low bandwidth (4kHz)
audio algorithms:
• G.729a
• G.711
Viewing Profiles
Conference Profiles are listed in the Conference Profiles list pane.
To list Conference Profiles:
1 In the RMX Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
1-6
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
2
Click the Conference Profiles button.
The Conference Profiles are displayed in the List pane.
Profile Toolbar
Profile List
The following Conference Profile properties are displayed in the List
pane:
Table 1-2
Conference Profiles Pane Columns
Field
Description
Name
The name of the Conference Profile.
Layout
Displays either “Auto Layout” or an icon of the
layout selected for the profile.
For information about video layouts, see Table 1-4
"Video Layout Options” on page 1-24.
Line Rate
The maximum bit rate at which endpoints can
connect to the conference.
Routing Name
Displays the Routing Name defined by the user or
automatically generated by the system.
1-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-2
Conference Profiles Pane Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Encryption
Displays if media encryption is enabled for the
Profile. For more information see "Media
Encryption” on page 2-66.
Profile Toolbar
The Profile toolbar provides quick access to the Profile functions:
Table 1-3
Button
Profile Tool bar buttons
Button
Name
Description
New Profile
To create a new Profile.
Delete Profile
To delete a profile, click the Profile name and
then click this button.
Defining Profiles
Profiles are the basis for the definition of all ongoing conferences,
Reservations, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues, and Conference Templates
and they contain only conference properties.
To define a new Profile:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
1-8
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
The RMX displays the default settings, so you need only define the
Profile name.
1-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the Profile name and, if required, the Profile general
parameters:
Table 1-4
New Profile - General Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique Profile name, as follows:
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (length varies according to the
field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
It is recommended to use a name that indicates the
Profile type, such as Operator conference or Video
Switching conference.
Note: This is the only parameter that must be defined
when creating a new profile.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Line Rate
Select the conference bit rate. The line rate represents
the combined video, audio and Content rate.
The default setting is 384 Kbps.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Routing Name
Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or
automatically generated by the system if no Routing
Name is entered as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is
used also as the Routing Name.
•
1-10
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or
full Unicode text) is entered in Display Name, the
ID (such as Conference ID) is used as the Routing
Name.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-4
New Profile - General Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Switching
If the Operator Conference option is selected, this
option is disabled, and the selection is cleared.
When selected, the conference is in a special
conferencing mode which implies that all participants
must connect at the same line rate and use the same
video resolution. Participants with endpoints that do
not support the selected line rate and resolution will
connect as secondary (audio only).
For more information, see "Video Switching” on
page 2-24.
Select the video protocol and resolution:
• H.264 720p30 (supported by all media cards)
MPM+ and MPMx cards only:
•
•
•
H.264 1080p30
H.264 720p60
H.264 SD 30
Notes:
High Definition Video Switching conferencing mode
is unavailable to ISDN participants.
•
Operator
Conference
4
Select this option to define the profile of an Operator
conference.
An Operator conference can only be a Continuous
Presence conference, therefore when selected, the
High Definition Video Switching option is disabled and
cleared.
When defining an Operator Conference, the Send
Content to Legacy Endpoints option in the Video
Settings tab is cleared and disabled.
For more information, see Chapter 8, “Operator
Assistance & Participant Move” on page 8-1.
Click the Advanced tab.
1-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 1-5
1-12
New Profile - Advanced Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
The Encryption check box is unchecked by default.
Check the check box to activate encryption for the
conference.
For more information, see "Media Encryption” on
page 2-66.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-5
New Profile - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
LPR
When selected (default for CP conferences), Lost
Packet Recovery creates additional packets that
contain recovery information used to reconstruct
packets that are lost during transmission.
LPR check box is automatically cleared if High
Definition Video Switching is selected, but can be
selected if required. For more information, see "LPR –
Lost Packet Recovery” on page 2-76.
Auto Terminate
When selected (default), the conference automatically
ends when the termination conditions are met:
Before First Joins — No participant has connected to
a conference during the n minutes after it started.
Default idle time is 10 minutes.
At the End - After Last Quits — All the participants
have disconnected from the conference and the
conference is idle (empty) for the predefined time
period. Default idle time is 1 minute.
At the End - When Last Participant Remains —
Only one participant is still connected to the
conference for the predefined time period (excluding
the recording link which is not considered a participant
when this option is selected). This option should be
selected when defining a Profile that will be used for
Gateway Calls and you want to ensure that the call is
automatically terminated when only one participant is
connected. Default idle time is 1 minute.
Note: The selection of this option is automatically
cleared and disabled when the Operator Conference
option is selected. The Operator conference cannot
automatically end unless it is terminated by the RMX
User.
1-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-5
6
1-14
New Profile - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Auto Redialing
The Auto Redialing option instructs the RMX to
automatically redial IP and SIP participants that have
been abnormally disconnected from the conference.
• Auto Redialing is disabled by default.
•
Auto Redialing can be enabled or disabled during
an ongoing conference using the Conference
Properties – Advanced dialog box.
•
The RMX will not redial an endpoint that has been
disconnected from the conference by the
participant.
•
The RMX will not redial an endpoint that has been
disconnected or deleted from the conference by an
operator or administrator.
Click the Gathering Settings tab.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
7
Optional. Define the following fields if the conference is not
launched by the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook:
If the conference is launched by the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for
Microsoft Outlook the field information is received from the meeting
invitation and existing field value are overridden. For more information see
"Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®” on page 10-1.
Table 2
Profile - Gathering Settings
Field
Description
Display Name
This field is defined when the Profile is created. For
more information see the "Defining Profiles” on
page 1-8.
Enable Gathering
Select this check box to enable the Gathering Phase
feature.
Default: Selected.
Displayed
Language
Select the Gathering Phase slide language:
Gathering Phase slide field headings are displayed in
the language selected.
The Gathering Phase slide can be in a different
language to the RMX Web Client.
Default: English
Note: When working with the Polycom Conferencing
Add-in for Microsoft Outlook, the language selected
should match the language selected for the
conference in the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for
Microsoft Outlook to ensure that the Gathering
Phase slide displays correctly.
Access Number 1
Enter the ISDN or PSTN number(s) to call to connect
to the conference.
Note: The numbers entered must be verified as the
actual Access Numbers.
Access Number 2
1-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2
Profile - Gathering Settings
Field
Description
Info 1
Optionally, enter any additional information to be
displayed during the Gathering Phase.
These fields are not limited in the RMX Web Client
but only 96 characters can be displayed in the
Gathering Slide on a 16:9 monitor.
If the Gathering slide is displayed on a 4:3 endpoint:
the slide is cropped on both sides:
Info 2
•
The left most characters of the information fields
are not displayed.
•
The live video is cropped on the right side of the
display.
Info 3
Info 1
Info 2
Info 3
For more information see "Video Preview” on page 2-45.
1-16
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
8
Click the Video Quality tab.
The New Profile – Video Quality dialog box opens.
1-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9
Define the following parameters:
Table 1-1
New Profile - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
Video Quality
Depending on the amount of movement contained in
the conference video, select either:
• Motion – for a higher frame rate without increased
resolution. When selected, Video Clarity is
disabled.
•
Sharpness – for higher video resolution and
requires more system resources.
Note: When Sharpness is selected as the Video
Quality setting in the conference Profile, the RMX will
send 4CIF (H.263) at 15fps instead of CIF (H.264) at
30fps. For more information, see "Video Resolutions in
CP” on page 2-4.
Maximum
Resolution
This setting overrides the Maximum Resolution setting
of the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
The administrator can select one of the following
Maximum Resolution options:
• Auto (default) - The Maximum Resolution remains
as selected in the Resolution Configuration dialog
box.
•
•
•
•
CIF
SD
HD720
HD1080
Maximum Resolution settings can be monitored in the
Profile Properties - Video Quality and Participant
Properties - Advanced dialog boxes.
Notes:
The Resolution field in the New Participant - Advanced
dialog box allows Maximum Resolution to be further
limited per participant endpoint.
The Maximum Resolution settings for conferences and
participants cannot be changed during an ongoing
conference.
1-18
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-1
New Profile - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Clarity™
When enabled (default), Video Clarity applies video
enhancing algorithms to incoming video streams of
resolutions up to and including SD. Clearer images
with sharper edges and higher contrast are sent back
to all endpoints at the highest possible resolution
supported by each endpoint.
All layouts, including 1x1, are supported.
Note: Video Clarity is enabled only when Video Quality
is set to Sharpness (default setting) and is disabled
when Video Quality is set to Motion.
Video Clarity can only be enabled for Continuous
Presence conferences in MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Mode.
Auto Brightness
Auto Brightness detects and automatically adjusts the
brightness of video windows that are dimmer than
other video windows in the conference layout.
• Auto Brightness is supported with MPM+ and
MPMx cards only.
•
Auto Brightness only increases brightness and
does not darken video windows.
•
•
Auto Brightness is selected by default.
Auto Brightness cannot be selected and
deselected during an ongoing conference.
Default: On
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal
graphics
•
•
Hi-res Graphics — a higher bit rate intended for
high resolution graphic display
•
Live Video — Content channel displays live video
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in
a lower bit rate for the people channel.
For more information, see "H.239 / People+Content”
on page 2-29.
1-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-1
New Profile - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Content Protocol
H.263 – Content is shared using H.263 even if some
endpoints have H.264 capability.
Up to H.264 – H.264 is the default Content sharing
algorithm.
When selected:
• Content is shared using H.264 if all endpoints have
H.264 capability.
•
Content is shared using H.263 if all endpoints do
not have H.264 capability.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability
can connect to the conference but cannot share
Content.
10 Click the Video Settings tab.
The New Profile - Video Settings dialog box opens.
1-20
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
11 Define the video display mode and layout using the following
parameters:
Table 1-2
Profile Properties - Video Settings
Field/Option
Description
Presentation
Mode
Select this option to activate the Presentation Mode.
In this mode, when the current speaker speaks for a
predefined time (30 seconds), the conference changes
to Lecture Mode. When another participant starts
talking, the Presentation Mode is cancelled and the
conference returns to the previous video layout.
Lecture View
Switching
Select this option to enable automatic switching of
participants on the Lecturer’s screen when Lecture
Mode is enabled for the conference.
The automatic switching is enabled when the number
of participants exceeds the number of video windows
displayed on the Lecturer’s screen.
Note: Lecture Mode is enabled in the Conference
Properties – Participants tab. For more information,
see "Lecture Mode” on page 2-94.
Send Content to
Legacy
Endpoints
When enabled (default), Content can be sent to H.323/
SIP/ISDN endpoints that do not support H.239 Content
(legacy endpoints) over the video (people) channel.
For more details, see Chapter 2, “Sending Content to
Legacy Endpoints” on page 2-37.
Notes:
• This option is enabled in MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Modes only.
•
When enabled, additional video resources are
allocated to the conference:
•
In MPM+ mode, an additional SD video
resource is allocated.
•
In MPMx mode, an additional HD video
resource is allocated.
•
This option is valid when sending Content as a
separate stream is enabled by the system flag:
ENABLE_H239 set to YES.
•
Select this option when Avaya IP Softphone will be
connecting to the conference.
1-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-2
1-22
Profile Properties - Video Settings (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Send Content to
Legacy
Endpoints
(cont.)
•
If High Definition Video Switching option is selected
in the Conference Profile - General tab, the Send
Content to Legacy Endpoints selection is cleared
and the option is disabled.
•
If the Same Layout option is selected, the Send
Content to Legacy Endpoints selection is cleared
and is disabled.
Same Layout
Select this option to force the selected layout on all
participants in a conference. Displays the same video
stream to all participants and personal selection of the
video layout is disabled. In addition, if participants are
forced to a video layout window, they can see
themselves.
Auto Layout
When selected (default), the system automatically
selects the conference layout based on the number of
participants currently connected to the conference.
When a new video participant connects or
disconnects, the conference layout automatically
changes to reflect the new number of video
participants.
For more information, see Table 1-3 "Auto Layout –
Default Layouts” on page 1-24.
Clear this selection to manually select a layout for the
conference.
The default Auto Layout settings can be customized by
modifying default Auto Layout system flags in the
System Configuration file. For more information see,
"Auto Layout Configuration” on page 19-41.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-2
Profile Properties - Video Settings (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Telepresence
Mode
Select the Telepresence Mode from the drop-down
menu:
• Off - Normal conference video is sent by the RMX.
•
Auto (Default) - If any ITP (Immersive
Telepresence) endpoints are detected, ITP
features are applied to the conference video for all
participants.
When Auto is selected, the ITP features are
dynamic. If all ITP endpoints disconnect from the
conference, normal conference video is resumed
for all participants. ITP features are resumed for all
participants should an ITP endpoint re-connects to
the conference.
•
On - ITP features are applied to the conference
video for all participants regardless of whether
there are ITP endpoints connected or not.
Notes:
• This field is enabled only if the RMX system is
licensed for Telepresence Mode.
Telepresence
Layout Mode
The Telepresence Layout Mode drop- down menu,
enables VNOC operators and Polycom Multi Layout
Applications to retrieve Telepresence Layout Mode
information from the RMX.
The following modes can be selected:
• Manual
•
Continuous presence - Room Continuous
Presence (Default)
•
Room Switch - Voice Activated Room Switching
1-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-3
Auto Layout – Default Layouts
Number of Video Participants
Auto Layout Default Settings
0–2
3
4–5
6–7
8-10
11
12+
In layout 2+8, the two central windows display the last two speakers
in the conference: the current speaker and the “previous” speaker. To
minimize the changes in the layout, when a new speaker is identified
the “previous” speaker is replaced by the new speaker while the current speaker remains in his/her window.
The RMX supports the VUI addition to the H.264 protocol for endpoints that
transmit wide video (16:9) in standard 4SIF resolution.
12 To select the Video Layout for the conference, click the required
number of windows from the layouts bar and then select the
windows array. The selected layout is displayed in the Video Layout
pane.
Table 1-4
Video Layout Options
Number of
Video Windows
1
1-24
Available Video Layouts
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-4
Video Layout Options (Continued)
Number of
Video Windows
Available Video Layouts
2
3
4
5+
9
10+
When there is a change of speaker in a Continuous Presence conference, the
transition is set by default to fade in the current speaker while fading out the
previous speaker.
To make this transition visually pleasant, fading in the current speaker while
fading out the previous speaker is done over a period of 500 milliseconds.
The Fade In / Fade Out feature can be disabled by adding a new flag to the
System Configuration. The Value of the new flag must be:
FADE_IN_FADE_OUT=NO.
Fade In / Fade Out is not supported with MPMx cards.
For more information about System Flags, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, Chapter 19, “System Configuration” on page 19-5.
1-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
13 Click the Audio Settings tab.
The New Profile - Audio Settings dialog box opens.
14 Define the video display mode and layout using the following
parameters:
Table 1-5
1-26
Profile Properties - Audio Settings
Field/Option
Description
Echo
Suppression
When enabled (default), an algorithm is used to search
for and detect echo outside the normal range of human
speech (such as echo) and automatically mute them
when detected.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-5
Profile Properties - Audio Settings (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Echo
Suppression
(Cont.)
Clear this option to disable the Echo Suppression
algorithm.
Notes:
• This option is activated only in MPM+ and MPMx
Card Configuration Modes.
The CMA uses the Profiles that are stored in the RMX.
When the Echo Suppression is enabled, it will be
enabled in the conference that is started from the CMA
with that Profile. However, the CMA does not display
an indication that this option is enabled for the
conference.
Keyboard Noise
Suppression
Select this option to let the system use an algorithm to
search for and detect keyboard noises and
automatically mute them when detected.
Notes:
• This option is activated only in MPM+ and MPMx
Card Configuration Modes.
•
The CMA uses the Profiles that are stored in the
RMX. When the Keyboard Noise Suppression is
enabled, it will be enabled in the conference that is
started from the CMA with that Profile. However,
the CMA does not display an indication that this
option is enabled for the conference.
•
1-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 1-5
Profile Properties - Audio Settings (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Audio Clarity
When selected, improves received audio from
participants connected via low audio bandwidth
connections, by stretching the fidelity of the
narrowband telephone connection to improve call
clarity.
• The enhancement is applied to the following low
bandwidth (8kHz) audio algorithms:
•
•
1-28
G.729a
G.711
•
Audio Clarity is supported with MPM+ and MPMx
cards only.
•
•
Audio Clarity is selected by default.
Audio Clarity cannot be selected and deselected
during an ongoing conference.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
15 Click the Skins tab to modify the background and frames.
The New Profile - Skins dialog box opens.
In Classic View (for the first two skin
options) the frames fill the screen with
their borders touching
16 Select one of the Skin options.
When Telepresence Mode is enabled, the Skin options are disabled as the
system uses a black background and the frames and speaker indication are
disabled.
17 Click IVR tab.
1-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Profile - IVR dialog box opens.
18 If required, set the following parameters:
Table 1-6
1-30
Profile Properties - IVR
Field/Option
Description
Conference IVR
Service
The default conference IVR Service is selected. You
can select another conference IVR Service if required.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-6
Profile Properties - IVR (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Conference
Requires
Chairperson
Select this option to allow the conference to start only
when the chairperson connects to the conference and
to automatically terminate the conference when the
chairperson exits. Participants who connect to the
conference before the chairperson are placed on Hold
and hear background music (and see the Welcome
video slide). Once the conference is activated, the
participants are automatically connected to the
conference.
When the check box is cleared, the conference starts
when the first participant connects to it and ends at the
predefined time or according to the Auto Terminate
rules when enabled.
19 Optional. Click the Recording tab to enable conference recording
with Polycom RSS 2000/4000.
1-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Profile - Recording tab opens.
20 Define the following parameters:
Table 1-7
1-32
Profile Properties - Recording Parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable Recording
Select this check box to enable the Recording
settings. If no Recording Links are found an error
message is displayed.
Recording Link
Select the Recording Link to be used for conference
recording.
Recording Links defined on the RMX can be given a
descriptive name and can be associated with a
Virtual Recording Room (VRR) saved on the
Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0 Recording and
Streaming Server (RSS).
For more information see the chapter “Recording
Conferences”.
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
Table 1-7
Profile Properties - Recording Parameters (Continued)
Parameter
Description
Start Recording
Select one of the following:
• Immediately – conference recording is
automatically started upon connection of the first
participant.
•
Upon Request – the operator or chairperson
must initiate the recording (manual).
Audio Only
Select this option to record only the audio channel of
the conference.
Display Recording
Icon
This option is automatically selected to display a
Recording Indication to all conference participants
informing them that the conference is being
recorded.
1-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
21 Click the Network Services check box.
The New Profile - Network Services tab opens.
Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences,
Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues, SIP Factories and Gateway Sessions
with SIP servers is done per conferencing entity. This allows better
control on the number of entities that register with each SIP server.
Selective registration is enabled by assigning a conference Profile in
which registration is configured to the required conferencing entities.
Assigning a conference Profile in which registration is not configure
to conferencing entities will prevent them from registering. By
default, Registration is disabled in the Conference Profile, and must
be enabled in Profiles assigned to conferencing entities that require
registration.
1-34
Chapter 1-Conference Profiles
22 Define the following parameters:
Table 1-8
Profile Properties - Network Services
Parameter
Description
IP Network Services:
Service Name
This column lists all the defined Network Services,
one or several depending on the system
configuration.
SIP Registration
To register the conferencing entity to which this
profile is assigned with the SIP Server of the
selected Network Service, click the check box of that
Network Service in this column.
Accept Calls
To prevent dial in participants from connecting to a
conferencing entity when connecting via a Network
Service, clear the check box of the Network Service
from which calls cannot connect to the conference.
23 Click OK to complete the Profile definition.
A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list.
Modifying an Existing Profile
You can modify any of the Profile’s parameters but you cannot rename
the Profile.
To modify the Profile Properties:
1 In the Conference Profiles list, double -click the Profile icon or rightclick the Profile icon, and then click Profile Properties.
The Profile Properties - General dialog box opens.
1-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Deleting a Conference Profile
To delete a Conference Profile:
1 In the Conference Profiles list, select the Conference Profile you want to
delete.
2
Click the Delete Profile ( ) button.
or
Right-click the Conference Profile to be deleted and select
Delete Profile from the drop-down menu.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
4
The Conference Profile is deleted.
A Conference Profile cannot be deleted if it is being used by Meeting Rooms,
Entry Queues, SIP Factories and Reservations.
A Profile that is assigned to only one ongoing conference and no other
conferencing entity can be deleted.
1-36
2
Additional Conferencing
Information
Various conferencing modes and video features require additional
settings, such as system flag settings, conference parameters and other
settings. In depth explanations of these additional settings are described
in the following sections.
The RMX 1500 contains only an MPMx card.
The RMX 2000 can function with three types of video Media Processing
Modules (MPM): MPM, MPM+ and MPMx. These cards differ in their
port capacity and their support of video resolutions.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
The RMX 4000 can contain MPM+ or MPMx cards.
MPM+ and MPMx cards support additional video resolutions and video
quality enhancement such as Video Clarity™ in addition to all video
modes and features supported by MPM cards.
Video Session Modes
The RMX offers two video session modes: Continuous Presence and
Video Switching. The video session type determines the video display
options (full screen or split screen with all participants viewed
simultaneously) and the method in which the video is processed by the
MCU (with or without using the MCU’s video resources).
2-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Line Rates for CP and VSW
Table 2-1 lists the video session modes available at all supported line rates
in MPM, MPM+ and MPMx card configuration modes.
Table 2-1
Video Session Mode by Line Rate and Card type
Line Rate (kbps)
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
CP / Video
Switching
CP / Video
Switching
64
96
128
192
256
320
384
512
768
832
CP / Video
Switching
1024
1152
1280
1472
1536
1728
1920
2048
2560
3072
3584
Video Switching
4096
6144
2-2
Not Supported
Video Switching
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Dynamic Continuous Presence (CP) Mode
The Continuous Presence mode offers 35 layouts to accommodate
different numbers of participants and conference settings including
support of the VUI annex to the H.264 protocol for endpoints that
transmit wide video instead of 4CIF resolution.
For conferences with more participants than display squares, the RMX
dynamic video mix capability allows the viewed sites to be modified
throughout the conference. The displayed layout can be changed during
an ongoing conference, allowing a participant to view different screen
layouts of the other conference participants. These layout options allow
conferences to have greater flexibility when displaying a large number of
participants and maximizes the screen’s effectiveness.
Continuous Presence (CP) Conferencing
Video quality in Continuous Presence mode is affected by the conference
line rate (that determines the maximum line rate to be used by the
connecting endpoints), and the video capabilities of the endpoints such as
the video protocol, video resolution and frame rate.
The video protocol selected by the system determines the video
compression standard used by the endpoints. In Continuous Presence
conferences, the system selects the best video protocol for the endpoint
according to its capabilities.
The following Video protocols are supported:
•
H.261 - the video compression algorithm mandatory to all endpoints.
It is used by endpoints that do not support other protocols.
•
H.263 - a video compression algorithm that provides a better video
quality than H.261. This standard is not supported by all endpoints.
•
H.264 - a video compression standard that offers improved video
quality, especially at line rates lower than 384 Kbps.
H.264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at
lower bit rates.
•
RTV - a video protocol that provides high quality video conferencing
capability to Microsoft OCS (Office Communicator Server) endpoints at
resolutions up to HD720p30. (SIP only).
2-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Video Resolutions in CP
The RMX always attempts to connect to endpoints at the highest line rate.
If the connection cannot be established, the RMX attempts to connect at
the next highest line rate at its highest supported resolution.
Depending on the line rate, the RMX sends video at the best possible
resolution supported by the endpoint regardless of the resolution
received from the endpoint.
The video resolution is also defined by the Quality settings:
•
Motion, when selected, results lower video resolution.
•
Sharpness, when selected, sends higher video resolution.
The combination of frame rate and resolution affects the number of video
resources required on the MCU to support the call.
Video Resource Usage
Video resource usage is dependent on the participant’s line rate,
resolution and video Quality settings.
2-4
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates
The following Table summarizes the Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates
and Video Resource usage for each of the pre-defined optimization settings
for each Resolution, H.264 Profile, Video Quality setting (Sharpness and
Motion) for MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration Modes.
•
•
The table above lists resource consumption for H.264.
For H.263 with MPMx cards:
•
•
CIF resolution consumes 1.5 resources.
4CIF resolution consumes 3 resources.
2-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Additional Video Resolutions in MPM+/MPMx Card Configuration
Mode
The following higher video quality resolutions are available when the
RMX is working in MPM+ or MPMx Mode:
•
CIF
352 x 288 pixels at 50 fps.
•
WCIF
512 x 288 pixels at 50 fps.
•
WSD
848 x 480 pixels at 50 fps.
•
W4CIF
1024 x 576 pixels at 30 fps.
•
HD 720p 1280 x 720 pixels at 60 fps (symmetric with MPMx).
•
HD 1080p 1920 x 1080 pixels at 30 fps (symmetric with MPMx).
The video resolution transmitted to any endpoint is determined by the endpoint’s
capabilities, the conference line rate, the Conference Profile’s Motion and
Sharpness settings and the RMX’s Card Configuration Mode (MPM+ or MPMx).
Additional Intermediate Video Resolutions
Two higher quality, intermediate video resolutions replace the
transmission of CIF (352 x 288 pixels) or SIF (352 x 240 pixels) resolutions
to endpoints that have capabilities between:
•
CIF (352 x 288 pixels) and 4CIF (704 x 576 pixels) – the resolution
transmitted to these endpoints is 432 x 336 pixels.
•
SIF (352 x 240 pixels) and 4SIF (704 x 480 pixels) – the resolution
transmitted to these endpoints is 480 x 352 pixels.
The frame rates (depending on the endpoint’s capability) for both
intermediate resolutions are:
•
In MPM Mode – 25 or 30 fps.
In MPM+ / MPMx Mode – 50 or 60 fps.
2-6
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Video Display with CIF, SD and HD Video Connections
Although any combination of CIF, SD and HD connections is supported
in all CP conferences, the following rules apply:
•
In a 1X1 Video Layout:
•
— SD: If the speaker transmits CIF, the MCU will send CIF to all
participants, including the SD participants. In any other layout
the MCU will transmit to each participant at the participant’s
sending resolution.
— HD: The MCU transmits speaker resolution (including input
from HD participants) at up to SD resolution. If 1x1 is the
requested layout for the entire duration of the conference, set the
conference to HD Video Switching mode.
In asymmetrical Video Layouts:
•
— SD: A participant in the large frame that sends CIF is displayed
in CIF.
— HD: Where participants’ video windows are different sizes, the
RMX transmits HD and receives SD or lower resolutions.
In panoramic Video Layouts:
— SD: Participants that send CIF also receive CIF.
— HD: the RMX transmits HD and receives SD or lower
resolutions, the RMX scales images from SD to HD resolution.
Setting the Maximum CP Resolution for Conferencing
The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during
First-time Power-up and after a system upgrade. The default value is
HD1080.
All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are
made by selections in the Max Resolution pane of the Resolution
Configuration dialog box.
2-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Depending on the type of Media card(s) installed, the Maximum CP
Resolution of the RMX can be set to one of the following resolutions:
MPM Cards
MPM+ / MPMx Cards
HD 720p30
HD 1080p30
SD 30
HD 720p30
SD 15
SD 30
CIF 30
CIF 30
For information about setting system flags, see "Resolution Configuration”
on page 2-16.
CP Conferencing with H.263 4CIF
The video resolution of 4CIF in H.263 endpoints is only supported for
conferences in which the video quality is set to sharpness and for line
rates of 384 Kbps to 1920 Kbps as shown in Table 2-2.
Table 2-2
Video Quality vs. Line Rate
Video Quality
Endpoint
Line Rate
Kbps
Motion
Sharpness
Resolution
Frame
Rate
Resolution
Frame
Rate
128
QCIF
30
CIF
30
256
CIF
30
CIF
30
384 - 1920+
CIF
30
4CIF
15
The RMX Web Client supports monitoring of H.263 4CIF information. The
H.245 or SDP tab includes the additional information.
The creation of a new H.263 4CIF slide is supported in the IVR Service in
addition to the current H.263 IVR slide. If users utilize the default
Polycom slides that are delivered with RMX 1500/2000/4000, the slide’s
resolution will be as defined in the profile, i.e. SD, HD, CIF, etc.
For more information see “High Resolution Slides”.
2-8
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
H.263 4CIF Guidelines
•
H.263 4CIF is supported with H.323, SIP and ISDN connection
endpoints.
•
H.263 4CIF is supported in CP mode only. VSW is supported on the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 in HD only.
•
Click & View is supported in H.263 4CIF.
•
AES encryption is supported with H.263 4CIF.
•
H.263 4CIF is supported in recording by the RSS2000 and other
recording devices.
•
All video layouts are supported in H.263 4CIF, except 1x1 layout. In a
1x1 layout, the resolution will be CIF.
•
For information about Resource Usage see Table 19-12 on page 19-57.
•
H.239 is supported in all 3 resolutions and based on the same
bandwidth decision matrix as for HD.
H.264 High Profile
The H.264 High Profile is a new addition to the H.264 video protocol suite.
It uses the most efficient video data compression algorithms to reduce
bandwidth requirements for video data streams.
Video quality is maintained at bit rates that are up to 50% lower than
previously required. For example, a 512kbps call will have the video
quality of a 1Mbps HD call while a 1Mbps HD call has higher video
quality at the same (1Mbps) bit rate.
Guidelines
•
H.264 High Profile is supported with MPMx cards only.
•
H.264 High Profile is supported in H.323 and SIP networking
environments.
•
H.264 High Profile is supported in Continuous Presence conferences at
all bit rates, video resolutions and layouts.
•
H.264 High Profile is the first protocol declared by the RMX, to ensure
that endpoints that support the protocol will connect using it.
H.264 High-Profile should be used when all or most endpoints support it.
2-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default
may affect the video quality of endpoints that do not support the
H.264 High Profile.
•
For monitoring purposes, the RMX and endpoint H.264 High Profile
capability is listed in the Participant Properties - H.245 and SDP tabs
for H.323 participants and SIP participants respectively.
For more information see "IP Participant Properties” on page 11-19.
•
H.264 High Profile is not supported:
—
—
—
—
—
In MPM and MPM+ card Configuration Modes
In Video Switched conferences
For Content Sharing
As an RSS Recording link
With Video Preview
H.264 High Profile System Flags
Flags used in Version 7.0.1 only
From Version 7.0.2 the flags described below were replaced with the High
Profile sliders in the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
Setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the default may
affect the video quality of endpoints that do not support the H.264 High
Profile.
Endpoints that do not support H.264 High Profile will connect according to
the minimum bitrate thresholds defined by the following System Flags:
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_SD30_SHARPNESS
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_HD720P30_SHARPNESS
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_HD1080P30_SHARPNESS
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_CIF60_MOTION
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_SD60_MOTION
•
H264_BASE_PROFILE_MIN_RATE_HD720P60_MOTION
These System Flags must be added to the System Configuration file before
they can be modified. For more information see the RMX 15002000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, "Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
2-10
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Example: If the High Profile Optimized option is selected in the Resolution
Configuration dialog box and the System Flag values are set as in the
following table:
System Flag
Default Value
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_SD30_SHARPNESS
256
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD720P30_SHARPNESS
1024
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD1080P30_SHARPNESS
1536
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_CIF60_MOTION
256
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_SD60_MOTION
1024
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD720P60_MOTION
1536
Endpoints will connect at resolutions as set out in the following table,
depending on whether they support H.264 High Profile or not:
Video
Quality
Setting
Sharpness
Motion
Endpoint Connection Bit Rate (kbps)
High Profile
Supported
High Profile Not
Supported
128<= bit rate <512
256<= bit rate <1024
512<= bit rate <1024 1024<= bit rate <1536
Resolution
SD30
HD720P30
1024<= bit rate
1536<= bit rate
HD1080P30
128<= bit rate <512
256<= bit rate <1024
CIF60
512<= bit rate <832
1024<= bit rate <1536
SD60
832<= bit rate
1536<= bit rate
HD720P60
2-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Microsoft RTV Video Protocol
Microsoft RTV (Real Time Video) protocol provides high quality video
conferencing capability to Microsoft OC (Office Communicator) Client
endpoints at resolutions up to HD720p30. Interoperability between
Polycom HDX and OCS endpoints is improved.
Guidelines
•
The RTV protocol is supported:
•
— On RMX 1500/2000/4000
— With MPMx cards
— In SIP networking environments only
— In CP mode only
OCS (Wave 13) and Lync Server (Wave 14) clients are supported.
•
RTV is supported in Basic Cascade mode.
•
RTV is the default protocol for OCS endpoints and Lync Server clients
connecting to a conference.
•
RTV participants are supported in recorded conferences.
•
RTV participant encryption is supported using the SRTP protocol.
•
Video Preview is not supported for RTV endpoints.
•
Custom Slides in IVR Services are not supported for RTV endpoints.
•
HD720p30 resolution is supported at bit rates greater than 600 kbps.
The following table summarizes the resolutions supported at the
various bit rates.
Table 2-3
RTV - Resolution by Bit Rate
Resolution
QCIF
Bitrate
Bitrate <180kbps
CIF30
180kbps < Bitrate < 250kbps
VGA (SD30)
250kbps < Bitrate < 600kbps *
HD720p30
* Dependant on the PC’s capability
2-12
600kbps < Bitrate *
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
System Resource usage is the same as for the H.264 protocol. Table 2-4
summarizes System Resource usage for each of the supported
resolutions.
Table 2-4
RTV - Resources by Resolution
Resolution
QCIF / CIF30
VGA (SD30) / W4CIF
HD720p30
Video Resources Used
1
1.5
3
Participant Settings
When defining a new participant or modifying an existing participant,
select SIP as the participant’s networking environment Type in the New
Participant or Participant Properties - General tab.
SIP
2-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The participants Video Protocol in the New Participant or Participant
Properties - Advanced tab should be left at (or set to) its default value: Auto.
Auto
The Auto setting allows the video protocol to be negotiated according to
the endpoint’s capabilities:
•
OCS endpoints and Lync Server clients connect to the conference
using the RTV protocol.
•
Other endpoints negotiate the video protocol in the following
sequence: H.264, followed by RTV, followed by H.263 and finally
H.261.
Protocol Forcing
Selecting H.264, RTV, H.263 or H.261 as the Video Protocol results in
endpoints that do not support the selected Video Protocol connecting as
Secondary (audio only).
2-14
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Monitoring RTV
RTV information appears in all three panes of the Participant Properties SDP tab.
2-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Resolution Configuration
All the above resolution options and settings are based on a decision
matrix which matches video resolutions to connection line rates, with the
aim of providing the best balance between resource usage and video
quality at any given line rate.
The Resolution Configuration dialog box enables the RMX administrator to
override the default video resolution decision matrix, effectively creating
his/her own decision matrix. The minimum threshold line rates at which
endpoints are connected at the various video resolutions can be optimized
by adjusting the resolution sliders.
System resource usage is also affected by the Resolution Configuration
settings. For more information see "Video Resource Usage” on page 2-4 and
"Default Minimum Threshold Line Rates” on page 2-5.
Guidelines
•
Resolution Slider settings affect all Continuous Presence (CP)
conferences running on the RMX. Video Switched conferences are not
affected.
On the RMX1500 MPMx-Q assembly, the use of HD with Continuous Presence
requires an additional license. In the Resource Report and Resolution
Configuration panes, HD settings are displayed but are not enabled and if HD is
selected the system will enable SD by default.
•
A system restart is not needed after changing the Resolution Slider
settings.
•
Resolution Slider settings cannot be changed if there are ongoing
conferences running on the RMX.
•
The displayed sliders and the resolutions change according the Card
Configuration Mode: MPM, MPM+ or MPMx.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Accessing the Resolution Configuration dialog box
The Resolution Configuration dialog box is accessed by clicking Setup >
Resolution Configuration in the RMX Setup menu.
2-16
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The Resolution Configuration dialog box display changes according to the
Card Configuration Mode:
•
MPM and MPM+
•
MPMx - supports H.264 High Profile
Modifying the Resolution Configuration in MPM or MPM+ Card
Configuration Mode
The Resolution Configuration dialog box shown below is displayed when
the RMX is in MPM, MPM+ or MPMx Card Configuration Mode.
The Resolution Configuration dialog box opens. It contains the following
elements:
•
Maximum CP Resolution Pane
•
Resolution Configuration Pane
•
Sharpness Resolution Sliders
•
Motion Resolution Sliders
Max Resolution
Resolution Configuration
Sharpness
Sliders
Motion
Sliders
Resolutions (Resources per connection)
Selected Minimum Threshold Line Rate
for Resolution
2-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Maximum CP Resolution Pane
Depending on whether MPM or MPM+ cards are installed, the Maximum
CP Resolution of the RMX can be set to one of the following resolutions:
MPM Cards
MPM+ Cards
HD 720p30
HD 1080p30
SD 30
HD 720p30
SD 15
SD 30
CIF 30
CIF 30
Limiting Maximum Resolution
Before a selection is made in this pane, the Maximum CP Resolution of the
system is determined by the MAX_CP_RESOLUTION System Flag.
The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is applied to the system during
First Time Power-on and after a system upgrade. The default value is
HD1080.
All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP Resolution of the system are
made by selections in this pane.
Maximum Resolution
Maximum Resolution can be limited per conference or per participant
endpoint.
The Maximum Conference Resolution, can be limited via the Profile - Video
Quality dialog box. For more information see "Defining Profiles” on
page 1-8.
The Maximum Resolution can further be limited per participant endpoint
via the Participant - Properties dialog box. For more information see
"Adding a Participant to the Address Book” on page 6-3.
Resolution Configuration Pane
The user can select from 3 pre-defined Resolution Configurations or select a
manual Resolution Slider adjustment mode. The pre-defined settings can
be accepted without modification or be used as the basis for manual fine
tuning of resolution settings by the administrator.
2-18
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The Manual radio button is automatically selected if any changes are
made to the Resolution Sliders.
The Resolution Configurations are:
•
Resource-Quality Balanced (default)
A balance between the optimized video quality and optimized
resource usage. This is the only available resolution configuration in
version 6.0.x and earlier.
Use this option:
• When the priority is to maintain a balance between resource usage and
video quality.
•
When it is necessary to maintain backward compatibility with previous
versions.
•
When working with CMA.
The Balanced settings are described in the section: "Continuous
Presence (CP) Conferencing” on page 2-3.
•
Resource Optimized
System resource usage is optimized by allowing high resolution
connections only at high line rates and may result in lower video
resolutions (in comparison to other resolution configurations) for
some line rates.
Use this option when the priority is to save MCU resources and increase the
number of participant connections.
•
Video Quality Optimized
Video is optimized through higher resolution connections at lower
line rates increasing the resource usage at lower line rates. This may
decrease the number of participant connections.
Use this option when the priority is to use higher video resolutions while
decreasing the number of participant connections.
•
Manual
The administrator adjusts the sliders to accommodate local
conferencing requirements.
2-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Sharpness / Motion Resolution Slider Panes
Sharpness and Motion are Video Quality settings that are selected per
conference and are defined in the conference Profile and they determine
the resolution matrix that will be applied globally to all conferences
according to the selection of Sharpness or Motion. The resolution matrix for
Sharpness or Motion is determined by the resolution configuration and can
be viewed in the Resolution Configuration sliders.
System Resource usage is affected by the Resolution Configuration settings.
Example
As shown in following diagram:
2-20
•
Moving the HD720p30 resolution slider from 1024kbps to 1920kbps
increases the minimum connection threshold line rate for that
resolution. Endpoints connecting at line rates between 1024kbps and
1920kbps that would have connected at
HD 720p30 resolution will instead connect at SD 30 resolution. Each
of the affected endpoints will connect at lower resolution but will use
1.5 system resources instead of 3 system resources.
•
Moving the HD1080p30 resolution slider from 4096kbps to 2560kbps
decreases the minimum connection threshold line rate for that
resolution. Endpoints connecting at line rates between 2560kbps and
4096kbps that would have connected at
HD 720p30 resolution will instead connect at HD 1080p30 resolution.
Each of the affected endpoints will connect at higher resolution but
will use 6 system resources instead of 3 system resources.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Modifying the Resolution Configuration in MPMx Card
Configuration Mode
The Resolution Configuration - Basic Configuration dialog box is the first
dialog box displayed when the RMX is in MPMx Card Configuration Mode.
Clicking the Detailed Configuration button toggles the display of the
Detailed Configuration pane, which displays sliders for modifying
minimum connection threshold line rates for endpoints that support
H.264 Base Profile or High Profile. The Detailed Configuration pane can also
be opened by clicking the Manual radio button in the Resolution
Configuration pane.
Sharpness and Motion settings are accessed by clicking the Sharpness and
Motion tabs when the Detailed Configuration is open.
Basic Configuration
Detailed Configuration
Sharpness / Motion
Minimum
Connection
Threshold
Line Rate
Sliders
2-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Sharpness and Motion
Sharpness and Motion are Video Quality settings that are selected per
conference and are defined in the conference Profile. A conference that has
Sharpness selected in its Profile uses the Sharpness settings of the Resolution
Configuration and likewise a conference that has Motion selected in its
Profile uses the Motion settings of the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
The Sharpness and Motion tabs in the Resolution Configuration dialog box
allow the user to view and modify Resolution Configuration settings for
conferences with either Video Quality setting.
Resolution Configuration - Basic
The Resolution Configuration -Basic dialog box contains the following
panes:
•
Max CP Resolution Pane
•
Resolution Configuration Pane
Maximum CP Resolution Pane
When in MPMx Card Configuration Mode the RMX can be set to one of the
following Maximum CP Resolutions:
•
HD 1080p30
•
HD 720p30
•
SD 30
•
CIF 30
Limiting Maximum Resolution
Before a selection is made in this pane, the Maximum CP Resolution of the
system is determined by the MAX_CP_RESOLUTION System Flag.
For more information see "Limiting Maximum Resolution” on page 2-18.
2-22
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Resolution Configuration Pane
The Resolution Configuration pane and its selection options in MPMx Card
Configuration Mode behave in the same manner as for MPM and MPM+
Card Configuration Modes as described in the “Resolution Configuration
Pane” section on page 2-18.
Resolution Configuration - Detailed
H.264 High Profile allows higher quality video to be transmitted at lower
bit rates.
However, setting minimum bit rate thresholds that are lower than the
default may affect the video quality of endpoints that do not support the
H.264 High Profile. The RMX uses two decision matrices (Base Profile, High
Profile) to enable endpoints to connect according to their capabilities.
The Detailed Configuration dialog box allows the administrator to
configure minimum connection threshold bit rates for endpoints that
support H.264 High Profile and those that do not support H.264 High Profile
by using the following slider panes:
•
Base Profile - Endpoints that do not support H.264 High Profile connect
at these minimum threshold bit rates.
2-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
High Profile - Endpoints that support H.264 High Profile connect at
these minimum threshold bit rates.
Although the default minimum threshold bit rates provide
acceptable video quality, the use of higher bit rates usually results in
better video quality.
Base Profile / High Profile Resolution Slider Panes
The Base Profile and High Profile sliders operate in the same manner as that
described for the Sharpness and Motion sliders. For more information see
the example in the section: "Sharpness / Motion Resolution Slider Panes” on
page 2-20.
Video Switching
In Video Switching mode all participants see the same video picture (full
screen). The current speaker is displayed in full screen on all the
participants' endpoints, while the speaker sees the previous speaker.
Switching between participants is voice-activated; whenever a participant
starts to speak, he or she becomes the conference speaker and is viewed
on all screens. All conference participants must use the same line rate and
video parameters such as video protocol, frame rate, annexes and
interlaced video mode as no video processing is performed. Compliant
endpoints can connect to conferences at the following resolutions:
2-24
•
H.264 1080p30
•
H.264 720p30
•
H.264 720p60
•
H.264 SD 30
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Video Switching uses less system resources than CP: only one CIF video
resource per participant for HD resolution. Table 2-5 lists the resources
available to VSW conferences by line rate and card type.
Table 2-5 VSW Resource Capacity Line Rate
Maximum Possible Resources Per Card*
Resource Type
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
VSW 2Mbps
40
80
80*
VSW 4Mbps
40
40
40*
VSW 6Mbps
-
20
20*
* Capacity numbers are for maximum capacity card assemblies. These numbers
may be lower when LPR and/or encryption are enabled.
The maximum supported video conference size is 160 participants.
Video Switching conferences require:
•
All participants to have HD compliant endpoints.
•
All participants to connect using the same conference line rate.
Video Switching conferencing mode is unavailable to ISDN participants.
Table 2-6 lists the recommended number of connections at HD1080p
resolution for fully configured and licenced RMX systems.
The numbers in Table 2-6 are for MPM card assemblies with maximum
resource capacities. For detailed resource capacity information see the relevant
RMX Hardware Guide.
Table 2-6
Maximum Number of HD1080p Connections by Line Rate
Line Rate/Participants
RMX 1500
RMX 2000
RMX 4000
Up to 2Mbps
80
160
320
4Mbps
40
80
160
6Mbps (MPM+/MPMx)
20
40
80
2-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Guidelines
•
The display aspect ratio is 4x3 or 16x9.
•
Site names, skins, etc. are not supported in Video Switching.
•
Video forcing is enabled at the conference and participant levels.
•
Endpoints that do not support HD or are unable to meet these
requirements connect as Secondary (audio only).
Enabling Video Switching
For the MCU to run Video Switching conferences the following criteria
must be met:
•
The HD_THRESHOLD_BITRATE flag must be set in the System
Configuration. The value of this flag is the system minimum threshold
bit rate.
The HD_THRESHOLD_BIT RATE flag is responsible for negotiation only,
It does not guarantee that the endpoint will open an HD channel or transmit on
an opened HD channel.
•
The line rate selected in the conference Profile must be the same as or
higher than that specified by the HD_THRESHOLD_BITRATE flag.
•
The Video Switching option must be selected in the profile. For more
information see "Defining Profiles” on page 1-8.
•
The RMX must have available resources (ports).
•
The endpoints must support HD.
Modifying the Video Switching Threshold Bit Rate
To modify the video switching threshold:
1 Click Setup>System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
Set the HD_THRESHOLD_BITRATE flag to the required line rate
value (range 384kbps to 4Mbs, default is 768kbps).
3
Click OK.
The MCU must be reset for flag changes to take effect.
For more information see "System Configuration” on page 19-5.
2-26
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Creating a Video Switching Profile
A Video Switching enabled Profile must be created prior to running Video
Switching conferences.
Video Switching conferences, Entry Queues and Meeting Rooms are
created by selecting an Video Switching-enabled Profile and must be set
to the same line rate as the target conference.
To connect to an Video Switching conference via an Entry Queue, the
Entry Queue must be Video Switching enabled. It is recommended to use
the same Profile for both the target conference and Entry Queue.
To Create a Video Switching Enabled Profile:
1 In the New Profile – General tab, in the Line Rate field, select a bit rate
for the drop-down menu that is higher than the defined HD
threshold.
2
Select the Video Switching check box.
3
Select the resolution for the conference:
— H.264 720p30 (supported by all media cards)
MPM+ and MPMx cards only:
2-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
— H.264 1080p30
— H.264 720p60
— H.264 SD 30
Click OK.
For more information, see "Defining Profiles” on page 1-8.
Monitoring Video Switching Conferences
HD conferences appear with the HD (
) icon in the conferences list to
indicate the currently running HD conference(s).
HD Conference
Monitoring is done in the same way as for standard conferences.
For more information, see "Conference and Participant Monitoring” on
page 11-1.
2-28
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
H.239 / People+Content
H.239
The H.239 protocol allows compliant endpoints to transmit and receive
two simultaneous video streams:
•
People Conference – Continuous Presence or Video Switched
conference
•
Content Conference – Video Switching conference for content
sharing
By default, all conferences, Entry Queues, and Meeting Rooms launched on
the RMX have H.239 capabilities.
To view Content, endpoints must use the same Bit Rate, Protocol, and
Resolution. An endpoint may not send Content while connecting to an
Entry Queue.
Endpoints without H.239 capability can connect to the video conference
without Content.
Cascade links declare H.239 capabilities and they are supported in Star
and MIH cascading topologies. For more details, see "Cascading
Conferences - H.239-enabled MIH Topology” on page 3-34.
People+Content
People+Content utilizes a different signaling protocol and is Polycom’s
proprietary equivalent of H.239.
Guidelines
•
Both H.323 and SIP environments are supported.
•
A mix of H.323 and SIP endpoints can share content.
•
Conferences can include a mix of endpoints that support H.239 or
People+Content.
•
All endpoints will receive Content at the highest resolution common
to all connected endpoints.
•
SIP People+Content is supported with MPM+ and MPMx cards.
•
H.239 is supported in MIH, Star and Basic Cascading topologies.
2-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
People+Content is supported in cascaded conferences but cannot be
used as the protocol for a cascade link.
•
If an endpoint supports both H.239 and People+Content protocols,
H.239 is selected as the preferred communications protocol.
•
People+Content is enabled by default. It can be disabled for all
conferences and endpoints by manually adding the ENABLE_EPC
System Flag to the System Configuration and setting its value to NO
(default setting is YES).
•
Endpoints that support People+Content (for example, FX endpoints)
may require a different signaling protocol. For these endpoints,
manually add the System Flag CS_ENABLE_EPC to the System
Configuration and set its value YES (default value is NO).
Content Transmission Modes
The Content channel can transmit one of the following modes:
•
Graphics – default mode, for standard graphics
•
Hi-res Graphics – requiring a higher bit rate, for high quality display
or highly detailed graphics
•
Live Video – highest bit rate, for video clips or live video display
The highest common Content bit rate is calculated for the conference each
time an endpoint connects. Therefore, if an endpoint connects to an
ongoing conference at a lower bit rate than the current bit rate, the
Content bit rate for the current conference is re-calculated and decreased.
Bit rate allocation by the MCU is dynamic during the conference and
when the Content channel closes, the video bit rate of the People conference
is restored to its maximum.
During a conference the MCU will not permit an endpoint to increase its
bit rate, it can however change its Content resolution. The RMX can
decrease the allocated Content bit rate during a conference.
2-30
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 2-7 summarizes the bit rate allocated to the Content channel from
the video channel in each of the three Content Transmission Modes:
Table 2-7 Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel per Conference Line Rate
Bit Rate Allocation per Conference Line Rate (kbps)
Content
Transmission
Mode
64/
96
128
256
384
512
768
823
1024
1152
1472
1728
1920
2048
4096
6144
Graphics
0
64
64
128
128
256
256
256
512
1152
1536
Hi Resolution
Graphics
0
64
128
192
256
384
384
512
768
1536
1536
Live Video
0
64
128
256
384
512
768
768
1152
1536
1536
Table 2-8 summarizes the Maximum Resolution of Content and Frames per
Second (fps) for Bit Rate Allocations to the Content Channel as set out in
Table 2-8.
Table 2-8
Content - Maximum Resolution, Frames/Second per Bit Rate
Allocation
Bit Rate Allocated to
Content Channel (kbps)
Content
Maximum Resolution
Frames/Second
From 64 and less than 512
H.264 HD720p
5
From 512 and less than 768
H.264 HD720p
30
From 768 and up to 1536
H.264 HD1080p
15
Content Protocol
H.263 Annex T and H.264 protocols are supported for the Content
transmission.
H.264 provides higher video quality at video resolutions of up to HD.
2-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Endpoint Capabilities
•
The H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIES System Flag in system.cfg gives
additional control over Content sharing.
When the flag is set to NO, the RMX only verifies that the endpoint
supports the content protocols: Up to H.264 or H.263.
When set to YES, the RMX checks frame rate, bit rate, resolution,
annexes and all other parameters of the Content mode as declared by
an endpoint during the capabilities negotiation phase. If the endpoint
does not support the Content capabilities of the MCU the participant
will not be able to send or receive content over a dedicated content
channel. The flag’s default value is NO.
•
Content management control (BFCP) utilizes an unsecured channel
even when SIP TLS is enabled. If security is of higher priority than
SIP content sharing, SIP People+Content can be disabled. To do this
manually add the ENABLE_SIP_PEOPLE_ PLUS_CONTENT
System Flag to the System Configuration and set its value to NO.
•
SIP People+Content and BFCP capabilities are by default only declared
to Polycom and Avaya endpoints. If, however, the endpoint identity is
hidden by a proxy server, these capabilities will not be declared by
the RMX. Capabilities declaration is controlled by the
ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR_ALL_USER_AGENT System Flag. The
default value of this System Flag is NO. When set to YES, the flag
ensures that the RMX declares SIP People+ Content and BFCP
capabilities in all environments.
If these System Flags don’t exist in the system, they must be created
using the RMX Menu – Setup option. For more information see
"Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
H.263 Endpoints
• If an endpoint that supports only H.263 for Content Sharing connects
to a conference with an Up to H.264 Content sharing Profile:
•
H.263 is used for Content if that participant is the first to connect to
the conference
•
Content sharing is stopped for all participants if the connection
occurs after Content sharing has started. When Content sharing is
restarted by the user, Content is shared using H.263.
H.264 Endpoints
• During a H.264 Content session, changes to resolution or frame rate
do not interrupt Content transmission.
2-32
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
If an endpoint that does not support H.264 Content sharing
disconnects from a conference with an Up to H.264 Content Sharing
Profile, the Content sharing continues using H.263. This is true even if
all the remaining connected endpoints support H.264. If Content
sharing is stopped and restarted by the user, Content sharing is
automatically upgraded to use H.264.
Content at HD1080p Resolution
• Endpoints that support H.264 can receive H.239 Content at the
following resolutions:
•
— HD720pat30fps
— HD1080pat15fps
— HD720p at 5fps
The minimum required conference line rate must be 2048 kbps or
higher.
•
All connected endpoints must support the minimum line rate
required for HD1080p and be capable of receiving HD1080p content.
•
The Content Protocol setting in the conference Profile must be set to Up
to H.264.
Entry Queues
• The selection of either H.263 or Up to H.264 in the Entry Queue Profile
does not affect how Content is shared.
•
When the endpoint is moved to the conference from the Entry Queue,
the endpoint shares Content according to the guidelines set out under
Endpoint Capabilities and according to the content protocol that is
defined for the target conference.
Cascade Links
Content is shared across a Cascaded Link using H.263 irrespective of
whether either or both the cascade-enabled Entry Queue and the
Cascaded Link have Up to H.264 Content sharing defined in their profiles.
2-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Defining Content Sharing Parameters for a Conference
To define Content Sharing Parameters:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click New Profile.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
2-34
3
Define the Profile General parameters.
4
Optional. Click the Advanced tab and define additional conference
parameters.
5
Click the Video Quality tab.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
6
In the Content Video Definition section, select the Content Settings and
Protocol as follows:
Table 2-9
H.239 Content Options
Field
Description
Content
Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
• Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal
graphics
•
Hi-res Graphics — a higher bit rate intended for
high resolution graphic display
•
Live Video — Content channel displays live video
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in a
lower bit rate for the people channel.
Content
Protocol
7
H.263 – Content is shared using H.263 even if some
endpoints have H.264 capability.
Up to H.264 – H.264 is the default Content sharing
algorithm.
When selected:
• Content is shared using H.264 if all endpoints have
H.264 capability.
•
Content is shared using H.263 if all endpoints do not
have H.264 capability.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability
can connect to the conference but cannot share
Content.
Click OK.
Modifying the Threshold Line Rate for HD Resolution Content
The threshold line rate for HD Resolution Content is the line rate at which
the RMX will send Content at HD1080 Resolution. The default is 768 kbps.
To modify the HD Resolution Content threshold line rate:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
2-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, double-click the
MIN_H239_HD1080_RATE entry.
The Update Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Value field, enter the minimum threshold line rate at which
HD1080 Resolution Content will be enabled.
4
Click OK to exit the Update Flag and then again to exit the
System Flags dialog box.
Disabling HD Resolution Content
To disable HD720p/ HD1080p resolution content:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
2-36
2
In the System Flags - MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, double-click the
MIN_H239_HD1080_RATE entry.
3
In the Update Flag - Value field, enter 0.
4
Click OK to exit the Update Flag and then again to exit the
System Flags dialog box.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Sending Content to Legacy Endpoints
The RMX can be configured to send Content to H.323/SIP/ISDN endpoints
that do not support H.239 Content (legacy endpoints) over the video
(people) channel, allowing the participants using legacy endpoints to
view Content instead of the other conference participants.
Guidelines for Sending Content to Legacy Endpoints
•
This option is enabled in MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration Modes
only.
•
This option is valid when sending Content as a separate stream is
enabled in the System Configuration and the flag: ENABLE_H239 is set
to YES.
•
Additional video resources are allocated to the conference when
Content is sent to legacy endpoints:
— In MPM+ mode, an additional SD video resource is allocated.
— In MPMx mode, an additional HD video resource is allocated.
The allocation is done only when a legacy endpoint is connected to
the conference and a Content session is initiated and transmitted via
the video channel.
Once the resource is allocated, it remains allocated to the conference
until the conference ends.
If the system cannot allocate the resource required for sending the
Content, the conference status changes to “Content Resource
Deficiency” and Content will not be sent to the legacy endpoints.
As the resource required for sending Content to legacy endpoints is
allocated on the fly, when scheduling a reservation, in rare occasions
when the MCU is fully loaded, “Resource deficiency” may be
encountered. This may prevent participants from connecting to the
conference or from Content being sent to the legacy endpoint. To
ensure resource for sending Content to legacy endpoints, add one
resource to the number of resources defined in the Reserve Resources
for Video Participants field, in the Conference Properties - General dialog
box.
•
Non-H.239 (legacy) endpoints receive the Content via the video
channel using the same video protocol and resolution with which
they receive video.
•
The highest Content resolution for legacy endpoints is:
2-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
— HD720p30 with MPMx
— HD720p5/6 with MPM+
Content cannot be sent to legacy endpoints when Same Layout mode
is selected for the conference.
•
This option in not supported in High Definition Video Switching
conferences.
•
When Content is transmitted, the Site Name of the endpoints cannot
be viewed.
•
Content can be sent to legacy endpoints in gateway calls.
•
When moving a legacy participant to the Operator conference, Content
will not be available to the legacy endpoint.
•
An FX endpoint dialing in to an RMX with MPMx cards will receive
content using People + Content. An FX endpoint dialed out from an
RMX with MPMx cards will only receive content via the video
channel using People + Content if Send Content to Legacy Endpoints is
enabled in the Conference Profile.
Content Display on Legacy Endpoints
When Contents is sent to legacy endpoints, their video layout
automatically changes to a “Content layout” which is defined by the
system flag LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT and the
Content is shown in the larger/top left (“speaker”) window. The video
layouts of the other conference participants do not change.
The switch to the Content layout occurs in the Auto Layout, Presentation
Mode, Lecture Mode and when a layout is selected for the conference.
However, in Lecture Mode, when Content is sent to legacy endpoints,
when switching to the Content layout, the Content is shown in the
“lecturer/speaker” window and the lecturer is show in a second window.
If the layout contains more than two windows, all other windows will be
empty. All other participants will see the lecturer in full screen.
In Same Layout mode, Content cannot be sent to legacy endpoints.
The LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag default is set to
a layout of 1+4 where the Content is shown in the large window and the
other conference participants are shown in the small windows. This
default value can be changed in the System Configuration.
When Content is stopped, the layout of the legacy participants returns to
the last video layout seen prior to the Content mode.
2-38
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The Legacy participants can change their layout using Click&View. In such
a case, the Content is forced to the “speaker” window.
The RMX user can also change the layout for the participants the legacy
endpoints (selecting personal layout).
When forcing a video participant to the Content window (instead of
Content), the Content display can be restored only by selecting any other
video layout.
Interoperability with Polycom CMA and DMA
The CMA uses the Profiles that are stored in the RMX. If the Send Content
to Legacy Endpoints option is enabled in the Conference Profile, this option
will be enabled in the conference started from the CMA that uses that
Profile. However, the CMA does not display an indication that this option
is enabled for the conference.
A new conference can be started on the DMA using a Conference Profile
that is defined on the RMX or by defining all the conference parameters.
The Send Content to Legacy Endpoints option can be enabled only in the
Conference Profile defined in the RMX, therefore, to include this option in
the conference started on the DMA use an RMX existing Profile. However,
the DMA does not display an indication that this option is enabled for the
conference.
2-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Enabling the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints Option
The Send Content to Legacy Endpoint option is enabled in the Conference
Profile - Video Settings tab. It is selected by default.
If High Definition Video Switching option is selected in the Conference Profile
- General tab, the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints selection is cleared and
the option is disabled.
If the Same Layout option is selected in the Conference Profile - Video Settings
tab, the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints selection is cleared and is
disabled.
Note: Select this option when Avaya IP Softphone will be connecting to
the conference.
2-40
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Changing the Default Layout for Displaying Content on Legacy
Endpoints
The default layout that will be used to display Content on the screens of
legacy endpoints is defined by the system flag
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT.
The configured default layout is 1+4 (
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER). You can
change the default layout configuration by entering a new value for the
flag in the system configuration.
To modify system flags:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, double-click the
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT entry.
The Edit Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Value field, enter the flag value for the required layout as
follows:
Table 2-10 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2
CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X1
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR
2-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-10 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT
CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_3X3
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
2-42
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 2-10 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_4X4
4
Click OK.
The flag is updated in the MCMS_PARAMETERS list.
5
Click OK.
For flag changes to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information, see the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on
page 19-127.
2-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Stopping a Content Session
In some cases, when one participant ends the Content session from his/
her endpoint, the Content token is not released and other participants
cannot send Content.
The RMX User can withdraw the Content token from the current holder
and to return it to the MCU for assignment to other endpoints.
To end the current Content session:
>> In the Conferences list pane, right-click the conference icon and then
click Abort H.239 Session.
2-44
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Video Preview
RMX users can preview the video sent from the participant to the
conference (MCU) and the video sent from the conference to the
participant. It enables the RMX users to monitor the quality of the video
sent and received by the participant and identify possible quality
degradation.
The video preview is displayed in a separate window independent to the
RMX Web Client. All Web Client functionality is enabled and conference
and participant monitoring as well as all other user actions can be
performed while the video preview window is open and active.
Live video is shown in the preview window as long as the window is
open. The preview window closes automatically when the conference
ends or when participant disconnects from the conference. It can also be
closed manually by the RMX user.
Video Preview Guidelines
•
Video preview is available in Continuous Presence and Video Switching
conferences.
•
Video preview window size and resolution are adjusted to the
resolution of the PC that displays the preview.
•
Video Preview of the video sent from the conference to the
participant is shown according to the line rate and video parameters
of the level threshold to which the participant is connected.
•
In versions up to and including Version 7.2.2, only users with
Administrator authorization could request to view a video preview.
•
Video preview is supported with MPM+ and MPMx cards.
•
Only one preview window can be displayed for each RMX Web
Client connection (workstation).
•
Only one preview window can be displayed for a single conference
and up to four preview windows can be displayed for each media
card on different workstations (one per workstation and one per
conference).
For example, if the RMX contains two media cards, and there are 5
conferences running on the RMX, if five conferences are running on
the same media card, only four conferences can be previewed from
four different workstations. If four or less conferences are running on
2-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
one media card and the remaining conferences are running on the
other media card, all five conferences can be previewed.
•
Live video that is shown in the preview window does not include the
Content when it is sent by the participant.
•
Video Preview is supported in cascaded conferences.
•
If the video preview window is opened when the IVR slide is
displayed to the participant, it will also be displayed in the video
preview window.
•
Video Preview is not supported in RMX Manager application.
•
Video Preview is not supported with H.264 High Profile
•
Video Preview is not supported for RTV endpoints.
•
Video Preview is disabled in encrypted conferences.
•
Video preview cannot be displayed when the participant’s video is
suspended.
•
Participant’s video preview and the CMAD window cannot be open
and running simultaneously on the same PC as both require the same
DirectDraw resource.
Workstation Requirements
To be able to display the video preview window, the following minimum
requirements must be met:
•
Windows XP and later
•
Internet Explorer 7
•
DirectX is installed
•
DirectDraw Acceleration must be enabled and no other application is
using the video resource
•
Hardware acceleration must be enabled
Testing your Workstation
To ensure that your workstation can display the video preview window:
1 In Windows, click Start > Run.
The Run dialog box opens.
2-46
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
2
In the Open field, type dxdiag and press the Enter key or click OK.
A confirmation message is displayed.
3
Click Yes to run the diagnostics.
The DirectX Diagnostic Tool dialog box opens.
4
Click the Display tab.
To be able to display the video preview window, the DirectDraw
Acceleration and Direct3D Acceleration options must be Enabled.
If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw
Acceleration, a black window may be viewed in the Video Preview
window.
5
Click the Exit button.
2-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Previewing the Participant Video
To preview the participant video:
1 List the conference participants in the Participants pane.
2
Right-click the participant whose video you want to preview and
then click one of the following options:
— View Participant Sent Video - to display the video sent from the
participant to the conference.
— View Participant Received Video - to display the video sent
from the conference to the participant.
2-48
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The Video Preview window opens.
If the video card installed in the PC does not support DirectDraw Acceleration, a
black window may be viewed.
2-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Gathering Phase
The Gathering Phase of a conference is the time period during which
participants are connecting to a conference. During the Gathering Phase, a
mix of live video from connected endpoints is combined with both static
and variable textual information about the conference into a slide which is
displayed on all connected endpoints.
Textual Information
Recording
Indicator
(If enabled)
Connected
Participants
Conference
Information
2-50
Live Video From Connected Participants
Participant
Count
Optional Additional
Information
(Info1/2/3 in Profile
see page 1-8)
Access
Numbers
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
During the Gathering Phase, the audio of all participants can be heard, and
the video of active speakers is displayed in the video windows as they
begin talking.
All connected participants are kept informed about the current conference
status including names of connected participants, participant count,
participant type (video/audio) etc.
Gathering Phase Guidelines
•
The Gathering Phase slide can be displayed at any time during the
conference by entering the Show Participants DTMF code, *88.
•
The Gathering Phase is not supported in Video Switching Conferences.
•
The names of the first eight participants to connect are displayed. If
eight or more participants connect, the 8th row displays “…”.
•
Static text in the Gathering Phase slide such as the field headings:
Organizer, Duration, Video/Audio Participants, Access Number, IP are
always displayed in the language as configured in the Polycom Virtual
Meeting Rooms Add-in for Microsoft Outlook.The following languages
are supported:
•
•
— English
— French
— German
— International Spanish
— Korean
— Japanese
— Simplified Chinese
Dynamic text in the Gathering Phase slide such as the meeting name,
participants’ names, access numbers and the additional information
entered in the Info1/2/3 fields of the Gathering Settings tab of the
conference Profile are displayed in the language of the meeting
invitation.
The language of a Gathering Phase slide of a conference configured to
include a Gathering Phase that is not launched by the Polycom
Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook is configured by the
administrator. Using the RMX Web Client, the administrator selects
the language for the Gathering Phase slide. The language selected can
be different to that of the RMX Web Client used by the administrator
to perform the configuration.
2-51
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Content can be sent during the Gathering Phase. The content is
displayed in the large video window of the participant’s layout while
the Gathering slide is displayed in a smaller video window in the
layout.
Content
Gathering Slide
Gathering Phase Duration
The duration of the Gathering Phase can be customized by the
administrator so that it is long enough to be viewed by most connected
participants yet short enough so as not to over extend into the scheduled
conferencing time.
The Gathering Phase duration is configured for the RMX, by the following
System Flags in system.cfg using the Setup >System Configuration menu:
•
CONF_GATHERING_DURATION_SECONDS
Range: 0 - 3600 seconds
Default: 180 seconds
The Gathering Phase duration of the conference is measured from the
scheduled start time of the conference.
Example: If the value of the flag is set to 180, the Gathering slide is
displayed for three minutes to all participants starting at the
conference Start Time, and ending three minutes after the conference
Start Time.
For participants who connect before Start Time, the Gathering slide is
displayed from the time of connection until the end of the Gathering
duration period.
2-52
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
PARTY_GATHERING_DURATION_SECONDS
Range: 0 - 3600 seconds
Default: 15 seconds
The value of this flag determines the duration of the display of the
Gathering slide for participants that connect to the conference after the
conference Start Time.
Participants connecting to the conference very close to of the end of
the Gathering Phase (when there are fewer seconds left to the end of
the Gathering Phase than specified by the value of the flag) have the
Gathering slide displayed for the time specified by the value of the
flag.
Example: If the value of the flag is set to 15, the Gathering Phase slide
is displayed to the participant for 15 seconds.
Enabling the Gathering Phase Display
The Gathering Phase is enabled for per conference in the Conference Profile.
The profile also includes the dial-in numbers and the optional additional
information to display on the slide.
Conferences that are configured to include a Gathering Phase that are not
launched by the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook need the
following information to be entered via the New Profile or Profile Properties
— Gathering Settings dialog box:
•
Display Name
blank.)
(Optional, the Meeting Name is used if left
•
Displayed Language
•
Access Number 1 / 2
•
Additional Information (Optional free text)
(Optional.)
— Info 1
— Info 2
— Info 3
Conferences launched by the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft
Outlook receive this information from the meeting invitation.
For more information see "Defining Profiles” on page 1-8.
2-53
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Closed Captions
Endpoints can provide real-time text transcriptions or language
translations of the video conference by displaying closed captions. The
captions for a conference may be provided by the captioner who is
present in the conference, or the captioner may use a telephone or web
browser to listen to the conference audio. When the captioner sends a unit
of text, all conference participants see it on the main monitor for 15
seconds. The text then disappears automatically.
The captioner may enter caption text using one of the following methods:
•
Remotely, via a dial-up connection to the system’s serial RS-232 port.
•
In the room using equipment connected directly to the serial port.
•
In the room or remotely, using the Polycom HDX web interface.
Closed Captions Guidelines
• The Captions display properties are configured on the endpoint
sending the captions.
•
Closed Captions content is defined from the endpoint. The RMX only
transmits it to the endpoints.
•
When enabled, Closed Captions are available to all endpoints
supporting FECC.
•
Closed Captions are supported in H.323 and SIP connections.
•
The FECC indications during ongoing conferences are used when
closed captions are active.
•
When Closed Captions are enabled, muting an endpoint may cause
the display of the “Far Mute” indication on all the screens of the
endpoints connected to the conference.
•
The Closed Captions option is not supported in cascading
conferences (they can only be viewed in the local conference) as
FECC is not supported in cascading links.
•
Site name display is not affected by closed captions display.
•
Closed Captions are supported by the RMX in the following
configurations and conferencing modes:
— MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration Modes.
— High Definition Video Switching and Continuous Presence
conferencing modes.
2-54
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
— Encrypted and non-encrypted conferences.
— Conferences with Content.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Enabling Closed Captions
Closed Captions are enabled by a system flag. By default, Closed Captions
are disabled.
To change the flag value:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, click the New Flag button.
The New Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the New Flag field enter ENABLE_CLOSED_CAPTION.
4
In the Value field enter YES to enable Closed Captions or NO to disable
their display.
5
Click OK to close the New Flag dialog box.
The new flag is added to the flags list.
6
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box.
For flag changes to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information, see the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on
page 19-127.
Message Overlay
Message Overlay allows messages to be sent to all participants in an
ongoing conference.
A maximum of 24 Unicode characters can be sent as a Message Overlay.
2-55
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Message Overlay
Overlay
Guidelines
2-56
•
Message Overlay is supported in:
•
— continuous Presence (CP) conferences
— in Same Layout mode
— in encrypted conferences
Message Overlay is not supported in Lecture mode.
•
Participants that have their video suspended do not receive Message
Overlays.
•
Message Overlays cannot be sent via the Content channel.
•
Message Overlay is not displayed when the PCM menu is active.
•
If a Repeating Message Overlay is modified before it has completed all
its repetitions, it is changed immediately without completing all of its
repetitions. The modified Repeating Message Overlay is displayed
starting with repetition one.
•
Message Overlay can be enabled, modified and disabled during an
ongoing conference using the Conference Properties – Message Overlay
dialog box.
•
In some languages, for example Russian, when large font size is
selected, both rolling and static messages may be truncated if the
message length exceeds the resolution width.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling Message Overlay
Message Overlays are created and enabled in the Conference Properties –
Message Overlay dialog box.
To enable Message Overlay:
1 In the Conferences List pane, double click the name of the conference
to have Message Overlay enabled or right-click the conference name
and then click Conference Properties.
The General tab is displayed.
2
Click the Message Overlay tab.
The Message Overlay tab is displayed.
Preview
3
Select the Enable check box.
4
Modify the following fields as set out in Table 2-11.
2-57
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
As the fields are modified the Preview changes to show the effect of
the changes.
For example:
Small Text, White on red, Top, Middle
Small Text, White on yellow, Bottom
Table 2-11 Conference Properties - Message Overlay
Field
Description
Content
Enter a message of up to 24 Unicode characters.
Font Size
Select the size of the Message Overlay text from the
drop-down menu options:
• Small
•
•
Medium
Large
Default: Small
Note: In some languages, for example Russian, when
large font size is selected, both rolling and static
messages may be truncated if the message length
exceeds the resolution width.
Color
Select the color of the text and background of the
Message Overlay from the following drop-down menu
options:
Default: White text on pale blue background
2-58
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 2-11 Conference Properties - Message Overlay (Continued)
Field
Description
Display Repetition
Click the arrows ( ) to increase or decrease the
number of times that the Message Overlay is to be
repeated.
Default: 3
Display Position
Select the position for the display of the Message
Overlay on the endpoint screen:
• Top
•
•
Middle
Bottom
Default: Bottom
Display Speed
Select whether the Message Overlay is static or
repeating:
• Static
•
•
Slow
Fast
Default: Slow
5
Click the OK button.
2-59
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Audio Algorithm Support
The RMX supports the following audio algorithms: G.711, G. 719, G.722,
G.722.1, G. 728, G.729A, G.723.1, Siren14 and Siren 22.
Polycom’s proprietary Siren 22 and industry standard G.719 audio
algorithms are supported for participants connecting with Polycom
endpoints.
The Siren 22 audio algorithm provides CD-quality audio for better clarity
and less listener fatigue with audio and visual communication
applications. Siren 22 requires less computing power and has much lower
latency than alternative wideband audio technologies.
Guidelines
2-60
•
Siren 22, G.719 and Siren 22Stereo are supported with MPM+ and
MPMx cards.
•
Siren 22 and G.719 are supported in both mono and stereo.
•
Stereo is supported in H.323 calls only.
•
Siren 22 is supported by Polycom HDX endpoints, version 2.0 and
later.
•
G.728 is supported with both MPM+ and MPMx cards and in H.323,
SIP and ISDN environments.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Mono
The Siren 22 and G.719 mono audio algorithms are supported at the
following bit rates:
Table 2-12 Siren22 and G.719 Mono vs Bitrate
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
Siren22 64k
Siren22 48K
Siren22_32k
G.719_64k
384
G.719_48k
G.719_32k
G.728 16K
Siren22_48K
Siren22_32k
G.719_48k
256
G.719_32k
G.728 16
Siren22_32k
128
G.719_32k
G.728 16K
2-61
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Stereo
The Siren 22Stereo and G.719Stereo audio algorithms are supported at the
following bit rates.
Table 2-13 Siren22Stereo and G.719Stereo vs Bitrate
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
Siren22Stereo_128k
Siren22Stereo_96k
Siren22Stereo_64k
1024
G.719Stereo_128k
G.719Stereo_96k
G.719Stereo_64k
Siren22Stereo_96k
Siren22Stereo_64k
512
G.719Stereo_96k
G.719Stereo_64k
Siren22Stereo_64k
384
G.719Stereo_64k
2-62
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Audio algorithms supported for ISDN
Table 2-14 Supported Audio Algorithm vs Bitrate
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
G722.1 C 48K
G722.1 C 32K
G722.1 C 24K
Siren14 48K
Siren14 32K
Siren14 24K
G722.1 32K
256
G722.1 24K
G722.1 16K
G722 48K
G722 56K
G722 64K
G711 56K
G711 64K
G.728 16K
2-63
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-14 Supported Audio Algorithm vs Bitrate (Continued)
Audio Algorithm
Minimum Bitrate (kbps)
G.722.1 C 32K
G.722.1 C 24K
Siren14 32K
Siren14 24K
G.722.1 32K
G.722.1 24K
128
G.722 48K
G.722 56K
G.722 64K
G.711 56K
G.711 64K
G.728 16K
G.722.1 16K
G.722.1 C 24K
Siren14 24K
G.722 48K
G.722 56K
96
G.722 64K
G.711 56K
G.711 64K
G.728 16K
G.728 16K
2-64
64
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Monitoring Participant Audio Properties
The audio algorithm used by the participant’s endpoint can be verified in
the Participant Properties - Channel Status dialog box.
To view the participant’s properties during a conference:
1 In the Participants list, right click the desired participant and select
Participant Properties.
2
Click the Channel Status - Advanced tab.
The Participant Properties - Channel Status - Advanced dialog box is
displayed.
3
In the Channel Info field, select Audio In or Audio Out to display the
audio parameters.
4
Click the OK button.
2-65
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Media Encryption
Encryption is available at the conference and participant levels, based on
AES 128 (Advanced Encryption Standard) and is fully H.233/H.234
compliant and the Encryption Key exchange DH 1024-bit (DiffieHellman) standards.
Media Encryption Guidelines
2-66
•
Encryption is not available in all countries and it is enabled in the
MCU license. Contact Polycom Support to enable it.
•
Endpoints must support both AES 128 encryption and DH 1024 key
exchange standards which are compliant with H.235 (H.323) to
encrypt and to join an encrypted conference.
•
The encryption mode of the endpoints is not automatically
recognized, therefore the encryption mode must be set for the
conference or the participants (when defined).
•
Media Encryption for ISDN/PSTN participants is implemented in RMX
systems with MPM+ and MPMx cards.
•
Conference level encryption must be set in the Profile, and cannot be
changed once the conference is running.
•
If an endpoint connected to an encrypted conference stops encrypting
its media it is disconnected from the conference.
•
Mixing encrypted and non-encrypted endpoints in one conference is
possible, based on system flag settings:
(ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF).
The behavior is different for H.323/SIP and ISDN participants.
•
In Cascaded conferences, the link between the cascaded conferences
must be encrypted in order to encrypt the conferences.
•
Media Encryption for ISDN/PSTN (H.320) participants is not
supported in cascaded conferences.
•
The recording link can be encrypted when recording from an
encrypted conference to the RSS that is set to encryption. For more
details, see "Recording Link Encryption” on page 12-8.
•
Encryption of SIP Media is supported using SRTP (Secured Real-time
Transport Protocol) and the AES key exchange method.
•
Encryption of SIP Media requires the encryption of SIP signaling TLS Transport Layer must be used.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
Encryption of SIP Media is supported in CP and VSW conferences.
— All media channels are encrypted: video, audio and FECC.
— Encryption of SIP Media is available only in MPM+ and MPMx
Card Configuration Modes.
— RMX SRTP implementation complies with Microsoft SRTP
implementation.
— LPR is not supported with SRTP.
You can define whether access to conferences for encrypted and nonencrypted participants is permitted at the conference level or at the
participant level.
Conference Access
When H.323, SIP and ISDN participants connect directly to the
conference, they can be defined or undefined participants. Undefined
Participants can connect to an encrypted conference only if the endpoint’s
encryption is set to YES; otherwise, the endpoint’s encryption is
considered as if set to NO.
Encrypted ISDN/PSTN Participant can connect to a non-encrypted
conference while encrypted H.323 participants cannot connect to a nonencrypted conference.
Non-encrypted participants can connect to an encrypted conference only
if they are defined in the conference’s participants list (defined
participants) and the system flag
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF is set to YES.
This flag does not apply to undefined participants. Table 2-15 summarizes
the conference access options for defined participants:
Table 2-15
Connection of Defined H.323 and SIP Participants to the Conference
Based on the Encryption Settings
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Connection
Permitted
NO
Yes
Auto
Yes (encrypted)
NO
Yes
No
No
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
NO
No
Auto
Yes (non-encrypted)
2-67
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-15
Connection of Defined H.323 and SIP Participants to the Conference
Based on the Encryption Settings (Continued)
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Connection
Permitted
NO
No
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
NO
No
Yes
No
YES
Yes
Auto
Yes (encrypted)
YES
Yes
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
YES
No
Auto
Yes (non-encrypted)
YES
No
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
YES
No
Yes
No
Defined ISDN participant connection to the conference is enabled
according to the flag setting and the conference encryption setting.
Table 2-16 Connection of Defined ISDN Participants to the Conference Based on
the Encryption Settings
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
2-68
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Connection
Permitted
NO
Yes
Auto
Yes (encrypted)
NO
Yes
No
No
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
NO
No
Auto
Yes (non-encrypted)
NO
No
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
NO
No
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
YES
Yes
Auto
Yes (encrypted)
YES
Yes
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 2-16 Connection of Defined ISDN Participants to the Conference Based on
the Encryption Settings (Continued)
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Encryption
Setting
Participant
Connection
Permitted
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
YES
No
Auto
Yes (non-encrypted)
YES
No
No
Yes (non-encrypted)
YES
No
Yes
Yes (encrypted)
Entry Queue Access
To be able to join a conference from an Entry Queue as an encrypted
participant, encryption must be enabled in the Profile assigned to the
Entry Queue. All non-encrypted participants connecting to an encrypted
Entry Queue are disconnected from the MCU.
When an undefined participant connects to an Entry Queue the
participant inherits the encryption characteristics of the Entry Queue as
defined in the Entry Queue’s profile.
The participant’s move to the destination conference will be successful
depending on the Encryption flag setting and the destination conference
encryption setting, as summarized in Table 2-17:
Table 2-17
Encryption: Flag vs. Conference and Entry Queue Settings When
H.323 and SIP Participant Encryption is set to Auto
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
Entry Queue
Encryption
Setting
Destination
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Enable
Participant
Move from EQ
to Conference
NO
Yes
No
No
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
NO
No
No
Yes
NO
No
Yes
No
2-69
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-17
Encryption: Flag vs. Conference and Entry Queue Settings When
H.323 and SIP Participant Encryption is set to Auto (Continued)
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
Entry Queue
Encryption
Setting
Destination
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Enable
Participant
Move from EQ
to Conference
YES
Yes
No
No
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes
YES
No
No
Yes
YES
No
Yes
Yes
Table 2-18 Encryption: Flag vs. Conference and Entry Queue Settings When
ISDN Participant Encryption is set to Auto
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
2-70
Entry Queue
Encryption
Setting
Destination
Conference
Encryption
Setting
Enable
Participant
Move from EQ
to Conference
NO
Yes
No
Yes
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
NO
No
No
Yes
NO
No
Yes
No
YES
Yes
No
Yes
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes
YES
No
No
Yes
YES
No
Yes
Yes
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Move Guidelines
•
When participants are moved to another conference their encryption
settings are evaluated to determine if the move is permitted. If not,
the move fails and the participants remain in their original conference.
•
When the flag is set to YES, participants can move between conferences
that have different encryption settings. For example, encrypted
participants can move to encrypted and non-encrypted conferences.
•
When the flag is set to NO, the participant’s encryption setting must
match the conference encryption setting to be moved to the other
conference. For example, encrypted participants can move only from
an encrypted conference to another encrypted conference.
Encryption Flag Settings
To modify the Encryption flag:
1 Click Setup>System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
Set the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
flag to YES or NO.
3
Click OK.
For more information, see "System Configuration” on page 19-5.
>> Reset the MCU for flag changes to take effect.
2-71
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Enabling Encryption in the Profile
Encryption for the conference is in the Profile and cannot be changed once
the conference is running.
To enable encryption at the conference level:
>> In the Conference Profile Properties – Advanced dialog box, select the
Encryption check box.
The recording link from an encrypted conference to the RSS set to
encryption can be encrypted. For more details, see "Recording Link
Encryption” on page 12-8.
Enabling Encryption at the Participant Level
You can select the encryption mode for each of the defined participants.
Encryption options are affected by the settings of the flag in the system
configuration. Undefined participants are connected with the Participant
Encryption option set to Auto, inheriting the conference/Entry Queue
encryption setting.
2-72
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
To enable encryption at the participant level:
>> In the Participant Properties – Advanced dialog box, in the Encryption
list, select one of the following options: Auto, On, or Off.
— Auto - The participant inherits the conference/Entry Queue
encryption setting. The participant connects as encrypted only if
the conference is defined as encrypted.
— Yes - The participant joins the conference/Entry Queue is
encrypted.
— No - The participant joins the conference/Entry Queue is
non-encrypted.
2-73
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring the Encryption Status
The conference encryption status is indicated in the Conference Properties General dialog box.
The participant encryption status is indicated by a check mark in the
Encryption column in the Participants list pane.
2-74
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The participant encryption status is also indicated in the Participant
Properties – SDP tab, where SRTP indication is listed for each encrypted
channel (for example, audio and video).
An encrypted participant who is unable to join a conference is
disconnected from the conference. The disconnection cause is displayed
in the Participant Properties – Connection Status tab, Security Failure
indication, and the Cause box identifies the encryption related situation.
For more information about monitoring, see "Conference and Participant
Monitoring” on page 11-1.
2-75
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
LPR – Lost Packet Recovery
Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) and Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation (DBA) help
minimize media quality degradation that can result from packet loss in
the network.
Packet Loss
Packet Loss refers to the failure of data packets, transmitted over an IP
network, to arrive at their destination. Packet Loss is described as a
percentage of the total packets transmitted.
Causes of Packet Loss
Network congestion within a LAN or WAN, faulty or incorrectly
configured network equipment or faulty cabling are among the many
causes of Packet Loss.
Effects of Packet Loss on Conferences
Packet Loss affects the quality of:
•
Video – frozen images, decreased frame rate, flickering, tiling,
distortion, smearing, loss of lip sync
•
Audio – drop-outs, chirping, audio distortion
•
Content – frozen images, blurring, distortion, slow screen refresh rate
Lost Packet Recovery
The Lost Packet Recovery (LPR) algorithm uses Forward Error Correction
(FEC) to create additional packets that contain recovery information.
These additional packets are used to reconstruct packets that are lost, for
whatever reason, during transmission. Dynamic Bandwidth Allocation
(DBA) is used to allocate the bandwidth needed to transmit the additional
packets.
2-76
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Lost Packet Recovery Guidelines
•
LPR is supported in H.323 and SIP networking environments only.
•
In LPR-enabled Continuous Presence conferences:
•
— Both LPR-enabled and non LPR-enabled endpoints are
supported.
— The LPR process is not applied to packet transmissions from non
LPR-enabled H.323, SIP and H.320 endpoints.
In LPR-enabled Video Switched conferences:
•
— H.323 and SIP endpoints are supported.
— When cascading between conferences running on RMX and
MGC (Polycom legacy MCU), LPR is not supported over the link
between the two conferences.
— Non H.323 participants cannot be created, added or moved to
LPR-enabled Video Switched conferences.
When connecting via an Entry Queue:
•
— A participant using an LPR-enabled endpoint cannot be moved
to a non LPR-enabled conference.
— SIP and H.320 participants cannot be moved to LPR-enabled
Video Switched conferences.
If packet loss is detected in the packet transmissions of either the
video or Content streams:
— LPR is applied to both the video and Content streams.
— DBA allocates bandwidth from the video stream for the insertion
of additional packets containing recovery information.
Enabling Lost Packet Recovery
LPR is enabled or disabled in the Conference Profile dialog box.
•
CP Conferences – LPR is enabled by default in the New Profile –
Advanced dialog box.
•
VSW Conferences – If Video Switching is selected, the LPR check box
is automatically cleared and LPR is disabled. LPR can be enabled for
VSW conferences but H.320 and SIP participants will not be able to
connect.
For more information, see "Defining Profiles” on page 1-8.
2-77
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring Lost Packet Recovery
In the Participant Properties – H.245 tab, LPR activity is displayed in all
three panes.
2-78
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
In the Participant Properties – Channel Status tab, check box indicators show
LPR activation in the local and remote (transmit and receive) channels.
Telepresence Mode
RMX supports the Telepresence Mode allowing multiple participants to
join a telepresence conference from RPX and TPX high definition rooms as
well as traditional, standard definition video conferencing systems.
2-79
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
TPX (Telepresence) and RPX (Realpresence) room systems are configured
with high definition cameras and displays that are set up to ensure that all
participants share a sense of being in the same room.
Figure 2-1 Realpresence Participants using two RPX HD 400 Room Systems
The following are examples of situations where an RMX is needed for
Telepresence configurations:
•
RPX to TPX
•
RPX 2-cameras/screens to RPX 4-cameras/screens
•
3 or more RPXs
•
3 or more TPXs
RMX Telepresence Mode Guidelines
System Level
•
The RMX system must be licensed for Telepresence Mode.
•
The system must be activated with a Telepresence enabled license key.
Conference Level
2-80
•
The Telepresence Mode and Telepresence Layout Mode fields are only
displayed in the Conference Profile dialog box if the RMX has a
Telepresence license installed.
•
A Telepresence conference must have Telepresence Mode enabled in its
profile.
•
In Telepresence Mode, ITP sites are automatically detected.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
•
•
•
When Telepresence mode is selected in a conference profile, the
following options are disabled:
— borders
— site names
— speaker indication
— skins
— same layout
— presentation mode
— auto layout
— lecture mode
The master (center) camera is used for video, audio and content.
Conference Templates can be used to simplify the setting up
Telepresence conferences where precise participant layout and video
forcing settings are crucial. Conference Templates:
— Save the conference Profile.
— Save all participant parameters including their Personal Layout
and Video Forcing settings.
An ongoing Telepresence conference can be saved to a Conference
Template for later re-use.
For more information see "Conference Templates” on page 9-1.
Room (Participant/Endpoint) Level
•
To the RMX, each camera in a Telepresence room is considered to be an
endpoint and is configured as a participant.
•
The Telepresence Mode field is always displayed in the New Participant
dialog box. If the system is not licensed for Telepresence this field is
automatically set to None.
•
Telepresence participants (endpoints) must be specified as:
— RPX – transmitting 4:3 video
or
— TPX – transmitting 16:9 video
Automatic detection of Immersive Telepresence (ITP) Sites
When the conference Telepresence Mode is set to Auto (Default) ITP
endpoints are automatically detected.
2-81
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
If an ITP endpoint is detected in such conference, ITP features are applied
to all endpoints and the RMX sends conference video with the following
options disabled:
•
Borders
•
Site names
•
Speaker indication
•
Skins
•
Same Layout
•
Presentation Mode
•
Auto Layout
•
Lecture Mode
The ITP features are dynamic, and if all ITP endpoints disconnect from
the conference, normal conference video is resumed for the remaining all
participants. ITP features are re-applied to all participants should an ITP
endpoint re-connects to that conference.
Striping Options
Horizontal Striping
Horizontal Striping is used by the RMX in order to prevent cropping and
preserve the aspect ratio of video for all Telepresence Modes.
4:3
16:9
Horizontal Striping
Symmetric Letter box Cropping
Symmetric Letter box Cropping is used by the RMX in order to preserve the
aspect ratio of video for all Telepresence Modes.
2-82
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
4:3
16:9
Symmetric
Letter box Cropping
Gathering Phase with ITP Room Systems
When a conference is configured to include a Gathering Phase, only one
endpoint name is displayed for the ITP room in the connected participant
list of the Gathering slide. The ITP room endpoint with the suffix “1” in its
name receives the Gathering slide.
Aspect ratio for standard endpoints
Standard endpoints (non-ITP) receive video from the RMX with the same
aspect ratio as that which they transmitted to the RMX.
Video Fade is enabled for all Telepresence conferences
Video Fade is enabled for all Telepresence conferences.
RPX and TPX Video Layouts
Additional video layouts have been created to give Telepresence operators
more video layout options when configuring TPX and RPX room systems.
These additional video layout options are available to all endpoints on
both conference layout and Personal Layout levels.
Table 2-19 TPX / RPX – Additional Video Layouts
Number of
Endpoints
Layouts
1
2-83
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-19 TPX / RPX – Additional Video Layouts (Continued)
Number of
Endpoints
2
Layouts
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
4:3
3
4
5
9
2-84
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Table 2-19 TPX / RPX – Additional Video Layouts (Continued)
Number of
Endpoints
Layouts
10+
2-85
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The following example illustrates the use of standard and additional RMX
Telepresence layouts when connecting four Room Systems as follows:
•
Two TPX Room Systems
— 2 active cameras
— 6 screens
•
Two RPX Room Systems
— 8 cameras
— 8 screens
TPX View
3 Screens 16:9
RPX View
4 Screens 4:3
Standard TPX Layout
Camera Zoomed Out
Alignment of back-projectors
eliminates the display of the
vertical blank areas of the
video layouts
Figure 2-2 RPX and TPX Room System connected using RMX 1500/2000/4000
2-86
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Enabling Telepresence Mode
Conference Level
Telepresence Mode must be configured in a new or existing Conference
Profile.
To enable Telepresence in a new or existing Conference Profile:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
Click the New Profiles (
Profile.
3
Define the various profile General, Advanced, Gathering Settings and
Video Quality parameters.
) button or open an existing Conference
For more information on defining Profiles, see "Defining Profiles” on
page 1-8.
4
Click the Video Settings tab.
2-87
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
In the Telepresence Mode field, select one of the following options:
— OFF - When OFF is selected, normal conference video is sent by
the RMX.
— AUTO (Default) - The ITP features are dynamic. When AUTO is
selected and an ITP endpoint is detected, ITP features are
applied to the conference video for all participants. If all ITP
endpoints disconnect from the conference, normal conference
video is resumed for all remaining participants. ITP features are
re-applied for all participants should an ITP endpoint re-connect
to the conference.
— ON - ITP features are always applied to the conference video for
all participants regardless of whether there are ITP endpoints
connected or not.
6
In the Telepresence Layout Mode field, select the Telepresence Layout
Mode to be used in the conference. This field is used by VNOC
operators and Polycom Multi Layout Applications to retrieve
Telepresence Layout Mode information from the RMX.
The following modes can be selected (as required by the VNOC and
Polycom Multi Layout Applications):
— Manual
— Continuous presence - Room Continuous Presence (Default)
— Room Switch - Voice Activated Room Switching
7
Select the required video layout.
When Telepresence Mode is enabled, the Skin options are disabled as the
system uses a black background and the frames and speaker indication are
disabled.
8
Click OK.
Room (Participant/Endpoint) Level
Setting the participant/endpoint Telepresence Mode configures the RMX to
receive the video format of the RPX or TPX room endpoints.
To configure a participant/endpoint for Telepresence:
1
2-88
In the Address Book pane, click New Participant (
an existing Telepresence endpoint.
) or double-click
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
The New Participant or Participant Properties - General dialog box is
displayed.
2
If defining a new participant, enter the required information in the
New Participant – General dialog box for the participant.
For more information, see “Adding a new participant to the Address
Book” on page 4-4.
3
Click the Advanced tab.
4
Select the Telepresence Mode for the participant:
Table 2-20 New Participant – Telepresence Mode
Mode
Description
RPX
Select this option for room endpoints that transmit
4:3 video format.
2-89
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 2-20 New Participant – Telepresence Mode (Continued)
5
Mode
Description
TPX
Select this option for room endpoints that transmit
16:9 video format.
None
Select this option for endpoints that are neither RPX
or TPX room endpoints.
Click OK.
Saving an Ongoing Conference as a Template
Any conference that is ongoing can be saved as a template.
To save an ongoing conference as a template:
1 In the Conferences List, select the conference you want to save as a
Template.
2
Click the Save Conference ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Save Conference.
The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the
ongoing conference Display Name.
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template
An ongoing conference can be started from any Template saved in the
Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing conference from a Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Template you want to start
as an ongoing conference.
2-90
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
2
Click the Start Ongoing Conference ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Ongoing Conference.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from
the Template display name of the template.
2-91
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring Telepresence Mode
Monitoring Ongoing Conferences
An additional status indicator, Telepresence Mode Enabled, is displayed in the
Conference Properties - Video Settings tab when monitoring ongoing
conferences.
The Telepresence Mode Enabled, Telepresence Mode and Telepresence
Layout Mode fields are only displayed if the RMX has a Telepresence license
installed.
If Telepresence Mode is enabled, a check mark is displayed in the check box.
This option is grayed as this is a status indicator and cannot be used to
enable or disable Telepresence Mode.
2-92
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Monitoring Participant Properties
An additional status indicator, Telepresence, is displayed in the
Participant Properties - Advanced tab when monitoring conference
participants.
The Telepresence mode of the participant is indicated:
•
RPX - the participant’s endpoint is transmitting 4:3 video format.
•
TPX - the participant’s endpoint is transmitting 16:9 video format.
•
None.
2-93
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Lecture Mode
Lecture Mode enables all participants to view the lecturer in full screen
while the conference lecturer sees all the other conference participants in
the selected layout while he/she is speaking. When the number of sites/
endpoints exceeds the number of video windows in the layout, switching
between participants occurs every 15 seconds. Conference participants
cannot change their Personal Layouts while Lecture Mode is enabled.
Automatic switching is suspended when one of the participants begins
talking, and it is resumed automatically when the lecturer resumes
talking.
Enabling Lecture Mode
Lecture Mode is enabled at the conference level by selecting the lecturer.
Automatic switching between participants viewed on the lecturer’s screen
is enabled in the conference Profile.
Enabling the Automatic Switching
>> In the Profile Properties - Video Settings dialog box, select the Lecturer
View Switching check box.
2-94
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
This option is activated when the conference includes more sites than
windows in the selected layout. If this option is disabled, the
participants will be displayed in the selected video layout without
switching.
For more information about Profile definition, see "Defining Profiles”
on page 1-8.
Selecting the Conference Lecturer
A conference can be set to Lecture Mode when:
•
Defining a new ongoing Conference, after the adding or defining the
participant to be designated as lecturer
•
During an ongoing conference, after the participant (to be designated
as lecturer) has connected to the conference.
To enable Lecture Mode for the Conference:
>> In the Conference Properties - Participant dialog box, select the Lecturer
from the list.
2-95
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Restricting Content Broadcast to Lecturer
Content broadcasting can be restricted to the conference lecturer only,
when one of the conference participants is set as the lecturer (and not
automatically selected by the system). Restricting the Content Broadcast
prevents the accidental interruption or termination of H.239 Content that
is being shared in a conference.
Content Broadcast restriction is enabled by setting the
RESTRICT_CONTENT_BROADCAST_TO_LECTURER system flag to
ON. When set to OFF (default) it enables all users to send Content.
When enabled, the following rules apply:
• Content can only be sent by the designated lecturer. When any other
participant tries to send Content, the request is rejected.
•
If the RMX user changes the designated lecturer (in the Conference
Properties - Video Settings dialog box), the Content of the current
lecturer is stopped immediately and cannot be renewed.
•
The RMX User can abort the H.239 Session of the lecturer.
•
Content Broadcasting is not implemented in conferences that do not
include a designated lecturer and the lecturer is automatically
selected by the system (for example, in Presentation Mode).
Content Broadcast Control
Content Broadcast Control prevents the accidental interruption or
termination of H.239 Content that is being shared in a conference.
Content Broadcast Control achieves this by giving Content Token ownership
to a specific endpoint via the RMX Web Client. Other endpoints are not
able to send content until Content Token ownership has been transferred to
another endpoint via the RMX Web Client.
Guidelines
• Content Broadcast Control is supported in MPM+ and MPMx card
configuration modes.
2-96
•
Content Broadcast Control is supported in CP and Video Switching
conferences.
•
Content Broadcast Control is supported in H.323 environments.
•
Only the selected Content Token owner may send content and Content
Token requests from other endpoints are rejected.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
•
•
•
Content Token ownership is valid until:
— It is canceled by an administrator, operator or chairperson using
the
RMX Web Client.
— The owner releases it.
— The endpoint of the Content Token owner disconnects from the
conference.
An administrator, operator or chairperson can cancel Content Token
ownership.
In cascaded conferences, a participant functioning as the cascade link
cannot be given token ownership.
Giving and Cancelling Token Ownership
To give token ownership:
1 In the Participants list, right click the endpoint that is to receive
Content Token ownership.
2
Select Change To Content Token Owner in the drop-down menu.
2-97
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The endpoint receives ownership of the Content Token and an
indication icon is displayed in the Role column of the participant’s
entry in the Participants list.
To cancel token ownership:
1
In the Participants list, right click the endpoint that currently has
Content Token ownership.
2
Select Cancel Content Token Owner in the drop-down menu.
Content Token ownership is cancelled for the endpoint.
Lecture Mode Monitoring
A conference in which the Lecture Mode is enabled is started as any other
conference. The conference runs as an audio activated Continuous
Presence conference until the lecturer connects to the conference. The
selected video layout is the one that is activated when the conference
starts. Once the lecturer is connected, the conference switches to the
Lecture Mode.
2-98
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
When Lecturer View Switching is activated, it enables automatic switching
between the conference participants in the lecturer’s video window. The
switching in this mode is not determined by voice activation and is
initiated when the number of participants exceeds the number of
windows in the selected video layout. In this case, when the switching is
performed, the system refreshes the display and replaces the last active
speaker with the current speaker.
When one of the participants is talking, the automatic switching is
suspended, showing the current speaker, and it is resumed when the
lecturer resumes talking.
If the lecturer is disconnected during an Ongoing Conference, the
conference resumes standard conferencing.
Forcing is enabled at the Conference level only. It applies only to the
video layout viewed by the lecturer as all the other conference
participants see only the lecturer in full screen.
If an asymmetrical video layout is selected for the lecturer (i.e. 3+1, 4+1,
8+1), each video window contains a different participant (i.e. one cannot
be forced to a large frame and to a small frame simultaneously).
When Lecture Mode is enabled for the conference, the lecturer is indicated
by an icon ( ) in the Role column of the Participants list.
Participant designated as the
Lecturer
To control the Lecture Mode during an Ongoing Conference:
During the Ongoing Conference, in the Conference Properties - Video
Settings dialog box you can:
•
Enable or disable the Lecture Mode and designate the conference
lecturer in the Lecturer list; select None to disable the Lecture Mode or
select a participant to become the lecturer to enable it.
2-99
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2-100
•
Designate a new lecturer.
•
Enable or disable the Lecturer View Switching between participants
displayed on the lecturer monitor window by selecting or clearing
the Lecturer View Switching check box.
•
Change the video layout for the lecturer by selecting another video
layout.
Chapter 2-Additional Conferencing Information
Permanent Conference
A Permanent Conference is an ongoing conference with no pre-determined
End Time continuing until it is terminated by an administrator, operator or
chairperson.
Guidelines
•
Resources are reserved for a Permanent Conference, only when the
conference has become ongoing.
•
Resources are allocated to a Permanent Conference according to the
Reserve Resources for Video Participants field. If the number of defined
dial-out participants exceeds the value of this field, the RMX
automatically replaces the number in the Reserve Resources for Video
Participants field with the number of defined dial-out participants in
the Permanent Conference.
•
Auto Terminate is disabled in Permanent Conferences.
•
If participants disconnect from the Permanent Conference, resources
that were reserved for its video and audio participants are released.
•
Ad-hoc Entry Queues, Conference Reservations and SIP Factories cannot
be defined as Permanent Conferences.
•
Additional participants can connect to the conference, or be added by
the operator, if sufficient resources are available.
•
The maximum size of the Call Detail Record (CDR) for a Permanent
Conference is 1MB.
2-101
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Enabling a Permanent Conference
The Permanent Conference option is selected in the New Conference, New
Meeting Room or New Conference Templates dialog boxes.
Permanent Conference
New Conference
2-102
New Meeting Room
New Conference Template
3
Cascading Conferences
Cascading enables administrators to connect one conference directly to
one or several conferences, depending on the topology, creating one
large conference. The conferences can run on the same MCU or different
MCUs.
There are many reasons for cascading conferences, the most common
are:
•
Connecting two conferences on different MCUs at different sites.
•
Utilizing the connection abilities of different MCUs, for example,
different communication protocols, such as, serial connections,
ISDN, etc....
The following cascading topologies are available for cascading:
•
Basic Cascading - only two conferences are connected (usually
running on two different RMXs). The cascaded MCUs reside on the
same network.
•
Star Cascading - one or several conferences are connected to one
master conference. Conferences are usually running on separate
MCUs. The cascaded MCUs reside on the same network.
•
MIH (Multi-Hierarchy) Cascading - several conferences are
connected to each other in Master-Slave relationship. The cascaded
MCUs can reside on different networks.
System configuration and feature availability change according to the
selected cascading topology.
Video Layout in Cascading conferences
Cascade links are treated as endpoints in CP conferences and are
allocated resources according to Table 2-2 on page 2-8. Cascaded links in
1x1 video layout are in SD resolution.
3-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
When cascading two conferences, the video layout displayed in the
cascaded conference is determined by the selected layout in each of the
two conferences. Each of the two conferences will inherit the video layout
of the other conference in one of their windows.
In order to avoid cluttering in the cascaded window, it is advised to select
appropriate video layouts in each conference before cascading them.
Conference A
Conference B
Without
Cascade
During
Cascading
Video layout of Conf. B in
window of Conf. A
Video layout of Conf. A in
window of Conf. B
Figure 3-1 Video Layouts in Cascaded Conferences
Guidelines
To ensure that conferences can be cascaded and video can be viewed in all
conferences the following guidelines are recommended:
3-2
•
The same version installed on all MCUs participating the cascading
topology
•
The same license installed on all MCUs participating the cascading
topology
•
Same Conference Parameters are defined in the Profile of the
conferences participating in the cascading topology
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
— Conference line rates should be identical
— Content rate should be identical
— Same encryption settings
DTMF codes should be defined with the same numeric codes in the
IVR services assigned to the cascading conferences
•
DTMF forwarding is suppressed
•
The video layout of the link is set to 1x1 by the appropriate system
flag.
Flags controlling Cascade Layouts
•
Setting the FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_CASCADED_LINK
_CONNECTION System Flag to YES (default) automatically forces
the cascading link to Full Screen (1x1) in CP conferences, hence
displaying the speaker of one conference to a full window in the
video layout of the other conference.
Set this flag to NO when cascading between an RMX and an MGC
that is functioning as a Gateway, if the participant layouts on the
MGC are not to be forced to 1X1.
•
Setting the AVOID_VIDEO_LOOP_BACK_IN_CASCADE System
Flag to YES (default) prevents the speaker’s image from being sent
back through the participant link from the cascaded conference. This
can occur in cascaded conferences with conference layouts other than
1x1. It results in the speaker’s own video image being displayed in
the speaker’s video layout.
Guidelines
This option is supported with:
— With MPM+ and MPMx cards.
— In H.323, SIP and ISDN environments.
— For Basic Cascading of Continuous Presence, Video Switched and
Event Mode conferences. If a Master MCU has two slave MCUs,
participants connected to the slave MCUs will not receive video
from each other.
— Video resolution will be according to the Resolution Configuration,
VSW Setting, or Event Mode profile.
For more details on defining system flags, see "Modifying System Flags” on
page 19-5.
3-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
DTMF Forwarding
When two conferences are connected over an IP link, DTMF codes from
one conference are not forwarded to the second conference with the
exception of the following operations that are available throughout the
conference and the forwarding of their DTMF codes is not suppressed (i.e.
they will apply to both conferences):
•
Terminate conference.
•
Mute all but me.
•
Unmute all but me.
•
Secure conference.
•
Unsecure conference.
During cascading between a gateway and a conference all DTMF codes are
forwarded from the gateway to the conference and vice versa.
Play Tone Upon Cascading Link Connection
The RMX can be configured to play a tone when a cascading link between
conferences is established. The tone is played in both conferences.
This tone is not played when the cascading link disconnects from the
conferences.
The tone used to notify that the cascading link connection has been
established cannot be customized.
The option to play a tone when the cascading link is established is enabled
by setting the System Flag:
CASCADE_LINK_PLAY_TONE_ON_CONNECTION to YES.
Default value: NO.
The tone volume is controlled by the same flag as the IVR messages and
tones: IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME.
3-4
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Basic Cascading
In this topology, a link is created between two conferences, usually
running on two different MCUs. The MCUs are usually installed at
different locations (states/countries) to save long distance charges by
connecting each participant to their local MCU, while only the link
between the two conferences is billed as long distance call.
•
This is the only topology that enables both IP and ISDN cascading
links:
•
— When linking two conferences using an IP connection, the
destination MCU can be indicated by:
• IP address
• H.323 Alias
— If IP cascading link is used to connect the two conferences, both
MCUs must be located in the same network.
One MCU can be used as a gateway.
•
The configuration can include two RMXs or one RMX and one MGC.
Basic Cascading using IP Cascaded Link
In this topology, both MCUs can be registered with the same gatekeeper
or the IP addresses of both MCUs can be used for the cascading link.
Content can be sent across the Cascading Link.
Figure 3-2 Basic Cascading Topology - IP Cascading Link
3-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
For example, MCU B is registered with the gatekeeper using 76 as the
MCU prefix.
The connection between the two conferences is created when a dial out IP
participant is defined (added) to conference A whose dial out number is
the dial-in number of the conference or Entry Queue running on MCU B.
Dialing Directly to a Conference
Dial out IP participant in conference A dials out to the conference running
on MCU B entering the number in the format:
[MCU B Prefix/IP address][conference B ID].
For example, if MCU B prefix is 76 and the conference ID is 12345, the dial
number is 7612345.
Dialing to an Entry Queue
When dialing to an Entry Queue, the dial out participant dials the MCU B
prefix or IP address of MCU B and the Entry Queue ID in the format:
[MCU B Prefix/IP address][EQ B ID].
For example, if MCU B prefix is 76 and the Entry Queue ID is 22558, the
dial number is 7622558.
When the participant from conference A connects to the Entry Queue, the
system plays to all the participants in Conference A the IVR message
requesting the participant to enter the destination conference ID.
At this point, the Conference A organizer or any other participant in the
conference can enter the required information for the IVR session using
DTMF codes. For example, the meeting organizer enters the destination
conference ID - 12345.
Any DTMF input from conference A is forwarded to the Entry Queue on
MCU B to complete the IVR session and enable the move of the
participant to the destination conference B.
Once the DTMF codes are entered and forwarded to the Entry Queue on
MCU B, the IVR session is completed, the participant moved to the
destination conference and the connection between the two conferences is
established.
3-6
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Automatic Identification of the Cascading Link
In both dialing methods, the system automatically identifies that the dial
in participant is an MCU and creates a Cascading Link and displays the
link icon for the participant (
). The master-slave relationship is
randomly defined by the MCUs during the negotiation process of the
connection phase.
Basic Cascading using ISDN Cascaded Link
ISDN connection can be used to link between two MCUs or MCU and
gateway and create a cascading conference. Content can be sent across the
ISDN Cascading Link.
Network Topologies Enabling H.239 Content Over ISDN
Cascaded Links
ISDN Cascaded links that support H.239 Content can be created between
two gateways, gateway-to-MCU or between two MCUs in the following
network topologies:
•
Gateway to Gateway
RMX Gateway A
Figure 4
RMX Gateway B
Gateway to Gateway Topology
In this topology, an IP participant calls another IP participant over an
ISDN link between two gateways.
3-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Gateway to MCU
RMX Gateway A
Figure 5
RMX MCU B
Gateway to MCU/ MCU to Gateway Topology
In this topology, an IP participant calls a conference running on an
MCU via a gateway and over an ISDN link.
•
MCU to MCU
Figure 6
Cascading Between Two MCUs Using an ISDN Link
In this topology, an ISDN participant from conference running on
MCU A calls a conference running on MCU B over an ISDN link.
Guidelines
•
3-8
Content is restricted. When another endpoint wants to send content,
the first endpoint must stop sending content before the second
endpoint can initiate or send content.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
Endpoints that do not support H.239 can receive the Content using
the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints option.
•
When a participant joins a conference with active Content, content
cannot be viewed by the new participant. Restart the Content.
•
Cascaded MCUs/Gateways must be registered with the same
Gatekeeper or neighboring Gatekeepers. MCUs and endpoints must
also be registered with Gatekeepers.
•
Gateway/MCU calls require definition of IVR Services. For more
information see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide,
"Defining the IVR Service for Gateway Calls” on page 17-13
In version 7.1, H.239 content protocol is H.263 when sent over ISDN or H.323
Cascading link.
Gateway to Gateway Calls via ISDN Cascading Link
When H.323 participants connects to another IP participants via a Gateway
to Gateway call over an ISDN link, the dialing string includes the following
components:
[GW A prefix in GK] - the prefix with which the RMX (gateway) is
registered to the gatekeeper.
[GW Profile ID] - The ID of the Gateway Profile defined on Gateway A
to be used for routing the call to the Gateway B.
[GW Profile ISDN/PSTN number] - the dial-in number assigned to
the Gateway Profile defined on Gateway B, including the required
country and area codes.
Information required that is not part of the dialing string:
[Destination number] - the destination number as alias, IPv4 address
or ISDN/PSTN number of participant B.
The dialing string format:
H.323 Participants connecting to another IP participant via a Gateway to
Gateway call over an ISDN link enter a dial string using the format:
<GW A Prefix in GK><Gateway Profile_ID on GW
A>*<Destination ISDN Dial-in number assigned to the
Gateway Session Profile GW B>*<Destination Number,
participant>
3-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
For example:
GW A prefix in Gatekeeper - (not used with SIP)
Gateway Profile ID in GW A
ISDN Dial-in Number assigned to the
Gateway Session Profile GW B
IP Participant Alias
22
9999
4444103
3456
H.323 participant dials: 229999*4444103 and when prompted for the
Destination number enters 3456 followed by the pound key (#) using
DTMF codes.
SIP Participants connecting to another IP participant via a Gateway to
Gateway call over an ISDN link enter a dial string using the format:
<Gateway Profile_ID on GW A>@<Central Signaling IP GW
A>*<Destination ISDN Dial-in number assigned to the
Gateway Session Profile GW B>*<Destination Number,
participant>
For example:
If Central Signaling IP address of Gateway A is 172.22.177.89, SIP
participant dials: 9999@ 172.22.177.89* 4444103 and when prompted for
the Destination number enters 3456 followed by the pound key (#) using
DTMF codes.
Gateway to MCU Calls via ISDN Cascading Link
When H.323 participants connects to a conference/Meeting Room via a
Gateway to MCU call over an ISDN link, the dialing string includes the
following components:
The dialing string includes the following components:
[GW A prefix in GK] - the prefix with which Gateway A is registered
to the gatekeeper.
[GW Profile ID on GW A] - The ID of the Gateway Profile on GW A to
be used for routing the call to the Meeting Room/conference running on
MCU B.
[Conference/Meeting Room/Entry Queue ISDN/PSTN number] the dial-in number assigned to the Entry Queue/Meeting Room/
Conference defined on MCU B, including the required country and area
codes.
3-10
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Information required that is not part of the dialing string:
[Destination Conference ID] - Only if using the Entry Queue on
MCU B for routing calls or creating new ad hoc conferences. The ID of the
destination conference on MCU B.
The dialing string format:
<GW A Prefix in GK><Gateway Profile_ID on GW A>*<ISDN
Number assigned to the Meeting Room/Conference/Entry
Queue>
For Example:
GW A prefix in Gatekeeper - (not used with SIP)
22
Gateway Profile ID in GW A
ISDN Dial-in Number assigned to the
Entry Queue/MR/conference
9999
4444100
H.323 participant dials: 229999*4444100.
SIP participant dials (if Central Signaling IP address of Gateway A is
172.22.177.89): 9999@ 172.22.177.89 IP* 4444100.
If dialing an Entry Queue, when prompted for the Destination number
enters 3456 followed by the pound key (#) using DTMF codes to create a
new conference or join an ongoing conference with that ID.
MCU to MCU Calls via ISDN Cascading Link
A dial out ISDN participant is defined (added) to conference A running
on MCU A. The participant’s dial out number is the dial-in number of the
Entry Queue or conference running on MCU B (for example 54145106).
MCU A dials out to an Entry Queue or conference B running on MCU B
using the Entry Queue number (for example 54145106) or the conference
number.
When the participant, who is a dial-in participant in conference B,
connects to the Entry Queue, the system plays to all the participants in
Conference A the IVR message requesting the participant to enter the
destination conference ID (or if connecting to a conference directly, the
participant is requested to enter the conference password).
At this point the Conference A organizer or any other participant in the
conference can enter the required information for the IVR session using
DTMF codes. For example, the meeting organizer enters the destination
conference ID - 12345.
3-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Any DTMF input from conference A is forwarded to the Entry Queue on
MCU B to complete the IVR session and enable the move of the
participant to the destination conference B.
Once the DTMF codes are entered and the IVR session is completed, the
participant is connected to the conference and the connection between the
conferences is established. The system automatically identifies the calling
participant as an MCU and the connection is identified as a cascading link
and the cascading link icon is displayed for the participant. (
).
RMX Configuration Enabling ISDN Cascading Links
To enable Gateway-to-Gateway, Gateway-to-MCU and MCU-to-MCU
calls over ISDN Cascading links, the following configurations are
required:
3-12
•
Modifying the IP Network Service to include the MCU Prefix in the
Gatekeeper (in the Gatekeepers dialog box). For more details, see
"Modifying the Default IP Network Service” on page 14-13.
•
ISDN Network Service is configured in both MCUs. For more details,
"Modifying an ISDN/PSTN Network Service” on page 14-56.
•
Configuring a Gateway Profile and assigning dial-in ISDN/PSTN
numbers. For details, see "Defining the Gateway Profile” on page 17-18.
•
Configure the Entry Queue or conference (for direct dial-in) is enabled
for ISDN connection and a dial-in number is assigned (for example
54145106).
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
Defining the dial-in ISDN participant in MCU B and Dial-out ISDN
participant in MCU A (for MCU-to-MCU cascading conferences).
A dial out ISDN participant is defined (added) to conference A. The
participant’s dial out number is the dial-in number of the Entry
Queue or conference running on MCU B (for example 54145106).
MCU A dials out to an Entry Queue or conference B running on MCU
B using the Entry Queue number (for example 54145106) or the
conference number.
Conference Profile Definition
The following table lists the recommended Meeting Room/Conference
Profile parameters setting when routing ISDN cascaded calls.
Table 3-1
Recommended Conference Profile Options Setting
Line Rate
Motion
128

128
Sharpness
Encryption
LPR

3-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 3-1
Recommended Conference Profile Options Setting (Continued)
Line Rate
Motion
128

128

256

Sharpness
Encryption
LPR




256
256

256

384





384
384

384

512





512
512

512

768





768
768

768




Since the remote participant settings are unknown, it is recommended that the
gateway or endpoint be configured to support a higher line rate (for example,
768 Kbps) to allow flexibility during endpoint capability negotiations.
3-14
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
MCU Interoperability Table
The following table lists the different MCU and Gateway configurations
that are supported or implemented when routing Cascaded ISDN calls.
Table 3-2
MCU Interoperability Table
Scenario
Version(s)
RMX
Gateway
RMX MCU
User calls via a Gateway to a
Remote Conference (user to
conference)
RMX v. 7.1
RMX
Gateway
RMX
Gateway
User calls via a Gateway to a
Remote User behind Gateway
(user to user)
RMX v. 7.1
RMX MCU
RMX MCU
A dial out participants calls to a
remote conference (conference
to conference)
RMX v. 7.1
RMX MCU
RMX
Gateway
A dial out participants calls to a
remote User behind a Gateway
(Conference to User)
RMX v. 7.1
Endpoint
RMX
Gateway
User calls directly to a remote
user behind a Gateway (User to
User)
RMX v. 7.1
RMX MCU
Codian
Gateway
Dial out participants use a fixed
rule behind the Codian Gateway.
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Codian
version
RMX
Gateway
Codian
Gateway
Dial out participants use a fixed
rule behind the Codian Gateway.
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Codian
version
Codian
Gateway
RMX MCU
User calls via a Codian Gateway
to a Remote Conference (user to
conference)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Codian
version
3-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 3-2
3-16
MCU Interoperability Table (Continued)
Scenario
Version(s)
Codian
Gateway
RMX
Gateway
User calls via a Codian Gateway
to a Remote User behind RMX
Gateway (user to user)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Codian
version
RMX MCU
Radvision
Gateway
User calls via a Radvision
Gateway to a Remote User
behind RMX Gateway (user to
user)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Radvision
version
RMX
Gateway
Radvision
Gateway
User calls via a Radvision
Gateway to a Remote User
behind RMX Gateway (user to
user)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Radvision
version
Radvision
Gateway
RMX MCU
User calls via a Radvision
Gateway to a Remote
Conference (user to conference)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Radvision
version
Radvision
Gateway
RMX
Gateway
User calls via a Radvision
Gateway to a Remote User
behind RMX Gateway (user to
user)
RMX v. 7.1
Latest
Radvision
version
Endpoint
RMX
Gateway
User calls directly to a DMA
controlled environment
RMX v. 7.1
RMX MCU
RMX
Gateway
A dial out participants calls to a
remote conference on a DMA
controlled environment
RMX v. 7.1
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
On the Codian gateway Content is not supported with line rates of 128Kbps
and below.
•
When using the following topology:
H.323 endpoint ->Codian Gateway -> ISDN Link -> RMX -> H.323 endpoint,
the Codian Gateway is unable to send DTMF and the call is disconnected
(VNGFE- 3587).
•
Sending Content from a participant over Radvision Gateway to a
conference/participant, the GWP20 patch must be installed in the RadVision
gateway:
On the Radvision gateway, open the GWP20 User Interface. Click Settings/
Advanced Commands. In the Command box enter H239OlcPatch. In the
Parameters box enter Enable and then click Send.
Suppression of DTMF Forwarding
Forwarding of the DTMF codes from one conference to another over an
ISDN cascading link is not automatically suppressed as with IP cascading
link and it can be limited to basic operations while suppressing all other
operations by a system flag:
DTMF_FORWARD_ANY_DIGIT_TIMER_SECONDS.
3-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
System Flag Settings
The DTMF_FORWARD_ANY_DIGIT_TIMER_SECONDS flag
determines the time period (in seconds) that MCU A will forward DTMF
inputs from conference A participants to MCU B.
Once the timer expires, most of the DTMF codes (excluding five
operations as for IP links) entered in conference A will not be forwarded
to conference B. This is done to prevent an operation requested by a
participant individually (for example, mute my line) to be applied to all
the participants in conference B.
Flag range (in seconds): 0 - 360000
This flag is defined on MCU A (the calling MCU).
If a flag is not listed in the System Flags list it must be added to the
system.cfg file before it can be modified. For more details on defining
system flags, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
Star Cascading Topology
In the Star topology (as well as in the Basic topology), the MCUs are
usually installed at different locations (states/countries) and participants
connect to their local MCU to facilitate the connection and save long
distance call costs. Star Topology Cascading requires that all cascaded
MCUs reside on the same network.
Although participants in Star Cascading conferences can connect to their local
conference using H.323, SIP and ISDN, the Cascading Links between
conferences must connect via H.323.
Content sharing is available to all conferences over the H.323 Cascading
Link.
In this topology, the MCUs are networked together using two modes:
•
Master-Slave Cascading
•
Cascading via Entry Queue
Master-Slave Cascading
It is similar to MIH (Multi Hierarchy) cascading, with only two levels: one
Master MCU on level 1 and several Slave MCUs on level 2.
3-18
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
The cascading hierarchy topology can extend to four levels (Figure 3-3)
and should be deployed according to the following guidelines:
•
If an RMX is deployed on level 1:
•
— RMX systems can be used on level 2
— MGC with version 9.0.4 can be used on level 2 if RMX version
7.0.2 and higher is deployed in level 1
If an MGC is deployed on level 1:
— MGC or RMX can be used on level 2.
Figure 3-1 Master-Slave Star Cascading Topology
•
When creating a cascading link between two RMXs:
•
— The RMXs operate in CP (Continuous Presence) mode.
When creating a cascading link between MGCs and RMXs:
— The MGCs can only operate in VSW mode.
3-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The following table summarizes Video Session Modes line rate options that
need to be selected for each conference in the cascading hierarchy
according to the cascading topology:
Table 4
Topology
Level 1
MIH Cascading – Video Session Mode and Line Rate
MCU Type
Video Session
Mode
Line Rate
Endpoint
CP - HD
1.5Mb/s, 1Mb/s,
2Mb/s
HDX
CP - CIF
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
VSX
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
HDX,
VSX
1.5Mb/s
HDX
RMX
Level 2
RMX
Level 1
RMX
Level 2
RMX
Level 1
MGC
CP - CIF 263
Level 2
RMX
CP - CIF 264
Level 1
MGC
VSW - HD
Level 2
RMX
VSW HD
To establish the links between two RMXs requires the following
procedures be performed:
3-20
•
Establish the Master-Slave relationships between the cascaded
conferences by defining the dialing direction.
•
Create the Master and Slave conferences, defining the appropriate
line rate.
•
Create a cascade-enabled Dial-out Participant link in the Master
conference
•
Create a cascade-enabled Dial-in Participant link in the Slave
conference.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Creating a Cascade Enabled Dial-out/Dial-in Participant Link
The connection between two cascaded conferences is established by a
cascade enabled dial-out and dial-in participants, acting as a cascades
link.
The dialing direction determines whether the dial-out participant is
defined in the conference running on the Master MCU or the Slave MCU.
For example, if the dialing direction is from the Master conference on
level 1 to the Slave conference on level 2, the dial-out participant is
defined in the Master conference on level 1 and a dial-in participant is
defined in the Slave conference running on the MCU on level 2.
If the cascade-enabled dial-out participant always connects to the same
destination conference on the other (second) MCU, the participant
properties can be saved in the Address Book of the MCU for future
repeated use of the cascaded link.
To define the dial-out cascade participant link:
1 In the Conferences pane, select the conference.
2
In the Participants pane, click New Participant (
).
The New Participant - General dialog box is displayed.
3-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 5 New Participant – Dial-out Cascade Link
Field
Description
Display Name
Enter the participant name
Dialing Direction
Select Dial-out.
Type
Select H.323.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of the
MCU running the other (second) conference, where
the cascade enabled Entry Queue is defined.
Alias Name
If you are using the target MCU IP address, enter the
Conference ID of the target conference. For
example: 24006
If a gatekeeper is used, instead of the IP address,
you can enter the prefix of the target MCU as
registered with the gatekeeper, as part of the dialing
string and the conference ID in the format:
<Target MCU Prefix><Conference_ID>
For example: 92524006
If the conference has a password and you want to
include the password in the dial string, append the
password to in the dial string after the Conference
ID.
For example: 92524006##1234
If the conference has a password and you do not
want to include the password in the dial string, set
the ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_
WITHOUT_PASSWORD flag to YES.
For more information see the RMX1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, “Modifying System Flags” on
page 11-5.
Alias Type
3-22
Select E.164 (digits 0-9, *, #).
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
4
Click the Advanced tab.
5
In the Cascade field, select:
6
— Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference running on a
Slave MCU.
— Master, if the participant is defined in a conference running on
the Master MCU.
Click OK.
3-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To define a Dial-in Participant as the cascade link:
This participant is added to the ongoing conference on the Slave MCU.
1
In the Participants list, click the New Participant button(
).
The New Participant - General dialog box opens.
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 3-1 New Participant – Dial-out Cascade Link
3-24
Field
Description
Display Name
Enter the participant name
Dialing Direction
Select Dial-in.
Type
Select H.323.
IP Address
If a gatekeeper is used: This field is left empty.
If a gatekeeper is not used: Enter the IP address of
the Signaling Host of the MCU running the other
conference.
Alias Name
If a gatekeeper is used: Enter the Alias of the MCU
running the other (second) conference.
If a gatekeeper is not used: This field is left empty.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Table 3-1 New Participant – Dial-out Cascade Link (Continued)
3
Field
Description
Alias Type
Select E.164 (digits 0-9, *, #).
Click the Advanced tab.
The Advanced tab opens.
4
In the Cascaded Link field, select:
5
— Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference running on a
Slave MCU.
— Master, if the participant is defined in a conference running on
the Master MCU.
Click the OK button.
3-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Cascading via Entry Queue
The link between the two conferences is created when a participant that is
defined as a dial-out cascaded link in one conference (Conference A)
connects to the second conference (Conference B) via a special cascaded
Entry Queue (EQ). When MCU A dials out to the cascaded link to connect
it to conference A, it actually dials out to the cascaded Entry Queue
defined on MCU B.
Conference
A
EQ
Cascaded
Link
Conference
B
Cascaded
Link
MCU A
MCU B
Figure 3-2 Cascaded Conferences - Star Topology
Though the process of cascading conferences mentioned in this section
refers to conferences running on two different RMX units, it is possible to
cascade conferences running between RMX units and other MCUs.
The following features are not supported by the cascaded link and
therefore are not supported in the combined conference:
3-26
•
DTMF codes are enabled in cascaded conference, but only in their
local conference. The operations executed via DTMF codes are not
forwarded between linked conferences.
•
FECC (Far End Camera Control will only apply to conferences
running in their local MCU).
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Enabling Cascading
Cascading two conferences requires that the following procedures are
implemented:
•
Creating the cascade-enabled Entry Queue
A cascade-enabled Entry Queue must be created in the MCU hosting
the destination conference (Conference B). The cascade-enabled Entry
Queue is used to establish the dial-in link between the destination
conference and the linked conference and bypassing standard Entry
Queue, IVR prompt and video slide display.
•
Creating a cascade-enabled Dial-out link
The creation of a cascade-enabled dial-out link (participant) in the
linked conference (Conference A). This dial-out participant functions
as the link between the two conferences.
•
(Optional) Enabling the cascaded linked participant to connect to the
linked conference (Conference A) without entering the conference
password. This can be done by modifying the default settings of the
relevant system flag.
Creating the Cascade-enabled Entry Queue
The cascade-enabled Entry Queue maintains the correct behavior of the
cascaded link when it dials into it.
The cascade-enabled Entry Queue should be used only to connect cascaded
links and should not be used to connect standard participants to conferences.
When cascading High Definition (HD) conferences, the cascade-enabled
Entry Queue must have the same settings as both cascaded conferences
and the participants in both conferences must use the same line rate and
HD capabilities as set for the conferences and Entry Queue.
To define a Cascade-Enabled Entry Queue:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click the Entry Queues button.
The Entry Queues list pane is displayed.
2
Click the New Entry Queue
button.
The New Entry Queue dialog box is displayed.
3-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the standard Entry Queue parameters (as described in
Chapter 3).
4
In the Cascade field, select Master or Slave depending on the Master/
Slave relationship.
— Set this field to Master if the Entry Queue is defined on the MCU
that is at the center of the topology and other conferences dial
into it (acting as the Master).
— Set this field to Slave if the Entry Queue is defined on the MCU
acting as a Slave, that is, to which the link from the Master MCU
(MCU at the center of the topology) is dialing.
If you are defining an HD cascaded Entry Queue, it is recommended
to select the same Profile that is selected for both conferences.
5
Click OK.
The new Entry Queue enabling cascading is created.
3-28
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Creating the Dial-out Cascaded Link
The dial-out link (participant) is created or added in the linked conference
(Conference A). The dial-out string defined for the participant is the
dialing string required to connect to the destination conference
(Conference B) Entry Queue defined on the MCU hosting the destination
cascaded conference. The dial-out participant can be defined in the
Address Book and added to the conference whenever using the same
cascade-enabled Entry Queue and a destination conference (with the
same ID and Password).
To define the Dial-out Cascaded Link:
1 Display the list of participants in the linked conference
(Conference A).
2
In the Participant List pane, click the New Participant
button.
The New Participant - General dialog box is displayed.
3
In the Name field, enter a participant name.
4
In the Dialing Direction field, select Dial-out.
5
In the Type list field, verify that H.323 is selected.
3-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
There are two methods to define the dialing string:
A
Using the MCU’s IP Address and the Alias string.
B
Using only the Alias string (requires a gatekeeper).
Method A (If no gatekeeper is used):
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of
the MCU hosting the destination conference (in the example,
MCU B).
In the Alias Name/Type field, enter the ID of the cascade-enabled Entry
Queue (EQ), the Conference ID and Password of the destination
conference (MCU B) as follows:
EQ ID#Destination Conference ID#Password (Password is optional).
F or E xa m p l e : 78 48 5 #2 40 0 6# 1 23 4
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
Destination
Conference ID
Password (optional)
Method B (Using a gatekeeper):
In the Alias Name field, enter the Prefix of MCU B, EQ ID, Destination
Conference ID, and Password, as follows:
MCU Prefix EQ ID#Conference ID#Password (Password is optional)
F o r E xa m p l e : 9 2 57 84 8 5# 24 0 06 # 12 34
MCU Prefix as
registered in the
gatekeeper
7
3-30
Click the Advanced tab.
Password (optional)
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
Conference ID
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
8
In the Cascade field, select:
— Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference running on a
Slave MCU and will connect to the Master MCU (in the center of
the topology).
— Master, if the participant is defined in a conference running on
the Master MCU (in the center of the topology) dialing from the
Master MCU to the Slave MCU.
9
Click OK.
The cascade-enabled dial-out link is created and the system
automatically dials out to connect the participant to the linked
conference, as well as the destination conference.
Enabling Cascaded Conferences without Password
If a password is assigned to the linked conference, cascaded links will be
prompted for a password when connecting to it (Conference A).
Administrators have the option of altering the MCU settings to enable
cascaded links to connect without a password.
3-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To enable cascaded links to connect without a password:
1 In the RMX web client connected to MCU A (where the linked
conference is running), click Setup>System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
Set the
ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASSWORD flag to
YES.
3
Click OK.
For more information, see "System Configuration” on page 19-5.
>> Reset the MCU for flag changes to take effect.
Monitoring Star Cascaded Conferences
To monitor both conferences at the same time, two instances of the RMX
Web Clients must be opened (one for each MCU) by entering the IP
Address of each MCU. If both conferences are running on the same MCU,
only one RMX Web Client window is required.
When conferences are cascaded, the Participant list pane of each of the two
conferences will display a linked icon ( ); a dial-in linked icon in the
destination conference (Conference B) and a dial-out linked icon in the
linked conference (Conference A).
3-32
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
The Conferences list panes in each of the two conferences will display a
cascaded conference icon ( ) indicating that a conference running on the
MCU is presently cascading with another conference running on the same
or another MCU. The cascaded conference icon will be displayed for a
short period of time and then disappear.
Conference A (Linked Conference)
Dial-out Linked Participant
Conference B (Destination Conference)
EQ created Dial-in Linked Participant
Cascaded conference icon
Creating the Dial-out Link from a Conference Running on the MGC to
the Conference Running on the RMX
In the same way that the dial-out cascaded link is created in the RMX, you
can create a dial-out participant in the MGC.
In the MGC Manager application, define a new participant as follows:
1
In the Participant Properties dialog box, enter a Participant Name,
select Dial-out and H.323.
2
Define the dialing string as described in step 6 on page 3-30 (both
methods are applicable).
3-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
In the Advanced tab’s Node Type field, select MCU.
1
+
2
3
4
Click OK.
Cascading Conferences - H.239-enabled MIH
Topology
H.239 Multi-Hierarchy (MIH) cascading is available to RMX users
enabling them to run very large conferences on different MCUs in
multiple levels of Master-Slave relationships using an H.323 connection.
Multi-Hierarchy (MIH) Cascading is implemented where the cascaded
MCUs reside on different networks, whereas Star Topology Cascading
requires that all cascaded MCUs reside on the same network.
MIH Cascading allows:
3-34
•
Ability to open and use a content channel (H.239) during
conferencing.
•
Full management of extremely large, distributed conferences.
•
Connecting conferences on different MCUs at different sites.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
Utilizing the connection abilities of different MCUs, for example,
different communication protocols, such as, serial connections, ISDN,
etc.
•
Significant call cost savings to be realized by having participants call
local MCUs which in turn call remote MCUs, long distance.
Although participants in MIH Cascading conferences can connect using H.323,
SIP and ISDN, the MIH Cascading Links must connect via H.323.
MIH Cascading Levels
The cascading hierarchy topology can extend to four levels (Figure 3-3)
and should be deployed according to the following guidelines:
•
If an RMX is deployed on level 1:
•
— Any RMX can be used on level 2, MGC version 9.0.4 can be used
on level 2 and DST MCS 4000 and other MCUs can be deployed
on levels 3 and 4.
If an MGC is deployed on level 1:
•
Level 1
RMX
— MGC or RMX can be used on level 2, and DST MCS 4000 and
other MCUs can be deployed on levels 3 and 4.
DST MCS 4000 MCUs connect as endpoints to the RMXs or MGCs on
higher levels.
MGC
MGC
RMX
Level 2
or
or
Level 3
Level 4
MCU
For more information about this
configuration, see the relevant MGC
documentation.
DST MCS 4000
Figure 3-3 MIH Cascade Levels
3-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
MIH Cascading Guidelines
Master and Slave Conferences
• In MIH Cascading conferences, although there are multiple levels of
Master and Slave relationships between conferences, the conference
that runs on the MCU on level 1 of the hierarchy must be the Master
for the entire cascading session. When an MGC is part of the
cascading topology, it must be set as Level 1 MCU, unless MGC
Version 9.0.4 is installed.
•
Conferences running on MCUs on levels 2 and 3 and can be both
Masters and Slaves to conferences running on MCUs on levels above
and below them.
•
All conferences running on MCUs on level 4 are Slave conferences.
•
When the DST MCS 4000 is on level 3 and acting as slave to level 2,
the RMX on level 2 must dial out to it in order for the DST MCS 4000
to be identified as slave. The link between the two MCU (dial out
participant) is defined as a standard participant and not as a
cascading link.
Conference A
Master of Conferences B and C
Cascade Links
Conference B
Slave Conference of A
Master of Conferences D and E
Conference C
Slave Conference of A
Master of Conferences
F and G
Participant
Connections
Conferences D & E
Slaves of Conference B
Conferences F & G
Slaves of Conference C
Figure 3-4 MIH Cascading – Master-Slave Relationship
Video Session Mode, Line Rate and Video Settings
The types of MCUs, their position in the cascade topology and the
endpoint capabilities (HD/CIF and H.263/H.264) determine the Video
Session Mode of the MIH Cascading conference.
•
When creating a cascading link between two RMXs:
— The RMXs operate in CP (Continuous Presence) mode.
3-36
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
•
When creating a cascading link between MGCs and RMXs:
•
— If there are no MGCs on level 2, the MGCs can operate in either
in CP or VSW (Video Switching) mode.
— If there are MGCs on level 2, the MGCs can only operate in VSW
mode.
When creating a cascading link between two MGCs:
— The MGCs must be configured to operate in VSW mode.
For more details about the MGC to MGC connection, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Ad Hoc Auto Cascading and
Cascading Links”.
•
To enable the connection of the links between cascaded conferences,
they must run at the same line rate.
The following table summarizes Video Session Modes line rate options that
need to be selected for each conference in the cascading hierarchy
according to the cascading topology:
Table 3-2
Topology
Level 1
MIH Cascading – Video Session Mode and Line Rate
MCU Type
Video Session
Mode
Line Rate
Endpoint
CP - HD
1.5Mb/s, 1Mb/s,
2Mb/s
HDX
CP - CIF
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
VSX
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
HDX,
VSX
1.5Mb/s
HDX
CP/VSW -HD
1.5Mb/s, 1Mb/s,
2Mb/s
HDX
CP - CIF
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
HDX,
VSX
RMX
Level 2
RMX
Level 1
RMX
Level 2
RMX
Level 1
MGC
CP - CIF 263
Level 2
RMX
CP - CIF 264
Level 1
MGC
VSW - HD
Level 2
RMX
VSW HD
Level 2
RMX
Level 3
MCS 4000
Level 2
RMX
Level 3
MCS 4000
3-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
H.239 Content Sharing
Content sharing is controlled by means of a token. The Content Token is
allocated to participants by the highest level master conference.
•
The Content Token must be released by the participant that is
currently holding it before it can be re-allocated.
•
After release, the Content Token is allocated to the participant that
most recently requested it.
•
The Content Token can be withdrawn from a conference participant by
using the RMX web client only if the highest level master conference
is running on the RMX unit.
•
The following table lists the bit rate allocated to the Content channel
from the video channel in each of the three Content modes:
Table 3-3
Conf Kbps
/ Mode
Bit Rate Allocation to Content Channel
64/
96
128
256
384
512
768
1024
1472
1920
Graphics
0
64
64
128
128
256
256
256
256
Hi-res
Graphics
0
64
128
192
256
384
384
512
512
Live Video
0
64
128
256
384
512
768
768
768
Setting up MIH Cascading Conferences
The cascading topology, the master/slave relationship and the dialing
direction determines the set-up procedure:
•
RMX to RMX
•
MGC to RMX
•
MGC to MGC
For more details about the MGC to MGC connection, see the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Ad Hoc Auto Cascading and
Cascading Links”.
3-38
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
RMX to RMX Cascading
Level 1 (Master)
Level 2 (Slave to Level 1)
Figure 3-5 Dialing Direction
To establish the links between two RMXs requires the following
procedures be performed:
•
Establish the Master-Slave relationships between the cascaded
conferences by defining the dialing direction.
•
Create the Master and Slave conferences, defining the appropriate
line rate and whether it is a CP conference or HD Video Switching
conference.
•
Create a cascade-enabled Entry Queue for dial-in connections (you
create it once for all cascading links using the same line rate).
•
Create a cascade-enabled Dial-out Participant link in the Master or the
Slave conference (depending on the dialing direction).
Establish the Master-Slave relationships and the dialing direction
MIH Cascading conferences are linked in a master-slave relationship with
each other according to the dialing direction. It determines the definition
of the cascaded links and the Entry Queues. Dialing directions can be topdown or bottom-up or up from level 4 to level 3 and from level 3 to level 2
and down from level 1 to level 2.
It is recommended to select one dialing direction (usually bottom up) for the
entire hierarchy to simplify the setup procedure.
3-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 3-4
Dialing
Direction
RMX
Level 1
to
RMX
Level 2
Set up Procedures according to the Dialing Direction
RMX Level 1
RMX Level 2
Define the cascade-enabled
Entry Queue, defining it as
Slave.
Define the conference line
rate and if required to HD
Video Switching to be the
same as the one set on the
RMX Level 2.
Define the conference line
rate and if required to HD
Video Switching to be the
same as the one set on the
RMX Level 1.
Define the dial-out participant
(Cascaded Link) to the
conference running on the
RMX on Level 2, setting it as
Master.
RMX
Level 2
to
RMX
Level 1
Define the cascade-enabled
Entry Queue, setting it as
Master.
Define the conference line
rate and Video Session
Mode to be the same as the
one set on RMX Level 2.
Define the conference line
rate and Video Session Mode
to be the same as the one set
on RMX Level 1.
Define the dial-out participant
(Cascaded Link) to the
conference running on the
RMX on Level 2, setting it as
Slave.
3-40
•
When cascading between a DST MCS 4000 on level 3 and the RMX on level
2, the RMX must dial out to the MCS 4000 to establish the Master-Slave
relationship (the RMX is the Master).
•
If the RMX on level 2 is being dialed from both Level 1 and Level 3 and it is
acting as both Slave to level 1 and Master to Level 3, two Cascade-enabled
Entry Queues must be defined: one defined as Slave (for dial in from
conferences running on MCU Level 1) and the other defined as Master (for
dial in from conferences running on MCU Level 3).
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Creating a Cascade Enabled Entry Queue
Cascade-enabled Entry Queues do not play IVR prompts and video slide
displays associated with standard Entry Queues.
Depending on the dialing direction, a cascade-enabled Entry Queue is
defined either on the MCU on level 1 or on level 2. (See “Dialing
Direction”).
The definition of the Entry Queue as Master or Slave is done accordingly.
To define a Cascade-Enabled Entry Queue:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click Entry Queues.
The Entry Queues list pane is displayed.
2
Click the New Entry Queue (
) button.
3-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Entry Queue dialog box is displayed.
3
Define the Entry Queue parameters as for a standard Entry Queue.
For more information about Entry Queue parameters, see the RMX
1500/2000 Administrator’s Guide, “Entry Queues” on page 5-1.
4
In the Cascade field, select Master or Slave depending on the Master/
Slave relationship.
— Set this field to Master if:
•
The Entry Queue is defined on the MCU on level 1 and the
dialing is done from level 2 to level 1.
• The Entry Queue is defined on the MCU on level 2 and the
dialing is done from level 3 to level 2.
— Set this field to Slave if the Entry Queue is defined on the MCU
on level 2 (Slave) and the dialing is done from MCU level 1 to
level 2.
5
Click OK.
Cascade-enabled Entry Queues should not be used to connect standard participants
to conferences.
3-42
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Creating the Cascaded Conferences
The table below lists the line rates that should be used when defining the
conference Profiles for cascaded conferences on the RMX on both Level 1
and Level 2. The video settings will be automatically selected by the
system, however, if HD Video Switching is used, it must be selected in the
conference Profiles.
Table 3-5
Recommended Conference Line Rates for Cascaded Conferences
Topology
Video Session Mode
Conference Line Rate
RMX

RMX
CP-HD
1.5Mb/s, 1Mb/s, 2Mb/s
CP-CIF
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
Creating a Cascade Enabled Dial-out Participant Link
The connection between two cascaded conferences is established by a
cascade enabled dial-out participant, acting as a cascades link.
The dialing direction determines whether the dial-out participant is
defined in the conference running on the Master MCU or the Slave MCU.
For example, if the dialing direction is from level 1 to level 2, and the
Master conference is on level 1, the dial-out participant is defined in the
conference running on the MCU on level 1 (connecting to an Entry Queue
defined as Slave running on the MCU on level 2.
If the cascade-enabled dial-out participant always connects to the same
destination conference via the same cascade-enabled Entry Queue on the
other (second) MCU, the participant properties can be saved in the
Address Book of the MCU for future repeated use of the cascaded link.
To define the dial-out cascade participant link:
1 In the Conferences pane, select the conference.
2
In the Participants pane, click New Participant (
).
3-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Participant - General dialog box is displayed.
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 3-6 New Participant – Dial-out Cascade Link
3-44
Field
Description
Display Name
Enter the participant name
Dialing Direction
Select Dial-out.
Type
Select H.323.
IP Address
Enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of the
MCU running the other (second) conference, where
the cascade enabled Entry Queue is defined.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Table 3-6 New Participant – Dial-out Cascade Link (Continued)
Field
Description
Alias Name
If you are using the target MCU IP address, enter the
dial string made up of the ID of the cascade enabled
Entry Queue and the Conference ID as follows:
<Cascade_Enabled_Entry_Queue_ID> ##
<Conference_ID>
For example: 78485##24006
If a gatekeeper is used, you can enter the prefix of
the target MCU, registered with the gatekeeper,
instead of the IP address, as part of the dialing string.
<Gatekeeper_Prefix><Cascade_Enable_
Entry_ Queue_ID>##<Conference_ID>
For example: 92578485##24006
If the conference has a password and you want to
include the password in the dial string, append the
password to in the dial string after the Conference
ID.
For example: 78485##24006##1234
If the conference has a password and you do not
want to include the password in the dial string, set
the
ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_
PASSWORD
flag to YES.
For more information see the RMX1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, “Modifying System Flags” on
page 11-5.
Alias Type
Select E.164 (digits 0-9, *, #).
3-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Click the Advanced tab.
5
In the Cascade field, select:
6
— Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference running on a
Slave MCU.
— Master, if the participant is defined in a conference running on
the Master MCU.
Click OK.
MGC to RMX Cascading
Level 1 (Master)
3-46
Level 2 (Slave to Level 1)
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
MGC running versions other than 9.0.4 is always on level 1 and must be
set as the Master MCU. If the cascading topology includes additional
MGCs as well as RMXs it is recommended to define Video Switching
conferences for all the cascading conferences in the topology.
If MGC is running version 9.0.4, and RMX is running version 7.0.2 and
higher, the MGC can be set as Master on level 1 and MGC as Slave on
level 2
Depending on the dialing direction, the following procedures must be
performed:
Table 3-7
Dialing
Direction
MGC to
RMX
Set up Procedures according to the Dialing Direction
MGC Level 1
Set the appropriate flags
(done once only).
RMX 1500/2000/4000
Level 2
Set the appropriate flags (done
once only).
Define the cascade-enabled
Entry Queue, setting it as Slave.
Define the conference
setting and its line rate to be
the same as the one set on
the RMX.
Define the conference setting
and its line rate to be the same
as the one set on the MGC.
Define the dial-out
participant (Cascaded Link)
to the conference running
on the RMX.
3-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 3-7
Dialing
Direction
RMX to
MGC
Set up Procedures according to the Dialing Direction
MGC Level 1
Set the appropriate flags
(done once only)
RMX 1500/2000/4000
Level 2
Set the appropriate flags (done
once only)
Define the cascade-enabled
Entry Queue.
Define the conference
setting and its line rate to be
the same as the one set on
the RMX.
Define the conference setting
and its line rate to be the same
as the one set on the MGC.
Define the dial-out participant
(Cascaded Link) to the
conference running on the
MGC, setting the participant
Cascade parameter to Slave.
Setting the flags in the MGC
Flag setting is required to ensure the correct MCU behavior for cascading
conferences. It is performed once per MCU.
1
In the MGC Manager, right-click the MCU icon and then click MCU
Utils>Edit “system.cfg”.
2
In the H264 Section, ensure that the following flags are set to:
— ENABLE_HD_SD_IN_FIXED_MODE=YES
Setting this flag to YES enables H.264 Standard Definition (SD),
High Definition (HD) and VSX 8000 (Version 8.0) support in
Video Switching conferences.
— H264_VSW_AUTO=NO
Setting this flag to NO disables the highest common mechanism
in H.264 and enables the selection of H.264 Video Protocol in
fixed mode in Dual Stream Video Switching cascading
conferences
3-48
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
— ENABLE_H239_ANNEX_T=YES
This flag should be set to the same value (YES/NO) as the
settings of the RMX flag H263_ANNEX_T
To use MIH Cascade in the MGC, the Conference Numeric ID routing mode must
be used. It is determined when the system.cfg flag in the GREET AND GUIDE/IVR
section is set to QUICK_LOGIN_VIA_ENTRY_QUEUE=NO.
3
Click OK.
4
If you changed the flags, reset the MCU.
Defining the Cascading Entry Queue in the MGC
The Entry Queue definition on the MGC is required if the dialing is done
from the RMX to the MGC.
1
In the MGC Manager, expand the MCU tree.
2
Right-click the Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and SIP Factories icon and
click New Entry Queue.
3
In the New Entry Queue dialog box, set the Entry Queue parameters
and select the Cascade check box.
For more details on the definition of new Entry Queues refer to the
MGC Manager User’s Guide, Volume II, Chapter 1, “Ad Hoc Auto
Cascading and Cascading Links”.
3-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Click OK.
Creating the Dial-out Link between the Conference Running on the
MGC and the Conference Running on the RMX
If the dialing is done from the MGC to the RMX, you need to define the
cascaded link (dial-out participant) in the conference running on the
MGC.
The dial-out string defined for the participant is the dialing string
required to connect to the destination conference via the Cascade-enabled
Entry Queue defined on the RMX hosting the destination cascaded
conference. The dial-out participant can be defined on the MGC as
template or assigned to the Meeting Room.
In the MGC Manager application, define a new participant as follows:
1
In the Participant Properties - Identification dialog box, enter a
Participant Name
2
In the Connection Type field, select Dial-out.
3
In the Interface Type list field, select H.323.
4
There are two methods to define the dialing string to the other
conference:
a
Using the MCU’s IP Address and the Alias string.
b
Using only the Alias string (requires a gatekeeper).
Method A (If no gatekeeper is used):
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the Signaling Host of
the RMX hosting the destination conference.
In the Alias Name/Type field, enter the ID of the cascade-enabled Entry
Queue (EQ), the Conference ID and Password of the destination
conference as follows:
EQ ID##Destination Conference ID##Password (Password is
optional).
For Example:
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
1002##12001##1234
Destination
Conference ID
Password (optional)
Method B (Using a gatekeeper):
In the Alias Name field, enter the Prefix of MCU B, EQ ID, Destination
Conference ID, and Password, as follows:
3-50
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
MCU Prefix EQ ID##Conference ID##Password (Password is
optional)
For Example:
MCU Prefix as
registered in the
gatekeeper
9251002##12001##1234
Password (optional)
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
Conference ID
5
Click the Advanced tab and in the Node Type field, select Terminal.
6
Click OK.
Setting the Flags on the RMX
When running conferences in mixed environment (RMX and MGC) there
may be small differences between the line rates each MCU is sending. In
the RMX 2000/4000, several flags must be set to ensure that these
differences will not cause the cascaded link to connect as Secondary and
that Content flows correctly between the cascaded conferences. This
procedure is performed once per RMX.
1
In the RMX Web Client menu, click Setup>System Configuration.
3-51
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the System Flags dialog box, add the following new flags and
values:
— MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT=YES
Setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video
Switching conferences run on the RMX 2000/4000 from
1920Kbps to 17897Kbps to match the actual rate of the HD Video
Switching conference running on the MGC. In such case, the
conference can include IP and ISDN participants.
— IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT=NO
Setting this flag to YES will adjust the line rate of HD Video
Switching conferences run on the RMX 2000/4000 from
1920Kbps to 18432Kbps to match the actual rate of the IP Only
HD Video Switching conference running on the MGC. In such
case, the conference can include IP Only participants.
If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to YES, the IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
flag must be set to NO.
If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT is set to NO, the IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
flag must be set to YES.
— H263_ANNEX_T=YES (default)
This flag enables/disables the use of Annex T with H263. Set it to
NO if the endpoints connecting to the conference do not support
this mode. In such a case, you must also change the MGC flag
ENABLE_H239_ANNEX_T setting to NO.
— FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT_ON_CASCADED_LINK
_CONNECTION=YES (default).
Set this flag to NO If the MGC is functioning as a Gateway and
participant layouts on the other network are not to be forced to
1X1.
3
3-52
If the MGC is dialing the RMX and the cascaded link connects to the
conference via the Cascade-enabled Entry Queue without being
prompted for the conference password, set the flag to YES as follows:
4
— ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASSWO
RD=YES
Click OK.
5
Reset the MCU to apply the changes.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
Defining the Cascade Enabled Entry Queue on the RMX
If the dialing is done from the conference running on the MGC that is the
Master MCU, a Cascade-enabled Entry Queue must be defined on the
RMX setting it as Slave.
For more details, see RMX to RMX Cascading.
Defining the Cascading Conferences
The table below lists the line rates and the video settings that should be
used when defining the conferences on the MGC. The same line rates
should be selected when defining the Conference Profiles on the RMX, as
well as whether the conference is HD Video Switching. However, the
video settings will be automatically selected by the system.
Table 3-8
Recommended Conference Line Rates for Cascaded Conferences
Topology
MGC

RMX
Video Session Mode
Conference Line
Rate
MGC - CIF 263
RMX - CIF 264 CP
768Kb/s, 2Mb/s
MGC - HD VSW
RMX - HD VSW
1.5Mb/s
3-53
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
In addition, the conference running on the MGC should be set as Meet Me
Per Conference and select the H.239 option in the Dual Stream Mode field.
For more details on conference definition on the MGC, refer to the MGC
Manager User’s Guide, Volume I, Chapter 5.
Defining the Dial-out Participant on the RMX
If the dialing is done from a conference running on the RMX to the
conference running on the MGC, the dial-out participant is defined in the
conference running on the RMX, setting the Cascade field to Slave. This
participant dials the Cascade-enabled Entry Queue defined on the MGC.
1
Display the list of participants in the linked conference (Slave
conference).
2
In the Participant List pane, click the New Participant (
The New Participant - General dialog box is displayed.
3-54
3
In the Name field, enter a participant name.
4
In the Dialing Direction field, select Dial-out.
5
In the Type list field, verify that H.323 is selected.
) button.
Chapter 3-Cascading Conferences
6
There are two methods to define the dialing string:
A
Using the MCU’s IP Address and the Alias string.
B
Using only the Alias string (requires a gatekeeper).
Method A (If no gatekeeper is used):
In the IP Address field, enter the IP address of the MGC hosting the
destination conference (Master conference).
In the Alias Name/Type field, enter the ID of the cascade-enabled Entry
Queue (EQ), the Conference ID and Password of the destination
conference (Master Conference) as follows:
EQ ID##Destination Conference ID##Password (Password
is optional).
F or E xa m p l e : 10 05 # #2 00 0 6# # 12 34
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
Destination
Conference ID
Password (optional)
Method B (Using a gatekeeper):
In the Alias Name field, enter the MGC Prefix as registered in the
gatekeeper, EQ ID, Destination Conference ID, and Password, as
follows:
MGC Prefix EQ ID##Conference ID##Password (Password is
optional)
F o r E x a m p l e : 92 5 10 05 # #2 0 00 6# # 12 34
MCU Prefix as
registered in the
gatekeeper
Password (optional)
Cascade-enabled
EQ ID
Conference ID
3-55
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3-56
7
Click the Advanced tab and in the Cascade field, select the Slave
option.
8
Click OK.
The cascade-enabled dial-out link is created and the system
automatically dials out to connect the participant to the local
conference, as well as the destination conference on the MGC.
4
Meeting Rooms
A Meeting Room is a conference saved on the MCU in passive mode,
without using any of the system resources. A Meeting Room is
automatically activated when the first participant dials into it.
ISDN/PSTN participants can dial-in directly to a Meeting Room without
connection through an Entry Queue. Up to two numbers can be defined
per conference provided that they are from the same ISDN/PSTN
Network Service. When a dial-in number is allocated to a Meeting Room,
the number cannot be deleted nor can the ISDN/PSTN Network Service be
removed. The dial-in number must be communicated to the ISDN or
PSTN dial-in participants.
Dial-out participants can be connected to the conference automatically,
or manually. In the automatic mode the system calls all the participants
one after the other. In the manual mode, the RMX user or meeting
organizer instructs the conferencing system to call the participant. Dialout participants must be defined (mainly their name and telephone
number) and added to the conference. This mode can only be selected at
the conference/Meeting Room definition stage and cannot be changed
once the conference is ongoing.
Meeting Rooms can be activated as many times as required. Once
activated, a Meeting Room functions as any ongoing conference.
A Meeting Room can be designated as a Permanent Conference. For
more information see "Lecture Mode” on page 2-94.
All Meeting Rooms are based on a Profile.
The maximum of number of Meeting Rooms that can be defined is:
•
RMX 1500 — 1000
•
RMX 2000 — 1000
•
RMX 4000 — 2000
4-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The system is shipped with four default Meeting Rooms as shown in
Table 4-1.
Table 4-1
Default Meeting Rooms List
Meeting Room Name
ID
Default Line Rate
Maple_Room
1001
384 Kbps
Oak_Room
1002
384 Kbps
Juniper_Room
1003
384 Kbps
Fig_Room
1004
384 Kbps
Meeting Rooms List
Meeting Rooms are listed in the Meeting Room list pane.
To list Meeting Rooms:
>> In the RMX Management pane, in the Frequently Used list, click the
Meeting Rooms button
4-2
.
Chapter 4-Meeting Rooms
The Meeting Rooms List is displayed.
Meeting Room Toolbar
Meeting Room List
Access to Meeting Rooms
An active Meeting Room becomes an ongoing conference and is
monitored in the same way as any other conference.
The Meeting Room List columns include:
Table 4-2
Meeting Rooms List Columns
Field
Display Name
Description
Displays the name and the icon of the Meeting Room in the
RMX Web Client.
Display Name
(cont.)
(green)
An active video Meeting Room that was
activated when the first participant connected to
it.
A passive video Meeting Room that is waiting to
be activated.
(gray)
4-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 4-2
Meeting Rooms List Columns (Continued)
Field
Routing Name
Description
The ASCII name that registers conferences, Meeting Rooms,
Entry Queues and SIP Factories in the various gatekeepers
and SIP Servers. In addition, the Routing Name is also:
• The name that endpoints use to connect to conferences.
•
4-4
The name used by all conferencing devices to connect to
conferences that must be registered with the gatekeeper
and SIP Servers.
ID
Displays the Meeting Room ID. This number must be
communicated to H.323 conference participants to enable
them to dial in.
Duration
Displays the duration of the Meeting Room in hours using the
format HH:MM (default 01:00).
Conference
Password
The password to be used by participants
to access the Meeting Room. If blank,
no password is assigned to the
conference. This password is valid only
in conferences that are configured to
prompt for a conference password in the
IVR Service.
Chairperson
Password
Displays the password to be used by the
users to identify themselves as Chairpersons. They are granted additional
privileges. If left blank, no chairperson
password is assigned to the conference.
This password is valid only in conferences that are configured to prompt for
a chairperson password.
Profile
Displays the name of the Profile assigned to the Meeting
Room. For more information, see "Conference Profiles” on
page 1-1.
The RMX can be
configured to
automatically
generate
conference and
chairperson
passwords when
these fields are
left blank.
For more
information, see
the "Automatic
Password
Generation
Flags” on
page 19-47.
Chapter 4-Meeting Rooms
Table 4-2
Meeting Rooms List Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
SIP
Registration
The status of registration with the SIP server:
• Not configured - Registration with the SIP Server was
not enabled in the Conference Profile assigned to this
conferencing Entity. In Multiple Networks configuration, If
one service is not configured while others are configured
and registered, the status reflects the registration with the
configured Network Services. The registration status with
each SIP Server can be viewed in the Properties Network Services dialog box of each conferencing entity.
•
Failed - Registration with the SIP Server failed. This may
be due to incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP
Network Service, or the SIP server may be down, or any
other reason the affects the connection between the RMX
or the SIP Server to the network.
•
Registered - the conferencing entity is registered with the
SIP Server.
•
Partially Registered - This status is available only in
Multiple Networks configuration, when the conferencing
entity failed to register to all the required Network
Services if more than one Network Service was selected.
Meeting Room Toolbar & Right-click Menu
The Meeting Room toolbar and right-click menus provide the following
functionality:
Table 4-3
Toolbar
button
Meeting Room Toolbar and Right-click Menus
Right-click
menu
Description
New Meeting
Room
Select this button to create a new Meeting
Room.
Delete Meeting
Room
Select any Meeting Room and then click this
button to delete the Meeting Room.
4-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Dial out to participants assigned to a Meeting Room will only start when the dial
in participant who has activated it has completed the connection process and
the Meeting Room has become an ongoing conference.
Creating a New Meeting Room
To create a new meeting room:
>> In the Meeting Rooms pane, click the New Meeting Room
button
or right-click an empty area in the pane and then click New Meeting
Room.
The New Meeting Room dialog box is displayed.
The definition procedure is the same as for the new conference (with
the exception of Reserved Resources for Audio and Video participants).
For more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started
Guide, "Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane” on page 3-15.
4-6
5
Entry Queues, Ad Hoc
Conferences and SIP Factories
Entry Queues
An Entry Queue (EQ) is a special routing lobby to access conferences.
Participants connect to a single-dial lobby and are routed to their
destination conference according to the Conference ID they enter. The
Entry Queue remains in a passive state when there are no callers in the
queue (in between connections) and is automatically activated once a
caller dials its dial-in number. The connection of ISDN/PSTN
participants to conferences is enabled only via Entry Queues to which an
ISDN/PSTN dial-in number is assigned.
The maximum of number of Entry Queues that can be defined is:
•
RMX 1500 — 40
•
RMX 2000 — 40
•
RMX 4000 — 80
The parameters (bit rate and video properties) with which the
participants connect to the Entry Queue and later to their destination
conference are defined in the Conference Profile that is assigned to the
Entry Queue. For example, if the Profile Bit Rate is set to 384 Kbps, all
endpoints connect to the Entry Queue and later to their destination
conference using this bit rate even if they are capable of connecting at
higher bit rates.
An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to
enable the voice prompts guiding the participants through the
connection process. The Entry Queue IVR Service also includes a video
slide that is displayed to the participants while staying in the Entry
Queue (during their connection process).
5-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Different Entry Queues can be created to accommodate different
conferencing parameters (by assigning different Profiles) and prompts in
different languages (by assigning different Entry Queue IVR Services).
For more information, see "IVR Services” on page 15-1.
The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing. If the Ad Hoc
option is enabled for the Entry Queue, when the participant enters the
target conference ID the system checks whether a conference with that ID
is already running on the MCU. If not, the system automatically creates a
new ongoing conference with that ID.
For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing, see "Ad Hoc
Conferencing” on page 5-17.
An Entry Queue can be designated as Transit Entry Queue to which calls
with dial strings containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing
information are transferred.
For more information, see "Transit Entry Queue” on page 5-9.
To enable ISDN/PSTN participants to dial in to the Entry Queue, an
ISDN/PSTN dial-in number must be assigned to the Entry Queue. Up to
two dial-in numbers can be assigned to each Entry Queue. The dial-in
numbers must be allocated from the dial-in number range defined in the
ISDN/PSTN Network Service. You can allocate the two dial-in numbers
from the same ISDN/PSTN Network Service or from two different ISDN/
PSTN Network Services. The dial-in number must be communicated to
the ISDN or PSTN dial-in participants.
The Entry Queue can also be used as part of the Gateway to Polycom®
Distributed Media Application™ (DMA™) 7000 solution for connecting
Audio only PSTN, ISDN, SIP and H.323 endpoints to DMA™ 7000.
For more information, see Appendix D, “Gateway to Polycom®
DMA™ 7000” .
Default Entry Queue properties
The system is shipped with a default Entry Queue whose properties are:
Table 5-1
5-2
Default Entry Queue Properties
Parameter
Value
Display Name
DefaultEQ
The user can change the name if required.
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
Table 5-1
Default Entry Queue Properties (Continued)
Parameter
Value
Routing Name
DefaultEQ
The default Routing Name cannot be changed.
ID
1000
Profile name
Factory-Video-Profile. Profile Bit Rate is set to 384 Kbps.
Entry Queue
Service
Entry Queue IVR Service. This is default Entry Queue IVR
Service shipped with the system and includes default
voice messages and prompts in English.
Ad Hoc
Enabled
Cascade
None (Disabled)
Enable ISDN/
PSTN Access
Disabled. You can modify the properties of this Entry
Queue to enable ISDN/PSTN participants to dial-in to a
conference. Up to two dial-in numbers can be assigned.
5-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Defining a New Entry Queue
You can modify the properties of the default Entry Queue and define
additional Entry Queues to suit different conferencing requirements.
To define a new Entry Queue:
1 In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
.
5-4
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
2
In the Entry Queues list pane, click the New Entry Queue
The New Entry Queue dialog box opens.
3
Define the following parameters:
button.
Table 5-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters
Option
Description
Display Name
The Display Name is the conferencing entity name in
native language character sets to be displayed in the
RMX Web Client.
In conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and
SIP factories the system automatically generates an
ASCII name for the Display Name field that can be
modified using Unicode encoding.
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (length varies according to the
field).
5-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 5-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Display Name
(cont.)
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
The maximum length of text fields also varies
according to the mixture of character sets (Unicode
and ASCII).
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters. If the
same name is already used by another conference,
Meeting Room or Entry Queue, the RMX displays an
error message requesting you to enter a different
name.
Routing Name
Enter a name using ASCII text only. If no Routing
Name is entered, the system automatically assigns a
new name as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is
used also as the Routing Name.
•
5-6
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or
full Unicode text) is entered in Display Name, the
ID (such as Conference ID) is used as the Routing
Name.
Profile
Select the Profile to be used by the Entry Queue. The
default Profile is selected by default. This Profile
determines the Bit Rate and the video properties with
which participants connect to the Entry Queue and
destination conference.
In Ad Hoc conferencing it is used to define the new
conference properties.
ID
Enter a unique number identifying this conferencing
entity for dial in. Default string length is 4 digits.
If you do not manually assign the ID, the MCU assigns
one after the completion of the definition. The ID String
Length is defined by the flag
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN in the System
Configuration.
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
Table 5-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
Option
Description
Entry Queue
IVR Service
The default Entry Queue IVR Service is selected. If
required, select an alternate Entry Queue IVR Service,
which includes the required voice prompts, to guide
participants during their connection to the Entry
Queue.
Ad Hoc
Select this check box to enable the Ad Hoc option for
this Entry Queue.
IVR Service
Provider Only
Select this check box to designate this Entry Queue as
a special Entry Queue that provides IVR Services to
SIP calls on behalf of the DMA. The IVR service
provider only EntryQueue does not route the SIP calls
to a target conference. Instead the DMA handles the
call. For more details, see "IVR Provider Entry Queue
(Shared Number Dialing)” on page 5-10.
Cascade
Set this field to None for all Entry Queues other than
cascading.
If this Entry Queue is used to connect dial-in cascaded
links, select Master or Slave depending on the Master/
Slave relationship in the Cascading topology.
Set this field to Master if:
• The Entry Queue is defined on the MCU on level 1
and the dialing is done from level 2 to level 1.
•
The Entry Queue is defined on the MCU on level 2
and the dialing is done from level 3 to level 2.
Set this field to Slave if the Entry Queue is defined on
the MCU on level 2 (Slave) and the dialing is done
from MCU level 1 to level 2.
Enable ISDN/
PSTN Access
Select this check box to allocate dial-in numbers for
ISDN/PSTN connections.
To define the first dial-in number using the default
ISDN/PSTN Network Service, leave the default
selection. When the Entry Queue is saved on the
MCU, the dial-in number will be automatically assigned
to the Entry Queue. This number is taken from the dialin numbers range in the default ISDN/PSTN Network
Service.
5-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 5-2: Entry Queue Definitions Parameters (Continued)
4
Option
Description
ISDN/PSTN
Network Service
The default Network Service is automatically selected.
To select a different ISDN/PSTN Network Service in
the service list, select the name of the Network
Service.
Dial-in Number
(1)
Leave this field blank to let the system automatically
assign a number from the selected ISDN/PSTN
Network Service. To manually define a dial-in number,
enter a required number from the dial-in number range
defined for the selected Network Service.
Dial-in Number
(2)
By default, the second dial-in number is not defined. To
define a second-dial-in number, enter a required
number from the dial-in number range defined for the
selected Network Service.
Click OK.
The new Entry Queue is added to the Entry Queues list.
Listing Entry Queues
To view the list of Entry Queues:
 In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
The Entry Queues are listed in the Entry Queues pane.
You can double-click an Entry Queue to view its properties.
5-8
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
Modifying the EQ Properties
To modify the EQ:
>> In the Entry Queues pane, either double-click or right-click and select
Entry Queue Properties of the selected Entry Queue in the list.
The Entry Queue Properties dialog box is displayed. All the fields
may be modified except Routing Name.
Transit Entry Queue
A Transit Entry Queue is an Entry Queue to which calls with dial strings
containing incomplete or incorrect conference routing information are
transferred.
IP Calls are routed to the Transit Entry Queue when:
•
A gatekeeper is not used, or where calls are made directly to the
RMX’s Signaling IP Address, with incorrect or without a Conference
ID.
•
When a gatekeeper is used and only the prefix of the RMX is dialed,
with incorrect or without a Conference ID.
•
When the dialed prefix is followed by an incorrect conference ID.
When no Transit Entry Queue is defined, all calls containing incomplete or
incorrect conference routing information are rejected by the RMX.
In the Transit Entry Queue, the Entry Queue IVR Service prompts the
participant for a destination conference ID. Once the correct information
is entered, the participant is transferred to the destination conference.
Setting a Transit Entry Queue
The RMX factory default settings define the Default Entry Queue also as
the Transit Entry Queue. You can designate another Entry Queue as the
Transit Entry Queue.
Only one Transit Entry Queue may be defined per RMX and selecting
another Entry Queue as the Transit Entry Queue automatically cancels the
previous selection.
To designate an Entry Queue as Transit Entry Queue:
1 In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane, click Entry Queues.
5-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the Entry Queues list, right-click the Entry Queue entry and then
click Set Transit EQ.
The Entry Queue selected as Transit Entry Queue is displayed in bold.
To cancel the Transit Entry Queue setting:
1
In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane click Entry Queues.
2
In the Entry Queues list, right-click the Transit Entry Queue entry and
then click Cancel Transit EQ.
IVR Provider Entry Queue (Shared Number Dialing)
In an environment that includes a DMA, the RMX Entry Queue can be
configured to provide the IVR Services on behalf of the DMA to SIP
endpoints. It displays the Welcome Slide, plays the welcome message and
retrieves the destination conference ID that is entered by the participant
using DTMF codes.
To enable this feature, a special Entry Queue that is defined as IVR Service
Provider only is created. This Entry Queue does not forward calls to
conferences running on the RMX and its main functionality is to provide
IVR services.
Call Flow
The SIP participant dials the DMA Virtual Entry Queue number, for
example 1000@dma.polycom.com.
5-10
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
The DMA forwards the SIP call to the RMX, to a special Entry Queue that
is configured as IVR Service Provider Only. The participant is prompted to
enter the conference ID using DTMF codes.
Once the participant enters the conference ID, the conference ID is
forwarded to the DMA, enabling the DMA to connect the SIP endpoint to
the destination conference or create a new conference and connect the
participant to that conference.
Guidelines
•
An Entry Queue defined as IVR service provider only does not route
the SIP call to a target conference and it cannot be used to rout calls
on the RMX. In such a configuration, the DMA handles the calls.
Therefore, normal Entry Queues must be defined separately.
•
Operator Assistance must be disabled in the IVR Service assigned to
this Entry Queue.
•
Only the conference ID prompts should be configured. Other
prompts are not supported in IVR Service Provider Only
configuration.
•
PSTN, ISDN, H.323 calls to this Entry Queue are rejected.
•
The DMA must be configured to locate the IVR Service Provider Only
Entry Queue on the RMX. To locate the Entry Queue the DMA
requires the Entry Queue’s ID number and the RMX Central
Signaling IP address (xxx.xx.xxx.xx).
RMX Configuration
Entry Queue IVR Service
If required, create a special Entry Queue IVR Service in which the Operator
Assistance option is disabled and only the Conference ID prompts are
enabled.
5-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Entry Queue
 In the New Entry Queue dialog box, select IVR Service Provider Only.
.
— Enter the Entry Queue ID that will be used by the DMA to
forward the SIP calls to this Entry Queue.
— Select the special Entry Queue IVR Service if one was created.
— Ad Hoc, Cascade and Enable ISDN/PSTN Dial-in options should
not be selected with this type of Entry Queue.
SIP Factories
A SIP Factory is a conferencing entity that enables SIP endpoints to create
Ad Hoc conferences. The system is shipped with a default SIP Factory,
named DefaultFactory.
When a SIP endpoint calls the SIP Factory URI, a new conference is
automatically created based on the Profile parameters, and the endpoint
joins the conference.
5-12
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
The SIP Factory URI must be registered with the SIP server to enable
routing of calls to the SIP Factory. To ensure that the SIP factory is
registered, the option to register Factories must be selected in the Default
IP Network Service.
The maximum of number of SIP Factories that can be defined is:
•
RMX 1500 — 40
•
RMX 2000 — 40
•
RMX 4000 — 80
Creating SIP Factories
To create a new SIP Factory:
1 In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane, click SIP Factories.
2
In the SIP Factories list pane, click the New SIP Factory
The New Factory dialog box opens.
button.
5-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 5-3: New Factory Properties
Option
Description
Display Name
Enter the SIP Factory name that will be displayed.
The Display Name is the conferencing entity name in
native language character sets to be displayed in the
RMX Web Client.
In conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and
SIP factories the system automatically generates an
ASCII name for the Display Name field that can be
modified using Unicode encoding.
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (length varies according to the
field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
The maximum length of text fields also varies
according to the mixture of character sets (Unicode
and ASCII).
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters. If the
same name is already used by another conference,
Meeting Room or Entry Queue, the RMX displays an
error message requesting you to enter a different
name.
Routing Name
The Routing Name is defined by the user, however if
no Routing Name is entered, the system will
automatically assign a new name when the Profile is
saved as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is
used also as the Routing Name.
•
5-14
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or
full Unicode text) is entered in Display Name, the
ID (such as Conference ID) is used as the Routing
Name.
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
Table 5-3: New Factory Properties (Continued)
4
Option
Description
Profile
The default Profile is selected by default. If required,
select the conference Profile from the list of Profiles
defined in the MCU.
A new conference is created using the parameters
defined in the Profile.
Automatic
Connection
Select this check box to immediately accept the
conference creator endpoint to the conference. If the
check box is cleared, the endpoint is redirected to the
conference and then connected.
Click OK.
The new SIP Factory is added to the list.
SIP Registration & Presence for Entry Queues and SIP
Factories
Entry Queues and SIP Factories can be registered with SIP servers. This
enables Office Communication Server or LYNC server client users to see the
availability status (Available or Offline) of these conferencing entities and
to connect to them directly from the Buddy List.
5-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Guidelines
•
The Entry Queue or SIP Factory must be added to the Active Directory
as a User.
•
SIP Registration must be enabled in the Profile assigned to the Entry
Queue or SIP Factory. For more information see Step 21 of "Defining
Profiles” on page 1-8.
Monitoring Registration Status
The SIP registration status can be viewed in the Entry Queue or SIP Factory
list panes.
5-16
Chapter 5-Entry Queues, Ad Hoc Conferences and SIP Factories
The following statuses are displayed:
•
Not configured - Registration with the SIP Server was not enabled in
the Conference Profile assigned to the Entry Queue or SIP Factory.
•
Failed - Registration with the SIP Server failed.
This may be due to incorrect definition of the SIP server in the IP
Network Service, or the SIP Server may be down, or any other reason
the affects the connection between the RMX or the SIP Server to the
network.
•
Registered - the conferencing entity is registered with the SIP Server.
•
Partially Registered - This status is available only in Multiple
Networks configuration, when the conferencing entity failed to
register to all the required Network Services if more than one Network
Service was selected for Registration.
Ad Hoc Conferencing
The Entry Queue can also be used for Ad Hoc conferencing. If the Ad Hoc
option is enabled for the Entry Queue, when the participant enters the
target conference ID the system checks whether a conference with that ID
is already running on the MCU. If not, the system automatically creates a
new ongoing conference with that ID. The conference parameters are
based on the Profile linked to the Entry Queue. As opposed to Meeting
Rooms, that are predefined conferences saved on the MCU, Ad Hoc
conferences are not stored on the MCU. Once an Ad Hoc conference is
started it becomes an ongoing conference, and it is monitored and
controlled as any standard ongoing conference.
An external database application can be used for authentication with Ad
Hoc conferences. The authentication can be done at the Entry Queue level
and at the conference level. At the Entry Queue level, the MCU queries
the external database server whether the participant has the right to create
a new conference. At the conference level the MCU verifies whether the
participant can join the conference and if the participant is the conference
chairperson. The external database can populate certain conference
parameters.
For more information about Ad Hoc conferencing, see Appendix D, "Ad
Hoc Conferencing and External Database Authentication” on page D-1.
5-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Gateway to Polycom® Distributed Media Application™ (DMA™)
7000
Gateway to Polycom® Distributed Media Application™ (DMA™) 7000
enables audio only PSTN, ISDN (video endpoints using only their audio
channels), SIP and H.323 calls to connect to the Polycom DMA 7000 via
gateway sessions running on the RMX. Each RMX conference acting as a
gateway session includes one connection to the endpoint and another
connection to the DMA. The DMA 7000 enables load balancing and the
distribution of multipoint calls on up to 10 Polycom RMX media servers.
As part of this solution, the RMX acts as a gateway for the DMA that
supports H.323 calls. The PSTN, ISDN or SIP endpoint dials the virtual
Meeting Room on the DMA via a special Entry Queue on the RMX.
For more information, see "Dialing to Polycom® DMA™ 7000” on
page 17-26.
5-18
6
Address Book
The Address Book stores information about the people and businesses
you communicate with. The Address Book stores, among many other
fields, IP addresses, phone numbers and network communication
protocols used by the participant’s endpoint. By utilizing the Address
Book users are able to quickly and efficiently assign or designate
participants to conferences. Groups defined in the Address Book help
facilitate the creation of conferences. Participants can be added to the
Address Book individually or in Groups.
The maximum of number of Address Book entries that can be defined is:
•
RMX 1500 — 4000
•
RMX 2000 — 4000
•
RMX 4000 — 4000
When using the Polycom CMA Global Address Book, all entries are
listed.
Importing and exporting of Address Books enables organizations to
seamlessly distribute up-to-date Address Books to multiple RMX units.
It is not possible to distribute Address Books to external databases
running on applications such as Polycom’s ReadiManager (SE200) or
Polycom CMA. External databases can run in conjunction with RMX
units, but must be managed from the external application, e.g. new
participants cannot be added to the external database from the RMX
Web Client. To enable the RMX to run with an external database such as
Polycom CMA, the appropriate system configuration flags must be set.
For more information, see "System Configuration” on page 19-5.
Integration with Polycom CMA Global Address Book is supported. For more
information, see "Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the RMX”
on page 6-23. Integration with the SE200 GAB (Global Address Book) is not
supported.
6-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Viewing the Address Book
You can view the participants currently defined in the Address Book. The
first time the RMX Web Client is accessed, the Address Book pane is
displayed.
Anchor Pin
Address Book pane
Displaying and Hiding the Address Book
The Address Book can be hidden it by clicking the anchor pin ( ) button
in the pane header.
The Address Book pane closes and a tab is displayed at the right edge of the
screen.
6-2
Chapter 6-Address Book
Click the tab to re-open the Address Book.
Click tab to open Address Book
The following information is displayed for each participant. The fields
displayed vary accordingly, when viewing the full display or the docked
Address Book pane.
Table 6-1
Docked Address Book List Columns
Field/Option
Description
Type
Indicates whether the participant is a video (
audio (
) or
).
Name
Displays the name of the participant.
IP Address/Phone
Indicates the IP address and phone number of the
participant’s endpoint.
For SIP participants, the IP address is displayed only if
one was defined for the participant.
Dialing Direction
Dial-in – The participant dials in to the conference.
Dial-out – The RMX dials out to the participant.
Adding a Participant to the Address Book
Adding participants to the Address Book can be performed by the
following methods:
•
Directly in the Address Book.
•
Moving or saving a participant from an ongoing conference to the
Address Book.
6-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Only defined dial-out ISDN/PSTN participants can be added to the
Address Book or ongoing conferences. ISDN/PSTN participants are
added to the Address Book in the same manner that H.323 and SIP
participants are added.
When adding dial-out participants to the ongoing conference, the system
automatically dials out to the participants using the Network Service
(ISDN/PSTN or IP) defined for the connection in the participant properties.
Adding a new participant to the Address Book Directly
New participants can be added directly in the Address Book as needed.
To add a new participant to the Address Book:
1
In the Address Book pane, click the New Participant button(
).
The New Participant - General dialog box opens.
IP/SIP Participant
ISDN/PSTN Participant
6-4
Chapter 6-Address Book
2
Define the following fields:
Table 6-2 New Participant – General Properties
Field
Description
Name
Enter the name of the participant or the endpoint as it
will be displayed in the RMX Web Client.
The Name field can be modified using Unicode
encoding.
•
English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (length varies according to the
field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
Maximum field length in ASCII is 80 characters.
The maximum length of text fields varies according to
the mixture of character sets used (Unicode and
ASCII).
This name can also become the endpoint name that is
displayed in the video layout. For more details about
endpoint (site) names, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Getting Started Guide, “"Text Indication in the Video
Layout” on page 3-42”.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Endpoint
Website (IP only)
Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the
internal website of the participant’s endpoint. It
enables you to perform administrative, configuration
and troubleshooting activities on the endpoint.
The connection is available only if the IP address of
the endpoint’s internal site is defined in the Website IP
Address field.
6-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 6-2 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Dialing Direction
Select the dialing direction:
• Dial-in – The participant dials in to the
conference.
• Dial-out – The MCU dials out to the participant.
Notes:
• This field applies to IP participants only.
•
Dial-out is forced when defining an ISDN/PSTN
participant.
Type
The network communication protocol used by the
endpoint to connect to the conference: H.323, SIP or
ISDN/PSTN.
The fields in the dialog box change according to the
selected network type.
IP Address
(H.323 and SIP
Only)
Enter the IP address of the participant’s endpoint.
• For H.323 participant define either the endpoint
IP address or alias.
•
For SIP participant define either the endpoint IP
address or the SIP address.
Note: This field is hidden when the ISDN/PSTN
protocol is selected.
Phone Number
(ISDN/PSTN
Only)
6-6
Enter the phone number of the ISDN/PSTN
participant.
Note: This field is only displayed when the ISDN/
PSTN protocol is selected.
Chapter 6-Address Book
Table 6-2 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Alias Name/Type
(H.323 Only)
If you are using the endpoint’s alias and not the IP
address, first select the type of alias and then enter
the endpoint’s alias:
•
•
•
H.323 ID (alphanumeric ID)
E.164 (digits 0-9, * and #)
Email ID (email address format,
e.g. abc@example.com)
•
Participant Number (digits 0-9, * and #
Note:
• Although all types are supported, the type of alias
is dependent on the gatekeeper’s capabilities. The
most commonly supported alias types are H.323
ID and E.164.
•
This field is used to enter the Entry Queue ID,
target Conference ID and Conference Password
when defining a cascaded link.
•
This field is removed from the dialog box when the
ISDN/PSTN protocol is selected.
6-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 6-2 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Extension/
Identifier String
Dial-out participants that connect to an external device
such as Cascaded Links or Recording Links may be
required to enter a conference password or an
identifying string to connect. Enter the required string
as follows:
[p]…[p][string]
For example: pp4566#
p - optional - indicates a pause of one second before
sending the DTMF string. Enter several concatenated
[p]s to increase the delay before sending the string.
The required delay depends on the configuration of
the external device or conference IVR system.
String - enter the required string using the digits 0-9
and the characters * and #. The maximum number of
characters that can be entered is identical to the
H.323 alias length.
If the information required to access the device/
conference is composed of several strings, for
example, the conference ID and the conference
password, this information can be entered as one
string, where pauses [p] are added between the
strings for the required delays, as follows:
[p]…[p][string][p]…[p] [string]...
For example: p23pp*34p4566#
The RMX automatically sends this information upon
connection to the destination device/conference. The
information is sent by the RMX as DTMF code to the
destination device/conference, simulating the
standard IVR procedure.
6-8
Chapter 6-Address Book
Table 6-2 New Participant – General Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
SIP Address/
Type
(SIP Only)
Select the format in which the SIP address is written:
• SIP URI - Uses the format of an E-mail address,
typically containing a user name and a host name:
sip:[user]@[host]. For example,
sip:dan@polycom.com.
•
TEL URI - Used when the endpoint does not
specify the domain that should interpret a
telephone number that has been input by the user.
Rather, each domain through which the request
passes would be given that opportunity. As an
example, a user in an airport might log in and send
requests through an outbound proxy in the airport.
If the users enters “411” (this is the phone number
for local directory assistance in the United States),
this number needs to be interpreted and
processed by the outbound proxy in the airport,
and not by the user's home domain.
In this case, tel: 411 is the correct choice.
Note: This field is removed from the dialog box when
the ISDN/PSTN protocol is selected.
3
Endpoint
Website IP
Address
(IP only)
Enter the IP address of the endpoint’s internal site to
enable connection to it for management and
configuration purposes.
This field is automatically completed the first time that
the endpoint connects to the RMX. If the field is blank
it can be manually completed by the system
administrator. The field can be modified while the
endpoint is connected
Audio Only
Select this check box to define the participant as a
voice participant, with no video capabilities.
Usually, additional definitions are not required and you can use the
system defaults for the remaining parameters. In such a case, click
OK.
To modify the default settings for advanced parameters, click the
Advanced tab.
6-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Define the following Advanced parameters:
IP/SIP
Participant
ISDN/PSTN
Participant
Table 6-3 New Participant – Advanced Properties
Field
Description
Video Bit Rate /
Auto
(IP Only)
The Auto check box is automatically selected to use
the Line Rate defined for the conference.
Note: This check box cannot be cleared when
defining a new participant during an ongoing
conference.
To specify the video rate for the endpoint, clear this
check box and then select the required video rate.
6-10
Chapter 6-Address Book
Table 6-3 New Participant – Advanced Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Video Protocol
Select the video compression standard that will be
forced by the MCU on the endpoint when connecting
to the conference: H.261, H.263, H.264 or RTV.
Select Auto to let the MCU select the video protocol
according to the endpoint’s capabilities.
Resolution
The Auto check box is automatically selected to use
the Resolution defined for the conference.
To specify the Resolution for the participant, select
the required resolution from the drop-down menu.
Broadcasting
Volume +
Listening Volume
To adjust the volume the participant broadcasts to the
conference or the volume the participant hears the
conference, move the slider; each unit represents an
increase or decrease of 3 dB (decibel). The volume
scale is from 1 to 10, where 1 is the weakest and 10
is the strongest. The default connection value is 5.
Encryption
Select whether the endpoint uses encryption for its
connection to the conference.
Auto (default setting) indicates that the endpoint will
connect according to the conference encryption
setting.
AGC
AGC (Auto Gain Control) mechanism regulates noise
and audio volume by keeping the received audio
signals of all participants balanced. Select this check
box to enable the AGC mechanism for participants
with weaker audio signals.
Notes:
• To be enable AGC, set the value of the
ENABLE_AGC System Flag in system.cfg to be
YES. The flag’s default value is NO.
•
If the System Flag does not exist in the system, it
must be manually added to the System
Configuration. For more information see
"Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
•
Enabling AGC may result in amplification of
background noise.
6-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 6-3 New Participant – Advanced Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Cascaded Link
(IP Only)
If this participant is used as a link between
conferences select:
• Slave, if the participant is defined in a conference
running on a Slave MCU.
•
Master, if the participant is defined in a
conference running on the Master MCU.
It enables the connection of one conference directly
to another conference using an H.323 connection
only. The conferences can run on the same MCU or
different MCU’s. For more information, see "Enabling
Cascading” on page 3-27.
ISDN/PSTN
Network Service
Enables users to select the ISDN/PSTN network
service.
5
To add general information about the participant, i.e. email, company
name, etc..., click the Information tab and type the necessary details
in the Info 1-4 fields. Text in the info fields can be added in Unicode
format (length: 31 characters).
6
Click OK.
The new participant is added to the address book.
6-12
Chapter 6-Address Book
Adding a Participant from an Ongoing Conference to the Address
Book
You can add a participant to the Address Book directly from an ongoing
conference.
To add a participant from the conference to the Address Book:
1 During an ongoing conference, select the participant in the Participant
pane and either click the Add Participant to Address Book button
( ) or right-click and select Add Participant to Address Book.
The participant is added to the Address Book.
Alternatively, you could:
a
Double-click the participant’s icon or right-click the participant
icon and click Participant Properties.
The Participant Properties window opens.
b
Click the Add to Address book button.
6-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Modifying Participants in the Address Book
When required, you can modify the participant’s properties.
To modify participant properties in the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book pane, double-click the participant’s icon or rightclick the participant’s name and click Participant Properties.
The Participant’s Properties window is displayed.
2
Modify the necessary properties in the window, e.g. dialing direction,
communication protocol type, etc... You can modify any property in
any of the three tabs: General, Advanced and Info.
3
Click OK.
The changes to the participant’s properties are updated.
6-14
Chapter 6-Address Book
Deleting Participants from the Address Book
To delete participants from the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book pane select the participant to delete. Click the
Delete Participant ( ) button or right-click and then click the
Delete Participant option.
2
Click Yes in the dialog box that is displayed to confirm the deletion.
After confirmation, the selected participant is deleted from the
Address Book.
Searching the Address Book
To search for participants in the Address Book:
1 In the Address Book toolbar, click in the Find field.
The field clears and a cursor is displayed indicating that the field is
active.
2
Type all or part of the participant’s Name and click the search (
button.
)
The closest matching participant entries are displayed and the Active
Filter indicator turns on.
Closest Matching Participants
6-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Filtering the Address Book
Filtering applies pattern matching criteria to the information in the
Address Book entries, enabling you to select and work with a subset of
Address Book entries.
Filtering can be applied to one or multiple Address Book fields at a time.
To filter an address book field:
1 In the Address Book field that you want to filter, click the filter ( )
button.
A drop-down menu is displayed containing all the matching patterns
that can be applied to the selected field.
995 Entries in Unfiltered Address Book
Selected Field
Filter Button
Pattern Matching Options
2
Click the matching pattern to be applied as the filter.
The filtered list is displayed with an active filter (blue) indicator ( )
displayed in the selected field heading.
6-16
Chapter 6-Address Book
Example: If the user selects 213 as the matching pattern, the filtered
Address Book is displayed as follows:
1 Entry Matching “213” in Filtered Address Book
Selected Field
Active Filter Indicator
Filtered Field
To clear the filter and display all entries:
1 In the filtered Address Book field heading, click the Active Filter
indicator.
The pattern matching options menu is displayed.
Active Filter Indicator
Pattern Matching Options
2
Click All.
The filter is de-activated and all Address Book entries are displayed.
6-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Participant Groups
A group is a predefined collection of participants. A group provides an
easy way to connect a combination of endpoints to a conference. For
example, if you frequently conduct conferences with the marketing
department, you can create a group called “Marketing Team” that
contains the endpoints of all members of the marketing team.
Adding a New Group to the Address Book
To define a New Group:
1
In the Address Book pane click the New Group ( ) button or rightclick an empty area in the pane and click New Group.
The Group Properties dialog box is displayed.
2
6-18
In the Name field, enter a name for the group, for example, Marketing
Team.
Chapter 6-Address Book
3
4
Add participants to the Group by doing one of the following:
a
Click the Add from Address Book button to display the
Participants Address Book dialog box. Select the desired endpoints
to include in the Group and click Add. Multiple selections of
participants are enabled.
b
Drag and drop the desired endpoints from the Address Book pane
into the Group’s dialog box.
c
Click the New button to display the New Participant dialog box.
Define the endpoint’s parameters and click OK.
In the Group dialog box, click OK.
The new group is added to the Address Book.
Deleting a Group from the Address Book
To delete a Group:
1 In the Address Book pane, select the group and click the Delete Group
button or right-click the group and click the Delete Group.
Either option will delete the
selected group
2
Click Yes in the confirmation dialog box.
The selected group is deleted from the Address Book.
6-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Modifying a Group in the Address Book
To Modify a Group:
1 In the Address Book pane, double-click the Group icon (
right-click the Group and then click Properties.
) or
The Group Properties dialog box will be displayed.
2
The following operation can be performed:
a
Rename Group – Rename the Group in the name field.
b
Create New Participant – Click the New button to create new
participants in the Address Book and included them in the Group.
c
Add Participant – Add one or more participants to the Group by
clicking the Add from Address Book button and selecting the
participants from the Participants Address Book dialog box.
d
Remove Participant – Select the one or more participants in the
Group properties dialog box and click the Remove button.
Standard Windows multiple selection techniques can be for (adding/
removing) participants (to/from) the Group.
3
6-20
Click OK.
Chapter 6-Address Book
Importing and Exporting Address Books
Address Books are proprietary Polycom data files that can only be
distributed among RMX units. The Address Books are exported in XML
format, which are editable offline. If no name is assigned to the exported
Address Book, the default file name is:
EMA.DataObjects.OfflineTemplates.AddressbookContent_.xml
Exporting an Address Book
To Export an Address Book:
1
In the Address Book pane, click the Export Address Book ( ) button
or right-click an empty area in the pane and click Export Address
Book.
The Export Address Book dialog box is displayed.
2
Enter the desired path or click the Browse button.
3
In the Save Address Book dialog box, select the directory to save the
file. You may also rename the file in the File Name field.
4
Click Save.
You will return to the Export File dialog box.
5
Click OK.
The exported Address Book is saved in the selected folder in XML
format.
6-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Importing an Address Book
To Import and Address Book:
1
In the Address Book pane, click the Import Address Book ( ) button
or right-click an empty area in the pane and then click Import
Address Book.
The Import Address Book dialog box is displayed.
2
Enter the path from which to import the Address Book or click the
Browse button.
3
In the Open dialog box navigate to the desired Address Book file (in
XML format) to import.
When importing an Address Book, participants with exact names in the current
Address Book will be overwritten by participants defined in the imported
Address Book.
4
Click Open.
You will return to the Import File dialog box.
5
Click OK.
The Address Book is imported and a confirmation message is
displayed at the end of the process.
6
6-22
Click Close.
Chapter 6-Address Book
Integrating the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with
the RMX
The Polycom CMA™ application includes a Global Address Book with all
registered endpoints. This address book can be used by the RMX 2000/
4000 to add participants to conferences.
CMA™ Address Book Integration Guidelines
• The RMX can use only one address book at a time. After you
integrate the Polycom CMA with the Polycom RMX, the Polycom
CMA address book replaces the RMX internal address book.
•
The RMX uses the Polycom CMA address book in read-only mode.
You can only add or modify CMA address book entries a from the
CMA. Entries are also added when endpoints register with the CMA
as gatekeeper.
The RMX acts as a proxy to all address book requests between the RMX Web
Client and the CMA. Ensure that firewall and other network settings allow
the RMX access to the CMA server.
To Integrate the Polycom CMA™ Address Book with the RMX:
CMA Side
1 In the CMA application, manually add the Polycom RMX system to
the Polycom CMA system as directed in the Polycom CMA Operations
Guide.
2
In the CMA application, add a user or use an existing user for RMX
login as directed in the Polycom CMA Operations Guide.
Write down the User Name and Password as they will be used later
to define the RMX connection to the CMA Global Address Book.
RMX Side
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
6-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The System Flags - MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER dialog box opens.
2
Modify the values of the following flags:
For more information, see "Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
In versions 3.0 and earlier, these flags have to be manually added to the
MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER dialog box. In version 4.0 and later, these flags
are automatically listed in the MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER dialog box.
Table 6-4
6-24
System Flags for CMA Address Book Integration
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
DIRECTORY
The Web Server folder name. Change this name if
you have changed the default names used by the
CMA application.
Default: /PlcmWebServices
Chapter 6-Address Book
Table 6-4
System Flags for CMA Address Book Integration (Continued)
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_IP
Version 4.x and earlier - enter the IP address of the
CMA server. For example: 172.22.185.89.
Version 5.0.x and version 6.0.x - enter the IP
address of the CMA server in the format:
http://[IP address of the CMA server].
For example, http://172.22.185.89.
Version 7.0.x and later - enter the IP address of the
CMA server. For example: 172.22.185.89.
This flag is also the trigger for replacing the internal
RMX address book with the CMA global Address
Book.
Leave this flag blank to disable address book
integration with the CMA server.
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
PASSWORD
The password associated with the user name
defined for the RMX in the CMA server.
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
USER
The login name defined for the RMX in the CMA
server defined in the format:
domain name/user name.
3
Click OK to complete the definitions.
4
When prompted, click Yes to reset the MCU and implement the
changes to the system configuration.
6-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6-26
7
Reservations
The Reservations option enables users to schedule conferences. These
conferences can be launched immediately or become ongoing, at a
specified time on a specified date.
Scheduling a conference reservation requires definition of conference
parameters such as the date and time at which the conference is to start,
the participants and the duration of the conference.
Scheduled conferences (Reservations) can occur once or repeatedly, and
the recurrence pattern can vary.
The maximum number of reservations per RMX are:
•
RMX 1500 - 2000
•
RMX 2000 - 2000
•
RMX 4000 - 4000
Guidelines
System
•
By default, the Scheduler is enabled by a System Flag. The flag
prevents potential scheduling conflicts from occurring as a result of
system calls from external scheduling applications such as
ReadiManager®, SE200 CMA™ 4000/5000 and others via the API.
If an external scheduling application is used, the flag
INTERNAL_SCHEDULER must be manually added to the System
Configuration and its value must be set to NO.
For more information see “Modifying System Flags” on page 5.
7-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Resources
•
The maximum number of participants per reservation is determined
by the availability of system resources:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
RMX 1500 MPMx-Q Mode: 90 (25 video).
RMX 1500 MPMx-S Mode: 180 (45 video).
RMX 1500 MPMx-D Mode: 360 (90 video)
RMX 2000 MPM Mode: 400 (80 video).
RMX 2000 MPM+ Mode: 800 (160 video).
RMX 2000 MPMx-D Mode: 720 (180 video).
RMX 4000 MPM+ Mode: 1600 (160 video).
RMX 4000 MPMx-D Mode: 1440 (180 video).
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
•
System resources are calculated according to the RMX’s license. For
more information see “Video/Voice Port Configuration” on page 59.
•
System resource availability is partially checked when reservations
are created:
•
7-2
— If a conference duration extension request is received from an
ongoing conference, the request is rejected if it would cause a
resource conflict.
— If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same
time and there are not enough resources for all participants to be
connected:
• The conferences are activated.
• Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences
until all system resources are used up.
If sufficient resources are not available in the system and a scheduled
Reservation cannot be activated, the Reservation is deleted from the
schedule.
•
Resources for Reservations are calculated using the Reserve Resources
for Audio/Video Participants fields of the New Reservation dialog box.
For more information see “New Reservation – Reserved Resources” on
page 12.
•
Resources are reserved for participants at the highest video
resolution supported by the Line Rate specified in the conference
Chapter 7-Reservations
Profile and up to the maximum system video resolution specified by
the Resolution Configuration dialog box.
If the RMX is in MPM+ or MPMx Mode and Fixed Capacity Mode is
selected, the number of resources allocated to this type of video
participant (CIF, SD, HD) is also checked. If resource deficiencies are
found an error message is displayed.
•
When a new Reservation is created in the Reservation Calendar, the
effect of the new Reservation (including its recurrences) on available
resources is checked. If resource deficiencies are found an error
message is displayed.
Defined dial-in or dial-out participants, Meeting Rooms, Entry
Queues and new connections to Ongoing conferences are not
included in the resources calculation.
Reservations
•
A Reservation that has been activated and becomes an ongoing
conference is deleted from the Reservation Calendar list.
•
The maximum number of concurrent reservations is 80. Reservations
with durations that overlap (for any amount of time) are considered
to be concurrent.
•
System resource availability is partially checked when reservations
are created:
•
•
— If a conference duration extension request is received from an
ongoing conference, the request is rejected if it would cause a
resource conflict.
— If several reservations are scheduled to be activated at the same
time and there are not enough resources for all participants to be
connected:
• The conferences are activated.
• Participants are connected to all the ongoing conferences
until all system resources are used up.
A scheduled Reservation cannot be activated and is deleted from the
schedule if an Ongoing conference has the same Numeric ID.
— Sufficient resources are not available in the system.
If a problem prevents a Reservation from being activated at its
schedule time, the Reservation will not be activated at all. This applies
even if the problem is resolved during the Reservation’s scheduled
time slot.
7-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
A Profile that is assigned to a Reservation cannot be deleted.
•
Reservations are backed up and restored during Setup > Software
Management >Backup /Restore Configuration operations. For more
information see “Banner Display and Customization” on page 104.
•
All existing reservations are erased by the Standard Restore option of
the Administration > Tools > Restore Factory Defaults procedure.
•
Reservations can also be scheduled from Conference Templates. For
more information see “Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference
Template” on page 15.
Using the Reservation Calendar
To open the Reservation Calendar:
>> In the RMX Management pane, click the Reservation Calendar button
( ).
Reservations
7-4
Chapter 7-Reservations
Toolbar Buttons
The toolbar buttons functions are described in Table 7-1.
Table 7-1
Reservations – Toolbar
Button
Description
New Reservation
Create a new reservation. The date and time of the
new reservation is set according to the highlighted
blocks on the Reservation Calendar.
Delete Reservation
Click to delete the selected reservation.
Back
Click to show the previous day or week, depending
on whether Show Day or Show Week is the
selected.
Next
Click to show the next day or week, depending on
whether Show Day or Show Week is the selected.
Today
Click to show the current date in the Reservation
Calendar in either Show Day or Show Week view.
Show Week
Change the calendar view to weekly display,
showing a calendar week: Sunday through
Saturday
Show Day
Click this button to show the day containing the
selected time slot.
Reservations List
Click to change to List View and display a list of all
reservations.
Used to search for reservations by Display Name.
(Available in Reservations List view only).
Reservations Views
The Reservation Calendar list has the following views available:
•
Week
•
Day
•
Today
•
List
7-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
In all views the Main Window List Pane header displays the total number
of reservations in the system.
Total number of reservations
Week View
By default the Reservation Calendar is displayed in Week view with the
current date highlighted in orange.
Day View
A single day is displayed.
Today View
The current date (Today), highlighted in orange, can be viewed in both
Week View and Day View.
Current Date (Today)
Day View
Week View
7-6
Chapter 7-Reservations
List View
List View does not have a calendar based format.
All Reservations are listed by:
•
•
•
•
Display Name
ID
Internal ID
Start Time
•
•
•
•
End Time
Status
Conference Password
Profile
The Reservations can be sorted, searched and browsed by any of the listed
fields.
7-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Changing the Calendar View
To change between Week and Day views:
 In Week View: In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click Show Day
( ) to change to Day View.
or
In Day View: In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click Show Week
(
) to change to Week View.
Week View
Back
– View Previous Week
Next
– View Next Week
Today
– View Current Date in Week View
Current Date
Show Week
Show Day
Day View
7-8
Back
– View Previous Day
Next
– View Next Day
Today
– View Current Date in Day View
Chapter 7-Reservations
To view Today (the current date):
>> In Week View or Day View, in the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the
Today ( ) button to have the current date displayed within the
selected view.
Week View
Day View
Current Date (Today)
To change to List View:
1
In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click, the Reservations List (
button.
)
The Reservations List is displayed.
2
Optional. Sort the data by any field (column heading) by clicking on
the column heading.
7-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
A
or
symbol is displayed in the column heading indicating that
the list is sorted by this field, as well as the sort order.
3
Optional. Click on the column heading to toggle the column’s sort
order.
To return to Calendar View:
>> In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click any of the buttons (Show
Week/Show Day/Today) to return to the required Reservation
Calendar view.
Scheduling Conferences Using the Reservation
Calendar
Creating a New Reservation
There are three methods of creating a new reservation:
Each method requires the selection of a starting time slot in the Reservation
Calendar. The default time slot is the current half-hour period of local time.
In all views, if the New Reservation (
) button is clicked without
selecting a starting time slot or if a time slot is selected that is in the past,
the Reservation becomes an Ongoing conference immediately and is not
added to the Reservations calendar.
Time Slot
After selecting a starting time slot in the Reservation Calendar you can
create a reservation with a default duration derived from the creation
method used or by interactively defining the duration of the reservation.
7-10
Chapter 7-Reservations
Method I – To create a reservation with default duration of 1 hour:
>> In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the New Reservation (
button to create a reservation of 1 hour duration.
)
Method II – To create a reservation with default duration of ½ hour:
>> Right-click and select New Reservation to create a reservation of ½
hour default duration.
Method III – To interactively define the duration:
1 In the calendar, click & drag to expand the time slot to select the
required Date, Start Time and Duration for the reservation.
2
In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click the New Reservation (
button or right-click and select New Reservation.
)
Example: The following click & drag sequence would select a
reservation for Tuesday, August 12, 2008, starting at 01:00 with a
duration of 4 hours.
Date: Tuesday, August 12, 2008
Start
Time
01:00
Click
Drag
Duration
4 Hours
Release
The duration of reservations created by any of the above methods can
be modified in the Scheduler tab of the New Reservation dialog box.
To create a new reservation:
1
Open the Reservation Calendar.
2
Select a starting time slot.
3
Create the reservation using one of the three methods described
above.
7-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Reservation – General tab dialog box opens.
All the fields are the same as for the New Conference – General tab,
described in the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "General
Tab” on page 3-17.
Table 7-2
New Reservation – Reserved Resources
Field
7-12
Description
Reserve
Resources for
Video
Participants
Enter the number of video participants for which the
system must reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
Reserve
Resources for
Audio
Participants
Enter the number of audio participants for which the
system must reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
Chapter 7-Reservations
When a Conference Profile is assigned to a Meeting Room or a Reservation,
the Profile’s parameters are not embedded in the Reservation, and are taken
from the Profile when the reservation becomes an ongoing conference.
Therefore, any changes to the Profile parameters between the time the
Reservation or Meeting Room was created and the time that it is activated
(and becomes an ongoing conference) will be applied to the conference.
If the user wants to save the current parameters, a different Profile with
these parameters must be assigned, or a different Profile with the new
parameters must be created.
4
Click the Schedule tab.
Calendar
7-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
Adjust the new reservation’s schedule by modifying the fields as
described in Table 7-3.
Table 7-3
New Reservation – Schedule Tab
Field
Start Time
End Time
Recurring
Meeting
7-14
Description
Select the Start Time
of the Reservation.
Select the End Time
of the Reservation.
•
The Start/End Times of the
Reservation are initially taken
from the time slot selected in
the Reservation Calendar.
•
The Start/End Times can be
adjusted by typing in the hours
and minutes fields or by
clicking the arrow buttons.
•
The Start/End dates can be
adjusted by typing in the date
field or by clicking the arrow
buttons or using the calendar.
•
The start time of all the
reservations can be manually
adjusted in one operation. For
more information see
"Adjusting the Start Times of all
Reservations” on page 7-20.
•
End Time settings are initially
calculated as Start Time +
Duration. End Time settings
are recalculated if Start Time
settings are changed.
•
Changes to End Time settings
do not affect Start Time
settings. However, the Duration
of the Reservation is
recalculated.
Select this option to set up a Recurring Reservation - a
series of Reservations to be repeated on a regular basis.
To create a recurring reservation, you must define a time
period and a recurrence pattern of how often the
Reservation should occur: Daily, Weekly or Monthly.
Chapter 7-Reservations
Table 7-3
New Reservation – Schedule Tab (Continued)
Field
Recurrence
Pattern
Description
Daily
If Daily is selected, the system automatically
selects all the days of the week. To de-select
days (for example, weekends) clear their check
boxes.
Weekly
If Weekly is selected, the system automatically
selects the day of the week for the Reservation
from the day selected in the Reservation
Calendar.
You can also define the recurrence interval in
weeks. For example, if you want the reservation
to occur every second week, enter 2 in the Recur
every _ week(s) field.
To define a twice-weekly recurring Reservation,
select the check box of the additional day of the
week on which the Reservation is to be
scheduled and set the recurrence interval to 1.
Monthly
If Monthly is selected, the system automatically
selects the day of the month as selected in the
Reservation Calendar. You are required to
choose a recurrence pattern:
• Day (1-31) of every (1-12) month(s) Repeats a conference on a specified day of
the month at a specified monthly interval. For
example, if the first Reservation is scheduled
for the 6th day of the current month and the
monthly interval is set to 1, the monthly
Reservation will occur on the 6th day of each
of the following months.
•
The (first, second,...,last) (Sun-Sat) of x
month(s) - Repeats a Reservation in a
particular week, on a specified day of the
week at the specified monthly interval. For
example, a recurrent meeting on the third
Monday every second month.
7-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 7-3
New Reservation – Schedule Tab (Continued)
Field
Description
A series of Reservations can be set to end after a specified number of
occurrences or by a specific date. Select one of the following methods of
terminating the series of Reservations:
6
End After
End After: x Occurrences - Ends a recurring series of
Reservations after a specific number (x) of occurrences.
Default: 1
(Leaving the field blank defaults to 1 occurrence.)
End by Date
End By Date: mm/dd/yyyy - Specifies a date for the last
occurrence of the recurring series of Reservations. The End
By Date value can be adjusted by typing in the date field or
by clicking the arrow button and using the calendar utility.
Default: Current date.
Click the Participants tab.
Participants List
7-16
Chapter 7-Reservations
The fields are the same as for the New Conference – Participants tab,
described in the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Participants Tab” on page 3-23.
Participant properties are embedded in the conferencing entity and therefore, if
the participant properties are modified in the Address Book (or Meeting Rooms)
after the Reservation has been created they are not applied to the participant
when the Reservation is activated.
7
Optional. Add participants from the Participants Address Book.
For more information see "Meeting Rooms” on page 4-1 and the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "To add participants from the
Address Book:” on page 3-26.
8
Optional. Add information to the reservation.
Information entered in the Information tab is written to the Call Detail
Record (CDR) when the reservation is activated. Changes made to this
information before it becomes an ongoing conference will be saved to
the CDR.
For more information see the RMX 15002000/4000 Getting Started
Guide, "Information Tab” on page 3-27.
9
Click OK.
The New Reservation is created and is displayed in the Reservation
Calendar.
If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID.
A recurring Reservation is assigned the same ISDN/PSTN dial-in
number for all recurrences.
If a dial in number conflict occurs prior to the conference’s start time,
an alert is displayed: “ISDN dial-in number is already assigned to
another conferencing entity” and the conference cannot start.
The series number (_0000n) of each reservation is appended to its
Display Name.
Example:
Conference Template name: Sales
Display Name for single scheduled occurrence: Sales
If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created:
Display Name for occurrence 1:
Sales_00001
Display Name for occurrence 2:
Sales_00002
Display Name for occurrence 3:
Sales_00003
7-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Managing Reservations
Reservations can be accessed and managed via all the views of the
Reservations List.
Guidelines
•
The Recurrence Pattern fields in the Schedule tab that are used to create
multiple occurrences of a Reservation are only displayed when the
Reservation and its multiple occurrences are initially created.
•
As with single occurrence Reservations, only the Duration, Start Time
and End Time parameters of multiple occurrence reservations can be
modified after the Reservation has been created.
•
A single occurrence Reservation cannot be modified to become a
multiple occurrence reservation.
•
Reservations can only be modified one at a time and not as a group.
•
If Reservations were created as a recurring series, the system gives the
option to delete them individually, or all as series.
Viewing and Modifying Reservations
Reservations can be viewed and modified by using the Week and Day views
of the Reservations Calendar or by using the Reservation Properties dialog
box.
Using the Week and Day views of the Reservations Calendar
In the Week and Day views each Reservation is represented by a shaded
square on the Reservation Calendar. Clicking on a Reservation selects the
Reservation. A dark blue border is displayed around the edges of the
Reservation indicating that it has been selected.
The Start Time of the Reservation is represented by the top edge of the
square while the End Time is represented by the bottom edge.
7-18
Chapter 7-Reservations
The cursor changes to a vertical double arrow (
the top and bottom sides of the square.
) when it is moved over
Click & Drag to Change Start Time
Click & Drag
to Move
Reservation
Click & Drag to Change End Time
To move the Reservation to another time slot:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Hold the mouse button down and drag the Reservation to the desired
time slot.
3
Release the mouse button.
To change the Reservation’s Start time:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Move the mouse over the top edge of the Reservation’s square.
3
When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow ( ) hold the
mouse button down and drag the edge to the desired Start Time.
4
Release the mouse button.
To change the Reservation’s End time:
1 Select the Reservation.
2
Move the mouse over the bottom edge of the Reservation’s square.
3
When the cursor changes to a vertical double arrow ( ) hold the
mouse button down and drag the edge to the desired End Time.
4
Release the mouse button.
7-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To View or Modify Reservations using the Reservation Properties
dialog box:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the reservation (or its recurrences)
you want to view, using the Show Day, Show Week, Today, Back,
Next or List buttons.
2
Double-click, or right-click and select Reservation Properties, to
select the reservation to be viewed or modified.
The Reservation Properties – General dialog box opens.
3
Select the tab(s) of the properties you want to view or modify.
4
Optional. Modify the Reservation Properties.
5
Click OK.
The dialog box closes and modifications (if any) are saved.
Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations
When utilizing GMT offset (for example, Daylight Saving Time change), the
start time of the reoccurring reservations scheduled before the RMX time
change are not updated accordingly (although their start time appear
correctly in the Reservations list, but when checking the reservation
properties the start time is incorrect).
Following the RMX time change, the start time of all reoccurring
reservations must be manually adjusted in one operation.
Using this option, the start times of all reservations currently scheduled
on the RMX are adjusted with the same offset.
To adjust the reoccurring reservations start time after the GMT Offset
has been changed for Daylight Saving Time (DST) or a physical move.:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > MCU Time.
The MCU Time dialog box opens.
7-20
Chapter 7-Reservations
2
Click the Adjust Reservations Time button.
The Adjust Reservations Time dialog box opens.
Click the arrows to adjust the start time by hours.
Range is between 12 hours and -12 hours
A positive value indicates adding to the start time
(-) indicates subtracting from the start time
Click the arrows to adjust the start time by minutes.
Range is between 45 minutes and -45 minutes.
A positive value indicates adding to the start time
(-) indicates subtracting from the start time
3
Click the arrows of the Offset - Hours box to indicate the number of
hours to add or subtract from the current start time; a positive value
indicates adding time, while minus (-) indicates subtracting time.
4
Click the arrows of the Offset - minutes box to indicate the number of
minutes to add or subtract from the current start time of the
reservations. Increments or decrements are by 15 minutes.
For example, to subtract 30 minutes from the start time of all the
reservation,
enter 0 in the hours box, and -30 in the minutes box.
To add one hour and 30 minutes to the start time, enter 1 in the hours
box and 30 in the minutes box.
7-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
Click the Adjust button to apply the change to all the reoccurring
reservations currently scheduled on the RMX.
When adjusting the start time of 1000 - 2000 reservations, an “Internal communication error”
message may appear. Ignore this message as the process completes successfully.
Deleting Reservations
To delete a single reservation:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the reservation you want to delete,
using the Show Day, Show Week, Today, Back, Next or List buttons.
2
Click to select the reservation to be deleted.
3
Click the Delete Reservation ( ) button.
or
Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation block, right-click and
select Delete Reservation.
4
Click OK in the confirmation dialog box.
The Reservation is deleted.
To delete all recurrences of a reservation:
1 In the Reservations List, navigate to the Reservation or any of its
recurrences, using the Show Day, Show Week, Today, Back, Next or
List buttons.
2
Click the Delete Reservation ( ) button.
or
Place the mouse pointer within the Reservation or any of its
recurrences, right-click and select Delete Reservation.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
7-22
3
Select Delete the series.
4
Click OK.
Chapter 7-Reservations
All occurrences of the Reservation are deleted.
Searching for Reservations using Quick Search
Quick Search is available only in List View. It enables you to search for
Reservations by Display Name.
To search for reservations:
1 In the Reservation Calendar toolbar, click in the Quick Search field.
The field clears and a cursor is displayed indicating that the field is
active.
2
Type all or part of the reservation’s Display Name into the field and
click Search.
The closest matching Reservation entries are displayed.
Closest Matching Reservations
3
Optional. Double- click the Reservation’s entry in the list to open the
Reservations Properties dialog box to view or modify the Reservation.
or
Right -click the Reservation’s entry in the list and select a menu option
to view, modify or delete the Reservation.
To clear the search and display all reservations:
1 Clear the Quick Search field.
2
Click Search.
All Reservations are displayed.
7-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
7-24
8
Operator Assistance &
Participant Move
RMX users (operators) assistance to participants is available when:
•
Participants have requested individual help (using *0 DTMF code)
during the conference.
•
Participants have requested help for the conference (using 00 DTMF
code) during the conference.
•
Participants have problems connecting to conferences, for example,
when they enter the wrong conference ID or password.
In addition, the RMX user (operator) can join the ongoing conference
and assist all conference participants.
Operator assistance is available only when an Operator conference is
running on the MCU.
The Operator conference offers additional conference management
capabilities to the RMX users, enabling them to attend to participants
with special requirements and acquire participant details for billing and
statistics. This service is designed usually for large conferences that
require the personal touch.
Operator assistance is available in MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Modes.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
8-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Operator Conferences
An Operator conference is a special conference that enables the RMX user
acting as an operator to assist participants without disturbing the ongoing
conferences and without being heard by other conference participants.
The operator can move a participant from the Entry Queue or ongoing
conference to a private, one-on-one conversation in the Operator
conference.
In attended mode, the RMX user (operator) can perform one of the
following actions:
•
Participants connected to the Entry Queue who fail to enter the
correct destination ID or conference password can be moved by the
user to the Operator conference for assistance.
•
After a short conversation, the operator can move the participant
from the Operator conference to the appropriate destination
conference (Home conference).
•
The operator can connect participants belonging to the same
destination conference to their conference simultaneously by
selecting the appropriate participants and moving them to the Home
conference (interactively or using the right-click menu).
•
The operator can move one or several participants from an ongoing
conference to the Operator conference for a private conversation.
•
The operator can move participants between ongoing Continuous
Presence conferences.
Operator Conference Guidelines
• An Operator conference can only run in Continuous Presence mode.
8-2
•
Operator conference is defined in the Conference Profile. When enabled
in Conference Profile, High Definition Video Switching option is
disabled.
•
An Operator conference can only be created by a User with Operator or
Administrator Authorization level.
•
Operator conference name is derived from the User Login Name and it
cannot be modified.
•
Only one Operator conference per User Login Name can be created.
•
When created, the Operator conference must include one and only one
participant - the Operator participant.
•
Only a defined dial-out participant can be added to an Operator
conference as an Operator participant
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
•
Once running, the RMX user can add new participants or move
participants from other conferences to this conference. The maximum
number of participants in an Operator conference is the same as in
standard conferences.
•
Special icons are used to indicate an Operator conference in the
Ongoing Conferences list and the operator participant in the
Participants list.
•
An Operator conference cannot be defined as a Reservation.
•
An Operator conference can be saved to a Conference Template. An
ongoing Operator conference can be started from a Conference
Template.
•
The Operator participant cannot be deleted from the Operator
conference or from any other conference to which she/he was moved
to, but it can be disconnected from the conference.
•
When deleting or terminating the Operator conference, the operator
participant is automatically disconnected from the MCU, even if
participating in a conference other than the Operator conference.
•
Participants in Telepresence conferences cannot be moved from their
conference, but an operator can join their conference and help them if
assistance is required.
•
Moving participants from/to an Operator conference follows the same
guidelines as moving participants between conferences. For move
guidelines, see "Move Guidelines” on page 8-26.
•
When a participant is moved from the Entry Queue to the Operator
conference, the option to move back to the source (Home) conference
is disabled as the Entry Queue is not considered as a source
conference.
•
The conference chairperson cannot be moved to the Operator
conference following the individual help request if the Auto Terminate
When Chairperson Exits option is enabled, to prevent the conference
from automatically ending prematurely. In such a case, the assistance
request is treated by the system as a conference assistance request,
and the operator can join the conference.
8-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Defining the Components Enabling Operator Assistance
To enable operator assistance for conferences, the following conferencing
entities must be adjusted or created:
•
IVR Service (Entry Queue and Conference) in which Operator
Assistance options are enabled.
•
A Conference Profile with the Operator Conference option enabled.
•
An active Operator conference with a connected Operator
participant.
Defining a Conference IVR Service with Operator Assistance
Options
1
2
In the RMX Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list and click
the IVR Services ( ) entry.
On the IVR Services toolbar, click the New Conference IVR Service
) button.
(
The New Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
8-4
3
Enter the Conference IVR Service Name.
4
Define the Conference IVR Service - Global parameters. For more
information, see Table 15-3, “Conference IVR Service Properties - Global
Parameters,” on page 15-10.
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
5
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
6
Define the system behavior when the participant enters the
Conference IVR queue. For more information, see "Defining a New
Conference IVR Service” on page 15-9.
7
Click the Conference Chairperson tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Chairperson dialog box
opens.
8
If required, enable the chairperson functionality and select the
various voice messages and options for the chairperson connection.
For more information, see Table 15-4, “New Conference IVR Service
Properties - Conference Chairperson Options and Messages,” on
page 15-14.
9
Click the Conference Password tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Password dialog box
opens.
10 If required, enable the request for conference password before
moving the participant from the conference IVR queue to the
conference and set the MCU behavior for password request for Dialin and Dial-out participant connections. For more information, see
Table 15-5, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Password
Parameters,” on page 15-16.
11 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case.
For more information, see Table 15-5, “New Conference IVR Service
Properties - Conference Password Parameters,” on page 15-16.
12 Click the General tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
13 Select the messages that will be played during the conference. For
more information, see Table 15-6, “Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages,” on page 15-17.
14 Click the Roll Call tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Roll Call dialog box opens.
8-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
15 Enable the Roll Call feature and assign the appropriate audio file to
each message type. For more information, see Table 15-7, “Conference
IVR Service Properties - Roll Call Messages,” on page 15-21.
16 Click the Video Services tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
17 Define the Video Services parameters. For more information, see
Table 15-9, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services
Parameters,” on page 15-25.
18 Click the DTMF Codes tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - DTMF Codes dialog box opens.
The default DTMF codes for the various functions that can be
performed during the conference by all participants or by the
chairperson are listed. For the full list of the available DTMF codes,
see Table 15-10, “New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes,”
on page 15-27.
19 If required, modify the default DTMF codes and the permissions for
various operations including Operator Assistance options:
— *0 for individual help - the participant requested help for himself
or herself. In such a case, the participant requesting help is
moved to the Operator conference for one-on-one conversation.
By default, all participants can use this code.
8-6
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
— 00 for conference help - the conference chairperson (default) can
request help for the conference. In such a case, the operator joins
the conference.
20 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
21 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance
when the participant requires or requests help during the connection
process to the conference or during the conference.
22 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio
message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for
the operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if
you want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the
appropriate audio file to the RMX.
23 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Defining an Entry Queue IVR Service with Operator Assistance
Options
1
In the RMX Management pane, click IVR Services (
).
8-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the IVR Services list, click the New Entry Queue IVR Service (
button.
)
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
3
Define the Entry Queue Service Name.
4
Define the Entry Queue IVR Service Global parameters. For more
information, see Table 15-11, “Entry Queue IVR Service Properties Global Parameters,” on page 15-31.
5
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
6
Define the system behavior when the participant enters the Entry
Queue. This dialog box contains options that are identical to those in
the Conference IVR Service - Welcome Message dialog box. For more
information, see “Welcome tab” on page 13-11.
7
Click the Conference ID tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Conference ID dialog box opens.
8
Select the required voice messages. For more information, see
Table 15-12, “Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Conference ID,” on
page 15-33.
9
Click the Video Services tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
10 In the Video Welcome Slide list, select the video slide that will be
displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue. The slide list
includes the video slides that were previously uploaded to the MCU
memory.
11 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
8-8
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
12 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance
when the participant requires or requests help during the connection
process.
13 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio
message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for
operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if
you want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the
appropriate audio file to the RMX.
14 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue IVR Service definition.
The new Entry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Defining a Conference Profile for an Operator Conference
1
In the RMX Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
8-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the Profile name and, if required, the Profile general
parameters:
Table 8-1
New Profile - General Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique Profile name, as follows:
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (length varies according to the
field).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
It is recommended to use a name that indicates the
Profile type, such as Operator conference or Video
Switching conference.
Note: This is the only parameter that must be defined
when creating a new profile.
Routing Name
Enter the Profile name using ASCII characters set.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or
automatically generated by the system if no Routing
Name is entered as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is
used also as the Routing Name.
•
Line Rate
8-10
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or
full Unicode text) is entered in Display Name, the
ID (such as Conference ID) is used as the Routing
Name.
Select the conference bit rate. The line rate represents
the combined video, audio and Content rate.
The default setting is 384 Kbps.
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Table 8-1
New Profile - General Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
High Definition
Video Switching
If the Operator Conference option is selected, this
option is disabled, and the selection is cleared.
When selected, the conference is ultra-high quality
video resolution, in a special conferencing mode which
implies that all participants must connect at the same
line rate and use HD video.
This feature utilizes the resources more wisely and
efficiently by:
• Saving utilization of video ports (1 port per
participant as opposed to 4 ports in CP mode).
•
Video display is in full screen mode only and video
is switched to the speaker.
Drawbacks of this feature are that all participants must
connect at the same line rate, (e.g. HD) and all
participants with endpoints not supporting HD will
connect as secondary (audio only).
Select the High Definition resolution; select either
HD 720p or HD 1080p (in MPM+ and MPMx mode
only).
If HD 1080p is selected, endpoints that do not support
HD 1080p resolution are connected as Secondary
(Audio Only) participants.
Notes:
• High Definition Video Switching conferencing mode
is unavailable to ISDN participants.
For more information, see "Video Resolutions in
CP” on page 2-4.
Operator
Conference
4
Select this option to define the profile of an Operator
conference.
An Operator conference can only be a Continuous
Presence conference, therefore when selected, the
High Definition Video Switching option is disabled and
cleared.
When defining an Operator Conference, the Send
Content to Legacy Endpoints option in the Video
Settings tab is cleared and disabled.
Click the Advanced tab.
8-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 8-2
8-12
New Profile - Advanced Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Select this check box to activate encryption for the
conference. For more information, see "Message
Overlay” on page 2-55.
LPR
When selected (default for CP conferences), Lost
Packet Recovery creates additional packets that
contain recovery information used to reconstruct
packets that are lost during transmission.
LPR is automatically disabled if High Definition Video
Switching is selected. For more information, see "LPR
– Lost Packet Recovery” on page 2-76.
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Table 8-2
6
New Profile - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Auto Terminate
When selected (default), the conference automatically
ends when the termination conditions are met:
Before First Joins — No participant has connected to
a conference during the n minutes after it started.
Default idle time is 10 minutes.
At the End - After Last Quits — All the participants
have disconnected from the conference and the
conference is idle (empty) for the predefined time
period. Default idle time is 1 minute.
At the End - When Last Participant Remains —
Only one participant is still connected to the
conference for the predefined time period (excluding
the recording link which is not considered a participant
when this option is selected). This option should be
selected when defining a Profile that will be used for
Gateway Calls and you want to ensure that the call is
automatically terminated when only one participant is
connected. Default idle time is 1 minute.
Note: The selection of this option is automatically
cleared and disabled when the Operator Conference
option is selected. The Operator conference cannot
automatically end unless it is terminated by the RMX
User.
Echo
Suppression
When enabled (default), an algorithm is used to search
for and detect echo outside the normal range of human
speech (such as echo) and automatically mute them
when detected.
Clear this option to disable the Echo Suppression
algorithm.
Note: This option is activated only in MPM+ and
MPMx Card Configuration Mode.
Keyboard Noise
Suppression
When enabled, an algorithm is used to search for and
detect keyboard noises and automatically mute them
when detected.
Note: This option is activated only in MPM+ and
MPMx Card Configuration Mode.
Click the Video Quality tab.
8-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Profile – Video Quality dialog box opens.
7
Define the following parameters:
Table 8-3
New Profile - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
Video Quality
Depending on the amount of movement contained in
the conference video, select either:
• Motion – for a higher frame rate without increased
resolution
•
Sharpness – for higher video resolution and
requires more system resources
Note: When Sharpness is selected as the Video
Quality setting in the conference Profile, the RMX will
send 4CIF (H.263) at 15fps instead of CIF (H.264) at
30fps. For more information, see "Video Resolutions in
CP” on page 2-4.
8-14
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Table 8-3
New Profile - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Video Clarity™
When enabled (default), Video Clarity applies video
enhancing algorithms to incoming video streams of
resolutions up to and including SD. Clearer images
with sharper edges and higher contrast are sent back
to all endpoints at the highest possible resolution
supported by each endpoint.
All layouts, including 1x1, are supported.
Video Clarity can only be enabled for Continuous
Presence conferences in MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Mode.
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Select the transmission mode for the Content channel:
• Graphics — basic mode, intended for normal
graphics
•
Hi-res Graphics — a higher bit rate intended for
high resolution graphic display
•
Live Video — Content channel displays live video
Selection of a higher bit rate for the Content results in
a lower bit rate for the people channel.
For more information, see "H.239 / People+Content”
on page 2-29.
Content Protocol
8
H.263 – Content is shared using H.263 even if some
endpoints have H.264 capability.
Up to H.264 – H.264 is the default Content sharing
algorithm.
When selected:
• Content is shared using H.264 if all endpoints have
H.264 capability.
•
Content is shared using H.263 if all endpoints do
not have H.264 capability.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability
can connect to the conference but cannot share
Content.
Click the Video Settings tab.
The New Profile - Video Settings dialog box opens.
8-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9
Define the video display mode and layout. For more details, see
Table 1-2, “Profile Properties - Video Settings,” on page 1-21.
10 Click the Skins tab to modify the background and frames.
The New Profile - Skins dialog box opens.
11 Select one of the Skin options.
12 Click IVR tab.
The New Profile - IVR dialog box opens.
13 Select the IVR Service and if the conference requires a chairperson.
14 Optional. Click the Recording tab to enable conference recording
with Polycom RSS 2000.
15 Define the various recording parameters. for details, see Table 1-7,
“Profile Properties - Recording Parameters,” on page 1-32.
16 Click OK to complete the Profile definition.
A new Profile is created and added to the Conference Profiles list.
Defining an Ongoing Operator Conference
To start a conference from the Conference pane:
1 In the Conferences pane, click the New Conference ( ) button.
The New Conference – General dialog box opens.
8-16
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
2
In the Profile field, select a Profile in which the Operator Conference
option is selected.
Upon selection of the Operator Conference Profile, the Display Name
is automatically taken from the RMX User Login Name. This name
cannot be modified.
Only one Operator conference can be created for each User Login
name.
8-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 8-4
New Conference – General Options
Field
Description
Duration
Define the duration of the conference in hours using
the format HH:MM (default 01:00).
Notes:
• The Operator conference is automatically
extended up to a maximum of 168 hours.
Therefore, the default duration can be used.
•
Routing Name
This field is displayed in all tabs.
Routing Name is the name with which ongoing
conferences, Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues and
SIP Factories register with various devices on the
network such as gatekeepers and SIP server. This
name must defined using ASCII characters.
Comma, colon and semicolon characters cannot
be used in the Routing Name.
The Routing Name can be defined by the user or
automatically generated by the system if no Routing
Name is entered as follows:
• If ASCII characters are entered as the Display
Name, it is used also as the Routing Name
•
If a combination of Unicode and ASCII
characters (or full Unicode text) is entered as the
Display Name, the ID (such as Conference ID) is
used as the Routing Name.
If the same name is already used by another
conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue, the
RMX displays an error message and requests that
you to enter a different name.
8-18
ID
Enter the unique-per-MCU conference ID. If left
blank, the MCU automatically assigns a number
once the conference is launched.
This ID must be communicated to conference
participants to enable them to dial in to the
conference.
Conference
Password
Leave this field empty when defining an Operator
conference.
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Table 8-4
New Conference – General Options (Continued)
Field
Description
Chairperson
Password
Leave this field empty when defining an Operator
conference.
Reserve
Resources for
Video Participants
Enter the number of video participants for which the
system must reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
When defining an Operator conference it is
recommended to reserve resources for at least 2
video participants (for the operator and one
additional participant - who will be moved to the
Operator conference for assistance).
Reserve
Resources for
Audio Participants
Enter the number of audio participants for which the
system must reserve resources.
Default: 0 participants.
When defining an Operator conference and the
operator is expected to help voice participants, it is
recommended to reserve resources for at least 2
video participants (for the operator and one
additional participant - who will be moved to the
Operator conference for assistance).
Maximum Number
of Participants
Enter the maximum number of participants that can
connect to an Operator conference (you can have
more than two), or leave the default selection
(Automatic).
Maximum number of participants that can connect to
an Operator conference:
Enable ISDN/
PSTN Dial-in
Select this check box if you want ISDN and PSTN
participants to be able to connect directly to the
Operator conference. This may be useful if
participants are having problems connecting to their
conference and you want to identify the problem or
help them connect to their destination conference.
8-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 8-4
4
New Conference – General Options (Continued)
Field
Description
ISDN/PSTN
Network Service
and Dial-in
Number
If you have enable the option for ISDN/PSTN direct
dial-in to the Operator conference, assign the ISDN/
PSTN Network Service and a dial-in number to be
used by the participants, or leave these fields blank
to let the system select the default Network Service
and assign the dial-in Number.
Note: The dial-in number must be unique and it
cannot be used by any other conferencing entity.
Click the Participants tab.
The New Conference - Participants dialog box opens.
You must define or add the Operator participant to the Operator
conference.
This participant must be defined as a dial-out participant.
Define the parameters of the endpoint that will be used by the RMX
User to connect to the Operator conference and to other conference to
assist participants.
For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Participants Tab” on page 3-23.
5
Optional. Click the Information tab.
The Information tab opens.
6
Enter the required information. For more details, see the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Information Tab” on
page 3-27.
7
Click OK.
The new Operator conference is added to the ongoing Conferences list
with a special icon
.
The Operator participant is displayed in the Participants list with an
Operator participant icon
, and the system automatically dials
out to the Operator participant.
Saving an Operator Conference to a Template
The Operator conference that is ongoing can be saved as a template.
8-20
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
To save an ongoing Operator conference as a template:
1 In the Conferences List, select the Operator conference you want to
save as a Template.
2
Click the Save Conference to Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Save Conference to Template.
The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the
ongoing conference Display Name (the Login name of the RMX User).
The Template is displayed with the Operator Conference icon.
8-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template
An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator
Template saved in the Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Operator Template to start
as an ongoing Operator conference.
•
You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is
identical to your Login Name. For example, if your Login name is Polycom,
you can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is
Polycom.
•
If an ongoing Operator conference with the same name or any other
conference with the same ID is already running, you cannot start another
Operator conference with the same login name.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken
from the Conference Template Display Name.
8-22
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring
Assistance
Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing
conferences.
Each Operator conference includes at least one participant - the Operator.
You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double-clicking
the conference entry in the Conferences list or by right-clicking the
conference entry and selecting Conference Properties. For more
information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Conference
Level Monitoring” on page 3-50.
Requesting Help
A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from
his/her touch tone telephone or the endpoint’s DTMF input device. The
participant can request Individual Assistance (default DTMF code *0) or
Conference Assistance (default DTMF code 00).
Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination
conference ID or the conference password will wait for operator
assistance (provided that an Operator conference is active).
8-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
When requiring or requesting operator assistance, the RMX management
application displays the following:
•
The participant’s connection Status changes, reflecting the help
request. For more information, see Table 8-5.
•
The conference status changes and it is displayed with the
exclamation point icon and the status “Awaiting Operator”.
•
The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants
indicating that assistance will be provided shortly.
The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status
column:
Table 8-5
Icon
Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications
Status Indication
Description
Awaiting Individual
Assistance
The participant has requested the
operator’s assistance for himself/
herself.
Awaiting Conference
Assistance
The participant has requested the
operator’s assistance for the
conference. Usually this means that the
operator is requested to join the
conference.
When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for
individual assistance the participant Status indications are cleared.
8-24
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
Participant Alerts List
The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently
waiting for operator assistance.
Participants are automatically added to the Participants Alerts list in the
following circumstances:
•
The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the
wrong conference ID or conference password and waits for the
operator’s assistance
•
The participant requests Operator’s Assistance during the ongoing
conference
This list is used as reference only. Participants can be assisted and moved
to the Operator conference or the destination conference only from the
Participants list of the Entry Queues or ongoing conference where they are
awaiting assistance.
The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list
when moved to any conference (including the Operator conference).
Audible Alarms
In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the RMX,
an audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request
Operator Assistance.
Using Audible Alarms
The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is
enabled for each MCU in either the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager.
The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is
enabled and selected in the Setup > Audible Alarm > User
Customization. When the Audible Alarm is activated, the *.wav file
selected in the User Customization is played, and it is repeated according to
the number of repetitions defined in the User Customization.
8-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
If more than one RMX is monitored in the RMX Manager, the Audible
Alarm must be enabled separately for each RMX installed in the site/
configuration. A different *.wav file can be selected for each MCU.
When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or
by multiple MCUs, the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one
after the other. It is important to note that when Stop Repeating Alarm is
selected from the toolbar from the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager, all
activated Audible Alarms are immediately halted.
For more details on Audible alarms and their configuration, see
Moving Participants Between Conferences
The RMX User can move participants between ongoing conferences,
including the Operator conference, and from the Entry Queue to the
destination conference if help is required.
When moving between conferences or when a participant is moved from
an Entry Queue to a conference by the RMX user (after failure to enter the
correct destination ID or conference password), the IVR messages and
slide display are skipped.
Move Guidelines
• Move is available only between CP conferences. Move is unavailable
from/to Video Switching conferences.
8-26
•
Move between conferences can be performed without an active
Operator conference.
•
When moving the conference chairperson from his/her conference to
another conference, the source conference will automatically end if
the Auto Terminate When Chairperson Exits option is enabled and that
participant is the only conference chairperson.
•
When moving the Operator to any conference (following assistance
request), the IVR messages and slide display are skipped.
•
Participants cannot be moved from a Telepresence conference.
•
Participants cannot be moved from LPR-enabled conferences to nonLPR conferences. Move from non-LPR conferences to LPR-enabled
conferences is available.
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
•
Move between encrypted and non-encrypted conferences depends on
the ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag
setting, as described in Table 8-6:
Table 8-6
•
Participant Move Capabilities vs. ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF flag setting
Flag
Setting
Source
Conference/
EQ Encrypted
Destination
Conference
Encrypted
Move Enabled?
NO
Yes
Yes
Yes
NO
Yes
No
Yes
NO
No
Yes
No
NO
No
No
Yes
YES
Yes
Yes
Yes
YES
Yes
No
Yes
YES
No
Yes
Yes
YES
No
No
Yes
When moving dial-out participants who are disconnected to another
conference, the system automatically dials out to connect them to the
destination conference.
•
Cascaded links cannot be moved between conferences.
•
Participants cannot be moved to a conference if the move will cause
the number of participants to exceed the maximum number of
participants allowed for the destination conference.
Moving Participants
RMX users can assist participants by performing the following operations:
•
Move a participant to an Operator conference (Attend a participant).
•
Move a participant to the Home (destination) conference.
•
Move participant from one ongoing conference to another
A move can be performed using the following methods:
•
Using the participant right-click menu
8-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Using drag and drop
To move a participant from the ongoing conference using the right-click
menu options:
1
In the Conferences list, click the conference where there are
participants waiting for Operator’s Assistance to display the list of
participants.
2
In the Participants list, right-click the icon of the participant to move
and select one of the following options:
— Move to Operator Conference - to move the participant to the
Operator conference
— Move to Conference - to move the participant to any ongoing
conference.
When selected, the Move to Conference dialog box opens, letting
you select the name of the destination conference.
8-28
Chapter 8-Operator Assistance & Participant Move
— Back to Home Conference - if the participant was moved to
another conference or to the Operator conference, this options
moves the participant back to his/her source conference.
This option is not available if the participant was moved from
the Entry Queue to the Operator conference or the destination
conference.
Moving a Participant Interactively
You can drag and drop a participant from the Entry Queue or ongoing
conference to the Operator or destination (Home) conference:
1
Display the participants list of the Entry Queue or the source
conference by clicking its entry in the Conferences list.
2
In the Participants list, drag the icon of the participant to the
Conferences List pane and drop it on the Operator Conference icon or
another ongoing conference.
8-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
8-30
9
Conference Templates
Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create, save,
schedule and activate identical conferences.
A Conference Template:
•
Saves the conference Profile.
•
Saves all participant parameters including their Personal Layout and
Video Forcing settings.
•
Simplifies the setting up Telepresence conferences where precise
participant layout and video forcing settings are crucial.
Guidelines
•
•
•
The maximum number of templates is:
— RMX 1500 — 100
— RMX 2000 — 100
— RMX 4000 — 200
A maximum of 200 participants can be saved in a Conference
Template when the RMX is in MPM+ or MPMx mode. When the
RMX is in MPM (RMX 2000) mode, the maximum is 80 participants.
If the RMX is switched to from MPM+ or MPMx mode to MPM
(RMX 2000) mode, conference templates may include more
participants than the allowed maximum in MPM mode.
Trying to start a Conference Template that exceeds the allowed
maximum number of participants will result in participants being
disconnected due to resource deficiency.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
•
If the Profile assigned to a conference is deleted while the
conference is ongoing the conference cannot be saved as a template.
9-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9-2
•
A Profile assigned to a Conference Template cannot be deleted. The
system does not permit such a deletion.
•
Profile parameters are not embedded in the Conference Template, and
are taken from the Profile when the Conference Template becomes an
ongoing conference. Therefore, any changes to the Profile parameters
between the time the Conference Template was created and the time
that it is activated (and becomes an ongoing conference) will be
applied to the conference.
•
Only defined participants can be saved to the Conference Template.
Before saving a conference to a template ensure that all undefined
participants have disconnected.
•
Undefined participants are not saved in Conference Templates.
•
Participant properties are embedded in the Conference Template and
therefore, if the participant properties are modified in the Address
Book after the Conference Template has been created they are not
applied to the participant whether the Template becomes an ongoing
conference or not.
•
The Conference Template display name, routing name or ID can be the
same as an Ongoing Conference, reservation, Meeting Room or Entry
Queue as it is not active. However, an ongoing conference cannot be
launched from the Conference Template if an ongoing conference,
Meeting Room or Entry Queue already has the same name or ID.
Therefore, it is recommended to modify the template ID, display
name, routing name to be unique.
•
A Reservation that has become an ongoing conference can be saved as
Conference Template.
•
SIP Factories and Entry Queues cannot be saved as Conference
Templates.
•
The conference specified in the Conference Template can be designated
as a Permanent Conference. For more information see "Lecture Mode” on
page 2-94.
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
Using Conference Templates
The Conference Templates list is initially displayed as a closed tab in the
RMX Web Client main window. The number of saved Conference Templates
is indicated on the tab.
Conference Templates Tab
Number of Saved Conference Templates
Clicking the tab opens the Conference Templates list.
Toolbar buttons
Click to hide the
Conference Templates List
List of
Saved
Templates
Number of Saved Conference Templates
The Conference Templates are listed by Conference Template Display Name
and ID and can be sorted by either field. The list can be customized by resizing the pane, adjusting the column widths or changing the order of the
column headings.
For more information see RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
“Customizing the Main Screen” on page 11.
Clicking the anchor pin ( ) button hides the Conference Templates list as a
closed tab.
9-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Toolbar Buttons
The Conference Template toolbar includes the following buttons:
Table 1 Conference Templates – Toolbar Buttons
Button
Description
New Conference
Template
Creates a new Conference Template.
Delete Conference
Template
Deletes the Conference Template(s) that are
selected in the list.
Start Conference
from Template
Starts an ongoing conference from the
Conference Template that has an identical name,
ID parameters and participants as the template.
Schedule Reservation
from Template
Creates a conference Reservation from the
Conference Template with the same name, ID,
parameters and participants as the Template.
Opens the Scheduler dialog box enabling you to
modify the fields required to create a single or
recurring Reservation based on the template. For
more information see “Reservations” on page 1.
The Conferences List toolbar includes the following button:
Table 2 Conferences List – Toolbar Button
Button
Save Conference to
Template
Description
Saves the selected ongoing conference as a
Conference Template.
Creating a New Conference Template
There are two methods to create a Conference Template:
9-4
•
From scratch - defining the conference parameters and participants
•
Saving an ongoing conference as Template
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
Creating a new Conference Template from Scratch
To create a new Conference Template:
1 In the RMX Web Client, click the Conference Templates tab.
2
Click the New Conference Template (
) button.
The New Conference Template - General dialog box opens.
3
The fields of the New Template – General dialog box are identical to
those of the New Conference – General dialog box. For a full description
of the fields see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
“General Tab” on page 17.
4
Modify the fields of the General tab.
A unique dial-in number must be assigned to each conferencing entity. However,
Conference Templates can be assigned dial-in numbers that are already
assigned to other conferencing entities, but when the template is used to start
an ongoing conference or schedule a reservation, it will not start if another
ongoing conference, Meeting Room, Entry Queue or Gateway Profile is using
this number.
5
Click the Participants tab.
9-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Template – Participants dialog box opens.
The fields of the New Template – Participants dialog box are the same
as those of the New Conference – Participant dialog box.
For a full description of these fields see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Getting Started Guide, “Participants Tab” on page 23.
9-6
6
Optional. Add participants to the template from the Address Book.
7
Click the New button.
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
The New Participant – General tab opens.
The New Template – Participant dialog box remains open in the
background.
For a full description of the General tab fields see “Adding a new
participant to the Address Book Directly” on page 4.
8
Modify the fields of the General tab.
9
Click the Advanced tab.
9-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Participant – Advanced tab opens.
For a full description of the Advanced tab fields see, “New Participant –
Advanced Properties” on page 10.
10 Modify the fields of the Advanced tab.
11 Click the Media Sources tab.
9-8
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
The Media Sources tab opens.
The Media Sources tab enables you to set up and save Personal Layout
and Video Forcing settings for each participant. This is especially
important when setting up Telepresence conferences.
For a full description of Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings see
the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, “Changing the Video
Layout of a Conference” on page 69 and “Video Forcing” on page 71.
12 Modify the Personal Layout and Video Forcing settings for the
participant.
13 Optional. Click the Information tab.
9-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Participant – Information tab opens.
For a full description of the Information fields see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Getting Started Guide, "Information Tab” on page 3-27.
14 Click the OK button.
The participant you have defined is added to the Participants List.
The New Participant dialog box closes and you are returned to the New
Template – Participant dialog box (which has remained open since
Step 7).
15 Optional. In the New Conference Template dialog box, click the
Information tab.
9-10
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
The New Conference Template – Information tab opens.
For a full description of the Information fields see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Getting Started Guide, “Information Tab” on page 27.
16 Click the OK button.
The New Conference Template is created and its name is added to the
Conference Templates list.
9-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Saving an Ongoing or Operator Conference as a Template
Any ongoing or Operator Conference can be saved as a template.
To save an ongoing or Operator Conference as a template:
1 In the Conferences List, select the conference or Operator Conference to
be saved as a Template.
2
Click the Save Conference to Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Save Conference to Template.
The conference is saved to a template whose name is taken from the
ongoing conference Display Name (the Login name of the RMX User).
The Template is displayed with the Operator Conference icon.
9-12
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
Starting an Ongoing Conference From a Template
An ongoing conference can be started from any Template saved in the
Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing conference from a Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Template you want to start
as an ongoing conference.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
If a Conference Template is assigned a dial-in number that is already assigned
to an ongoing conference, Meeting Room, Entry Queue or Gateway Profile,
when the template is used to start an ongoing conference or schedule a
reservation it will not start. However, the same number can be assigned to
several conference templates provided they are not used to start an ongoing
conference at the same time. If a dial in number conflict occurs prior to the
conference’s start time, an alert is displayed: “ISDN dial-in number is already
assigned to another conferencing entity” and the conference cannot start.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken
from the Conference Template Display Name.
Participants that are connected to other ongoing conferences when
the template becomes an ongoing conference are not connected.
If an ongoing conference, Meeting Room or Entry Queue with the same Display
Name, Routing Name or ID already exist in the system, the conference will not
be started.
9-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Starting an Operator Conference from a Template
An ongoing Operator conference can be started from an Operator
Template saved in the Conference Templates list.
To start an ongoing Operator conference from an Operator Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Operator Template to start
as an ongoing Operator conference.
•
You can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is
identical to your Login Name. For example, if your Login name is Polycom,
you can only start an Operator conference from a template whose name is
Polycom.
•
If an ongoing Operator conference with the same name or any other
conference with the same ID is already running, you cannot start another
Operator conference with the same login name.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template.
The conference is started.
The name of the ongoing conference in the Conferences list is taken from
the Conference Template Display Name.
9-14
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
Scheduling a Reservation From a Conference
Template
A Conference Template can be used to schedule a single or recurring
Reservation.
To schedule a Reservation from a Conference Template:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Conference Template you
want to schedule as a Reservation.
2
Click the Schedule Reservation from Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Schedule Reservation from Template.
The Reservation Properties dialog box is displayed.
9-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Display Name of the Reservation is taken from the Conference
Template Display Name.
Conference Template and Reservation Name
For a full description of the Reservation Properties fields see Table 7-3,
“New Reservation – Schedule Tab,” on page 7-14.
3
Modify the fields of the Reservation Properties.
4
Click the OK button.
A Reservation is created based on the Conference Template. The
Reservation can be viewed and modified along with all other
Reservations using the Reservations - Calendar View and Reservations
List.
If you create a recurring reservation all occurrences have the same ID.
A recurring Reservation is assigned the same ISDN/PSTN dial-in
number for all recurrences.
If a dial-in number conflict occurs prior to the conference’s start time,
an alert is displayed: “ISDN dial-in number is already assigned to
another conferencing entity” and the conference cannot start.
9-16
Chapter 9-Conference Templates
The series number (_0000n) of each reservation is appended to its
Display Name.
Example:
Conference Template name: Sales
Display Name for single scheduled occurrence: Sales
If 3 recurrences of the reservation are created:
Display Name for occurrence 1:
Sales_00001
Display Name for occurrence 2:
Sales_00002
Display Name for occurrence 3:
Sales_00003
Deleting a Conference Template
One or several Conference Templates can be deleted at a time.
To delete Conference Templates:
1 In the Conference Templates list, select the Template(s) you want to
delete.
2
Click the Delete Conference Template ( ) button.
or
Right-click and select Delete Conference Template.
A confirmation dialog box is displayed.
3
Click the OK button to delete the Conference Template(s).
9-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9-18
10
Polycom Conferencing for
Microsoft Outlook®
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook is an add-in that enables users
to easily organize and invite attendees to Video Enabled meetings via
Microsoft Outlook®.
Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook is implemented by installing
the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook on Microsoft
Outlook®
e-mail clients. It enables meetings to be scheduled with video endpoints
from within Outlook. The add-in also adds a Polycom Conference button in
the Meeting tab of the Microsoft Outlook e-mail client ribbon.
10-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The meeting organizer clicks the Polycom Conference button to add
Conference Information to the meeting invitation.
Attendees call the meeting at the scheduled Start Time using the link or
the dial-in number provided in the meeting invitation.
A Gathering Slide is displayed to connected participants until the
conference starts.
Polycom Conference Button
Conference
Information
Added
Gathering Slide:
Displays Meeting
Information Until
Conference Starts
The Gathering Slide displays live video along with information taken from
the meeting invitation such as the subject, meeting organizer, duration,
10-2
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
dial-in numbers etc. At the end of the Gathering Phase, the conference
layout is displayed.
For more information see "Video Preview” on page 2-45.
Setting up the Calendaring Solution
The following steps are performed to set up the Calendaring solution:
A The administrator installs the Polycom Conferencing Add-in for
Microsoft for Microsoft Outlook e-mail clients. For more information,
see the Polycom Unified Communications Deployment Guide for Microsoft
Environments.
B
The administrator creates an Microsoft Outlook e-mail-account for the
RMX.
If included in the solution, Polycom DMA system (DMA) and
calendaring-enabled endpoints share this e-mail account. For more
information, see the Polycom Unified Communications Deployment
Guide for Microsoft Environments.
C
The administrator configures the RMX for Calendaring using the
Exchange Integration Configuration dialog box, providing it with the
Microsoft Exchange Server Name, User Name and Password and
optional Primary SMTP Mail box information needed to access the
e-mail account.
To configure the RMX’s Exchange Integration Configuration:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > Exchange Integration
Configuration.
The Exchange Integration Configuration dialog box is displayed.
10-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
There are three options that can be used to configure the Exchange
Integration Configuration. The option you choose will depend on the
configuration of the mailbox in the Exchange Server and the
configuration of the Exchange Server itself.
— Option 1 - Use this option if the Exchange Server settings have
been left at their default values.
— Option 2 - Use this option if the Primary SMTP Mailbox is not the
default mailbox.
— Option 3 - Use this option if the Exchange Server settings have
been modified by the administrator.
Option 1 - Using default Exchange Server settings
Mailbox Properties
Default
Mailbox
Name
Required
Fields
Exchange
Management
Console
Default
Domain
Name
10-4
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
a
Define the following fields:
Table 10-1 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 1
b
Field
Description
Enable
Calendaring
Service
Select or clear this check box to enable or
disable the Calendaring Service using the
Polycom Add-in for Microsoft Outlook. When
this check box is cleared all fields in the dialog
box are disabled.
Exchange Server
Address
Enter the IP address of the Exchange Server.
User Name
Enter the User Name of the RMX, as registered
in the Microsoft Exchange Server, that the
RMX uses to login to its e-mail account.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Password
Enter the Password the RMX uses to login to
its e-mail account as registered in the Microsoft
Exchange Server.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Domain
Enter the name of the network domain where
the RMX is installed as defined in the Microsoft
Exchange Server.
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
This field is left empty.
Accept
Appointments
Select this check box to enable the RMX to
send replies to meeting invitations.
Clear this check box when the RMX is part of a
Unified Conferencing solution that includes a
DMA, as the DMA will send a reply to the
meeting invitation.
Click the OK button.
10-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Option 2 - Using an alternate Primary SMTP Mailbox
Mailbox Properties
Different
Mailbox
Names
Primary
SMTP
Mailbox
10-6
Additional
Required
Field
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
a
Define the following fields:
Table 10-2 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 2
Field
Description
Enable
Calendaring
Service
Exchange Server
Address
User Name
These fields are defined as for Option 1
above.
Password
Domain
Accept
Appointments
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
b
Enter the name of the SMTP Mailbox in the
Microsoft Exchange Server to be monitored by
the RMX.
Note: Although several mailboxes can be
assigned to each user in the Microsoft
Exchange Server, only the Primary SMTP
Mailbox is monitored. The Primary SMTP
Mailbox name does not have to contain either
the RMX’s User Name or Domain name.
Click the OK button.
10-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Option 3 - Using modified Exchange Server settings
IIS Manager
Full path to
Exchange Server
Required
Fields
Exchange Web
Services Folder
Renamed from
EWS to EWD
10-8
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
a
Define the following fields:
Table 10-3 Exchange Integration Configuration - Option 3
Field
Description
Exchange Server
Address
If Exchange Server settings have been
modified, enter the full path to the Microsoft
Exchange Server where the RMX’s Microsoft
Outlook e-mail account is registered, for
example if the EWS folder has been renamed
EWD:
https://labexch01/EWD/
Exchange.asmx
Note: If a server name is entered, the RMX
and the Microsoft Exchange Server must be
registered to the same Domain. (The Domain
name entered in this dialog box must match the
Local Domain Name entry in the Management
Network - DNS Properties dialog box.)
For more information see "Modifying the
Management Network” on page 14-3.
Field length: Up to 80 characters.
Enable
Calendaring
Service
User Name
Password
Domain
These fields are defined as for Option 1
above.
Primary SMTP
Mailbox (Optional)
Accept
Appointments
b
Click the OK button.
If applicable, RSS, VMC, DMA and calendaring-enabled endpoints
are configured with the Exchange Server Name, User Names and
Passwords needed to access their accounts.
10-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
For more information see the Polycom Unified Communications
Deployment Guide for Microsoft Environments.
2
The administrator configures the RMX to have a default Ad-hoc Entry
Queue service enabled. If ISDN/PSTN participants are included, up to
two ISDN/PSTN dial-in numbers must be configured for the Ad Hoc
Entry Queue.
For more information see "Defining a New Entry Queue” on page 5-4.
Calendaring Guidelines
•
The RMX must have its MCU prefix registered in the gatekeeper.
For more information see "Modifying the Default IP Network Service” on
page 14-13.
•
The RMX must be configured as a Static Route.
For more information see "Modifying the Default IP Network Service” on
page 14-13.
•
The RMX’s Default Entry Queue must be configured as an Ad Hoc
Entry Queue and must be designated as the Transit Entry Queue.
For more information see the "Entry Queues” on page 5-1.
•
The meeting organizer can enable recording and/or streaming of the
meeting.
•
If meeting is to be recorded, the Ad Hoc Entry Queue must have
recording enabled in its Profile.
For more information see "Defining Profiles” on page 1-8.
•
Meetings can be single instance or have multiple occurrences.
•
Attendees that do not have video devices may be invited to the
meeting.
•
Attendees using e-mail applications that use the iCalendar format
may be invited to meetings via the Calendaring Service.
•
Meeting invitations sent by Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook
can be in a different language to the RMX Web Client. The following
languages are supported:
—
—
—
—
—
10-10
English
French
German
International Spanish
Korean
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
•
•
— Japanese
— Simplified Chinese
RMX resource management is the responsibility of the system
administrator:
— Conferences initiated by Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft
Outlook are ad hoc and therefore resources are not reserved in
advance.
— Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook Add-in assumes
that sufficient resources are available and does not check
resource availability. Sufficient resources are therefore not
guaranteed.
— A meeting invitation that is automatically accepted by the RMX
is not guaranteed availability of resources.
— If the RMX runs out of resources, attendees will not be able to
connect to their conferences.
By using DMA to load-balance resources between several RMXs,
resource capacity can be increased, alleviating resource availability
problems.
10-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Creating and Connecting to a Conference
Creating a Conference
Meetings are organized using the Microsoft Outlook client in the normal
manner.
If the meeting organizer decides that video participants are to be included
in a multipoint video conference, he/she clicks the Polycom Conference
button. Conference Information such as the Meeting ID and connection
information is automatically added to the existing appointment
information.
Polycom Conference Button
Conference
Information
10-12
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
The meeting organizer can add a meeting agenda or personal text to the
invitation before it is sent. The meeting organizer can update or cancel the
video enabled meeting in the same manner as for any other meeting.
When the meeting organizer sends the meeting invitation a meeting
record is saved in the Microsoft Exchange Server, the RMX, DMA, RSS and
calendaring-enabled endpoints.
RMXs, DMA and calendaring-enabled endpoints poll the Microsoft
Exchange Server to retrieve new meeting records and updates to existing
meeting records.
Table 10-4 summarizes the RMX’s usage of Microsoft Outlook data fields
included in the meeting invitation.
Table 10-4
Microsoft Outlook Field Usage
Usage by the RMX / DMA
Microsoft
Outlook Field
Subject
Start/End Time
Conference / Meeting
Room
Display Name of Conference
/ Meeting Room.
Gathering Slide
Meeting Name.
Used to calculate the Conference’s Duration.
Record
Enable Recording in the
Conference or Meeting
Room Profile.
Display Recording option.
Video Access
Number
Comprised of: <MCU Prefix
in Gatekeeper>
<Conference Numeric
ID>.
Note: It is important that
MCU Prefix in Gatekeeper
field in the RMX’s IP Network
Service - Gatekeeper tab and
the Dial-in prefix field in the
Polycom Conferencing Addin for Microsoft Outlook Video Network tab contain
the same prefix information.
Displayed as the IP dial
in number in the Access
Number section of the
Gathering Slide.
10-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 10-4
Microsoft Outlook Field Usage (Continued)
Usage by the RMX / DMA
Microsoft
Outlook Field
Conference / Meeting
Room
Gathering Slide
Video Access
Number (Cont.)
If Recording and Streaming
are enabled in the
Conference Profile, this
number is used as part of the
recording file name.
Audio Access
Number
ISDN/PSTN dial-in number.
Up to two numbers are
supported.
Displayed as the ISDN/
PSTN dial-in number in
the Access Number
section of the Gathering
Slide.
Streaming
recording link
Enables the recording of the
conference to the Polycom
RSS using the recording link.
Enables streaming of the
recording of the conference
from the Polycom RSS.
If recording is enabled, a
REC indicator is
displayed in the top left
corner of the slide.
Connecting to a Conference
Participants can connect to the conference in the following ways:
10-14
•
Participants with Polycom CMA Desktop™ or a Microsoft Office
Communicator client running on their PCs can click on a link in the
meeting invitation to connect to the meeting.
•
Participants with a HDX or a room system will receive a prompt from
the endpoint’s calendaring system along with a button that can be
clicked in order to connect.
Participants with endpoints that are not calendaring-enabled can
connect to the meeting by dialing the meeting number manually.
•
Participants outside the office or using PSTN or mobile phones, can
use the dial in number in the meeting invitation to manually dial in to
the meeting.
Chapter 10-Polycom Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook®
RMX Standalone Deployment
When using a single RMX in a standalone deployment, connection is via
an Ad Hoc Entry Queue. The meeting is started when the first participant
connects to the RMX.
When the first participant connects, a conference is created and named
according to the information contained in the dial string. Subsequent
participants connecting with the same dial string are routed from the Ad
Hoc Entry Queue to the conference.
After the conference has been created the Conference Name, Organizer,
Time, Duration and Password (if enabled) are retrieved from the conference
parameters for display during the Gathering Phase.
RMX and Polycom DMA System Deployment
In a DMA deployment a Virtual Meeting Room is activated when the first
participant connects to the DMA. DMA receives the dial string to activate
a Virtual Meeting Room on the RMX.
DMA uses the Meeting ID contained in the dial-in string to access meeting
information stored in the Exchange Server database.
When the meeting information is found on the Exchange Server, the
Conference Name, Organizer, Time, Duration and Password (if enabled) are
retrieved from the Exchange Server database for display during the
Gathering Phase.
If enabled, automatically generated passwords are ignored.
For more information see "Automatic Password Generation Flags” on
page 19-47.
10-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Polycom Solution Support
Polycom Implementation and Maintenance services provide support for
Polycom solution components only. Additional services for supported
third-party Unified Communications (UC) environments integrated with
Polycom solutions are available from Polycom Global Services and its
certified Partners. These additional services will help customers
successfully design, deploy, optimize and manage Polycom visual
communications within their UC environments.
Professional Services for Microsoft Integration is mandatory for Polycom
Conferencing for Microsoft Outlook and Microsoft Office
Communications Server integrations. For additional information and
details please see http://www.polycom.com/services/
professional_services/index.html or contact your local Polycom
representative.
10-16
11
Conference and Participant
Monitoring
You can monitor ongoing conferences and perform various operations
while conferences are running.
Three levels of monitoring are available with the RMX:
•
General Monitoring - You can monitor the general status of all
ongoing conferences and their participants in the main window.
•
Conference Level Monitoring - You can view additional information
regarding a specific conference and modify its parameters if
required, using the Conference Properties option.
•
Participant Level Monitoring - You can view detailed information on
the participant's status, using the Participant Properties option.
•
The maximum number of participants:
The following numbers are for MPM card assemblies with maximum resource
capacities.
—
—
—
—
—
—
RMX 1500 MPMx Mode: 360 (90 video).
RMX 2000 MPM Mode: 400 (80 video).
RMX 2000 MPM+ Mode: 800 (160 video).
RMX 2000 MPMx Mode: 720 (180 video).
RMX 4000 MPM+ Mode: 1600 (160 video).
RMX 4000 MPMx Mode: 1440 (180 video).
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
11-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
General Monitoring
Users can monitor a conference or keep track of its participants and
progress. For more information, see RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started
Guide, "Monitoring Ongoing Conferences” on page 3-48.
You can click the blinking Participant Alerts indication bar to view
participants that require attention. For more information, see "System and
Participant Alerts” on page 19-1.
Conference Level Monitoring
In addition to the general conference information that is displayed in the
Conference list pane, you can view the details of the conference’s current
status and setup parameters, using the Conference Properties dialog box.
General
11-2
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

To view the parameters of an ongoing conference:
1 In the Conference list pane, double-click the conference or right-click
the conference and then click Conference Properties.
The Conference Properties - General dialog box with the General tab
opens.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The following information is displayed in the General tab:
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - General
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name is the conference name in native
language and Unicode character sets to be displayed
in the RMX Web Client.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Duration
The expected duration of the conference using the
format HH:MM.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
11-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - General (Continued)
11-4
Field
Description
Routing Name
The ASCII name of the conference. It can be used by
H.323 and SIP participants for dialing in directly to the
conference. It is used to register the conference in
the gatekeeper and the SIP server.
Start Time
The time the conference started.
End Time
The expected conference end time.
Conference
Password
A numeric password for participants to access the
conference.
Chairperson
Password
A numeric password used by participants to identify
themselves as the conference chairperson.
ID
The conference ID.
Profile
The name of the conference Profile from which
conference parameters were taken.
Line Rate
The maximum transfer rate, in kilobytes per second
(Kbps) of the call (video and audio streams).
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - General (Continued)
Field
Description
Video Switching
When selected, the conference is of ultra-high quality
video resolution, in a special conferencing mode
which implies that all participants must connect at the
same line rate and use HD video.
This feature utilizes the resources more wisely and
efficiently by:
• Saving utilization of video ports (1 port per
participant as opposed to 4 ports in CP mode).
•
Video display is in full screen mode only.
Drawbacks of this feature are that all participants
must connect at the same line rate, (e.g. HD) and all
participants with endpoints not supporting HD will
connect as secondary (audio only).
Video layout changes are not enabled during a
conference.
Video Switching supports the following resolutions:
• MPM:
•
•
MPM+:
•
•
HD 720P
HD 1080p
MPMx:
•
•
•
•
1080p30
720p30
720p60
SD30
If HD 1080p is selected, endpoints that do not support
HD 1080p resolution are connected as Secondary
(Audio Only) participants.
Note: Video Switching conferencing mode is
unavailable to ISDN participants.
For more information, see "Video Resolutions in CP”
on page 2-4.
Reserve
Resources for
Video Participants
Displays the number of video participants for which
the system reserved resources.
Default: 0 participants.
11-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - General (Continued)
2
11-6
Field
Description
Reserve
Resources for
Audio Participants
Displays the number of audio participants for which
the system reserved resources.
Default: 0 participants.
Max Number of
Participants
Indicates the total number of participants that can be
connected to the conference. The Automatic setting
indicates the maximum number of participants that
can be connected to the MCU according to resource
availability.
Enable ISDN/
PSTN Network
Service
When selected, ISDN/PSTN participants can dial into
the conference.
ISDN/PSTN
Network Service
When the Enable ISDN/PSTN Network Service
is selected, displays the default Network Service.
Dial-in Number (1)
Displays the conference dial in number.
Dial-in Number (2)
Displays the conference dial in number.
Click the Advanced tab.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The Conference Properties - Advanced dialog box opens.
3
The following information is displayed in the Advanced tab:
Table 11-2 Conference Properties - Advanced Parameters
Field/Option
Description
Encryption
Indicates whether the conference is encrypted.
LPR
Indicates whether LPR is enabled.
Auto Terminate
When selected, indicates that the MCU will
automatically terminate the conference when Before
First Joins, At the End-After Last Quits and At the End
- When Last Participant Remains parameters apply.
Echo
Suppression
When selected, indicates that when echo is detected it
is automatically muted.
Keyboard Noise
Suppression
When selected, indicates that when keyboard noises
are detected they are automatically muted.
11-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-2 Conference Properties - Advanced Parameters (Continued)
4
Field/Option
Description
Dial Out
Manually
Indicates whether dial-out participants are manually
(when selected) or automatically (when cleared)
connected to the conference.
Click the Gathering Settings tab.
The Conference Properties - Gathering Settings dialog box opens.
5
The following information is displayed:
Table 12
Profile - Gathering Settings
Field/Options
Enable Gathering
11-8
Description
Indicates whether the Gathering Phase has been
enabled.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 12
Profile - Gathering Settings
Field/Options
Description
Display Language
Indicates the language of the Gathering Slide field
headings.
Note: When working with the Polycom
Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook, the
language selected should match the language
selected for the conference in the Polycom
Conferencing Add-in for Microsoft Outlook to
ensure that the Gathering Phase slide displays
correctly.
Access Number 1
Indicates the ISDN or PSTN number(s) to call to
connect to the conference.
Note: The numbers entered must be verified as the
actual Access Numbers.
Access Number 2
Info 1
Info 2
Additional information to be displayed during the
Gathering Phase.
Info 3
Click the Video Quality tab.
11-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Conference Properties - Video Quality dialog box opens.
The following information is displayed:
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - Video Quality Parameters
Field/Option
Description
People Video Definition
11-10
Video Quality
Indicates the resolution and frame rate that determine
the video quality set for the conference. Possible
settings are: Motion or Sharpness. For more
information, see "Video Resolutions in CP” on
page 2-4.
Video Clarity™
Indicated if Video Clarity is enabled for the conference.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-1 Conference Properties - Video Quality Parameters (Continued)
Field/Option
Description
Content Video Definition
Content Settings
Indicates the Content channel resolution set for the
conference. Possible resolutions are:
• Graphics – default mode
•
•
Content Protocol
Hi-res Graphics – requiring a higher bit rate
Live Video – content channel is live video
H.263 – Content is shared using H.263 even if some
endpoints have H.264 capability.
Up to H.264 – H.264 is the default Content sharing
algorithm.
When selected:
• Content is shared using H.264 if all endpoints have
H.264 capability.
•
Content is shared using H.263 if all endpoints do
not have H.264 capability.
•
Endpoints that do not have at least H.263 capability
can connect to the conference but cannot share
Content.
11-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
Click the Video Settings tab to list the video parameters.
Video
Settings
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 11-2 Conference Properties - Video Settings Parameters
11-12
Field
Description
Presentation
Mode
When checked, indicates that the Presentations
Mode is active. For more information, see
"Presentation Mode” on page 1-21.
Lecturer View
Switching
When checked, the Lecturer View Switching enables
automatic random switching between the conference
participants in the lecturer video window.
Send Content to
Legacy Endpoints
Select this option to enable Legacy endpoints to
send content to H.323/SIP/ISDN endpoints that do
not support H.239 Content (legacy endpoints) over
the video (people) channel, allowing all conference
participants to view the content.
Same Layout
When checked, forces the selected layout on all
conference participants, and the Personal Layout
option is disabled.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-2 Conference Properties - Video Settings Parameters (Continued)
Skins
IVR
Info
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions
7
Field
Description
Auto Layout
When enabled, the system automatically selects the
conference layout based on the number of
participants in the conference.
Lecturer
Indicates the name of the lecturer (if one is selected).
Selecting a lecturer enables the Lecture Mode.
Telepresence
Mode Enabled
Indicates if the conference is
running in Telepresence Mode.
Telepresence
Mode
Indicates the Telepresence Mode.
Telepresence
Layout Mode
Indicates the layout of the
Telepresence Mode.
Video Layouts
(graphic)
Indicates the currently selected video layout.
These fields
are displayed if
the RMX has a
Telepresence
license
installed.
See "Defining
Profiles” on
page 1-8.
Click the Skins tab to view the skin selected for the conference.
You cannot select another skin during an ongoing conference.
8
Click the IVR tab to view the IVR settings.
9
Click the Information tab to view general information defined for the

conference. Changes made to this information once the conference is
running are not saved to the CDR.

   10 Click the Recording tab to review the recording settings for the
conference.
11 Click OK to close the Conference Properties dialog box.
11-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring Operator Conferences and Participants Requiring
Assistance
Operator conferences are monitored in the same way as standard ongoing
conferences.
Each Operator conference includes at least one participant - the Operator.
You can view the properties of the Operator conference by double-clicking
the conference entry in the Conferences list or by right-clicking the
conference entry and selecting Conference Properties. For more
information, see the RMX 15002000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Conference
Level Monitoring” on page 3-50.
Requesting Help
A participant can request help using the appropriate DTMF code from
his/her touch tone telephone or the endpoint’s DTMF input device. The
participant can request Individual Assistance (default DTMF code *0) or
Conference Assistance (default DTMF code 00).
Participants in Entry Queues who failed to enter the correct destination
conference ID or the conference password will wait for operator
assistance (provided that an Operator conference is active).
11-14
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
When requiring or requesting operator assistance, the RMX management
application displays the following:
•
The participant’s connection Status changes, reflecting the help
request. For details, see Table 11-3.
•
The conference status changes and it is displayed with the
exclamation point icon and the status “Awaiting Operator”.
•
The appropriate voice message is played to the relevant participants
indicating that assistance will be provided shortly.
The following icons and statuses are displayed in the Participant Status
column:
Table 11-3 Participants List Status Column Icons and Indications
Icon
Status indication
Description
Awaiting Individual
Assistance
The participant has requested the
operator’s assistance for himself/
herself.
Awaiting Conference
Assistance
The participant has requested the
operator’s assistance for the
conference. Usually this means that the
operator is requested to join the
conference.
When the Operator moves the participant to the Operator conference for
individual assistance the participant Status indications are cleared.
11-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Request to Speak
Participants that were muted by the conference organizer/system
operator can indicate that they want to be unmuted by entering the
appropriate DTMF code.
An icon is displayed in the Role column of the Participants list for 30
seconds.
Request to Speak
Request to Speak is:
•
Activated when the participant enters the appropriate DTMF code
(default: 99).
The DTMF code can be modified in the conference IVR Service
Properties - DTMF Codes dialog box.
11-16
•
Available for dial-in and dial-out participants.
•
A participant can request to speak more than once during the
conference.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
•
Supported in all conference types.
•
Supported in H.323 and SIP environments.
•
The duration of the icon display cannot be modified.
Participant Alerts List
The Participant Alerts list contains all the participants who are currently
waiting for operator assistance.
Participants are automatically added to the Participants Alerts list in the
following circumstances:
•
The participant fails to connect to the conference by entering the
wrong conference ID or conference password and waits for the
operator’s assistance
•
The participant requests Operator’s Assistance during the ongoing
conference
This list is used as reference only. Participants can be assisted and moved
to the Operator conference or the destination conference only from the
Participants list of the Entry Queues or ongoing conference where they are
awaiting assistance.
The participants are automatically removed from the Participant Alerts list
when moved to any conference (including the Operator conference).
Participant Level Monitoring
In addition to conference information, you can view detailed information
regarding the status and parameters of each listed participant, using the
Participant Properties dialog box. Participant properties can be displayed
for all participants currently connected to a conference and for defined
participants that have been disconnected.
Properties differ for IP and ISDN/PSTN participants.
11-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Displaying Participants Properties:
1 In the Participant List pane double-click the participant entry.
Alternatively, right-click a participant and then click Participant
Properties.
The Participant Properties - Media Sources dialog box opens.
11-18
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Media
Sources
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
The Media Sources dialog box enables you to mute participant’s audio,
suspend participant’s video transmission and select a personal Video
Layout for the participant.
For ISDN/PSTN participants, only the following tabs are displayed in the
Participant Properties dialog box:
• General, Advanced, Information
•
•
•
Media Sources
Connection Status
Channel Status
The General, Advanced and Information tabs include the same properties for
new and defined participants. For more information, see "Adding a new
participant to the Address Book Directly” on page 6-4.
IP Participant Properties
Table 11-4 Participant Properties - Media Sources Parameters
Field
Description
Name
Indicates the participant’s name.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
Endpoint Website
Click the Endpoint Website hyperlink to connect to the
internal website of the participant’s endpoint. It enables
you to perform administrative, configuration and
troubleshooting activities on the endpoint.
The connection is available only if the IP address of the
endpoint’s internal site is filled in the Website IP Address
field in the Participant Properties - General dialog box.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs (excluding ISDN/
PSTN participants).
Layout Type
Indicates whether the video layout currently viewed by the
participant is the Conference or Personal Layout. If
Personal Layout is selected, you can select a Video
Layout that will be viewed only by this participant.
11-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-4 Participant Properties - Media Sources Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Video Layout
Indicates the video layout currently viewed by the
participant. When Personal Layout is selected in the
Layout Type you can force participants to the video
windows in a layout that is specific to the participant. For
more information, see RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting
Started Guide, "Personal Layout Control with the RMX
Web Client” on page 3-81.
Mute/Suspend
Indicates if the endpoint’s audio and/or video channels
from the endpoint have been muted/suspended. The
entity that initiated audio mute or video suspend is also
indicated.
• MCU – Audio or Video channel has been muted/
suspended by the MCU.
•
User – Channels have been muted/suspended by
the RMX user.
•
Participant – Channels have been muted/
suspended by the participant from the endpoint.
You can also cancel or perform mute and suspend
operation using these check boxes.
Block
11-20
When checked, the audio transmission from the
conference to the participant’s endpoint is blocked, but
the participant will still be heard by other participants.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
2
Click the Connection Status tab to view the connection status, and if
disconnected the cause of the disconnection.
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Connection
Status
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Table 11-5 Participant Properties - Connection Status Parameters
Field
Description
Participant Status
Status
Indicates the connection status of the participant.
Connection Time
The date and time the participant connected to the
conference.
Note: The time format is derived from the MCU’s
operating system time format.
Disconnection
Time
The date and time the defined participant
disconnected from the conference.
Connection
Retries Left
Indicates the number of retries left for the system to
connect defined participant to the conference.
11-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-5 Participant Properties - Connection Status Parameters
3
Field
Description
Call
Disconnection
Cause
Displays the cause for the defined participant’s
disconnection from the conference. See Appendix A:
"Disconnection Causes” on page A-1.
Video
Disconnection
Cause
Displays the cause the video channel could not be
connected. For more information, see Appendix A:
"Disconnection Causes” on page A-1.
Possible Solution
In some cases, a possible solution is indicated to the
cause of the video disconnection.
Click the H.245 (H.323) tab during or after the participant’s
connection process to view information that can help in resolving
connection issues.
LPR activity
(Displayed in all three panes)
List’s the endpoint’s capabilities as
retrieved from the remote site
11-22
Displays the endpoint’s actual
capabilities used for the connection
Displays the MCU’s capabilities used for
connection with the participant
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-6 Participant Properties - H.245/SDP Parameters
4
Field
Description
Remote
Capabilities
Lists the participant’s capabilities as declared by the
endpoint.
Remote
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint
when establishing the connection with the MCU
(Endpoint to MCU).
Local
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU
when establishing the connection with the
participant’s endpoint (MCU to Endpoint).
Click the SDP (SIP) tab.
11-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
SIP People+Content information is displayed in all three panes of the
Participant Properties - SDP tab.
11-24
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Channel
Status
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions

Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
5
Click on the Channel Status tab to view the status of the various
channels.
11-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-7 Participant Properties - Channel Status Parameters
11-26
Field
Description
Channels Used
When checked, indicates the channel type used by
the participant to connect to the conference:
Incoming channels are endpoint to MCU, Outgoing
channels are from MCU to endpoint.
Channels:
• H.225/Signaling - The call-signaling channel.
• H.245/SDP - The Control channel.
• Audio in - Incoming audio channel
• Audio out - Outgoing audio channel
• Video in - Incoming video channel
• Video out - Outgoing video channel
• Content in - H.239/People+Content conferences
• Content out - H.239/People+Content
conferences
• FECC in - The incoming FECC channel is open.
• FECC out - The outgoing FECC channel is open.
Columns:
• Faulty – A red exclamation point indicates a
faulty channel condition. This is a real-time
indication; when resolved the indication
disappears. An exclamation point indicates that
further investigation may be required using
additional parameters displayed in the
Advanced Channel Status tab.
•
Bit Rate – The actual transfer rate for the
channel.
•
Packet Loss – The accumulated count of all
packets that are missing according to the RTCP
report since the channel was opened. This field
is relevant only during the connection stage and
does not display faulty indications.
•
Fraction Loss (Peak) – The ratio between the
number of lost packets and the total number of
transmitted packets since the last RTCP report.
Peak (in parentheses) indicates the highest
ratio recorded since the channel was opened.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-7 Participant Properties - Channel Status Parameters (Continued)
Field
Description
Channels Used
(cont.)
•
Number of Packets – The number of received
or transmitted packets since the channel has
opened. This field does not cause the display of
the faulty indicator.
•
Jitter (Peak) – Displays the network jitter (the
deviation in time between the packets) as
reported in the last RTCP report (in
milliseconds). Peak (in parentheses) reflects the
maximum network jitter since the channel was
opened.
•
Latency – Indicates the time it takes a packet to
travel from one end to another in milliseconds
(derived from the RTCP report).
Sync Status
Channel - The channel type: Video or Content.
Source - The name of the participant currently
viewed by this participant.
Position - The video layout position indicating the
place of each participant as they appear in a
conference.
Protocol Sync Loss - Indicates whether the system
was able to synchronize the bits order according to
the selected video protocol.
Video Intra Sync - Indicates whether the
synchronization on a video Intra frame was
successful.
Video Resolution - The video resolution of the
participant.
Rx - Rate
The received line rate.
Tx - Rate
The transmitted line rate.
Tx - Video Sync
Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization
problem in the outgoing channel from the MCU.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
Rx - Video Sync
Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization
problem in the incoming channel from the endpoint.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
11-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-7 Participant Properties - Channel Status Parameters (Continued)
6
Field
Description
Tx - LPR
Activation
When checked, indicates LPR activation in the
outgoing channel.
Rx - LPR
Activation
When checked, indicates LPR activation in the
incoming channel.
FECC Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is the
holder of the FECC Token.
Content Token
When checked, indicates that the participant is the
holder of the Content Token.
Click the Channel Status Advanced tab to view additional
information for selected audio and video channels.
In the Channel Status - Advanced tab, channels can be selected for
viewing additional information:
11-28
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-8 Participant Properties - Channel Status Advanced Parameters
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Channel
Status
Advanced
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions
Field
Description
Channel Info
Select a channel to view its information:
• H.225

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
H.245
Audio in
Audio out
Video in
Video out
Content in
Content Out
SIP BFCP TCP IN
MCU Address
The IP address of the MCU to which the participant is
connected and the port number allocated to the
participant incoming media stream on the MCU side.
Party Address
The IP address of the participant and the port number
allocated to the media stream on the participant side.
Media Info
This table provides information about the audio and
video parameters, such as video algorithm, resolution,
etc.... For more information, see Appendix E:
"Participant Properties Advanced Channel Information”
on page E-1.
RTP Statistics
This information may indicate problems with the network
which can affect the audio and video quality. For more
information, see Appendix E: "Participant Properties
Advanced Channel Information” on page E-1.
11-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
7
Table 11-9 Participant Properties - Gatekeeper Status Parameters
11-30
Administrator
Operator
Tab
Chairperson
Viewing Permissions
Gatekeeper
Status
Click the Gatekeeper Status tab to view its parameters.

Field
Description
Requested
Bandwidth
The bandwidth requested by the MCU from the
gatekeeper.
Allocated
Bandwidth
The actual bandwidth allocated by the gatekeeper to
the MCU.
Required Info
Interval
Indicates the interval, in seconds, between
registration messages that the MCU sends to the
gatekeeper to indicate that it is still connected.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-9 Participant Properties - Gatekeeper Status Parameters
Field
Description
Gatekeeper State
Indicates the status of the participant’s registration
with the gatekeeper and the bandwidth allocated to
the participant. The following statuses may be
displayed:
• ARQ – Admission Request - indicates that the
participant has requested the gatekeeper to
allocate the required bandwidth on the LAN.
•
Admitted – indicates that the gatekeeper has
allocated the required bandwidth to the
participant.
•
DRQ – Disengage Request – the endpoint
informs the gatekeeper that the connection to the
conference is terminated and requests to
disconnect the call and free the resources.
•
None – indicates that there is no connection to
the gatekeeper.
11-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring ISDN/PSTN Participants
Using the Participant Properties dialog box, you can monitor and verify the
properties of an ISDN/PSTN participant. The dialog box’s tabs contain
information that is relevant to the participant’s status only while the
conference is running and is used to monitor the participant’s status when
connection problems occur.
•
Table 11-10 lists the audio algorithms that are supported for ISDN
participants according to their connection bit rate:
Table 11-10 Supported Audio Algorithms vs Bit Rate
Bit Rate
Audio
Algorithm
96Kbps
(and Lower)
128Kbps – 192Kbps
256Kbps
(and Higher)
G722.1 16K
G722.1 C 32K
G722.1 C 48K
G722.1 C 24K
G722.1 C 24K
G722.1 C 32K
Siren14 24K
Siren14 32K
G722.1 C 24K
G722 48K
Siren14 24K
Siren14 48K
G722 56K
G722.1 32K
Siren14 32K
G722 64K
G722.1 24K
Siren14 24K
G711 56K
G722 48K
G722.1 32K
G711 64K
G722 56K
G722.1 24K
G722 64K
G722.1 16K
G711 56K
G722 48K
G711 64K
G722 56K
G722 64K
G711 56K
G711 64K
11-32
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
To view the participant’s properties during a conference:
1 In the Participants list, right click the desired participant and select
Participant Properties.
The Participant Properties - Media Sources dialog box is displayed.
Table 11-11 ISDN/PSTN Participant Properties - Media Sources
Field
Description
Mute/Suspend
Indicates if the endpoint’s audio and/or video
channels from the endpoint have been muted/
suspended.
11-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-11 ISDN/PSTN Participant Properties - Media Sources (Continued)
Field
Description
Mute/Suspend
(cont.)
The entity that initiated audio mute or video suspend
is also indicated.
• MCU – Audio or Video channel has been
muted/suspended by the MCU.
•
User – Channels have been muted/suspended
by the RMX user.
•
Participant – Channels have been muted/
suspended by the participant from the endpoint.
You can also cancel or perform mute and suspend
operation using these check boxes.
Block (Audio)
11-34
When checked, the audio transmission from the
conference to the participant’s endpoint is blocked,
but the participant will still be heard by other
participants.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
2
Click the H.221 tab to view additional information that can help to
resolve connection issues.
List’s the endpoint’s capabilities as
retrieved from the remote site
Displays the endpoint’s actual
capabilities used for the connection
Displays the MCU’s capabilities used for
connection with the participant
Table 11-12 Participant Properties - H.221 Parameters
Field
Description
Remote
Capabilities
Lists the participant’s capabilities as declared by the
endpoint.
11-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 11-12 Participant Properties - H.221 Parameters (Continued)
3
11-36
Field
Description
Remote
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the endpoint
when establishing the connection with the MCU
(Endpoint to MCU).
Local
Communication
Mode
Displays the actual capabilities used by the MCU
when establishing the connection with the
participant’s endpoint (MCU to Endpoint).
Click the Connection Status tab to view general information
regarding the participant connection and disconnection causes of the
participant to the conference.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-13 ISDN/PSTN Participant Properties - Connection Status
Field
Description
Status
Indicates the connection status of the participant to
the conference. If there is a problem, the appropriate
status is displayed, for example, Disconnected.
Connection Time
The date and time the participant connected to the
conference.
Disconnection
Time
The date and time the participant was disconnected
from the conference.
Connection
Retries Left
Indicates the number of retries left for the system to
connect the participant to the conference.
Call Disconnection
Cause
For a full list of Disconnection Causes, see “ISDN
Disconnection Causes” on page A-9.
11-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Click the Channel Status tab to view the status of a participant’s
channels.
Table 11-14 ISDN/PSTN Participant Properties - Channel Status
11-38
Field
Description
Connected Media
Indicates if the participant is connected with Audio,
Video and Content media channels.
Channels Used
•
Channel – Indicates the channel used by the
participants and whether the channel is
connected (indicated with a check mark) or
disconnected.
Chapter 11-Conference and Participant Monitoring
Table 11-14 ISDN/PSTN Participant Properties - Channel Status
Field
Description
Channels Used
(continued)
•
Participant Phone Number – In a dial-in
connection, indicates the participant’s CLI
(Calling Line Identification) as identified by the
MCU.
In a dial-out connection, indicates the
participant’s phone number dialed by the MCU
for each channel.
•
MCU Phone Number – In a dial-in connection,
indicates the MCU number dialed by the
participant.
In a dial-out connection, indicates the MCU (CLI)
number as seen by the participant. This is the
number entered in the MCU Number field in the
Network Service.
Tx - Video Sync
Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization
problem in the outgoing channel from the MCU.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
Rx - Video Sync
Loss
When checked, indicates a video synchronization
problem in the incoming channel from the endpoint.
The counter indicates the sync-loss count.
Content Token
A check mark indicates that the participant is the
current holder of the Content Token.
The Connected Media and Channels Used fields of an Audio Only participant
are displayed as follows:
Audio is the only
Connected
Media
Single channel
is used
11-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring Telepresence Participant Properties
A Telepresence status indicator is displayed in the Participant Properties Advanced tab when monitoring conference participants.
The Telepresence mode of the participant is indicated:
11-40
•
RPX - the participant’s endpoint is transmitting 4:3 video format.
•
TPX - the participant’s endpoint is transmitting 16:9 video format.
•
None - the participant’s endpoint is neither RPX nor TPX.
12
Recording Conferences
Conferences running on the RMX can be recorded using a Polycom®
RSS™ Recording and Streaming Server (RSS).
The recording system can be installed at the same site as the
conferencing MCU or at a remote site. Several MCU’s can share the same
recording system.
Recording conferences is enabled via a Recording Link, which is a dial-out
connection from the conference to the recording system.
Recording can start automatically, when the first participant connects to
a conference, or on request, when the RMX user or conference
chairperson initiates it.
Multiple Recording Links may be defined.
Conference Recording Links can be associated on the RMX with Virtual
Recording Rooms (VRR), created and saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000
Version 6.0 Recording and Streaming Server (RSS).
Each Recording Link defined on the RMX can be given a descriptive name
and can be associated with one VRR saved on the Polycom RSS 4000.
The following guidelines apply:
•
A Recording Link that is being used by an ongoing conference cannot
be deleted.
•
A Recording Link that is assigned to a Profile cannot be deleted.
•
While a Profile s being used in an ongoing conference, it cannot have
a different Recording Link assigned to it.
•
Up to 100 Recording Links can be listed for selection in the
Conference Profile.
•
Multiple Recording Links are supported in Continuous Presence and
Video Switched conferences.
•
The number of Recording Links available for selection is determined
by the value of the MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS System Flag
in system.cfg. Default value is 20 Recording Links.
12-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Creating Multiple Virtual Recording Rooms on the RSS
If the environment includes a Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0 Recording
and Streaming Server (RSS) and you want to associate Recording Links on
the RMX with Virtual Recording Rooms (VRR), created and saved on the
Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0 perform the following operations on the
RSS:
1
Modify the parameters of a recording Template to meet the recording
requirements.
2
Assign the modified recording Template to a VRR. The recording and
streaming server will assign a number to the VRR.
3
Repeat Step 1 and Step 2 for each VRR to create additional VRRs.
For more information see the RSS 4000 Version 6.0 User Guide.
Configuring the RMX to Enable Recording
To make recording possible the following components you must be
configured on the RMX:
•
Recording Link – defines the connection between the conference and
the recording system.
•
Recording-enabled Conference IVR Service – recording DTMF codes and
messages must be set in the Conference IVR Service to enable
“recording-related” voice messages to be played and to allow the
conference chairperson to control the recording process using DTMF
codes.
•
Recording-enabled Profile – recording must be enabled in the Conference
Profile assigned to the recorded conference.
If Multiple Recording Links are being defined for Virtual Recording Rooms
(VRRs), created and saved on the Polycom® RSS™ 4000 Version 6.0, the
MAXIMUM_RECORDING_LINKS System Flag in system.cfg can be
modified to determine the number of Recording Links available for
selection.
•
Range: 20 - 100
•
Default: 20
The flag value can be modified by selecting the System Configuration
option from the Setup menu. For more information, see "Modifying System
Flags” on page 19-5
12-2
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
Defining the Recording Link
The Recording Link is defined once and can be updated when the H.323
alias or the IP address (of the recording system) is changed. Only one
Recording Link can be defined in the RMX. Its type must be H.323.
In Multiple Networks Configuration, Recording Links use the default Network
Service to connect to conferences, therefore the recording system must be
defined on the default IP Network Service to enable the recording.
To define a Recording Link:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click Recording Links (
2
In the Recording Links list, click the New Recording Link (
).
) button.
The New Recording Link dialog box is displayed.
12-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 12-1 Recording Link Parameters
Parameter
Description
Name
Displays the default name that is assigned to the
Recording Link.
If multiple Recording Links are defined, it is
recommended to use a descriptive name to be
indicate the VRR to which it will be associated.
Default: Recording Link
IP Address
•
If no gatekeeper is configured, enter the IP
Address of the RSS. Example: If the RSS IP
address is 173.26.120.2 enter 172.26.120.2.
•
If a gatekeeper is configured, you can either
enter the IP address or an alias (see the alias
description).
Alias Name
If using the endpoint’s alias instead of IP address,
first select the alias type and then enter the
endpoint’s alias.
If you are associating this recording link to a VRR on
the RSS, define the alias as follows:
• If you are using the RSS IP address, enter the
VRR number in the Alias field. For example, if
the VRR number is 5555, enter 5555.
•
Type
4
Alternatively, if the Alias Type is set to H.323 ID,
enter the RSS IP address and the VRR number
in the format:
<RSS_IP_Address>##<VRR number>
For example: If the RSS IP is 173.26.120.2 and
the VRR number is 5555, enter
172.26.120.2##5555
Depending on the format used to enter the
information in the IP address and Alias fields, select
H.323 ID or E.164 (for multiple Recording links).
E-mail ID and Participant Number are also available.
Click OK.
The Recording Link is added to the RMX unit.
12-4
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
Enabling the Recording Features in a Conference IVR Service
To record a conference, a Conference IVR Service in which the recording
messages and DTMF codes are activated must be assigned to the
conference. The default Conference IVR Service shipped with the RMX
includes the recording-related voice messages and default DTMF codes
that enable the conference chairperson to control the recording process
from the endpoint. You can modify these default settings.
To modify the default recording settings for an existing Conference
IVR Service:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the IVR Services (
) button.
The IVR Services are listed in the IVR Services list pane.
2
To modify the default recording settings, double-click the Conference
IVR Service or right-click and select Properties.
The Conference IVR Service Properties dialog box is displayed.
3
To assign voice messages other than the default, click the General tab
and scroll down the list of messages to the recording messages.
4
Select the Recording In Progress message, and then select the
appropriate message file (by default, Recording_in_Progress.wav)
from the file list to the right of the field.
12-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
Select the Recording Failed message, and then select the appropriate
message file (by default, Recording_Failed.wav) from the file list to
the right of the field.
6
To modify the default DTMF codes, click the DTMF Codes tab.
7
To modify the DTMF code or permission for a recording function:
a
Select the desired DTMF name (Start, Stop or Pause Recording),
click the DTMF code entry and type a new code.
Table 12-2
b
8
Default DTMF Codes assigned to the recording process
Recording Operation
DTMF Code
Permission
Start or Resume Recording
*3
Chairperson
Stop Recording
*2
Chairperson
Pause Recording
*1
Chairperson
In the Permission entry, select whether this function can be used
by all conference participants or only the chairperson.
Click OK.
Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile
To be able to record a conference, the recording options must be enabled
in the Conference Profile assigned to it. You can add recording to existing
Profiles by modifying them.
To enable recording for a conference:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Conference Profiles (
button.
)
The Conference Profiles list is displayed.
2
Create a new profile by clicking the New Profile ( ) button or
modify an existing profile by double-clicking or right-clicking an
existing profile and then selecting Profile Properties.
If creating a new profile, complete the conference definition. For more
information on creating Profiles see the RMX Administrators Guide, “Defining
Profiles” on page 1-8.
12-6
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
3
In the Profile Properties dialog box, click the Recording tab.
4
Select the Enable Recording check box.
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 12-3 Conference Profile Recording Parameters
Parameter
Description
Enable Recording
Select to enable Recording Settings in the dialog
box.
Recording Link
Select a recording link for the conference from the
list.
Start recording
Select one of the following:
• Immediately – conference recording is
automatically started upon connection of the first
participant.
•
Upon Request – the operator or chairperson
must initiate the recording (manual).
Audio only
Select this option to record only the audio channel of
the conference.
Display Recording
Icon
Select to display Recording Indication to all
conference participants informing them that the
conference is being recorded. The recording icon is
replaced by a Paused icon when conference
recording is paused.
12-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
Click OK.
Recording is enabled in the Conference Profile.
Recording Link Encryption
The Recording Link can be encrypted when recording an encrypted
conference. The encryption of the Recording Link is enabled when
Encryption is selected in the Conference Profile on the RMX and on the RSS,
and the system flag
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT
_CONF is set to NO.
Recording Link Encryption Guidelines:
• The Recording Link connection type must be H.323.
•
The Recording Link uses the AES encryption format.
•
The RSS 2000/4000 recorder must be set to support encryption. The
following RSS recorders support encryption:
— RSS 4000 version 5.0 with “upgrade package_1647_Release
version” installed
— RSS 2000 with version 4.0.0.001 360 installed
For more information see the RSS 2000/4000 User Manual.
12-8
•
The system flag ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF is set to NO (default).
•
Encryption must be selected in the Conference Profile.
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
Recording Link Settings
The recording of encrypted conferences via an encrypted Recording Link is
enabled in the Conference Profile by:
•
Selecting the Encryption option in the Advanced tab.
•
Setting the Recording options in the Recording tab. For more details,
see "Enabling the Recording in the Conference Profile” on page 12-6.
.
However, the flag: ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_
IN_ENCRYPT_CONF can affect the encryption settings of the recording
connection/link during a conference.
When the flag is set to NO (default), the Recording Link inherits the
encryption settings of the conference. If the conference is encrypted, the
recording link will be encrypted.
When the flag is set to YES, it disables the encryption of the recording
link, regardless of the Encryption settings of the conference and RSS
recorder.
12-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Possible encryption setting of the recording link are summarized in
Table 13, "Recording Link Encryption Setting Based on System Configuration
Flag Setting".
Table 13
Recording Link Encryption Setting Based on System Configuration
Flag Setting
Profile Setting
RSS Setting
Flag Setting
Recording Link
Setting
Encryption
selected
Encrypted
NO
Encrypted
Encryption
selected
Encrypted
YES
Not Encrypted
Encryption
selected
Not Encrypted
NO
No connection to
the Recorder
Encryption
selected
Not Encrypted
YES
Not Encrypted
Encryption not
selected
Not Encrypted
YES/NO
Not Encrypted
Encryption not
selected
Encrypted
YES/NO
Not Encrypted
Managing the Recording Process
When a conference is started and recording is enabled in its Profile, the
system will automatically start the recording if the Start Recording
parameter is set to immediately. If it is set to Upon Request, the system waits
for the chairperson or RMX user’s request. Once the recording is initiated
for a conference, the MCU connects to the recording device (RSS 2000)
using the default Recording Link. The connection that is created between
the conference and the recording device is represented as a special
participant (Recording) whose name is the Recording Link. Once the
12-10
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
recording has started, the recording process can be stopped and restarted
from the Chairperson’s endpoint (using DTMF codes) or from the RMX
Web Client. After the recording process has finished, the recording can be
identified in the RSS 2000 by its RMX conference name.
A conference participant and the Recording Link cannot have identical names,
otherwise the recording process will fail.
Recording Link Layout
When the video layout of the conference is set to Auto Layout, the
recording of the conference will now include all the conference
participants and not n-1 participants as in previous versions.
In the new Auto Layout algorithm, the Recording Link is counted as a
“participant” and therefore it is excluded from the layout display used for
the recording. The layout used for the other participants will behave as in
the “standard” Auto Layout behavior.
The Recording Link Layout can be changed during an ongoing conference
in the same manner as for any other conference participant. For more
information see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Personal
Layout Control with the RMX Web Client” on page 3-81.
12-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The default settings for Auto Layout for the conference and the Recording
Link are summarized in the following table:
Table 14
Recording Link Default Layout Settings (Auto Layout Mode)
Participants
0
Conference Auto Layout
Default Settings
Recording Link Auto
Layout Settings
Not applicable
Not applicable
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10 or more
The default settings for Auto Layout of the Recording Link cannot be
changed, and the Auto Layout flags do not apply to the Recording Link Auto
Layout default settings.
12-12
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
Using the RMX Web Client to Manage the Recording Process
To manage the recording process using the right-click menu:
 Right-click the Recording participant in the conference and select from
one of the following options:
Table 12-1 Recording Participant Right-click Options
Name
Description
Start
Starts recording. When recording has started, this
option toggles with the Pause option.
Pause
Pauses the recording of the conference without
disconnecting. When the Recording is Paused, this
option toggles with the Start option.
Resume
Resumes the recording of the conference. The
Resume option toggles with the Pause option when it
is used.
Stop
Stops the recording.
Note: The Stop button is only enabled when the
Recording is Started or Paused.
Suspend Video
The Suspend Video option prevents the incoming
video of the recording link participant to be part of the
conference layout.
The Recording Link participant is set by default to
Suspend Video. The Suspend Video option toggles
with the Resume Video option.
12-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 12-1 Recording Participant Right-click Options (Continued)
Name
Description
Resume Video
The Resume Video option enables the incoming video
of the recording link participant to be part of the
conference layout.
This feature may be used to play back previously
recorded video or audio feeds in the conference layout.
For more information, see the RSS 2000 User Guide.
Participant
Properties
The Participant Properties option displays viewing only
information for monitoring, e.g. communication
capabilities and channels used to connect to the
conference. Users will not be able to perform any
functional requests from this window, i.e. disconnect,
change layout and mute.
To manage the recording process using the Conference toolbar:
 In the Conferences pane, click one of the following buttons in the
Conference tool bar.
The recording buttons will only be displayed in the conference tool bar for a
conference that is recording-enabled.
Table 12-2 Conferences List - Recording Tool bar buttons
Button
Description
Start/Resume recording. This button toggles with the
Pause button.
Stop recording.
12-14
Chapter 12-Recording Conferences
Table 12-2 Conferences List - Recording Tool bar buttons (Continued)
Button
Description
Pause recording. This button toggles with the Start/
Resume button.
Using DTMF Codes to Manage the Recording Process
By entering the appropriate DTMF code on the endpoint, the chairperson
can Stop the recording (*74), Pause it (*75), or Start/Resume the recording
(*73). For more information on managing the recording process via DTMF
codes, see the RSS 2000 User’s Guide.
Conference Recording with Codian IP VCR
Conference recording is available with Codian VCR 2210, VCR 2220 and
VCR 2240.
Recording between the RMX and the Codian VCR is enabled by adding an
IP participant to the recorded conference that acts as a link between the
conference and the recording device. This participant is identified as a
recording link to the Codian VCR according to the product ID sent from
the VCR during the connection phase, in the call setup parameters.
The video channel between the conference and the recording device is
unidirectional where the video stream is sent from the conference to the
recorder.
If the Codian VCR opens a video channel to the conference - this channel is
excluded from the conference video mix.
To record a conference running on the RMX using Codian recorder:
>> In the conference, define or add a dial-out participant using the
Codian VCR IP address as the address for dialing.
Once added to the conference, the MCU automatically connects the
participant (the link to Codian VCR) and the recording is
automatically started on the Codian VCR.
12-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
A connection can also be defined on the Codian VCR, dialing into the
recorded conference using the MCU prefix and the Conference ID as for
any other dial-in participant in the conference.
Monitoring the recording participant:
This connection is monitored as any other participant in the conference.
The connection can also be monitored in the Codian VCR web client.
12-16
13
Users, Connections and Notes
RMX Users
RMX Web Client Users are defined in the User’s table and can connect to
the MCU to perform various operations.
A maximum of 100 users can be defined per RMX.
The RMX supports four user Authorization Levels:
•
Chairperson
•
Operator
•
Administrator
•
Auditor
The authorization level dictates a user’s capabilities within the system.
A Chairperson can only manage ongoing conferences and participants.
The Chairperson does not have access to the RMX configurations and
utilities.
An Operator can perform all the RMX tasks a Chairperson does. In
addition, Operators can manage Meeting Rooms, Profiles, Entry Queues,
and SIP Factories, and can also view the RMX configurations, but cannot
change them.
An Administrator can perform all the tasks of Chairpersons and
Operator users. In addition, Administrators can define and delete other
users, and perform all configuration and maintenance tasks.
An Auditor can only view Auditor Files and audit the system.
Administrator and Operator users can verify which users are defined in
the system. Neither of them can view the user passwords, but an
Administrator can change a password.
The Users pane lists the currently defined users in the system and their
authorization levels. The pane also enables the administrators to add
and delete users.
13-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The RMX is shipped with a default Administrator user called POLYCOM,
whose password is POLYCOM. However, once you have defined other
authorized Administrator users, it is recommended to remove the default
user.
Listing Users
You can view the list of users that are currently defined in the system.
To view the users currently defined in the system:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
The list includes three columns: User Name, Authorization Level and
Disabled.
The User Name is the login name used by the user to connect to the
RMX.
The Authorization indicates the Authorization Level assigned to the
User: Administrator, Operator, Chairperson or Auditor.
Disabled indicates whether the user is disabled and cannot access the
system unless enabled by the administrator. For more details, see
"Disabling a User” on page 13-5.
Locked indicates whether the user has been locked out and cannot
access the system unless enabled by the administrator.
In Ultra Secure Mode (JITC_MODE=YES), Users can be automatically
disabled or locked out by the system when they do not log into the
RMX application for a predefined period or if their login session does
not meet Enhanced Security requirements. Users can be manually
disabled by the administrator. For more details, see "User and
Connection Management in Ultra Secure Mode” on page 13-8.
13-2
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
Adding a New User
Administrators can add new users to the system.
The User Name and Password must be in ASCII.
To add a new user to the system:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
2
The Users pane is displayed.
3
Click the New User ( ) button or right-click anywhere in the pane
and then click New User.
) button.
The New User Properties dialog box opens.
4
In the User Name text box, enter the name of the new user. This is the
login name used by the user when logging into the system.
5
In the Password text box, enter the new user’s password. This will be
the user’s password when logging into the system.
6
In the Authorization Level list, select the user type: Administrator,
Operator, Chairperson or Auditor.
7
Click OK.
The User Properties dialog box closes and the new user is added to the
system.
13-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Deleting a User
To delete a user, you must have Administrator authorization. The last remaining
Administrator in the Users list cannot be deleted.
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
2
Select the user and click the Delete (
and then click Delete User.
) button.
) button or right-click the user
The system displays a confirmation message.
3
In the confirmation dialog box, select Yes to confirm or No to cancel
the operation.
If you select Yes, the user name and icon are removed from the
system.
Changing a User’s Password
Users with Administrator authorization can change their own password
and other users’ passwords. Users with Operator authorization can
change their own password.
To change a user’s password:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
2
Right-click the user and click Change User Password.
The Change Password dialog box opens.
13-4
) option.
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
3
Enter the Old Password (current), New Password and Confirm the New
Password.
The Password must be in ASCII.
4
Click OK.
The user’s password is changed.
Disabling a User
An administrator can disable an enabled user. An indication is displayed
in the Users List when the User is disabled. The Administrator can enable
a disabled User.
To disable a user:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
2
In the Users pane, right-click the user to be disabled and select
Disable User in the menu.
A confirmation box is displayed.
3
Click YES.
The User status in the Users list - Disabled column changes to Yes.
13-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Enabling a User
The Administrator can enable a User that was disabled automatically by
the system (in the Ultra Secure Mode) or manually by the administrator.
To enable a user:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
) button.
The Users pane is displayed.
2
Right-click the user to be enabled and select Enable User.
A confirmation box is displayed.
3
Click YES.
The User status in the Users list - Disabled column changes to NO.
Renaming a User
To rename a user:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Users (
The Users pane is displayed.
13-6
) button.
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
2
Right-click the user to be renamed and select Rename User.
The Rename User dialog box is displayed.
3
Enter the user’s new name in the New User Name field and click OK.
The user is renamed and is forced to change his/her password.
Connections
The RMX enables you to list all connections that are currently logged into
the MCU, e.g. users, servers or API users. The MCU issues an ID number
for each login. The ID numbers are reset whenever the MCU is reset.
A maximum of 50 users can be concurrently logged in to the RMX.
Viewing the Connections List
To list the users who are currently connected to the MCU:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the Connections ( ) button.
A list of connected users is displayed in the Connections pane.
13-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The information includes:
— The user’s login name.
— The user’s authorization level (Chairperson, Operator,
Administrator or Auditor).
— The time the user logged in.
— The name/identification of the computer used for the user’s
connection.
User and Connection Management in Ultra Secure
Mode
Additional security measures can be implemented in the RMX system by
setting the appropriate system flags. These measures control the system
users, the user connections to the RMX and the user login process.
Managing RMX users includes:
• User types that are not supported when the Ultra Secure Mode
(JITC_MODE=YES) is enabled.
•
Disabling and enabling RMX Users
•
Renaming RMX Users
•
Disabling inactive users
Managing the user login process includes:
• Implementing Strong Passwords
13-8
•
Implementing password re-use / history rules
•
Defining password aging rules
•
Defining password change frequency
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
•
Forcing password change
•
Conference and Chairman Passwords
•
Locking out User
•
Displaying the User Login record
Controlling the user sessions includes:
• Limiting the maximum number of concurrent user sessions
•
User session timeout
•
Limiting the maximum number of users that can connect to the
system
13-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Managing the RMX Users
When the RMX is configured to Ultra Secure Mode (the JITC_MODE
System Flag is set to YES), the following user management rules are
automatically enforced:
User Types
•
Auditor and chairperson user types are not supported.
•
The SUPPORT user type is not allowed. If it exists, this user type is
removed when the JITC_MODE System Flag is set to YES and the
system is restarted.
The Audit files can be retrieved by the Administrator User.
Disabling/Enabling Users
•
An administrator can disable a user or enable a disabled user,
including administrators.
•
The last administrator cannot be disabled.
For more information see "Disabling a User” on page 13-5.
Renaming Users
•
An administrator can rename any user, including administrators.
•
A renamed user is considered by the system to be a new user and is
forced to change his/her password.
For more information see "Renaming a User” on page 13-6.
Disabling Inactive Users
Users can be automatically disabled by the system when they do not log
into the RMX application for a predefined period. When the RMX is
configured to Ultra Secure Mode (the JITC_MODE System Flag is set to
YES), this option is enforced.
•
To enable this option, the DISABLE_INACTIVE_USER System Flag
to a value between 1 to 90. This value determines the number of
consecutive days a user can be inactive before being disabled.
When flag value is set to 0 (default in standard security
environment), this option is disabled.
The flag value is automatically set to 30 days when the JITC_MODE
System Flag is set to YES.
13-10
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
•
The user is marked as disabled but is not deleted from the system
administrator/operator database.
•
The user remains disabled until re-enabled by an administrator.
•
If a disabled user attempts to Login, an error message, Account is
disabled, is displayed.
•
The last remaining administrator cannot be disabled.
For more information see "Disabling a User” on page 13-5.
Managing the User Login Process
Implementing Strong Passwords
Strong Passwords can be implemented for logging into the RMX
management applications. They can be implemented when the system is
in standard security mode or when in Ultra Secure Mode.
The FORCE_STRONG_PASSWORD_POLICY System Flag, which
enables or disables all password related flags cannot be set to NO and all
Strong Passwords rules are automatically enabled and cannot be disabled
when the JITC_MODE System Flag is set to YES.
If an administrator modifies any of the Strong Passwords flag settings, all
users are forced to perform the password change procedure, ensuring that
all user passwords conform to the modified Strong Passwords settings.
Administrators can change passwords for users and other administrators.
When changing passwords for him/herself, other administrators or other
users, the administrator is required to enter his/her own administrator’s
password.
Strong Passwords rules are enforced according to the settings of the various
Strong Passwords flags as described in Table 19-4, “JITC_MODE Flag Value
– Effect on System Flags,” on page 19-38. Default settings of these flag
change according to the system security mode.
Password Character Composition
• A Strong Password must contain at least two of all of the following
character types:
—
—
—
—
Upper case letters
Lower case letters
Numbers
Special characters: @ # $ % ^ & * ( ) _ - = + | } { : " \ ] [ ; / ?
> < , . (space) ~
13-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Passwords cannot contain the User ID (User Name) in any form.
Example: A user with a User ID, ben, is not permitted to use
“123BeN321” as a password because BeN is similar to the User ID.
•
Passwords cannot contain more than four digits in succession.
When the strong password option is enabled and the password does not
meet the Strong Password requirements an error, Password characteristics
do not comply with Enhance Security requirements, is displayed.
Password Length
The length of passwords is determined by the value of the
MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH System Flag.
•
Possible flag values are between 0 and 20.
•
A System Flag value of 0 means this rule is not enforced, however this
rule cannot be disabled when the RMX is in Ultra Secure Mode.
•
In Ultra Secure Mode, passwords must be at least 15 characters in
length (default) and can be up to 20 characters in length.
•
If the MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH flag is enabled and the password
does not meet the required length an error, Password is too short, is
displayed.
If the minimum password length is increased, valid pre-existing
passwords remain valid until users are forced to change their passwords.
Implementing Password Re-Use / History Rules
Users are prevented from re-using previous passwords by keeping a list
of previous passwords. If a password is recorded in the list, it cannot be
re-used. The list is cyclic, with the most recently recorded password
causing the deletion of the oldest recorded password.
•
The number of passwords that are recorded is determined by the
value of the PASSWORD_HISTORY_SIZE System Flag. Possible
values are between 0 and 16.
•
A flag value of 0 means the rule is not enforced, however this rule
cannot be disabled when the RMX is in Ultra Secure Mode.
•
In Ultra Secure Mode, at least 10 passwords (default) and up to 16
passwords must be retained.
If the password does not meet this requirement, an error, New password
was used recently, is displayed.
13-12
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
Defining Password Aging
The duration of password validity is determined by the value of the
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_DAYS System Flag.
•
Passwords can be set to be valid for durations of between 0 and 90
days.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, user passwords do not expire. The System
Flag cannot be set to 0 when the RMX is in Ultra Secure Mode.
•
In Ultra Secure Mode, the minimum duration can be set to 7 days and
the default duration is 60 days.
The display of a warning to the user of the number of days until password
expiration is determined by the value of the
PASSWORD_EXPIRATION_WARNING_DAYS System Flag.
•
Possible number of days to display expiry warnings is between 0 and
14.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, password expiry warnings are not
displayed. The System Flag cannot be set to 0 when the RMX is in
Ultra Secure Mode.
•
In Ultra Secure Mode, the earliest warning can be displayed 14 days
before passwords are due to expire and the latest warning can be
displayed 7 days before passwords are due to expire (default setting).
•
If a user attempts to log in after his/her password has expired, an
error is displayed: User must change password.
Defining Password Change Frequency
The frequency with which a user can change a password is determined by
the value of the MIN_PWD_CHANGE_FREQUENCY_IN_DAYS System
Flag. The value of the flag is the number of days that users must retain a
password.
•
Possible retention period is between 0 and 7 days. In Ultra Secure
Mode the retention period is between 1 (default) and 7.
•
If the System Flag is set to 0, users do not have to change their
passwords. The System Flag cannot be set to 0 when the RMX is in
Ultra Secure Mode.
•
If a user attempts to change a password within the time period
specified by this flag, an error, Password change is not allowed before
defined min time has passed, is displayed.
An administrator can assign a new password to a user at any time.
13-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Forcing Password Change
When the system is in Ultra Secure Mode the user is forced to change his/
her password as follows:
•
After modifying the value of the JITC_MODE System Flag to YES, all
RMX users are forced to change their Login passwords.
•
When an administrator creates a new user, the user is forced to
change his/her password on first Login.
•
If an administrator changes a users User ID name, that user is forced
to change his/her password on his/her next Login.
•
If a user logs in using his/her old or default password, the Login
attempt will fail. An error, User must change password, is displayed.
•
Changes made by the administrator to any of the Strong Password
enforcement System Flags render users’ passwords invalid.
Example: A user is logged in with a fifteen character password. The
administrator changes the value of the MIN_PASSWORD_LENGTH
System Flag to 20.
The next time the user tries to log in, he/she is forced to change his/her
password to meet the updated Strong Password requirements.
Temporary User Lockout
When the JITC_MODE System Flag is set to YES, Temporary User Lockout
is implemented as a defense against Denial of Service Attacks or Brutal
Attacks. Such attacks usually take the form of automated rapid Login
attempts with the aim of gaining access to or rendering the target system
(any network entity) unable to respond to users.
If a user tries to log in to the system and the Login is unsuccessful, the
user’s next Login attempt only receives a response from the RMX after 4
seconds.
User Lockout
User Lockout can be enabled to lock a user out of the system after three
consecutive Login failures with same User Name. The user is disabled and
only the administrator can enable the user within the system. User
Lockout is enabled when the USER_LOCKOUT System Flag is set to YES.
If the user tries to login while the account is locked, an error message,
Account is disabled, is displayed.
13-14
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
User Lockout is an Audit Event.
A system reset does not reset the Login attempts counter.
The time period during which the three consecutive Login failures occur is
determined by the value of the
USER_LOCKOUT_WINDOW_IN_MINUTES System Flag. A flag value
of 0 means that three consecutive Login failures in any time period will
result in User Lockout. Value can be between 0 and 45000.
The duration of the Lockout of the user is determined by the value of the
USER_LOCKOUT_DURATION_IN_MINUTES System Flag. A flag
value of 0 means permanent User Lockout until the administrator reenables the user within the system. Value can be between 0 and 480.
User Login Record
The system can display a record of the last Login of the user. It is displayed
in the Main Screen of the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager. The user Login
Record display is enabled when the LAST_LOGIN _ATTEMPTS System
Flag is set to YES.
Last Successful Login
Unsuccessful Logins
Both lists display the:
•
Date and Time of the Login attempt.
•
IP Address of the workstation initiating the Login attempt.
The list of unsuccessful Logins can contain up to ten records.
13-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Failed Login attempts are written to the system Log Files and are recorded
as Audit Events. The Audit files can be retrieved by the Administrator
User.
Controlling RMX User Sessions
Management Sessions per System
It is possible for a several users to simultaneously log in to the RMX and
initiate management sessions from different instances of the RMX Web
Client or RMX Manager that are running on a single or several
workstations.
The maximum number of concurrent management sessions (http and
https connections) per system is determined by the value of the
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAGEMENT_SESSIONS_PER_SYSTEM
System Flag.
Any attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions
per system results in the display of an error message: Maximum number of
permitted user connections has been exceeded. New connection is denied.
The log in attempt is recorded as an Audit Event
Sessions per User
It is possible for a user to log in to the RMX and initiate multiple
management sessions from different instances of the RMX Web Client or
RMX Manager that are running on a single or several workstations.
The maximum number of concurrent management sessions per user (http
and https connections) is determined by the value of the
MAX_NUMBER_OF_MANAGEMENT_SESSIONS_PER_USER System
Flag.
Any attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions
per user results in the display of an error message: A user with this name is
already logged into the system. Additional connection is denied.
The log in attempt is recorded as an Audit Event
Connection Timeout
If the connection is idle for longer than the number of seconds specified
by the setting of the APACHE_KEEP_ALIVE_TIMEOUT System Flag, the
connection to the RMX is terminated.
13-16
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
Session Timeout
If there is no input from the user or if the connection is idle for longer than
the number of minutes specified by the setting of the
SESSION_TIMOUT_IN_MINUTES System Flag, the connection to the
RMX is terminated.
A flag value of 0 means Session Timeout is disabled, however this feature
cannot be disabled when the RMX is in Ultra Secure Mode.
Erase Session History After Logout
In Ultra Secure Mode, the RMX Web Client and RMX Manager leave no
session information on the user’s workstation or the MCU after the user
logs off.
Notes
Notes are the electronic equivalent of paper sticky notes. You can use notes
to write down questions, important phone numbers, names of contact
persons, ideas, reminders, and anything you would write on note paper.
Notes can be left open on the screen while you work.
Notes can be read by all RMX Users concurrently connected to the MCU.
Notes that are added to the Notes list are updated on all workstations by
closing and re-opening the Notes window. Notes can be written in any
Unicode language.
Using Notes
To create a note:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Notes.
The Notes window opens.
13-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the Notes toolbar, click the New Note (
) button, or right-click
anywhere inside the Notes window and select New Note.
3
In the Note dialog box, type the required text and click OK.
The new note is saved and closed. The Notes list is updated, listing
the new note and its properties:
— Note – The beginning of the note’s text.
— Last Modified – The date of creation or last modification.
— Modified By – The Login Name of the user who last modified the
note.
— Modified From – The Client Application and Workstation from
which the note was created or modified.
Toolbar Handle
User Name
Client
Application
Workstation
To open or edit a note:
 Double-click the entry to edit, or right-click the entry and select Note
Properties.
The note opens for viewing or editing.
To delete a note:
1
In the Notes list, select the entry for the note to delete and click the
Delete Note button (
Note.
13-18
), or right-click the entry and select Delete
Chapter 13-Users, Connections and Notes
A delete confirmation dialog box is displayed.
2
Click OK to delete the note, or click Cancel to keep the note.
13-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
13-20
14
Network Services
To enable the RMX to function within IP and ISDN/PSTN network
environments, network parameters must be defined for both the IP
Network Services and ISDN/PSTN Network Services. The IP Network
Service must be defined for the RMX, while the ISDN/PSTN Network
Service definition is optional and is done when the RTM ISDN cards are
installed in the MCU.
The configuration dialog boxes for both these network services are
accessed via the RMX Management pane of the RMX Web Client.
14-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
IP Network Services
Two IP Services are defined for the RMX:
•
Management Network
•
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service)
Dial in, dial out connections and RMX management are supported within
the following IP addressing environments:
•
IPv6
•
IPv4
•
IPv6 & IPv4
When IPv4 is selected, IPv6 fields are not displayed and conversely when
IPv6 is selected, IPv4 fields are not displayed. When IPv6 & IPv4 is
selected both IPv6 and IPv4 fields are displayed.
For the purposes of comprehensive documentation, all screen captures in
this chapter show the dialog boxes as displayed with IPv6 & IPv4 selected.
For more information see "Using IPv6 Networking Addresses for RMX
Internal and External Entities” on page 14-39.
Management Network (Primary)
The Management Network is used to control the RMX, mainly via the RMX
Web Client application. The Management Network contains the network
parameters, such as the IP address of the Control Unit, needed for
connection between the RMX and the RMX Web Client. This IP address
can be used by the administrator or service personnel to connect to the
Control Unit should the RMX become corrupted or inaccessible.
During First Time Power-up, the Management Network parameters can be
set either via a USB key or by using a cable to create a private network.
For more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Modifying the Factory Default Management Network Settings on the USB
Key” on page 2-9 and Appendix G of this manual, "Configuring Direct
Connections to RMX” on page G-1.
14-2
Chapter 14-Network Services
Default IP Service (Conferencing Service)
The Default IP Service (Conferencing Service) is used to configure and
manage communications between the RMX and conferencing devices
such as endpoints, gatekeepers, SIP servers, etc.
The Default IP Service contains parameters for:
•
Signaling Host IP Address
•
MPM, MPM+ and MPMx media cards (Media Processors
•
External conferencing devices
Calls from all external IP entities are made to the Signaling Host, which
initiates call set-up and assigns the call to the appropriate MPM / MPM+ /
MPMx media card.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Conferencing related definitions such as environment (H.323 or SIP) are
also defined in this service.
Most of the Default IP Service is configured by the Fast Configuration
Wizard, which runs automatically should the following occur:
•
First time power-up.
•
Deletion of the Default IP Service, followed by a system reset.
For more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Procedure 1: First-time Power-up” on page 2-22.
Changes made to any of these parameters only take effect when the RMX unit
is reset. An Active Alarm is created when changes made to the system have not
yet been implemented and the MCU must be reset.
Modifying the Management Network
The Management Network parameters need to be modified if you want to:
•
Connect directly to the RMX from a workstation
•
Modify routes
•
Modify DNS information
14-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To view or modify the Management Network Service:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click the IP Network Services (
button.
2
In the IP Network Services list pane, double-click the Management
Network ( ) entry.
The Management Network Properties - IP dialog box opens.
14-4
)
Chapter 14-Network Services
3
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-1 Default Management Network Service – IP
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
Displays the name of the Management Network. This
name cannot be modified.
Note: This field is displayed in all Management Network
Properties tabs.
IP Version
IPv4
Select this option for IPv4 addressing
only.
IPv6
Select this option for IPv6 addressing
only.
IPv4 & IPv6
Select this option for both IPv4 and IPv6
addressing.
Auto
(Stateless)
Select this option to allow automatic
generation of the following addresses:
IPv6 Configuration
Method
•
•
•
Manual
Link-Local (For internal use only)
Site-Local
Global
Select his option to enable manual entry
of the following addresses:
•
•
Site-Local
•
•
•
Link-Local
Global
Manual configuration of the following
address types is not permitted:
Multicast
Anycast
14-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-1 Default Management Network Service – IP (Continued)
Field
Description
Control Unit IP
Address
IPv4
The IPv4 address of the RMX Control
Unit. This IP address is used by the
RMX Web Client to connect to the RMX.
The IPv6 address of the RMX Control
Unit. This IP address is used by the
RMX Web Client to connect to the RMX.
Note: Internet Explorer 7™ is required
for the RMX Web Client to connect to
the RMX using IPv6.
Click the All button to display the
IPv6 addresses as follows:
IPv6
•
Auto - If selected, Site-Local
and Global site addresses are
displayed.
•
Manual if selected, only the
Manual site address is
displayed.
All
14-6
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-1 Default Management Network Service – IP (Continued)
Field
Description
Shelf Management
IP Address
IPv4
The IPv4 address of the RMX Shelf
Management Server. This IP address is
used by the RMX Web Client for
Hardware Monitoring purposes.
The IPv6 address of the RMX Shelf
Management Server. This IP address is
used by the RMX Web Client for
Hardware Monitoring purposes.
Note: Internet Explorer 7™ is required
for the RMX Web Client to connect to
the RMX using IPv6.
IPv6
Click the All button to display the
IPv6 addresses as follows:
•
Auto - If selected, Site-Local
and Global site addresses are
displayed.
•
Manual if selected, only the
Manual site address is
displayed.
All
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the Control Unit.
Note: This field is specific to IPv4 and is not displayed
in Ipv6 only mode.
Secured
Communication
Select to enable Secured Communication.
The RMX supports TLS 1.0 and SSL 3.0 (Secure
Socket Layer).
A SSL/TLS Certificate must installed on the RMX for
this feature to be enabled. For more information see
"Secure Communication Mode” on page F-1.
14-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Click the Routers tab.
5
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-2 Default Management Network Service – Routers
Field
Description
Default Router
IP Address
IPv4
IPv6
14-8
Enter the IP address of the default
router. The default router is used
whenever the defined static routers are
not able to route packets to their
destination. The default router is also
used when host access is restricted to
one default router.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-2 Default Management Network Service – Routers (Continued)
Field
Description
Static Routes IPv4
Only Table
The system uses Static Routes to
search other networks for endpoint
addresses that are not found on the
local LAN.
Up to five routers can be defined in
addition to the Default Router. The
order in which the routers appear in the
list determines the order in which the
system looks for the endpoints on the
various networks. If the address is in
the local subnet, no router is used.
To define a static route (starting with
the first), click the appropriate column
and enter the required value.
Router IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the router.
Remote
IP
Address
Enter the IP address of the entity to be
reached outside the local network. The
Remote Type determines whether this
entity is a specific component (Host) or
a network.
• If Host is selected in the Remote
Type field, enter the IP address of
the endpoint.
•
Remote
Subnet
Mask
Remote
Type
If Network is selected in the
Remote Type field, enter of the
segment of the other network.
Enter the subnet mask of the remote
network.
Select the type of router connection:
Network – defines a connection to
a router segment in another
network.
•
•
Host – defines a direct connection
to an endpoint found on another
network.
14-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
Click the DNS tab.
7
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-3 Default Management Network Service – DNS
Field
Description
MCU Host Name
Enter the name of the MCU on the network.
Default name is RMX
DNS
Select:
• Off – if DNS servers are not used in the network.
•
Specify – to enter the IP addresses of the DNS
servers.
Note: The IP address fields are enabled only if
Specify is selected.
14-10
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-3 Default Management Network Service – DNS (Continued)
Field
Description
Register Host
Names
Automatically to
DNS Servers
Select this option to automatically register the MCU
Signaling Host and Shelf Management with the DNS
server.
Local Domain
Name
Enter the name of the domain where the MCU is
installed.
DNS Servers Addresses:
Primary Server
Secondary Server
The static IP addresses of the DNS servers.
A maximum of three servers can be defined.
Tertiary Server
8
RMX 2000 only: Click the LAN Ports tab.
RMX 1500/4000: If you want to modify the LAN Port Speed Settings on
an RMX 1500/4000, see "Ethernet Settings” on page 14-30.
14-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9
View or modify the following fields:
Table 14-4 Management Network Properties – LAN Ports Parameters
Field
Port Speed
Description
The RMX2000 has 3 LAN ports. The administrator can set
the speed and transmit/receive mode manually for LAN 2
Port only.
Port
The LAN port number: 1, 2 or 3.
Note: Do not change the automatic setting
of Port 1 and Port 3. Any change to Port 1
speed will not be applied.
Speed
Select the speed and transmit/receive
mode for each port.
Default: Auto – Negotiation of speed and
transmit/receive mode starts at 1000 Mbits/
second Full Duplex, proceeding downward
to 10 Mbits/second Half Duplex.
Note: To maximize conferencing
performance, especially in high bit rate call
environments, a 1Gb connection is
recommended.
10 Click OK.
11 If you have modified the Management Network Properties, reset the
MCU.
14-12
Chapter 14-Network Services
Modifying the Default IP Network Service
The Default IP Service parameters need to be modified if you want to
change the:
•
Network type that the RMX connects to
•
IP address of the RMX Signaling Host
•
IP addresses of the RMX Media boards
•
Subnet mask of the RMX’s IP cards
•
Gatekeeper parameters or add gatekeepers to the Alternate
Gatekeepers list
•
SIP server parameters
Fast Configuration Wizard
The Fast Configuration Wizard enables you to configure the Default IP
Service. It starts automatically if no Default IP Network Service is defined.
This happens during First Time Power-up, before the service has been
defined or if the Default IP Service has been deleted, followed by an RMX
restart.
The IP Management Service tab in the Fast Configuration Wizard is enabled
only if the factory default Management IP addresses were not modified.
If the Fast Configuration Wizard does not start automatically, the Default IP
Service must be modified through the IP Network Properties dialog boxes.
To view or modify the Default IP Service:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click IP Network Services (
2
In the Network list pane, double-click the Default IP Service (
or
).
,
,
) entry.
14-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Default IP Service - Networking IP dialog box opens.
RMX 2000 Only
RMX 4000 Only
3
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-5 Default IP Network Service – IP
14-14
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
The name Default IP Service is assigned to the IP
Network Service by the Fast Configuration Wizard.
This name can be changed.
Note: This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog
boxes and can contain character sets that use
Unicode encoding.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-5 Default IP Network Service – IP (Continued)
Field
Description
IP Network Type
Displays the network type selected during the First
Entry configuration. The Default IP Network icon
indicates the selected environment.
You can select:
• H.323: For an H.323-only Network Service.
•
•
SIP: For a SIP-only Network Service.
H.323 & SIP: For an integrated IP Service. Both
H.323 and SIP participants can connect to the
MCU using this service.
Note: This field is displayed in all Default IP Service
tabs.
Signaling Host IP
Address
Enter the address to be used by IP endpoints when
dialing in to the MCU.
Dial out calls from the RMX are initiated from this
address.
This address is used to register the RMX with a
Gatekeeper or a SIP Proxy server.
Media Card 1
IP Address
Enter the IP address(es) of the media card (s) as
provided by the network administrator:
RMX1500: MPMx 1
RMX 2000: MPM/MPM+/MPMx 1 and MPM/MPM+/
MPMx 2 (if installed)
RMX 4000: MPM+/MPMx 1, MPM+/MPMx 2 (if
installed), MPM+/MPMx 32 (if installed) and MPM+/
MPMx 4 (if installed)
Endpoints connect to conferences and transmit call
media (video, voice and content) via these
addresses.
Media Card 2
IP Address
(RMX 2000/4000)
Media Card 3
IP Address
(RMX 4000)
Media Card 4
IP Address
(RMX 4000)
Subnet Mask
Enter the subnet mask of the MCU.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
14-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Click the Routers tab.
With the exception of IP Network Type, the field definitions of the
Routers tab are the same as for the Default Management Network. For
more information see "Click the Routers tab.” on page 14-8.
5
Optional. Click the DNS tab.
Settings in this dialog box are relevant to Multiple Network Services
only.
For more information see "Multiple Network Services” on page 14-59.
14-16
Chapter 14-Network Services
6
Click the Gatekeeper tab.
7
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-6 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Gatekeeper Parameters
Field
Description
Gatekeeper
Select Specify to enable configuration of the
gatekeeper IP address.
When Off is selected, all gatekeeper options are
disabled.
14-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-6 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Gatekeeper Parameters
Field
Description
Primary
Gatekeeper
IP Address or
Name
Enter either the gatekeeper’s host
name as registered in the DNS or IP
address.
Alternate
Gatekeeper
IP Address or
Name
Enter the DNS host name or IP address
of the gatekeeper used as a fallback
gatekeeper used when the primary
gatekeeper is not functioning properly.
MCU Prefix in
Gatekeeper
Enter the number with which this Network Service
registers in the gatekeeper. This number is used by
H.323 endpoints as the first part of their dial-in string
when dialing the MCU.
When PathNavigator or SE200 is used, this prefix
automatically registers with the gatekeeper. When
another gatekeeper is used, this prefix must also be
defined in the gatekeeper.
Register as
Gateway
Select this check box if the RMX unit is to be seen as
a gateway, for example, when using a Cisco
gatekeeper.
Note: Do not select this check box when using
Polycom ReadiManager/CMA 5000 or a Radvision
gatekeeper.
Refresh
Registration
every __
seconds
The frequency with which the system informs the
gatekeeper that it is active by re-sending the IP
address and aliases of the IP cards to the gatekeeper.
If the IP card does not register within the defined time
interval, the gatekeeper will not refer calls to this IP
card until it re-registers. If set to 0, re-registration is
disabled.
Note:
• It is recommended to use default settings.
•
14-18
Note:
When in
IPv4&IPv6
or in IPv6
mode, it is
easier to
use Names
instead of
IP
Addresses.
This is a re-registration and not a ‘keep alive’
operation – an alternate gatekeeper address may
be returned.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-6 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Gatekeeper Parameters
Field
Description
Aliases:
Alias
The alias that identifies the RMX’s Signaling Host
within the network. Up to five aliases can be defined
for each RMX.
Note: When a gatekeeper is specified, at least one
alias must be entered in the table.
Additional aliases or prefixes may also be entered.
Type
The type defines the format in which the card’s alias is
sent to the gatekeeper. Each alias can be of a different
type:
•
•
•
H.323 ID (alphanumeric ID)
E.164 (digits 0-9, * and #)
Email ID (email address format,
e.g. abc@example.com)
•
Participant Number (digits 0-9, * and #)
Note: Although all types are supported, the type of
alias to be used depends on the gatekeeper’s
capabilities.
14-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
8
Click the Ports tab.
Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be
allocated to multimedia conference calls.
The port range recommended by IANA (Internet Assigned Numbers
Authority) is 49152 to 65535. The MCU uses this recommendation
along with the number of licensed ports to calculate the port range.
9
14-20
Modify the following fields:
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-7 Default IP Service – Conferencing – Ports Parameters
Field
Description
Fixed Ports
Leave this check box cleared if you are defining a
Network Service for local calls that do not require
configuring the firewall to accept calls from external
entities. When cleared, the system uses the default
port range and allocates 4 RTP and 4 RTCP ports
for media channels (Audio, Video, Content and
FECC).
Note: When ICE Environment is enabled, 8
additional ports are allocated to each call.
Click this check box to manually define the port
ranges or to limit the number of ports to be left open.
TCP Port from - to
Displays the default settings for port numbers used
for signaling and control.
To modify the number of TCP ports, enter the first
and last port numbers in the range.
The number of ports is calculated as follows:
Number of simultaneous calls x 2 ports (1 signaling
+ 1 control).
UDP Port from - to
Displays the default settings for port numbers used
for audio and video.
To modify the number of UDP ports:
• In MPM Card Configuration Mode:
Enter the first and last port numbers in the
range.
The number of ports is calculated as follows:
Number of simultaneous calls x 8 ports (2
audio, 2 video, 2 Content and 2 FECC).
•
In MPM+/MPMx Card Configuration Mode:
Enter the first and last port numbers in the
range, and the range must be 1024 ports.
When ICE environment is enabled, the range must
be 2048 ports.
If the network administrator does not specify an adequate port range, the
system will accept the settings and issue a warning. Calls will be rejected
when the MCU’s ports are exceeded.
14-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
10 If required, click the QoS tab.
Quality of Service (QoS) is important when transmitting high
bandwidth audio and video information. QoS can be measured and
guaranteed in terms of:
• Average delay between packets
• Variation in delay (jitter)
• Transmission error rate
DiffServ and Precedence are the two QoS methods supported by the
RMX. These methods differ in the way the packet’s priority is
encoded in the packet header.
RMX’s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service, not
per endpoint.
The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority.
14-22
Chapter 14-Network Services
11 View or modify the following fields:
Table 14-8 Default IP Service – Conferencing – QoS Parameters
Field
Description
Enable
Select to enable the configuration and use of the
QoS settings.
When un-checked, the values of the DSCP
(Differentiated Services Code Point) bits in the IP
packet headers are zero.
Type
DiffServ and Precedence are two methods for
encoding packet priority. The priority set here for
audio video and IP Signaling packets should match
the priority set in the router.
• DiffServ: Select when the network router uses
DiffServ for priority encoding.
The default priorities for both audio and video
packets is 0x88. These values are determined
by the QOS_IP_VIDEO and QOS_IP_AUDIO
flags in the system.cfg file.
The default priority for Signaling IP traffic is 0x00
and is determined by the QOS_IP_SIGNALING
flag in the system.cfg file.
For more information see “Modifying System Flags”
on page 19-5.
• Precedence: Select when the network router
uses Precedence for priority encoding, or when
you are not sure which method is used by the
router. Precedence should be combined with
None in the TOS field.
The default priority is 5 for audio and 4 for video
packets.
Note: Precedence is the default mode as it is
capable of providing priority services to all types
of routers, as well as being currently the most
common mechanism.
14-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-8 Default IP Service – Conferencing – QoS Parameters
Field
Description
Audio / Video
You can prioritize audio and video IP packets to
ensure that all participants in the conference hear
and see each other clearly. Select the desired
priority. The scale is from 0 to 5, where 0 is the
lowest priority and 5 is the highest. The
recommended priority is 4 for audio and 4 for video
to ensure that the delay for both packet types is the
same and that audio and video packets are
synchronized and to ensure lip sync.
TOS
Select the type of Service (TOS) that defines
optimization tagging for routing the conferences
audio and video packets.
• Delay: The recommended default for video
conferencing; prioritized audio and video
packets tagged with this definition are delivered
with minimal delay (the throughput of IP packets
minimizes the queue sequence and the delay
between packets).
•
14-24
None: No optimization definition is applied. This
is a compatibility mode in which routing is based
on Precedence priority settings only. Select
None if you do not know which standard your
router supports.
Chapter 14-Network Services
12 Click the SIP Servers tab.
13 Modify the following fields:
Table 14-9 Default IP Network Service – SIP Servers
Field
Description
SIP Server
Select:
•
•
SIP Server Type
Specify – to manually configure SIP servers.
Off – if SIP servers are not present in the
network.
Select:
Generic - for non Microsoft environments.
•
•
Microsoft - for Microsoft environments.
14-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-9 Default IP Network Service – SIP Servers (Continued)
Field
Description
Transport Type
Select the protocol that is used for signaling
between the MCU and the SIP Server or the
endpoints according to the protocol supported by the
SIP Server:
UDP – Select this option to use UDP for signaling.
TCP – Select this option to use TCP for signaling.
TLS – The Signaling Host listens on secured port
5061 only and all outgoing connections are
established on secured connections. Calls from SIP
clients or servers to non secured ports are rejected.
The following protocols are supported: TLS 1.0,
SSL 2.0 and SSL 3.0.
Create Certificate
This button is used to create a Certificate Request to
be sent to a Certification Authority.
Certificate Method
Select the method for sending the Certificate to the
RMX:
• CSR
•
PEM/PFX
For more information see "The Security Certificate”
on page H-82.
Send Certificate
This button is used when Integrating the RMX Into
the Microsoft OCS Environment. For more
information, see "Setting the RMX for Integration
Into Microsoft Environment” on page H-1.
SIP Servers: Primary / Alternate Server Parameter
Server IP Address
14-26
Enter the IP address of the preferred SIP server.
If a DNS is used, you can enter the SIP server
name.
Note: When in IPv4&IPv6 or in IPv6 mode, it is
easier to use Names instead of IP Addresses.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-9 Default IP Network Service – SIP Servers (Continued)
Field
Description
Server Domain
Name
Enter the name of the domain that you are using for
conferences, for example:
user_name@domain name
The domain name is used for identifying the SIP
server in the appropriate domain according to the
host part in the dialed string.
For example, when a call to EQ1@polycom.com
reaches its outbound proxy, this proxy looks for the
SIP server in the polycom.com domain, to which it
will forward the call.
When this call arrives at the SIP server in
polycom.com, the server looks for the registered
user (EQ1) and forwards the call to this Entry Queue
or conference.
Port
Enter the number of the TCP or UDP port used for
listening. The port number must match the port
number configured in the SIP server.
Default port is 5060.
Outbound Proxy Servers: Primary / Alternate Server Parameter
Server IP Address
By default, the Outbound Proxy Server is the same
as the SIP Server. If they differ, modify the IP
address of the Outbound Proxy and the listening
port number (if required).
Note: When in IPv4&IPv6 or in IPv6 mode, it is
easier to use Names instead of IP Addresses.
Port
Enter the port number the outbound proxy is
listening to.
The default port is 5060.
14-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
14 Click the Security tab.
15 Modify the following fields:
Table 14-10 Default IP Network Service – Security (SIP Digest)
Field
Description
Authentication
User Name
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting Room
name as registered with the proxy.
This field can contain up to 20 ASCII characters.
Authentication
Password
Enter the conference, Entry Queue or Meeting Room
password as defined in the proxy.
This field can contain up to 20 ASCII characters.
If the Authentication User Name and Authentication Password fields are
left empty, the SIP Digest authentication request is rejected. For
registration without authentication, the RMX must be registered as a
trusted entity on the SIP server.
14-28
Chapter 14-Network Services
16 Optional. To configure the ICE environment, click the SIP Advanced
tab.
17 Modify the following fields:
Table 14-11 Default IP Network Service – SIP Advanced
Field
Description
Server User Name
Enter the RMX User name as defined in the Active
Directory. For example, enter rmx1234.
This field is disabled if the ICE Environment field is
set to None.
ICE Environment
Select MS (for Microsoft ICE implementation) to
enable the ICE integration.
This field is disabled if the RMX is not running in
MPM+ Card Configuration Mode.
18 Click the OK button.
14-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Ethernet Settings
In RMX 1500/4000 automatically identified speed and transmit/receive
mode of each LAN port used by the system can be manually modified if
the specific switch requires it in the Ethernet Settings dialog box. These
settings are not part of the Management Network dialog box as for
RMX 2000.
RMX 1500: The Port numbers displayed in the dialog box do not reflect the
physical Port numbers as labeled on the RMX 1500 MCU.
Table 14-12 shows the physical mapping of Port Type to the physical label
on the back panel of the RMX 1500.
Table 14-12 Physical Mapping - Port Type to Label on RMX 1500 and RMX 4000
Port Type
Label on MCU
1500
4000
Media
LAN 2
LAN 2
Modem
Modem
LAN 1
Management 1
MNG B
LAN 2
Signaling 1
MNG
LAN 3
ShM
Shelf
LAN 6
RTM LAN Card
RTM-IP 4000 Card
To modify the automatic LAN port configuration:
1
14-30
On the RMX menu, click Setup > Ethernet Settings.
Chapter 14-Network Services
The Ethernet Settings dialog box opens.
RMX 4000
RMX 1500
RMX 1500/4000: Although the RTM LAN (media card) ports are shown as Port
1 in the Ethernet Settings and Hardware Monitor, the physical LAN
connection is Port 2.
14-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
Modify the following field:
Table 14-13 Ethernet Settings Parameters
3
14-32
Field
Description
Speed
The RMX has 3 LAN ports on the RTM-IP (Management,
Signaling and Shelf Management), and additional LAN ports
on each media card (RTM LAN) and RTM ISDN cards. The
administrator can set the speed and transmit/receive mode
manually for these ports.
Port
The LAN port number.
Note: Do not change the automatic setting of
Port 1,4 and Port 5 of the Management 2 and
Signaling 2 Networks. Any change to the speed
of these ports will not be applied.
Speed
Select the speed and transmit/receive mode for
each port.
Default: Auto – Negotiation of speed and
transmit/receive mode starts at 1000 Mbits/
second Full Duplex, proceeding downward to 10
Mbits/second Half Duplex.
Note: To maximize conferencing performance,
especially in high bit rate call environments, a
1Gb connection is recommended.
Note:
RMX4000: Do not select 1000 Full Duplex for
any LAN ports in Slot 17.
Select only 100 Full Duplex.
RMX1500: Do not select 1000 Full Duplex for
Port 5 (ShM).
Select only 100 Full Duplex.
Click the OK button.
Chapter 14-Network Services
IP Network Monitoring
The Signaling Monitor is the RMX entity used for monitoring the status of
external network entities such as the gatekeeper, DNS, SIP proxy and
Outbound proxy and their interaction with the MCU.
To monitor signaling status:
1
In the RMX Management pane, click Signaling Monitor (
2
In the Signaling Monitor pane, double-click Default IP Service.
).
The IP Network Services Properties – RMX CS IP tab opens:
The RMX CS IP tab displays the following fields:
Table 14-14 IP Network Services Properties – RMX CS IP
Field
Service Name
Description
The name assigned to the IP Network Service by the
Fast Configuration Wizard.
Note: This field is displayed in all tabs.
14-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-14 IP Network Services Properties – RMX CS IP (Continued)
Field
IPv4
IPv6
Description
IP Address
Default
Router IP
Address
The IP address of the default router. The
default router is used whenever the
defined static routers are not able to route
packets to their destination. The default
router is also used when host access is
restricted to one default router.
Subnet
Mask
The subnet mask of the MCU.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
Scope
Default
Router IP
Address
14-34
IP Address
Global
The Global Unicast IP address
of the RMX.
SiteLocal
The IP address of the RMX
within the local site or
organization.
The IP address of the default router. The
default router is used whenever the
defined static routers are not able to route
packets to their destination. The default
router is also used when host access is
restricted to one default router.
Chapter 14-Network Services
3
Click the H.323 tab.
The H.323 tab displays the following fields:
Table 14-15 IP Network Services Properties – H.323
Field
Connection State
Description
The state of the connection between the Signaling
Host and the gatekeeper:
Discovery - The Signaling Host is attempting to
locate the gatekeeper.
Registration - The Signaling Host is in the process
of registering with the gatekeeper.
Registered - The Signaling Host is registered with
the gatekeeper.
Not Registered - The registration of the Signaling
Host with the gatekeeper failed.
14-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-15 IP Network Services Properties – H.323 (Continued)
Field
Registration
Interval
4
14-36
Description
The interval in seconds between the Signaling
Host’s registration messages to the gatekeeper.
This value is taken from either the IP Network
Service or from the gatekeeper during registration.
The lesser value of the two is chosen.
Role
Active - The active gatekeeper.
Backup - The backup gatekeeper
that can be used if the connection to
the preferred gatekeeper fails.
ID
The gatekeeper ID retrieved from
the gatekeeper during the
registration process.
Name
The gatekeeper’s host’s name.
IP Address
The gatekeeper’s IP address.
Click the SIP Servers tab.
Chapter 14-Network Services
The SIP Servers tab displays the following fields:
Table 14-16 IP Network Services Properties – SIP Servers
5
Field
Description
Role
Active -The default SIP Server is used for SIP
traffic.
Backup -The SIP Server is used for SIP traffic if the
preferred proxy fails.
Name
The name of the SIP Server.
IP Address
The SIP Server's IP address.
Status
The connection state between the SIP Server and
the Signaling Host.
Not Available - No SIP server is available.
Auto - Gets information from DHCP, if used.
Click the ICE Servers tab.
14-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The ICE Servers tab displays the following fields:
Table 14-17 IP Network Services Properties – ICE Servers
Field
Description
Role
The ICE Server’s role is displayed:
• STUN password server
•
•
•
•
STUN Server UDP
STUN Server TCP
Relay Server UDP
Relay Server TCP
IP Address
The ICE Server’s IP Address.
Status 1/2/3/4
A status is displayed for each media card installed in
the RMX:
• Connection O.K.
•
•
•
•
•
•
MS – register fail
•
•
Channel exceeded allotted bandwidth
MS – subscribe fail
MS – service fail
Connection failed
User/password failed
Channel didn't receive any packets for 5
seconds
Unknown failure
In systems with multiple media cards, Status 1 refers
to the uppermost media card.
FW Detection
The Firewall Detection status is displayed:
• Unknown
•
•
•
•
•
14-38
UDP enabled
TCP enabled
Proxy -TCP is possible only through proxy
Block – both UDP & TCP blocked
None
Chapter 14-Network Services
Using IPv6 Networking Addresses for RMX Internal and External
Entities
IPv6 addresses can be assigned to both RMX (Internal) and External Entity
addresses.
RMX Internal Addresses
Default Management Network Service
• Control Unit
•
Signaling Host
•
Shelf Management
•
MPM1 (Media Card)
•
MPM2 (Media Card)
External Entities
•
Gatekeepers (Primary & Secondary)
•
SIP Proxies
•
DNS Servers
•
Default Router
•
Defined participants
IPv6 Guidelines
•
Internet Explorer 7™ is required for the RMX Web Client and RMX
Manager to connect to the RMX using IPv6.
•
IPv6 is supported with MPM+ and MPMx media cards only.
•
The default IP address version is IPv4.
•
Internet Explorer 7™ is required for the RMX Web Client use an IPv6
connection to the RMX.
•
The IP address field in the Address Book entry for a defined participant
can be either IPv4 or IPv6. A participant with an IPv4 address cannot
be added to an ongoing conference while the RMX is in IPv6 mode
nor can a participant with an IPv6 address be added while the RMX is
in IPv4 mode.
14-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
An error message, Bad IP address version, is displayed and the New
Participant dialog box remains open so that the participant’s address
can be entered in the correct format.
•
Participants that do not use the same IP address version as the RMX
in ongoing conferences launched from Meeting Rooms, Reservations
and Conference Templates, and are disconnected. An error message,
Bad IP address version, is displayed.
IP Security (IPSec) Protocols are not supported.
LAN Redundancy
LAN Port Redundancy is available on the RMX 1500/2000/4000. LAN
Redundancy enables the redundant LAN port connection to
automatically replace the failed port by using another physical connection
and NIC (Network Interface Card). When a LAN port fails, IP network
traffic failure is averted and network or endpoints disconnections do not
occur. For example, on RMX 1500 should the LAN 2 port fail on the RTM
IP, then LAN 1 is available as a backup.
On RMX 2000/4000 should the LAN 2 port fail on the RTM LAN card,
then LAN1 is available as a backup.
Redundant LAN 1 port
LAN 2
Figure 14-1RMX 1500 - RTM IP 1500 Rear Panel
14-40
Chapter 14-Network Services
Redundant LAN 1 port
LAN 2
Figure 14-2RMX 2000/4000 RTM LAN Card
The LAN redundancy feature is enable (YES by default) or disabled by the
flag LAN_REDUNDANCY.
Guidelines
•
On the RMX 1500, LAN redundancy cannot be enabled in parallel to
Multiple Networks.
•
On RMX 2000/4000, when Multiple Networks option is enabled and
the RTM LAN ports are not assigned to any network, then the LAN 1
port is redundant by default.
•
On RMX 2000/4000 the redundant default port is LAN 1 on the
RTM LAN.
•
On the RMX 1500, LAN ports can used as follows:
— LAN 2 port is used for standard communications
— LAN 1 port can be used to define a second Network Service or
used for LAN Redundancy
Configuration Requirements
LAN Redundancy is available by default. However, it is enabled by
connecting the appropriate LAN cables to the LAN ports on the RMX:
1
On the RMX 2000, install the RTM LAN card if one is not installed.
For more information see the Polycom RMX 2000 Hardware Guide,
“Installing the RTM LAN” on page 1-43.
2
On RMX 1500, connect the LAN cable to LAN 1 port on the RTM IP.
On the RMX 2000/4000 connect the LAN cable to LAN 1 port on the
RTM LAN.
14-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
On the RMX 2000, in the Setup> System Configuration > System
Flags dialog box, add the flag RMX2000_RTM_LAN and set it to YES
to activate the installed RTM LAN card
— On RMX 2000/4000, LAN Redundancy can be enabled in
parallel to the Multiple Networks. To enable the Multiple
Networks option, set the MULTIPLE_SERVICES flag to YES
On RMX 1500, when the MULTIPLE_SERVICES flag is set to YES (Multiple
Networks option is enabled), the LAN_REDUNDANCY flag must be set to NO.
4
If required, reset the RMX. On RMX 2000 reset is required when
adding the RMX2000_RTM_LAN flag.
Hardware Monitor Indications
When LAN Redundancy is enabled on the RMX, LAN 2 port is Active and
LED indications may appear.
The redundant LAN port is shown as Inactive and the LED indications on
the port are switched off.
When the Active LAN port fails and the redundant (Inactive) port takes
over, the LED indications appear.
In the Hardware Monitor pane the Lan List displays the RMX LAN ports
together with their Status indication.
Table 14-18 RMX 1500/2000 /4000 RTM LAN LED Indications
14-42
Status
Description
Active
The LAN port is active
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-18 RMX 1500/2000 /4000 RTM LAN LED Indications
Status
Description
Inactive
The LAN port is inactive
Standby
The LAN Redundancy option is enabled and this LAN
port is the redundant and in standby mode. In case of
failure, this port becomes active.
RMX Network Port Usage
The following table summarizes the port numbers and their usage in the
RMX 1500/2000/4000:
Table 14-19 RMX Network Port Usage Summary
Connection
Type
Port
Number
Protocol
Description
Configurable
HTTP
80
TCP
Management
between the RMX
and RMX Web Client
No
HTTPS
443
TCP
Secured
Management
between the RMX
and RMX Web Client
No
DNS
53
TCP
Domain name server.
Can be
disabled in
the IP
Network
Service
DHCP
68
TCP
Dynamic Host
Configuration
Protocol
Can be
disabled in
the IP
Network
Service
SSH
22
TCP
Secured shell. It is
the RMX terminal.
No
14-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-19 RMX Network Port Usage Summary
14-44
Connection
Type
Port
Number
Protocol
Description
Configurable
NTP
123
UDP
Network Time
Protocol. Enables
access to a time
server on the
network.
No
H.323 GK
RAS
1719
UDP
Gatekeeper RAS
messages traffic
No
H.323 Q.931
1720 incoming
;
4915259999 outgoing
TCP
H.323 Q.931 call
signaling.
Each outgoing call
has a separate port.
The port for each
outgoing call is
allocated
dynamically.
Yes - for
outgoing calls
only.
It is
configured in
the Fixed
Ports section
of the IP
service.
H.323 H.245
49152 59999
TCP
H.245 control.
Each outgoing call
has a separate port.
The port for each
outgoing call is
allocated
dynamically. It can be
avoided by tunneling.
Yes - for
outgoing calls
only.
It is
configured in
the Fixed
Ports section
of the IP
service.
SIP server
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the
SIP Server.
Sometimes port
60000 is used when
the system cannot
reuse the TCP port.
This port can be set
in the Central
signaling (CS)
configuration file.
Yes - in the IP
service
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-19 RMX Network Port Usage Summary
Connection
Type
Port
Number
Protocol
Description
Configurable
Alternative
SIP server
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the
alternate SIP Server.
Sometimes port
60000 is used when
the system cannot
reuse the TCP port.
This port can be set
in the Central
signaling (CS)
configuration file
Yes - in the IP
service
SIP Outbound
proxy
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the
SIP outbound proxy.
Sometimes port
60000 is used when
the system cannot
reuse the TCP port.
This port can be set
in the Central
signaling (CS)
configuration file
Yes - in the IP
service
Alternative
SIP Outbound
proxy
5060
60000
UDP,
TCP
Connection to the
alternate SIP
outbound proxy.
Sometimes port
60000 is used when
the system cannot
reuse the TCP port.
This port can be set
in the Central
signaling (CS)
configuration file
Yes - in the IP
service
RTP
49152 59999
UDP
RTP media packets.
The ports are
dynamically
allocated.
Yes - It is
configured in
the Fixed
Ports section
of the IP
service.
14-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-19 RMX Network Port Usage Summary
Connection
Type
Port
Number
RTCP
SIP -TLS
Protocol
Description
Configurable
49152 59999
UDP
RTP control.
The ports are
dynamically
allocated.
Yes - It is
configured in
the Fixed
Ports section
of the IP
service.
5061
TCP
SIP -TLS for SIP
server, alternate SIP
server, outbound
proxy and alternate
outbound proxy
No
ISDN/PSTN Network Services
To enable ISDN and PSTN participants to connect to the MCU, an ISDN/
PSTN Network Service must be defined. A maximum of two ISDN/PSTN
Network Services, of the same Span Type (E1 or T1) can be defined for the
RMX. Each Network Service can attach spans from either or both cards.
Most of the parameters of the first ISDN/PSTN Network Service are
configured in the Fast Configuration Wizard, which runs automatically if an
RTM ISDN card is detected in the RMX during first time power-up. For
more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "First
Entry Power-up and Configuration” on page 2-22.
Supported Capabilities and Conferencing Features:
• ISDN video is supported only in Continuous Presence (CP)
conferences.
14-46
•
Only BONDING (using multiple channels as a single, large
bandwidth channel) is supported.
•
Simple audio negotiation.
•
Supported video resolutions are the same as for IP.
•
Supported video Protocols are the same as for IP: H.261, H.263,
H.264.
•
H.239 for content sharing.
Chapter 14-Network Services
•
Lecture Mode.
•
DTMF codes.
•
Securing of conferences.
•
Basic cascading between two MCUs using an ISDN link is available
and forwarding of DTMF codes can be suppressed.
Non Supported Capabilities and Conferencing Features:
• NFAS (Non-Facility Associated Signaling)
•
Leased line usage
•
Restricted Channel mode
•
Aggregation of channels
•
V.35 serial standards
•
Primary and secondary clock source configuration (they are
automatically selected by the system)
•
Auto detection of Audio Only setting at endpoint
•
Auto re-negotiation of bit rate
•
Additional network services (two currently supported)
•
Change of video mode (capabilities) from remote side during call
•
Audio algorithms G.729 and G.723.1
•
FECC
•
H.243 Chair Control
•
Encryption
•
T.120 data sharing protocol
•
H.261 Annex D
•
MIH Cascading using an ISDN connection as cascade link
Adding/Modifying ISDN/PSTN Network Services
The system administrator can use the RMX Management – ISDN/
PSTN Network Services section of the RMX Web Client to add a second
ISDN/PSTN Network Service or modify the first ISDN/PSTN Network Service.
A new ISDN/PSTN Network Service can be defined even if no RTM ISDN card
is installed in the system.
14-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Obtaining ISDN/PSTN required information
Before configuring the ISDN/PSTN Network Service, obtain the
following information from your ISDN/PSTN Service Provider:
•
Switch Type
•
Line Coding and Framing
•
Numbering Plan
•
Numbering Type
•
Dial-in number range
If the RMX is connected to the public ISDN Network, an external CSU or similar
equipment is needed.
To Add an ISDN/PSTN Network Service:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click ISDN/PSTN Network Services
( ).
2
14-48
In the ISDN/PSTN Network Services list menu, click the New ISDN/
PSTN Service button ( ) or right-click anywhere in the ISDN/PSTN
Network Services list and select New ISDN/PSTN Service.
Chapter 14-Network Services
The Fast Configuration Wizard sequence begins with the ISDN/PSTN
dialog box:
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 14-20 ISDN Service Settings
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
Specify the service provider’s (carrier) name or any
other name you choose, using up to 20 characters.
The Network Service Name identifies the ISDN/PSTN
Service to the system.
Default name: ISDN/PSTN Service
Note: This field is displayed in all ISDN/PSTN
Network Properties tabs and can contain character
sets that use Unicode encoding.
14-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-20 ISDN Service Settings (Continued)
Field
Description
Span Type
Select the type of spans (ISDN/PSTN) lines, supplied
by the service provider, that are connected to the
RMX. Each span can be defined as a separate
Network Service, or all the spans from the same
carrier can be defined as part of the same Network
Service.
Select either:
• T1 (U.S. – 23 B channels + 1 D channel)
•
E1 (Europe – 30 B channels + 1 D channel)
Default: T1
Service Type
4
PRI is the only supported service type. It is
automatically selected.
Click Next.
The PRI Settings dialog box is displayed:
14-50
Chapter 14-Network Services
5
Define the following parameters:
Table 14-21 PRI Settings
Field
Description
Default Num Type
Select the Default Num Type from the list.
The Num Type defines how the system handles the
dialing digits. For example, if you type eight dialing
digits, the Num Type defines whether this number is
national or international.
If the PRI lines are connected to the RMX via a
network switch, the selection of the Num Type is
used to route the call to a specific PRI line. If you
want the network to interpret the dialing digits for
routing the call, select Unknown.
Default: Unknown
Note: For E1 spans, this parameter is set by the
system.
Num Plan
Select the type of signaling (Number Plan) from the
list according to information given by the service
provider.
Default: ISDN
Note: For E1 spans, this parameter is set by the
system.
Net Specific
Select the appropriate service program if one is
used by your service provider (carrier).
Some service providers may have several service
programs that can be used.
Default: None
Dial-out Prefix
Enter the prefix that the PBX requires to dial out.
Leave this field blank if a dial-out prefix is not
required.
The field can contain be empty (blank) or a numeric
value between 0 and 9999.
Default: Blank
14-51
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
Click Next.
The Span Definition dialog box is displayed:
Table 14-22 Span Definition
Field
Description
Framing
Select the Framing format used by the carrier for
the network interface from the list.
• For T1 spans, default is SFSF.
•
Side
For E1 spans, default is FEBE.
Select one of the following options:
• User side (default)
•
•
Network side
Symmetric side
Note: If the PBX is configured on the network side,
then the RMX unit must be configured as the user
side, and vice versa, or both must be configured
symmetrically.
14-52
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-22 Span Definition (Continued)
Field
Description
Line Coding
Select the PRI line coding method from the list.
• For T1 spans, default is B8ZS.
•
Switch Type
For E1 spans, default is HDB3.
Select the brand and revision level of switch
equipment installed in the service provider’s central
office.
• For T1 spans, default is AT&T 4ESS.
•
For E1 spans, default is EURO ISDN.
7
Click Next.
8
To define dial-in number ranges click the Add button.
9
The Add Phone Number dialog box opens.
The Phones dialog is displayed.
14-53
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
10 Define the following parameters:
Table 14-23 Phones Settings
•
•
Field
Description
First Number
The first number in the phone number range.
Last Number
The last number in the phone number range.
A range must include at least two dial-in numbers.
A range cannot exceed 1000 numbers.
11 Click OK.
The new range is added to the Dial-in Phone Numbers table.
12 Optional. Repeat steps 8 to 10 to define additional dial-in ranges.
13 Enter the MCU CLI (Calling Line Identification).
In a dial-in connections, the MCU CLI indicates the MCU’s number
dialed by the participant. In a dial-out connection, indicates the MCU
(CLI) number as seen by the participant
14 Click Save & Continue.
After clicking Save & Continue, you cannot use the Back button to
return to previous configuration dialog boxes.
The ISDN/PSTN Network Service is created and confirmed.
15 Click OK to continue the configuration.
The Spans dialog box opens displaying the following read-only fields:
— ID – The connector on the ISDN/PSTN card (PRI1 - PRI12).
— Slot – The media card that the ISDN/PSTN card is connected to
(1 or 2)
— Service – The Network Service to which the span is assigned, or
blank if the span is not assigned to a Network Service
— Clock Source – Indicates whether the span acts as a clock source,
and if it does, whether it acts as a Primary or Backup clock
source. The first span to synchronize becomes the primary clock
source.
— State – The type of alarm: No alarm, yellow alarm or red alarm.
14-54
Chapter 14-Network Services
16 Attach spans to existing Network Services, by marking the
appropriate check boxes in the Attached field.
Each ISDN/PSTN card can support 7 E1 or 9 T1 PRI lines.
17 Click Next.
The Video/Voice Ports dialog box opens.
Maximum
number of
licensed
ports
Current
Setting
14-55
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Video ports can be converted to voice ports to enable maximized
usage of the system’s resources.
The conversion ratio is 1:5, up to a maximum of 400 (80 x 5) voice
ports. The voice ports are used to connect VoIP and PSTN
participants.
If the system runs out of voice ports, voice endpoints cannot connect to
available video ports. Conversely, video endpoints cannot connect to available
voice ports.
18 Move the slider to the required setting.
The maximum number of video ports displayed in the dialog box is taken from
the license key. Only this number can be converted into voice ports.
The slider moves in multiples of two, converting video ports to voice
ports in groups of two, with each video port converting to five voice
ports. The minimum number of voice ports that can be allocated is 10
(2 video ports x 5 voice ports/video port).
All available ports are initially allocated as video ports at CIF
resolution.
19 Click Save & Close.
20 In the Reset Confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
21 Click Yes to complete the Fast Configuration Wizard and reset the RMX.
Changes made to any of these parameters only take effect when the RMX unit
is reset. An Active Alarm is created when changes made to the system have not
yet been implemented and the MCU must be reset.
Modifying an ISDN/PSTN Network Service
To Modify an ISDN/PSTN Network Service:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click the ISDN/PSTN Network
Services ( ) icon.
2
In the ISDN/PSTN Network Services list, double-click the ISDN or
right-click the ISDN entry and select Properties.
The ISDN Properties dialog boxes are displayed. They are similar to
the Fast Configuration Wizard’s dialog boxes. For more information see
"To Add an ISDN/PSTN Network Service:” on page 14-48.
14-56
Chapter 14-Network Services
The following ISDN Properties can be modified:
— PRI Settings
• Net Specific
• Dial-out Prefix
— Span Definition
• Framing
• Side
• Line Coding
• Switch Type
— Phones
• Dial-in Phone Numbers
• MCU CLI
— Spans
• Attached
All other ISDN Properties can only be modified only by deleting the
ISDN/PSTN network service and creating a new PSTN service using
the Fast Configuration Wizard. For more information, see "To Add an
ISDN/PSTN Network Service:” on page 14-48.
3
Click the LAN Ports tab
14-57
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-24 Default Management Network Service – LAN Ports
Field
Description
Port Speed
The RMX has 3 LAN ports. The administrator can set the
speed and transmit/receive mode manually for LAN 2
Port only.
Port
The LAN port number: 1, 2 or 3.
Note: Do not change the automatic setting
of Port 1 and Port 3. Any change to Port 1
speed will not be applied.
Speed
Select the speed and transmit/receive mode
for each port.
Default: Auto – Negotiation of speed and
transmit/receive mode starts at 1000 Mbits/
second Full Duplex, proceeding downward to
10 Mbits/second Half Duplex.
Note: To maximize conferencing
performance, especially in high bit rate call
environments, a 1Gb connection is
recommended.
Network Security
System security can be enhanced by separating the Media, Signaling and
Management Networks.
RMX 1500/4000
On the RMX 1500 and RMX 4000, Media, Signaling and Management
Networks are physically separated to provide enhanced security. The IP
Network Service and the Default Management Network have been logically
and physically separated from each other. In the IP Network Service each IP
address is assigned a physical port and media (RTP) inputs are routed
14-58
Chapter 14-Network Services
directly to an MPM+ or MPMx card. This provides for a more secure
network with greater bandwidth as each media card has its own
dedicated port. All signaling communications are processed on a single
stack of the processor in the MCU.
RMX 2000
On the RMX 2000, a RTM LAN or RTM ISDN card is required to enable
the separation between the networks. By defining Multiple Network
Services, a separate network can be defined for each media card installed
in the system.
Multiple Network Services
Media, signaling and Management networks can be physically separated
on the RMX system to provide enhanced security. This addresses the
requirement in an organization that different groups of participants be
supported on different networks. For example, some participants may be
internal to the organization while others are external.
Up to four media and signaling networks can be defined for RMX 4000, or
two for RMX 2000 and two for RMX 1500. Multiple IP Network Services can
be defined, one (RMX 2000/4000) or up to two (RMX 1500) for each media
and signaling network connected to the RMX. The networks can be
connected to one or several Media cards in the RMX unit.
The Management Network is logically and physically separated from the
media and signaling networks. There can be one Management Network
defined per RMX system.
Each conference on the RMX can host participants from the different IP
Network networks simultaneously.
The following figure shows the network topology with three different
media and signaling networks and one Management network connected
to the RMX 4000.
14-59
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Figure 14-3RMX 4000 - Multiple Network Topology Sample
Guidelines
•
Multiple Services system mode is a purchasable option and it is
enabled in the MCU license.
•
Multiple Services system mode is enabled when the system
configuration flag MULTIPLE_SERVICES is added and set to YES.
The MULTIPLE_SERVICE System Flag cannot be set to YES when IPv6
Addressing is enabled.
14-60
Chapter 14-Network Services
•
In version 7.2, when configuring Multiple Networks on the RMX 2000,
the RMX2000_RTM_LAN flag must be set to YES in addition to the
MULTIPLE_NETWORKS=YES flag
•
This option is supported with MPM+ and MPMx media cards.
•
Multiple Network Services are supported in MCUs with at least
1024MB memory only. MCU units with memory of 512MB support
only one IP Network Service.
•
Multiple Network Services are NOT supported with Microsoft ICE
Environments.
•
Only IPv4 is supported for the definition of Multiple Network
Services.
•
On RMX 1500, up to two Network Services, one per LAN port, can be
associated with each Media card.
On RMX 2000/4000, a media card can be associated with only one
Network Service.
•
On RMX 2000/4000, RTM ISDN or RTM LAN can be used for
Multiple Services configuration.
•
On RMX 1500, when Multiple Network Services option is enabled,
the two networks must differ in their subnet masks.
•
On the RMX 1500, LAN redundancy cannot be enabled in parallel to
Multiple Networks and the LAN_REDUNDANCY flag must be set
to NO when the Multiple Networks option is enabled.
•
An IP Network Service can be associated with one or several media
cards.
•
If more than one card is associated with the same Network Service,
the system routes the calls to the appropriate card according to
resource availability
•
Participants on different networks can connect to the same
conference with full audio, video and content capabilities.
•
Traffic on one network does not influence or affect the traffic on other
networks connected to the same MCU, unless they are connected to
the same media card. If one network fails, it will not affect the traffic
in the other connected networks, unless they are connected to the
same media card and the card fails.
14-61
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Maximum number of services that can be defined per RMX platform:
Table 14-25 Maximum Number of Network Services per RMX System
•
•
•
RMX Platform
IP Network Services
Management
Services
RMX 1500
Up to 2
1
RMX 2000
Up to 2 (combination of RTM ISDN and/
or RTM LAN)
1
RMX 4000
Up to 4 (Up to 2 RTM ISDN cards and
the remaining RTM LAN cards)
1
Only one DNS server can be defined for the entire configuration. It is
recommended to define it in one of the IP Network Services
(signaling) and not the Management Network to enable dialing in/
out using names.
— In the Network Services that do not include the DNS, use the IP
addresses of the various devices to define them in the Network
Services.
Participants are associated with a Network Service and use it
resources as follows:
— Dial-in participants - according to the network used to place the
call and connect to the RMX.
— Dial-out participant - according to the Network Service selected
during the participant properties definition or during conference
definition, according to the Network Service selected as default.
Recording Links use the default Network Service to connect to
conferences, therefore the recording system must be defined on the
default network to enable the recording.
Resource Allocation and Capacity
The Video/Voice Port Configuration and the Resolution Configuration settings
are configured per MCU and affect the resource capacity of the MCU.
They are reflected in the port gauges displayed on the RMX management
application’s main screen. In Multiple Networks mode, the overall
resources as configured in the Video/Voice Port Configuration are divided
between the Network Services. However, the port gauges do not reflect
the resource availability per Network Service.
14-62
Chapter 14-Network Services
Fixed and Flexible Resource Allocation Mode
On RMX 2000/4000 resources are divided between services according to
the number of media cards associated with each service and the card
assembly type (for example, MPM+40 vs. MPM+80). If two identical
media cards are installed in the system and each card is assigned to a
different Network Service, the resources are split between the services.
If two cards are installed but each card is of different assembly type, the
resources are allocated according to the card capacity ratio. For example,
in a system with one MPM+40 and one MPM+80, the capacity ratio is 1 to
2, therefore a third of the resources will be assigned to the network service
associated with MPM+40 and two thirds will be assigned to the Network
Service associated with MPM+80.
On RMX 1500 with two Network Services associated with one media card,
the resources of the two Network Services associated with one media card
are not split between the network services. In such a case, resources are
used per their availability by both Network Services equally.
In Fixed Resource Allocation Mode if the resources cannot be divided into
whole numbers, they will be rounded up to the nearest whole number,
assigning that resource to the Network Service with the higher capacity (i.e.
more media cards or media cards with higher capacity due to a different
card assembly).
First Time Installation and Configuration
First Time Installation and Configuration of the RMX 1500/2000/4000
consists of the following procedures:
1
Preparations:
— Gather Network Equipment and Address Information - get the
information needed for integrating the RMX into the local
network for each of the networks that will be connected to the
RMX unit. For a list of required address, see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Getting Started Guide, "Gather Network Equipment and Address
Information” on page 2-2.
— Unpack the RMX. For more details see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Getting Started Guide, Chapter 2.
— Modify the Management Network parameters on the USB Key. For
more details see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Modifying the Factory Default Management Network Settings on the
USB Key” on page 2-9.
14-63
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
Hardware Installation and Setup
3
— Mount the RMX in a rack. For more details see the RMX 1500/
2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Hardware Installation and Setup”
on page 2-11.
— Connect the necessary cables. For details, see “RMX Hardware
Installation” on page 67.
First Entry Power-up and Configuration
4
— Power up the RMX. For more details see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 1: First-time Power-up” on
page 2-22.
— Register the RMX. For more details see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 2: Product Registration” on
page 2-23.
— Connect to the RMX. For more details see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Getting Started Guide, "Procedure 3: Connection to MCU” on
page 2-24.
— Configure the Default IP Network Service using the information
for one of the networks connected a media card installed in the
system. For more details see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting
Started Guide, "Procedure 4: Modifying the Default IP Service and
ISDN/PSTN Network Service Settings” on page 2-26.
— Optional. Configure the ISDN/PSTN Network Service. For more
details see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide.
Modify the required System Flag to enable Multiple Services and
reset the MCU.
5
Add the required IP Network Services to accommodate the networks
connected to the RMX unit.
6
Select a Network Service to act as default for dial out and gateway
calls for which the Network Service was not selected.
7
Place several calls and run conferences to ensure that the system is
configured correctly.
Upgrading to Version 7.2.x and Multiple Services
1
14-64
Gather Network Equipment and Address Information for each of the
networks that will be connected to the RMX unit. For a list of
required address, see "Gather Network Equipment and Address
Information - IP Network Services Required Information” on page 14-66.
Chapter 14-Network Services
2
Upgrade the software version to Version 7.1 and install the activation
key that contains the Multiple Services license as described in RMX
1500/2000/4000 Release Notes, “Upgrade Paths to Version 7.2.1” on
page 14.
3
Place several calls and run conferences to ensure that the system
upgrade was completed successfully.
4
Modify the required System Flag to enable Multiple Services, DO
NOT reset the MCU yet.
5
Connect the additional network cables to the RMX and change
existing connections to match the required configuration as described
in the “RMX Hardware Installation” on page 67.
At this point, the Management Network can be modified to match the
required local network settings.
If the RMX 2000 you are upgrading does not include RTM ISDN or RTM LAN
cards, you must install at least one RTM LAN card to enable the definition of
multiple Network Services. If no RTM ISDN or RTM LAN cards are installed, the
RMX 2000 works in a single Network Service mode and an alarm is issued by
the system. For more details about the installation of RTM LAN cards, see the
RMX 2000 Hardware Guide.
6
Reset the MCU.
7
Connect to the MCU and Add the required IP Network Services to
accommodate the networks connected to the RMX unit.
8
Select a Network Service to act as default for dial out and gateway
calls for which the Network Service was not selected.
9
Place several calls and run conferences to ensure that the system is
configured correctly.
14-65
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Gather Network Equipment and Address Information - IP Network
Services Required Information
It is important that before connecting multiple networks and
implementing Multiple Services in the RMX, that you obtain the
information needed to complete the IP Network Service configuration for
each connected network from your network administrator.
Table 14-26 Network Equipment and Address Information per IP Network Service
Parameter
Local Network Settings
Note
Signaling Host IP
address
Media Board IP
address (MPM 1)
Media Board IP
address (MPM 2)
RMX 2000/4000 only
If more than one media
card is associated with
this Network Service
Media Board IP
address (MPM 3)
RMX 4000 only
If more than one media
card is associated with
this Network Service
Media Board IP
address (MPM 4)
RMX 4000 only
If more than one media
card is associated with
this Network Service
Gatekeeper IP
address (optional)
DNS IP address
(optional)
SIP Server IP
address (optional)
14-66
Only one DNS can be
defined for the entire
Network topology
Chapter 14-Network Services
RMX Hardware Installation
When connecting the LAN cables of the various networks to the RMX it is
recommended to use a color system to differentiate between the networks, for
example, using colored cables.
RMX 4000 Multiple Services Configuration
Connecting the cables to the RTM IP 4000:
The following cables are connected to the RTM IP on the rear panel of the
RMX 4000:
Table 14-27 LAN Connections to the RTM IP
RTM IP Port
Description
LAN 1
Modem
LAN 2
Management
LAN 3
–
LAN 4
–
LAN 5
–
LAN 6
Shelf Management
14-67
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Connecting the cables to the RTM LAN:
Table 14-28 LAN Connections to the RTM LAN
RTM LAN Port
Description
LAN 1
–
LAN 2
Signaling and Media - existing (first) Network Service
Figure 14-4 shows the cables connected to the RMX 4000 rear panel, when
one RTM ISDN and three RTM LAN cards are installed providing IP and
ISDN connectivity. The RTM ISDN card can be used for both ISDN and IP
calls and only one IP network Service is associated with each RTM LAN
card.
LAN cable (Media &
Signaling) Network 4
PRI cable
LAN cable
(Media & Signaling)
Network 3
LAN cable
(Media & Signaling)
Network 2
LAN cable
(Media & Signaling)
Network 1
Management
Network
Shelf Management
Figure 14-4RMX 4000 Rear Panel with LAN and PRI cables
14-68
Chapter 14-Network Services
In this case, up to four different IP Network Services can be defined - one
for each RTM LAN/RTM ISDN cards installed in the system.
Several cards can be assigned to the same IP Network Service. The
definition of the network services attached to the RMX unit and which
cards are assigned to each network service is defined in the IP Network
Service.
RMX 2000 Multiple Services Configuration
Connecting the cables to the RTM IP:
The following cables are connected to the RTM IP on the rear panel of the
RMX2000:
Table 14-29 LAN Connections to the RTM IP
RTM IP Port
Description
LAN 1
–
LAN 2
Management
LAN 3
Modem
Connecting the cables to the RTM LAN:
If RTM LAN or RTM ISDN cards are not installed on the RMX, they must be
installed before connecting the additional network cables for media and
signaling.
Table 14-30 LAN Connections to the RTM LAN
RTM IP Port
Description
LAN 1
–
LAN 2
Signaling and Media - first Network Service (optional)
14-69
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
If one LAN port per RTM ISDN/ RTM LAN card is used, up to two
different IP Network Services can be defined - one for each installed
RTM LAN/RTM ISDN cards.
Figure 14-5 shows the cables connected to the RMX 2000 rear panel, when
two RTM LAN cards are installed providing IP connectivity.
Figure 14-5RMX 2000 Rear Panel with RTM LAN Cables
RMX 1500 Multiple Services Configuration
Connecting the cables to the RTM IP 1500:
The following cables are connected to the RTM IP on the rear panel of the
RMX 1500:
Table 14-31 LAN Connections to the RTM IP
14-70
RTM IP Port
Description
LAN 1
Media and signaling - additional (second) Network Service
LAN 2
Media and signaling - existing (first) Network Service
MNG
–
MNG B
Management
Shelf
Shelf Management
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-31 LAN Connections to the RTM IP
RTM IP Port
Description
LAN 3
–
LAN 4
–
Modem
Modem
RMX Configuration
Once the network cables are connected to the RMX unit, you can modify
the default IP Network Service and add additional Network Services.
System Flags and License Settings
The MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flag determines whether the
Multiple Services option will be activated once the appropriate license is
installed. Possible Values: YES / NO Default: NO
This flag must be manually added to the system configuration and set to
YES to enable this option. For more information see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags”
on page 19-21.
If the MULTIPLE_SERVICES System Flag is set to YES and no RTM ISDN or
RTM LAN card is installed in the RMX 2000, an Active Alarm is displayed.
IP Network Service Definition
Use this procedure to define Network Services in addition to the Network
Service already defined during first entry installation and configuration.
Each of the defined Network Service can be associated with one or more
media cards installed in the system (depending on the system type).
Once a media card is associated with a Network Service it cannot be
associated with another network service.
To add new/additional Network Services:
1
In the Device Management pane, click IP Network Services (
2
In the Network Services list toolbar, click the
Service button.
).
Add Network
14-71
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New IP Service - Networking IP dialog box opens.
3
Define the following fields:
Table 14-32 IP Network Service - IP Parameters
14-72
Field
Description
Network Service
Name
Enter the IP Network Service name.
Note: This field is displayed in all IP Signaling dialog
boxes and can contain character sets that use
Unicode encoding.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-32 IP Network Service - IP Parameters
Field
Description
IP Network Type
Select the IP Network environment. You can select:
• H.323: For an H.323-only Network Service.
•
•
SIP: For a SIP-only Network Service.
H.323 & SIP: For an integrated IP Service. Both
H.323 and SIP participants can connect to the
MCU using this service.
Note: This field is displayed in all Default IP Service
tabs.
Signaling Host IP
Address
Enter the address to be used by IP endpoints when
dialing into the MCU using this Network Service.
Dial out calls of participants to whom this network
service will be assigned are initiated from this
address.
This address is used to register the RMX with a
Gatekeeper or a SIP Proxy server residing on this
network.
Media Card 1 IP
Address
If only one network is connected to this media card,
it is enough to assign one media card to this
Network Service. In such a case, enter one IP
address for the media card according to the LAN
Port used for the connection.
If each of the LAN ports on one media card is used
with two different networks, each port is assigned to
its own Network Service. In such a case, enter the
IP address of the port to be assigned to this Network
Service.
A LAN port that is already assigned to a different
Network Service, displays the IP Address of the
assigned port and it cannot be assigned to this
Network Service (it is disabled).
14-73
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-32 IP Network Service - IP Parameters
Field
Description
Media Card 2 IP
Address
(RMX 2000/4000)
If only one network is connected to this media card,
it is enough to assign one media card to this
Network Service. In such a case, enter one IP
address for the media card according to the LAN
Port used for the connection, as provided by the
network administrator.
If each of the LAN ports on one media card is used
with two different networks, each port is assigned to
its own Network Service. In such a case, enter the
IP address of the port to be assigned to this Network
Service.
Notes:
• LAN Ports/Media cards that are already
associated with another Network Service cannot
be associated with this Network Service.
Media Card 3 IP
Address
(RMX 4000)
Media Card 4 IP
Address
(RMX 4000)
•
You can define a Network Service without
assigning media cards to it.
•
To change the assignment of a card from one
service to another, the card must first be
removed from the service to which it is assigned
prior to its assignment to another service.
RMX 2000: If one card was already assigned to
another service, only one additional card can be
assigned to this service.
RMX 4000: Depending on the number of media
cards installed in the system, you can assign up to 4
media cards to this network service provided that
they are not assigned to any other Network Service.
Subnet Mask
4
14-74
Enter the subnet mask of the MCU in that network
service.
Default value: 255.255.255.0.
Optional. Some system flags can be defined per Network Service,
depending on the network environment.
To modify these flags, click the Service Configuration button.
Chapter 14-Network Services
The Service Configuration dialog box opens.
All the flags must be manually added to this dialog box. For a
detailed description of the flags and how to add them, see the
RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Manually Adding and
Deleting System Flags” on page 19-21.
Flags defined per Network Service override their general definition in the
System Configuration.
The following flags can be defined per service:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
SIP_ENABLE_FECC
ENABLE_H239
SIP_ENABLE_FECC
ENABLE_CLOSED_CAPTION
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT_RECORDING_LINK_IN_ENCRYPT_CONF
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MIN_LEN
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_MAX_LEN
ENABLE_CASCADED_LINK_TO_JOIN_WITHOUT_PASSWORD
MAX_CP_RESOLUTION
QOS_IP_AUDIO
QOS_IP_VIDEO
14-75
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
14-76
QOS_IP_SIGNALING
ENABLE_CISCO_GK
SIP_FREE_VIDEO_RESOURCES
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION
MS_ENVIRONMENT
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTERVAL_ENV
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_INTERVAL_EP
H263_ANNEX_T
H239_FORCE_CAPABILITIES
MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
IP_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
FORCE_STATIC_MB_ENCODING
FORCE_RESOLUTION
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_IP
DISABLE_WIDE_RES_TO_SIP_DIAL_OUT
SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPONRESOURCE_THRESHOLD
5
Click the Routers tab.
6
Define the routers used in this network and that are other than the
routers defined in the Management Network. The field definitions of
the Routers tab are the same as for the Default Management Network.
For more information see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s
Guide, "Click the Routers tab.” on page 14-16.
Chapter 14-Network Services
7
Click the DNS tab.
8
Modify the following fields:
Table 14-33 Default Management Network Service – DNS
Field
Description
Service Host
Name
Enter the host name of this network Service. Each
Network Service must have a unique Host Name
otherwise an error message is displayed.
DNS
Select:
• Off – if no DNS server is used in this network.
•
Specify – to enter the IP address of the DNS
server used by this network service.
Notes:
• The IP address field is enabled only if Specify is
selected.
•
Register Host
Names
Automatically to
DNS Servers
Only one DNS can be define for the entire
topology (that is, only one Network Service can
include the DNS definition).
Select this option to automatically register this
Network Service Signaling Host with the DNS
server.
14-77
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 14-33 Default Management Network Service – DNS (Continued)
9
Field
Description
Local Domain
Name
Enter the name of the domain for this network
service.
DNS Server
Address
Enter the static IP address of the DNS server that is
part of this network.
Click the Gatekeeper tab.
10 Define the Primary and Alternate Gatekeepers and at least one Alias for
this network Service. The field definitions of the Gatekeeper tab are the
same as for the Default IP Network Service. For more information see
the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Click the Gatekeeper
tab.” on page 14-17.
In Multiple Services mode, an Alias must be defined for the specified
gatekeeper.
11 Optional. Click the Ports tab.
Settings in the Ports tab allow specific ports in the firewall to be
allocated to multimedia conference calls. If required, defined the
ports to be used multimedia conference calls handled by this
Network Service. The field definitions of the Ports tab are the same as
for the Default IP Network Service.
For more information see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s
Guide, "Click the Ports tab.” on page 14-20.
12 If required, click the QoS tab.
RMX’s implementation of QoS is defined per Network Service, not
per endpoint.
The routers must support QoS in order for IP packets to get higher priority.
The field definitions of the QoS tab are the same as for the Default IP
Network Service. For more information see the RMX 1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, "If required, click the QoS tab.” on page 14-22.
14-78
Chapter 14-Network Services
13 Click the SIP Servers tab.
14 Define the Primary and Alternate SIP Server for this network Service.
•
Starting with Version 7.1, Registration of conferencing entities with the SIP
Servers was moved to the conferencing entities and is defined in the
Conference Profile.
•
If Microsoft Office Communications or Lync server are part of this network
service, a certificate must be created for this network service. If each
network connected to the RMX includes Microsoft Office Communications
or Lync server, separate certificates must be created and sent to the MCU
for each of these networks.
•
If the Network Service does not include a DNS, you must use the IP address
of the SIP Server instead of its name.
The field definitions of the SIP Servers tab are the same as for the
Default IP Network Service. For more information see the RMX 1500/
2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Click the SIP Servers tab.” on
page 14-25.
15 Click the Security tab.
The field definitions of the Security tab are the same as for the Default
IP Network Service. For more information see the RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Click the Security tab.” on page 14-28.
16 Optional. To configure the ICE environment, click the SIP Advanced
tab.
17 Modify the following fields:
Table 14-34 Default IP Network Service – SIP Advanced
Field
Description
Server User Name
Enter the User name for this service as defined in
the Active Directory. For example, enter rmxNet2.
This field is disabled if the ICE Environment field is
set to None.
ICE Environment
Select MS (for Microsoft ICE implementation) to
enable the ICE integration.
This field is disabled if the RMX is not running in
MPM+ Card Configuration Mode.
14-79
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
18 Click the OK button.
The new Network Service is added to the IP Network Services list
pane.
Setting a Network Service as Default
The default Network Service is used when no Network Service is selected
for the following:
•
Dial out participants
•
Reserving resources for participants when starting an ongoing
conference
•
Gateway calls
In addition, the Signaling Host IP address and the MCU Prefix in GK
displayed on the RMX Web Client main screen are taken from the default
H.323 Network Service.
One IP Network Service can be defined as default for H.323 connections
and another Network Service as default for SIP connections. If the IP
Network Service supports both H.323 and SIP connections, you can set
the same Network Service as default for both H.323 and SIP, or for H.323only or for SIP-only.
To designate an IP Network Service as the default IP Network Service:
1
In the Device Management pane, click IP Network Services (
2
In the Network Services list pane right-click the IP Network Service to
be set as the default, and then click Set As H.323 Default, or Set As
SIP Default.
).
The next time you access this menu, a check mark is added next to the
network service type to indicate its selection as default.
To set this IP Network Service for both H.323 and SIP connections,
repeat step 2 and select the option you need.
The following icons are used to indicate the default IP Network
Service type:
Table 14-35 Default IP Network Service Icons
Icon
Description
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323
connections and is designated as default for both SIP
and H.323 connections.
14-80
Chapter 14-Network Services
Table 14-35 Default IP Network Service Icons
Icon
Description
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323
connections and is designated as default for H.323
connections.
This Network Service supports both SIP and H.323
connections and is designated as default for SIP
connections.
This Network Service supports only H.323
connections and is set as default for H.323
connections.
This Network Service supports only SIP connections
and is set as default for SIP connections.
Ethernet Settings
The RMX 2000 is set to automatically identify the speed and transmit/
receive mode of each LAN ports located on the RTM LAN or RTM ISDN
cards that are added to the system. These port settings can be manually
configured if the specific switch requires it, via the Ethernet Settings as
for RMX 1500/4000. For more details, see RMX 1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, "Ethernet Settings” on page 14-30.
RMX 1500: The Port numbers displayed in the dialog box do not reflect the
physical Port numbers as labeled on the RMX 1500 MCU.
Signaling Host IP Address and MCU Prefix in GK Indications
The RMX Web Client displays the Signaling Host IP Address and MCU
Prefix in GK parameters as defined in the Default H.323 Network Service.
Video/Voice Port Configuration and Resolution Configuration
These configurations are set for the system and are applied to all the
Network Services.
14-81
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Conference Profile
Registration of conferencing entities such as ongoing conferences,
Meeting Rooms, Entry Queues, SIP Factories and Gateway Sessions with
SIP servers is done per conferencing entity. This allows better control on
the number of entities that register with each SIP server by selecting for
each of the conferencing entities whether it will register with the SIP
server.
The registration is defined in the Conference Profile - Network Services tab.
In the IP Network Services table, the system lists all the defined Network
Services (one or several depending on the system configuration).
14-82
•
To register the conferencing entity to which this profile is assigned to
a Network Service, in the Registration column click the check box of
that Network Service.
•
You can also prevent dial in participants from connecting to that
conferencing entities when connecting via a Network Service.
In the Accept Calls column, clear the check box of the Network Service
from which calls cannot connect to the conference.
Chapter 14-Network Services
Gateway Profiles
To enable the RMX to call the destination endpoint/MCU via IP
connection, the Network Service for the call must be selected in the
Gateway Profile dialog box.
The Network Service set as default is used if no other Network Service is
selected.
If the same Network Service is used for H.323 and SIP calls, the Network
Service Environment must include both H.323 and SIP settings.
14-83
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Hardware Monitor
The Hardware Monitor pane includes the status of the LAN ports on the
RTM LAN cards.
Signaling Monitor
The Signaling Monitor pane includes the list of the IP Network Services
defined in the system (up to two in RMX 1500/2000 and up to four in
RMX 4000). Double-clicking a Network Service, displays it properties and
status.
14-84
Chapter 14-Network Services
Conferencing
Each conference on the RMX can host participants from the different IP
Network networks simultaneously.
Defining Dial Out Participants
When defining dial out participants, you can select the Network Service
to place the call according to the network to which the endpoint pertains.
If the endpoint is located on a network other than the selected network,
the participant will not be able to connect.
If no Network is selected, the system uses the IP Network Service selected
for reserving the conference resources, and if none is set for the conference
it uses the Network Service set as default.
The IP Network Service is selected in the New Participant - Advanced dialog
box.
14-85
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Reserving Video Resources for a Conference
When defining a new ongoing conference or a conference reservation, you
can select the Network Service that will be used to reserve the required
resources. If no Network Service is selected, the default Network Service
is used. Therefore, make sure that not all conferences are reserving
resources from the same Network Service, otherwise you may run out of
resources for that Network Service.
The IP Network Service is selected in the New Conference/New Meeting
Room/New Reservation - General dialog box.
Monitoring Conferences
The Conference Properties - Network Services dialog box shows for each
Network Service with which Network Service’s SIP proxy the conference
should be registered and if the dial in call will be connected to the
conference.
In the Participant pane, a new column - Service Name was added,
indicating the name of Network Service used for the participant’s
connection.
14-86
Chapter 14-Network Services
Resource Report
The Resource Report displays the resource usage in total and per Network
Service in a table format. The Resources per Service table provides the
actual information on resource usage and availability per network Service
and provides an accurate snapshot of resources usage in the system.
You can select the graph to display: select either Totals (default) or the
Network Service.
Port Gauge Indications
The port Gauges displays the total resource usage for the RMX and not
per Network Service. Therefore, it may not be an accurate representation
of the availability of resources for conferencing, as one Network Service
may run out of available resources while another Network Service may
have all of it resources available. In such a case, the port gauges may show
that half of the system resources are available for conferencing, while calls
via the Network Service with no available resources will fail to connect.
14-87
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
14-88
15
IVR Services
Interactive Voice Response (IVR) is an application that allows
participants to communicate with the conferencing system via their
endpoint’s input device (such as a remote control). The IVR Service
includes a set of voice prompts and a video slide used to automate the
participants connection to a conference or Entry Queue. It allows
customization of menu driven scripts and voice prompts to meet
different needs and languages.
The IVR module includes two types of services:
•
Conference IVR Service that is used with conferences
•
Entry Queue IVR Service that is used with Entry Queues
The system is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services (one for
the conferences and the other for gateway calls) and one default Entry
Queue IVR Service. The default services include voice messages and
video slides in English.
To customize the IVR messages and video slide perform the following
operations:
•
Record the required voice messages and create a new video slide.
For more information, see "Creating a Welcome Video Slide” on
page 15-44.
•
Optional. Add the language to the list of languages supported by
the system.
•
Upload the voice messages to the MCU (This can be done as part of
the language definition or during the IVR Service definition).
•
Create the Conference IVR Service and upload the video slide, and
if required any additional voice messages.
15-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Optional. Create the Entry Queue IVR Service and upload the
required video slide and voice messages.
When upgrading the RMX software version new DTMF Codes and voice
messages are not automatically added to existing IVR Services in order to avoid
conflicts with existing DTMF codes. Therefore, to use new options, new
Conference and Entry Queue IVR Services must be created.
IVR Services List
You can view the currently defined Conference IVR and Entry Queue IVR
Services in the IVR Services list pane.
To view the IVR Services list:
1 In the RMX Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
15-2
Click the IVR Services ( ) entry.
The list pane displays the Conference IVR Services list and the total
number of IVR services currently defined in the system.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
IVR Toolbar
IVR Services List Pane
Access to IVR Services
list and customization
15-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
IVR Services Toolbar
The IVR Services toolbar provides quick access to the IVR Service
definitions as follows:
Table 15-1 IVR Toolbar buttons
Button
Button Name
Descriptions
New Conference
IVR Service
To create a new Conference IVR Service.
New Entry Queue
IVR Service
To create a new Entry Queue IVR Service.
Delete Service
Deletes the selected IVR service(s).
Set Default
Conference IVR
Service
Sets the selected Conference IVR Service as
default. When creating a new conference
Profile the default IVR Service is
automatically selected for the Profile (but can
be modified).
Set Default Entry
Queue Service
Sets the selected Entry Queue IVR Service
as default. When creating a new Entry Queue
the default Entry Queue IVR Service is
automatically selected.
Add Supported
Languages
Adds languages to the IVR module, enabling
you to download voice prompts and
messages for various languages.
Replace/Change
Music File
To replace the currently loaded music file that
is used to play background music, the MCU is
shipped with a default music file.
Adding Languages
You can define different sets of audio prompts in different languages,
allowing the participants to hear the messages in their preferred
language.
15-4
Chapter 15-IVR Services
The RMX is shipped with a default language (English) and all the
prompts and messages required for the default IVR Services, conference
and Entry Queues shipped with the system.
You can add languages to the list of languages for which different
messages are downloaded to the MCU and IVR Services are created. This
step is required before the creation of additional IVR messages using
languages that are different from English, or if you want to download
additional voice files to existing files in one operation and not during the
IVR service definition.
To add a language:
1 In the RMX Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list.
2
Click the IVR Services (
3
In the Conference IVR Services list, click the Add Supported
Languages ( ) button.
The Supported Languages dialog box opens.
4
Click the Add Language button.
The New Language dialog box opens.
) entry.
15-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
In the New Language box, enter the name of the new language. The
language name can be typed in Unicode and cannot start with a digit.
Maximum field length is 31 characters.
6
Click OK.
The new language is added to the list of Supported Languages.
To upload messages to the MCU:
You can upload audio files for the new language or additional files for an
existing language now, or you can do it during the definition of the IVR
Service. In the latter case, you can skip the next steps.
•
•
Voice messages should not exceed 3 minutes.
It is not recommended to upload more than 1000 audio files to the MCU
memory.
1
To upload the files to the MCU, in the Supported Languages dialog box,
click the Add Message File button.
2
The Add Message File dialog box opens.
Audio files are uploaded to the MCU one-by-one.
15-6
Chapter 15-IVR Services
3
In the IVR Message Language list, select the language for which the
audio file will be uploaded to the MCU.
4
In the IVR Message Category list, select the category for which the
audio file is uploaded.
5
In the Message Type list, select the message type for which the
uploaded message is to be played. You can upload several audio files
for each Message Type. Each file is downloaded separately.
Table 15-2 lists the Message Types for each category:
Table 15-2 IVR Message Types by Message Category
Message
Category
Message Type
Message
Conference
Password
Request Conference
Password
Requests the participant to
enter the conference password.
Request Conference
Password Retry
A participant who enters an
incorrect password is requested
to enter it again.
Request Digit
Requests the participant to
enter any digit in order to
connect to the conference. Used
for dial-out participants to avoid
answering machines in the
conference.
Welcome
Message
Welcome Message
The first message played when
the participant connects to the
conference or Entry Queue.
Conference
Chairperson
Request Chairperson
Identifier
Requests the participants to
enter the chairperson identifier
key.
Request Chairperson
Password
Requests the participant to
enter the chairperson password.
Request Chairperson
Password Retry
When the participant enters an
incorrect chairperson password,
requests the participant to enter
it again.
15-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-2 IVR Message Types by Message Category (Continued)
Message
Category
15-8
Message Type
Message
General
Messages played for system related event notifications,
for example, notification that the conference is locked.
Upload the files for the voice messages that are played
when an event occurs during the conference. For more
information, see "Conference IVR Service Properties General Voice Messages” on page 15-17.
Billing Code
Requests the chairperson to enter the conference Billing
Code.
Roll Call
Roll call related messages, such as the message played
when a participant joins the conference. Messages are
listed in the Conference IVR Service - Roll Call dialog
box.
Conference
ID
Requests the participant to enter the required
Conference ID to be routed to the destination
conference.
6
Click Upload File to upload the appropriate audio file to the MCU.
The Install File dialog box opens.
7
Enter the file name or click the Browse button to select the audio file
to upload.
The Select Source File dialog box opens.
8
Select the appropriate *.wav audio file, and then click the Open
button.
The name of the selected file is displayed in the Install field in the
Install File dialog box.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
9
Optional. You can play a .wav file by selecting the Play button (
).
10 Click Yes to upload the file to the MCU.
The system returns to the Add Message File dialog box.
11 Repeat step 6 to 10 for each additional audio file to be uploaded to the
MCU.
12 Once all the audio files are uploaded to the MCU, close the Add
Message File dialog box and return to the Add Language dialog box.
13 Click OK.
Defining a New Conference IVR Service
The RMX is shipped with two default Conference IVR Services and all its
audio messages and video slide. You can define new Conference IVR
Services or modify the default Conference IVR Service. For the definition
of Conference IVR Service for gateway calls, see "Defining the IVR Service
for Gateway Calls” on page 17-13.
Up to 40 IVR Services (Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR
Services) can be defined for a single RMX unit.
15-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Defining a New Conference IVR Service
To define a new Conference IVR Service:
1 On the IVR Services toolbar, click the New Conference IVR Service
(
) button.
The New Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 15-3 Conference IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
15-10
Field/Option
Description
Conference IVR
Service Name
Enter the name of the Conference IVR Service. The
maximum field length is 20 characters and may be
typed in Unicode.
Language For
IVR
Select the language of the audio messages and
prompts from the list of languages defined in the
Supported languages. The default language is
English. For more information, see "Adding
Languages” on page 15-4.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Table 15-3 Conference IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
Field/Option
Description
External Server
Authentication
You can configure the IVR Service to use an external
database application to verify a participant’s right to
join the conference. For more information, see
Appendix D: "Conference Access with External
Database Authentication” on page D-6.
Select one of the following options:
• Never – The participant’s right to join the
conference will not be verified with an external
database application (default).
•
Always – Any participant request to join the
conference is validated with the external database
application using a password.
•
Upon Request – Only the participant request to
join the conference as chairperson is validated
with the external database application using a
password. The validation process occurs only
when the participant enters the chairperson
identifier key.
Number of User
Input Retries
Enter the number of times the participant will be able
to respond to each menu prompt before being
disconnected from the conference. Range is between
1-4, and the default is 3.
Timeout for User
Input (Sec)
Enter the duration in seconds that the system will wait
for the participant’s input before prompting for another
input. Range is between 1-10, and the default value is
5 seconds.
DTMF Delimiter
Enter the key that indicates the last input key. Possible
values are the pound (#) and star (*) keys. The default
is #.
15-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
4
Select the Enable Welcome Messages check box to define the system
behavior when the participant enters the Conference IVR queue.
When participants access a conference through an Entry Queue, they
hear messages included in both the Entry Queue Service and
Conference IVR Service. To avoid playing the Welcome Message
twice, disable the Welcome Message in the Conference IVR Service.
5
Select the General Welcome Message, to be played when the
participant enters the conference IVR queue.
6
To upload an audio file for an IVR message, click Add Message File.
The Install File dialog box opens.
The RMX unit is bundled with default audio IVR message files. To upload a
customized audio file, see "Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides” on
page 15-40.
15-12
Chapter 15-IVR Services
a
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to upload.
The Select Source File dialog box opens.
b
Select the appropriate *.wav audio file and then click the Open
button.
c
Optional. You can play a .wav file by selecting the Play button
( ).
d
In the Install File dialog box, click Yes to upload the file to the
MCU memory.
The Done dialog box opens.
e
Once the upload is complete, click OK and return to the IVR
dialog box. The new audio file can now be selected from the list
of audio messages.
7
Click the Conference Chairperson tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Chairperson dialog box
opens.
8
Select the Enable Chairperson Messages check box to enable the
chairperson functionality. If this feature is disabled, participants are
not able to connect as the chairperson.
15-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9
Select the various voice messages and options for the chairperson
connection.
If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you
want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate
audio file to the RMX.
Table 15-4 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference
Chairperson Options and Messages
Field/Option
Description
Chairperson Identifier
Request
Select the audio file that requests the participants
to enter the key that identifies them as the
conference chairperson.
Request Chairperson
Password
Select the audio file that prompts the participant
for the chairperson password.
Retry Chairperson
Password
Select the audio file that prompts participants to
re-enter the chairperson password if they enter it
incorrectly.
Chairperson Identifier
Key
Enter the key to be used for identifying the
participant as a chairperson.
Possible keys are: pound key (#) or star (*).
Billing Code
The prompt requesting the chairperson billing
code selected in the General tab.
10 Click the Conference Password tab.
15-14
Chapter 15-IVR Services
The New Conference IVR Service - Conference Password dialog box
opens.
11 Select the Enable Password Messages check box to request the
conference password before moving the participant from the
conference IVR queue to the conference.
12 Select the MCU behavior for password request for Dial-in and Dialout participant connections.
Select the required system behavior as follows:
— Request password - The system requests the participant to enter
the conference password.
— None - The participant is moved to the conference without any
password request.
— Request Digit - The system requests the participant to enter any
key. This option is used mainly for dial-out participants and to
prevent an answering machine from entering the conference.
15-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
13 Select the various audio messages that will be played in each case.
Table 15-5 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Conference Password
Parameters
Option
Description
Request
Password
Select the audio file that prompts the participant for
the conference password.
Retry Password
Select the audio file that requests the participant to
enter the conference password again when failing to
enter the correct password.
Request Digit
Select the audio file that prompts the participant to
press any key when the Request Digit option is
selected.
14 Click the General tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
The General dialog box lists messages that are played during the
conference. These messages are played when participants or the
conference chairperson perform various operations or when a change
occurs.
15-16
Chapter 15-IVR Services
15 To assign the appropriate audio file to the message type, click the
appropriate table entry, in the Message File column. A drop-down list
is enabled.
16 From the list, select the audio file to be assigned to the event/
indication.
17 Repeat steps 15 and 16 to select the audio files for the required
messages.
The following types of messages and prompts can be enabled:
Table 15-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages
Message Type
Description
Chairperson Exit
Informs all the conference participants that the
chairperson has left the conference, causing the
conference to automatically terminate after a short
interval.
Note: This message is played only when the
Requires Chairperson option is selected in the
Conference Profile - IVR dialog box.
Chairperson Help
Menu
A voice menu is played upon a request from the
chairperson, listing the operations and their
respective DTMF codes that can be performed by
the chairperson. The playback can be stopped any
time.
Note: If you modify the default DTMF codes used to
perform various operations, the default voice files for
the help menus must be replaced.
Change
Chairperson
Password
Requests the participant to enter a new chairperson
password when the participant is attempting to
modify the chairperson password.
Change
Conference
Password
Requests the participant to enter a new conference
password when the participant is attempting to
modify the conference password.
Change Password
Failure
A message played when the participant enters an
invalid password, for example when a password is
already in use.
15-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages
15-18
Message Type
Description
Change
Passwords Menu
This voice menu is played when the participants
requests to change the conference password. This
message details the steps required to complete the
procedure.
Conference is
Locked
This message is played to participants attempting to
join a Secured conference.
Conference is
Secured
This message is played when the conference status
changes to Secure as initiated by the conference
chairperson or participant (using DTMF code *71).
Conference is
unsecured
This message is played when the conference status
changes to Unsecured as initiated by the
conference chairperson or participant (using DTMF
code #71).
Confirm Password
Change
Requests the participant to re-enter the new
password.
Dial Tone
The tone that will be played to indicate a dialing
tone, to let the calling participant enter the
destination number.
End Time Alert
Indicates that the conference is about to end.
Enter Destination
ID
Prompts the calling participant for the destination
number. Default message prompts the participant
for the conference ID (same message as in the
Entry Queue IVR Service).
First to Join
Informs the participant that he or she is the first
person to join the conference.
Incorrect
Destination ID
If the participant entered an incorrect conference ID
(in gateway calls it is the destination number),
requests the participant to enter the number again.
Maximum Number
of Participants
Exceeded
Indicates the participant cannot join the destination
conference as the maximum allowed number of
participants will be exceeded.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Table 15-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages
Message Type
Description
Mute All Off
This message is played to the conference to inform
all participants that they are unmuted (when Mute All
is cancelled).
Mute All On
Informs all participants that they are muted, with the
exception of the conference chairperson.
Note: This message is played only when the Mute
All Except Me option is activated.
No Video
Resources Audio
Only.
Informs the participant of the lack of Video
Resources in the RMX and that he/she is being
connected as Audio Only.
Participant Help
Menu
A voice menu that is played upon request from a
participant, listing the operations and their DTMF
codes that can be performed by any participant.
Password
Changed
Successfully
A message is played when the password was
successfully changed.
Recording Failed
This message is played when the conference
recording initiated by the chairperson or the
participant (depending on the configuration) fails to
start.
Recording in
Progress
This message is played to participant joining a
conference that is being recorded indicating the
recording status of the conference.
Request Billing
Code
Requests the participant to enter a code for billing
purposes.
Requires
Chairperson
The message is played when the conference is on
hold and the chairperson joins the conference. For
this message to be played the Conference Requires
Chairperson option must be selected in the
Conference Profile - IVR dialog box.
Ringing Tone
The tone that will be played to indicate that the
system is calling the destination number.
15-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-6 Conference IVR Service Properties - General Voice Messages
Message Type
Description
Self Mute
A confirmation message that is played when
participants request to mute their line.
Self Unmute
A confirmation message that is played when
participants request to unmute their line.
18 Click the Roll Call / Notifications tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Roll Call / Notifications dialog box
opens.
The Roll Call feature of the Conference IVR Service is used to record
the participants’ names for playback when the participants join and
leave a conference.
19 To enable the Roll Call feature, select the Enable Roll Call check box.
20 To assign the audio file to the message type, in the Message File
column, click the appropriate table entry. An arrow is displayed in
the Message File column.
If the Roll Call option is enabled, you must assign the appropriate audio files to
all message types.
15-20
Chapter 15-IVR Services
21 Click the arrow to open the Message File list and select the appropriate
audio file.
Table 15-7 Conference IVR Service Properties - Roll Call Messages
Roll Call
Message
Description
Roll Call Record
Requests participants to state their name for recording,
when they connect to the conference.
Note: The recording is automatically terminated after
two seconds.
Roll Call Joined
A voice message stating that the participant has joined
the conference.
Note: When the system flag
IVR_ROLL_CALL_USE_TONES_INSTEAD_OF_
VOICE is set to YES, the system does not playback the
Roll Call names when participants enter the conference.
However, the voice message will be played, unless it is
replaced with tone file.
The use of tones requires the uploading of the
appropriate tone files in *wav format and replacing the
Roll Call Joined message file with the tone file.
Roll Call Left
A voice message stating that the participant has left the
conference.
Note: When the system flag
IVR_ROLL_CALL_USE_TONES_INSTEAD_OF_
VOICE is set to YES, the system does not playback the
Roll Call names when participants exit the conference.
However, the voice message will be played, unless it is
replaced with tone file.
The use of tones requires the uploading of the
appropriate tone files in *wav format and replacing the
Roll Call Left message file with the tone file.
Roll Call Review
Played when Roll Call is requested by the chairperson,
introducing the names of the conference participants in
the order they joined the conference.
15-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
IVR Tone Notifications
Roll Call announcements played upon a participant’s connection or
disconnection from a conference (Entry and Exit announcements) can be
replaced by tones. These tones can be used as notification when
participants join or leave the conference but the identification of the
participant is not required. The system is shipped with two default tones:
Entry Tone and Exit tone.
When the Tone Notifications option is enabled, all Roll Call options are
disabled. No recording of the participant names will occur and the
conference chairperson will not be able to ask for a name review during
the conference.
To define the Notification Tones:
1 In the IVR Services list pane, double-click an existing IVR Service to
modify its properties, or click the New Conference IVR Service ( )
button on the toolbar.
The Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
2
Click the Roll Call/Notifications tab.
The Conference IVR Service Properties - Roll Call/Notifications dialog box
opens.
When the Enable Roll Call option is selected, the Roll call option
behaves as in previous versions.
15-22
Chapter 15-IVR Services
3
Select Enable Tones, or select None to disable the Roll Call and
Notification options.
If None is selected, all Roll Call and Tone Notification options are
disabled.
If Enable Tones is selected, the dialog box changes to display the tone
notification options.
4
To select the Entry Tone or Exit tone:
a
Click the appropriate table entry in the Message File column.
A drop-down list is enabled.
b
From the list, select the audio file to be assigned to the event/
indication.
If the Tones option is enabled, you must assign the appropriate audio files to all
notification types. The RMX system is shipped with two default tones:
Entry_tone.wav and Exit_tone.wav.
If required, you can upload customized audio files that will be played when
participants join or leave the conference.
If the option to play a tone when a cascading link connection is established,
make sure that the tone selected for Entry or Exit notification differ from the
cascading link tone as the latter one cannot be customized.
15-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
Click the Video Services tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
In addition to the low and high resolution slides included in the
default slide set, customized low and high resolution slides are
supported.
The following guidelines apply:
— Two customized slides can be loaded per IVR Service:
• A low resolution slide, to be used with low resolution
endpoints.
• A high resolution slide, to be used with high resolution
endpoints.
Table 15-8 summarizes the recommended input slide formats
and the resulting slides that are generated:
Table 15-8 IVR Slide - Input / Output Formats
Format
Slide Resolution
Input Slides
15-24
Generated Slides
High
HD1080p (16:9)
or
HD720p (16:9)
HD1080p
HD720p
Low
4CIF (4:3)
or
CIF (4:3)
4SIF
SIF
CIF
Chapter 15-IVR Services
6
— The source images for the high resolution slides must be in *.bmp
or *.jpg format.
— If the uploaded slides are not of the exact SD or HD resolution,
an error message is displayed and the slides are automatically
cropped or enlarged to the right size.
— If a slide that is selected in an IVR Service is deleted, a warning is
displayed listing the IVR Services in which it is selected. If
deleted, it will be replaced with a default RMX slide.
— The generated slides are not deleted if the system is downgraded
to a lower software version.
— The first custom source file uploaded, whatever its format, is
used to generate both high and low resolution custom slides.
High resolution source files uploaded after the first upload will
be used to generate and replace high resolution custom slides.
Likewise, low resolution source files uploaded after the first
upload will be used to generate and replace low resolution
custom slides.
— If there are two custom source files in the folder, one high
resolution, one low resolution, and a new high resolution custom
source file is uploaded, new high resolution custom slides are
created. The existing low resolution custom slides are not
deleted.
— If there are two custom source files in the folder, one high
resolution, one low resolution, and a new low resolution custom
source file is uploaded, new low resolution custom slides are
created. The existing high resolution custom slides are not
deleted.
Define the following parameters:
Table 15-9 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services
Parameters
Video
Services
Click&View
Description
Select this option to enable endpoints to run the
Click&View application that enables participants to
select a video layout from their endpoint.
15-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-9 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services
Parameters (Continued)
Video
Services
Video
Welcome Slide
Description
Select the Low Resolution and High Resolution video
slides to be displayed when participants connect to the
conference.
To view any slide, click the Preview Slide (
) button.
Notes:
• When using one of the default Polycom slides, the
slide will be displayed in the resolution defined in the
profile, i.e. CIF, SD, HD 720p or HD 1080p. When
defining a gateway IVR Service, the recommended
default slide is: Default_GW_Welcome_Slide.
7
If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR
Service definition, click the:
— Add Slide - Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution
Slide.
— Add Slide - High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution
Slide.
The Install File dialog box opens. The uploading process is similar to
the uploading of audio files. For more information, see step 6 on
page 15-12.
The video slide must be in a .jpg or .bmp file format. For more information, see
"Creating a Welcome Video Slide” on page 15-44.
15-26
Chapter 15-IVR Services
8
Click the DTMF Codes tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - DTMF Codes dialog box opens.
•
This dialog box lists the default DTMF codes for the various functions
that can be performed during the conference by all participants or by
the chairperson.
Table 15-10 New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes
Operation
DTMF String
Permission
Mute My Line
*6
All
Unmute My Line
#6
All
Increase Broadcast Volume
*9
All
Decrease Broadcast Volume
#9
All
Mute All Except Me
*5
Chairperson
Cancel Mute All Except Me
#5
Chairperson
Change Password
*77
Chairperson
Mute Incoming Participants
*86
Chairperson
Unmute Incoming Participants
#86
Chairperson
15-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-10 New Conference IVR Service Properties - DTMF Codes
15-28
Operation
DTMF String
Permission
Play Help Menu
*83
All
Enable Roll Call
*42
Chairperson
Disable Roll Call
#42
Chairperson
Roll Call Review Names
*43
Chairperson
Roll Call Stop Review Names
#43
Chairperson
Terminate Conference
*87
Chairperson
Start Click&View
**
All
Start PCM
##
Change To Chairperson
*78
All
Increase Listening Volume
*76
All
Decrease Listening Volume
#76
All
Override Mute All
Configurable
All
Start Recording
*3
Chairperson
Stop Recording
*2
Chairperson
Pause Recording
*1
Chairperson
Secure Conference
*71
Chairperson
Unsecured Conference
#71
Chairperson
Show Number of Participants
*88
All
Request individual assistance
*0
All
Request assistance for conference
00
Chairperson
Request to Speak
99
All
Touch Control Prefix
*#
All
Chapter 15-IVR Services
•
It is strongly advised that the Touch Control Prefix DTMF code (*#) not be
changed.
•
The Polycom® Touch Control device is only supported with MPM+ and
MPMx media cards.
For more information see the Polycom® Touch Control User Guide.
9
To modify the DTMF code or permission:
a
In the DTMF Code column, in the appropriate entry enter the new
code.
b
In the Permission column, select from the list who can use this
feature (all or just the chairperson).
By default, the Secure, Unsecure Conference and Show Number of Participants
options are enabled in the Conference IVR Service. These options can be
disabled by removing their codes from the Conference IVR Service.
• To disable the Secure Conference options, in the DTMF Code column, clear
the DTMF codes of both Secured Conference (*71) and Unsecured
Conference (#71) from the table.
•
To disable the Text Indication option in the DTMF Code column, clear the
DTMF code (*88) of Show Number of Participants from the table.
10 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
15-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
11 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance
when the participant requires or requests help during the connection
process to the conference or during the conference.
12 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio
message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for
the operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if
you want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the
appropriate audio file to the RMX.
13 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
Entry Queues IVR Service
An Entry Queue (EQ) is a routing lobby for conferences. Participants are
routed to the appropriate conference according to the conference ID they
enter.
An Entry Queue IVR Service must be assigned to the Entry Queue to
enable the voice prompts and video slide guiding the participants
through the connection process.
An Entry Queue IVR Service is a subset of an IVR Service. You can create
different Entry Queue Services for different languages and personalized
voice messages.
The RMX is shipped with a default Entry Queue IVR Service and all its
audio messages and video slide. You can define new Entry Queue IVR
Services or modify the default Entry Queue IVR Service.
Defining a New Entry Queue IVR Service
To set up a new Entry Queue IVR Service:
15-30
1
In the RMX Management pane, click IVR Services (
2
In the IVR Services list, click the New Entry Queue IVR Service (
button.
).
)
Chapter 15-IVR Services
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
3
Fill in the following parameters:
Table 15-11 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
Option
Description
Entry Queue
Service Name
(Mandatory) Enter the name of the Entry Queue
Service. The name can be typed in Unicode.
Maximum field length is 80 ASCII characters.
Language
Select the language in which the Audio Messages and
prompts will be heard. The languages are defined in
the Supported Languages function.
External Server
Authentication
This option is used for Ad Hoc conferencing, to verify
the participant’s permission to initiate a new
conference. For a detailed description see Appendix
D: "Conference Access with External Database
Authentication” on page D-6.
Select one of the following options:
• None to start a new conference without verifying
with an external database the user right to start it.
•
Conference ID to verify the user’s right to start a
new conference with an external database
application using the conference ID.
15-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-11 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Global Parameters
4
Option
Description
Number of User
Input Retries
Enter the number of times the participant is able to
respond to each menu prompt before the participant is
disconnected from the MCU.
Timeout for User
Input (Sec.)
Enter the duration in seconds that the system waits for
input from the participant before it is considered as an
input error.
DTMF Delimiter
The interaction between the caller and the system is
done via touch-tone signals (DTMF codes). Enter the
key that will be used to indicate a DTMF command
sent by the participant or the conference chairperson.
Possible keys are the pound key (#) or star (*).
Click the Welcome tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Welcome dialog box opens.
If the files were not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if you
want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the appropriate
audio file to the RMX.
5
15-32
Define the appropriate parameters. This dialog box contains options
that are identical to those in the Conference IVR Service - Welcome
Message dialog box. For more information about these parameters,
see Table 15-4 on page 15-14.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
6
Click the Conference ID tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Conference ID dialog box opens.
7
Select the voice messages:
Table 15-12 Entry Queue IVR Service Properties - Conference ID
Field/Option
Description
Request
Conference ID
Prompts the participant for the conference ID.
Retry Conference
ID
When the participant entered an incorrect
conference ID, requests the participant to enter the
ID again.
8
Assign an audio file to each message type, as follows:
9
— In the Message File column, click the table entry, and then select
the appropriate audio message.
Click the General tab.
15-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - General dialog box opens.
The administrator can enable an audio message that informs the
participant of the lack of Video Resources in the RMX and that he/she
is being connected as Audio Only. The message states: All video
resources are currently in use. Connecting using audio only.
The following guidelines apply:
— The IVR message applies to video participants only. Audio Only
participants will not receive the message.
— Only H.323 and SIP participants receive the audio message.
— Downgrade to Audio Only is not supported for undefined ISDN
dial in participants. These participants are disconnected if there
is a lack of Video Resources.
— The audio message is the first message after the call is connected,
preceding all other IVR messages.
— The message is called No Video Resources-Audio Only and the
message file (.wav) is called No video resources audio only.wav.
— The audio message must be added to the Conference and Entry
Queue IVR Services separately.
— The IVR message can be enabled/disabled by the administrator
using the ENABLE_ NO_VIDEO_RESOURCES_
AUDIO_ONLY_MESSAGE System Flag in system.cfg.
Possible values: YES / NO, default: YES
15-34
Chapter 15-IVR Services
If you wish to modify the flag value, the flag must be added to the
System Configuration file. For more information see the "Modifying
System Flags” on page 19-5.
10 Enter the message Name and Message File name for the Audio Only
message:
— Message Name: No Video Resources-Audio Only
— Message File name: No_Video_Resources_Audio_Only.wav
11 Click the Video Services tab.
The New Entry Queue IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
12 In the Video Welcome Slide list, select the video slide that will be
displayed to participants connecting to the Entry Queue. The slide list
includes the video slides that were previously uploaded to the MCU
memory.
13 To view any slide, click the Preview Slide (
) button.
14 If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior to the IVR
Service definition, click the:
— Add Slide - Low Resolution button to upload a Low Resolution
Slide.
— Add Slide - High Resolution button to upload a High Resolution
Slide.
15-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Install File dialog box opens. The uploading process is similar to
the uploading of audio files. For more information, see step 6 on
page 15-12.
The video slide must be in a .jpg or .bmp file format. For more information, see
"Creating a Welcome Video Slide” on page 15-44.
15 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
The Operator Assistance dialog box opens.
16 Select Enable Operator Assistance to enable operator assistance
when the participant requires or requests help during the connection
process.
17 In the Operator Assistance Indication Message field, select the audio
message to be played when the participant requests or is waiting for
operator’s assistance.
If the audio file was not uploaded prior to the definition of the IVR Service or if
you want to add new audio files, click Add Message File to upload the
appropriate audio file to the RMX.
18 Click OK to complete the Entry Queue Service definition.
The new Entry Queue IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
For more information, see "IVR Services List” on page 15-2.
15-36
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Setting a Conference IVR Service or Entry Queue IVR Service as the
Default Service
The first Conference IVR Service and Entry Queue IVR Service are
automatically selected by default. The IVR Services (Conference and
Entry Queue) shipped with the system are also set as default. If additional
Conference IVR Services and Entry Queue IVR Services are defined, you
can set another service as the default for each service type.
To select the default Conference IVR Service:
 In the IVR Services list, select the Conference IVR Service to be
defined as the default, and then click the Set Default Conference
IVR Service (
) button.
Alternatively, in the IVR Services list, right-click the Conference IVR
Service and then select Set Default Conference IVR Service.
The IVR Service is displayed in bold, indicating that it is the current
default service.
To select the Default Entry Queue IVR Service:
4
In the IVR Services list, select the Entry Queue IVR Service to be
defined as the default, and then click Set Default Entry Queue IVR
Service (
) button.
15-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Alternatively, in the Conference IVR Services list, right-click the Entry
Queue IVR Service and then select Set Default Entry Queue IVR
Service.
The default Entry Queue IVR Service is displayed in bold, indicating
that it is the current default service.
Modifying the Conference or Entry Queue IVR Service Properties
You can modify the properties of an existing IVR Service, except the
service name and language.
To modify the properties of an IVR Service:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click IVR Services.
15-38
2
In the IVR Services list, Click the IVR Service to modify.
For more information about the tabs and options of this dialog box,
see "Defining a New Conference IVR Service” on page 15-10.
3
Modify the required parameters or upload the required audio files.
4
Click OK.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Replacing the Music File
The RMX is shipped with a default music file that is played when
participants are placed on hold, for example, while waiting for the
chairperson to connect to the conference (if the conference requires a
chairperson), or when a single participant is connected to the conference.
You can replace the default music file with your own recorded music.
Music file guidelines:
•
The file must be in *.wav format.
•
Music length cannot exceed one hour.
•
The music recording must be in the range of (-12dB) to (-9dB).
Adding a Music File
To replace the Music file:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click IVR Services.
2
In the IVR Services list toolbar, click the Replace/Change Music File
( ) button.
The Install Music File window opens.
3
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to upload.
The Open dialog box opens.
15-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Select the appropriate audio *.wav file and then click the Open
button.
The selected file name is displayed in the Install Music File dialog box.
5
Optional. You can play the selected file by clicking the Play (
button.
6
)
a
Click Play Selected File to play a file on your computer
b
Click Play RMX File to play a file already uploaded on the RMX
In the Install Music File dialog box, click OK to upload the file to the
MCU.
The new file replaces the previously uploaded file and this file is used
for all background music played by the MCU.
Creating Audio Prompts and Video Slides
The RMX is shipped with default voice messages (in WAV format) and
video slides that are used for the default IVR services. You can create your
own video slides and record the voice messages for different languages or
customize them to your needs.
Recording an Audio Message
To record audio messages, use any sound recording utility available in
your computer or record them professionally in a recording studio. Make
sure that recorded message can be saved as a Wave file (*.wav format)
and that the recorded format settings are as defined in steps 4 and 5 on
page 15-41. The files are converted into the RMX internal format during
the upload process.
This section describes the use of the Sound Recorder utility delivered with
Windows 95/98/2000/XP.
To define the format settings for audio messages:
15-40
•
The format settings for audio messages need to be set only once. The
settings will then be applied to any new audio messages recorded.
•
The utility or facility used to record audio messages must be capable of
producing audio files with the formats and attributes as shown in the
following procedure, namely, PCM, 16.000kHz, 16Bit, Mono.
Windows® XP® Sound Recorder is one of the utilities that can be used.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
1
On your PC, click Start > Programs > Accessories > Entertainment >
Sound Recorder.
The Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box opens.
2
To define the recording format, click File > Properties.
The Properties for Sound dialog box opens.
3
Click the Convert Now button.
The Sound Selection dialog box opens.
4
In the Format field, select PCM.
15-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
In the Attributes list, select 16.000 kHz, 16Bit, Mono.
6
To save this format, click the Save As button.
The Save As dialog box opens.
7
Select the location where the format will reside, enter a name and
then click OK.
The system returns to the Sound Selection dialog box.
8
Click OK.
The system returns to the Properties for Sound dialog box.
9
Click OK.
The system returns to the Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box. You are
now ready to record your voice message.
To record a new audio message:
Regardless of the recording utility you are using, verify that any new audio
message recorded adheres to the following format settings: 16.000kHz, 16Bit,
Mono.
Make sure that a microphone or a sound input device is connected to
your PC.
1
On your PC, click Start > Programs > Accessories > Entertainment >
Sound Recorder.
The Sound–Sound Recorder dialog box opens.
2
15-42
Click File > New.
Chapter 15-IVR Services
3
Click the Record button.
The system starts recording.
4
Start narrating the desired message.
For all audio IVR messages, stop the recording anytime up to 3 minutes (which
is the maximum duration allowed for an IVR voice message). If the message
exceeds 3 minutes it will be rejected by the RMX unit.
5
Click the Stop Recording button.
6
Save the recorded message as a wave file, click File > Save As.
The Save As dialog box opens.
7
Verify that the Format reads: PCM 16.000 kHz, 16Bit, Mono. If the
format is correct, continue with step 10. If the format is incorrect, click
the Change button.
The Sound Selection dialog box is displayed.
15-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
8
In the Name field, select the name of the format created in step 7 on
page 15-42.
9
Click OK.
The system returns to the Save As dialog box.
10 In the Save in field, select the directory where the file will be stored.
11 In the Save as Type field, select the *.wav file format.
12 In the File name box, type a name for the message file, and then click
the Save button.
13 To record additional messages, repeat steps 1 to 10.
To upload your recorded *.wav file to the RMX, see step 6 on page 15-12.
Creating a Welcome Video Slide
The video slide is a still picture that can be created in any graphic
application.
To create a welcome video slide:
1 Using any graphic application, save your image in either *.jpg or
*.bmp file format.
2
For optimum quality, verify that the image’s dimensions adhere to
the RMX’s maximum values: Width:1600, Height:1200 pixels.
3
Save your file.
To upload your video slide to the RMX, see step 12 on page 15-35.
If using a default Polycom slide, the slide’s resolution will be as defined in the
profile, i.e. SD, HD or CIF.
If the display of the Welcome slide is cut in the upper area of the screen, change
the settings of the endpoint’s monitor to People "Stretch" instead of "Zoom".
15-44
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Default IVR Prompts and Messages
The system is shipped with the following audio prompts and messages:
Table 15-13 Default IVR Messages
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
General Welcome
Message
“Welcome to unified
conferencing.”
General_
Welcome.wav
Chairperson
Identifier Request
“For conference Chairperson
Services, Press the Pound Key.
All other participants please
wait...”
Chairperson_
Identifier.wav
Request
Chairperson
Password
“Please enter the Conference
Chairperson Password. Press
the pound key when complete.”
Chairperson_
Password.wav
Retry Chairperson
Password
“Invalid chairperson password.
Please try again.”
Chairperson_
Password_
Failure.wav
Request
Password
“Please enter the conference
password. Press the pound key
when complete.”
Conference_
Password.wav
Retry Password
“Invalid conference password.
Please try again.”
Retry_ Conference_
Password.wav
Request Digit
“Press any key to enter the
conference.”
Request_
Digit.wav
Request Billing
Code
“Please enter the Billing code.
Press the pound key when
complete.”
Billing_Code
.wav
Requires
Chairperson
“Please wait for the chairperson
to join the conference.”
Requires
Chairperson.wav
Chairperson Exit
“The chairperson has left the
conference.”
Chairperson_
Exit.wav
First to Join
“You are the first person to join
the conference.”
First to Join.wav
15-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-13 Default IVR Messages (Continued)
15-46
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
Mute All On
“All conference participants are
now muted.”
Mute_All_On.wav
Mute All Off
“All conference participants are
now unmuted.”
Mute_All_Off.wav
End Time Alert
“The conference is about to
end.”
End_Time_Alert.wav
Change Password
Menu
“Press one to change
conference password.
Press two to change
chairperson password.
Press nine to exit the menu.”
Change_Password_
Menu.wav
Change
Conference
Password
“Please enter the new
conference password. Press the
pound key when complete.”
Change_
Conference_
Password.wav
Change
Chairperson
Password
“Please enter the new
chairperson password. Press
the pound key when complete.”
Change_
Chairperson_
Password.wav
Confirm Password
Change
“Please re-enter the new
password. Press the pound key
when complete.”
Confirm_ Password_
Change.wav
Change Password
Failure
“The new password is invalid.”
Change_ Password_
Failure.wav
Password
Changed
Successfully
“The password has been
successfully changed.”
Password_
Changed_
Successfully.wav
Self Mute
“You are now muted.”
Self_Mute.wav
Self Unmute
“You are no longer muted.”
Self_Unmute.wav
Chapter 15-IVR Services
Table 15-13 Default IVR Messages (Continued)
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
Chairperson Help
Menu
“The available touch-tone
keypad actions are as follows:
• To exit this menu press any
key.
Chairperson_
Help_Menu.wav
Participant Help
Menu
•
To request private
assistance, press star, zero.
•
To request operator’s
assistance for the
conference, press zero,
zero.
•
To mute your line, press star,
six.
•
To unmute your line, press
pound, six.”
“The available touch-tone
keypad actions are as follows:
• To exit this menu press any
key.
•
To request private
assistance, press star, zero.
•
To mute your line, press star,
six.
•
To unmute your line, press
pound, six.
•
To increase your volume,
press star, nine.
•
To decrease your volume,
press pound, nine.
Participant_Help_
Menu.wav
Maximum
Participants
Exceeded
“The conference is full. You
cannot join at this time.”
Maximum_
Participants_
Exceeded.wav
Roll Call Record
“After the tone, please state your
name.”
Roll_Call_Record
.wav
Roll Call Joined
“...has joined the conference.”
Roll_Call _Joined
.wav
15-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 15-13 Default IVR Messages (Continued)
Message Type
Message Text
File Name
Roll Call Left
“...has left the conference.”
Roll_Call_Left
.wav
Roll Call Review
“The conference participants
are...”
Roll_Call_
Review.wav
Request
Conference
NID
“Please enter your conference
NID. Press the pound key when
complete.”
Request_
Conference_NID
.wav
Retry Conference
NID
“Invalid conference NID. Please
try again.”
Retry_Conference_
NID.wav
Secured
Conference
“The conference is now
secured.”
Conference_Secured
.wav
Secured
Conference
“The conference is now in an
unsecured mode”
Conference_
Unsecured.wav
Secured
Conference
“Conference you are trying to
join is locked”
Conference_Locked.
wav
Conference
Recording
“The conference is being
recorded”
Recording_
in_Progress.wav
Conference
Recording
“The conference recording has
failed”
Recording_
Failed.wav
No Video
Resources Audio
Only.
"All video resources are
currently in use. Connecting
using audio only"
No_Video_Resource
s_Audio_Only.wav
Volume Control of IVR Messages, Music and Roll Call
The volume of IVR music, IVR messages and Roll Call is controlled by the
following system flags:
15-48
•
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
•
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
•
IVR_ROLL_CALL_VOLUME
Chapter 15-IVR Services
To control the volume of IVR music, messages and Roll Call:
 Modify the values of the System Flags listed in Table 15-14 by clicking
the menu Setup > System Configuration.
If these flags do not appear in the System Flags list, they must be
manually added.
For more information see "Modifying System Flags” on page 19-5.
Table 15-14 System Flags – IVR Volume Control
Flag
Description
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
The volume of the IVR music played
when a single participant is connected to
the conference varies according to the
value of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 5).
0 – disables playing the music
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME
The volume of IVR messages varies
according to the value of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the IVR messages
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: It is not recommended to disable IVR
messages by setting the flag value to 0.
IVR_ROLL_CALL_VOLUME
The volume of the Roll Call varies
according to the value of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the Roll Call
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: It is not recommended to disable
the Roll Call by setting the flag value to 0.
The RMX must be restarted for modified flag settings to take effect.
15-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
15-50
16
The Call Detail Record (CDR)
Utility
The Call Detail Record (CDR) utility enables you to view summary
information about conferences, and retrieve full conference information
and archive it to a file. The file can be used to produce reports or can be
exported to external billing programs.
The value of the fields that support Unicode values, such as the info fields, will
be stored in the CDR file in UTF8. The application that reads the CDR must
support Unicode.
The Polycom RMX can store details of up to 2000 (RMX 1500/2000) or
4000 (RMX 4000) conferences. When this number is exceeded, the system
overwrites conferences, starting with the earliest conference. To save the
conferences’ information, their data must be retrieved and archived. The
frequency with which the archiving should be performed depends on the
volume of conferences run by the MCU.
The RMX displays Active Alarms before overwriting the older files,
enabling the users to backup the older files before they are deleted.
The display of Active Alarms is controlled by the
ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS System Flag.
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is set to YES (default
setting when JITC_MODE System Flag is set to YES) and a Cyclic File
reaches a file storage capacity limit, an Active Alarm is created: “Backup
of CDR files is required”.
Each conference is a separate record in the MCU memory. Each
conference is archived as a separate file. Each conference CDR file
contains general information about the conference, such as the conference
name, ID, start time and duration, as well as information about events
occurring during the conference, such as adding a new participant,
disconnecting a participant or extending the length of the conference.
16-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The CDR File
CDR File Formats
The conference CDR records can be retrieved and archived in the
following two formats:
•
Unformatted data – Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records
in “raw data” format. The first record in each file contains general
conference data. The remaining records contain event data, one
record for each event. Each record contains field values separated by
commas. This data can be transferred to an external program such as
Microsoft Excel for billing purposes.
The following is a sample of an unformatted CDR file:
Conference
summary record
Event code
Event records
Figure 16-1 Unformatted CDR File
•
Formatted text – Formatted CDR files contain multiple sections. The
first section in each file contains general conference data. The
remaining sections contain event data, one section for each event.
Each field value is displayed in a separate line, together with its
name. This data can be used to generate a summary report for a
conference
The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language
being used for the RMX Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR
information is retrieved.
16-2
Chapter 16-The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
The following is an example of a formatted CDR file:
General conference
section
Event heading
Event section
Figure 16-2 Formatted CDR File
CDR File Contents
The general conference section or record contains information such as the
Routing Name and ID, and the conference starting date and time.
The event sections or records contain an event type heading or event type
code, followed by event data. For example, an event type may be that a
participant connects to the conference, and the event data will list the date
and time the participant connects to the conference, the participant name
and ID, and the participant capabilities used to connect to the conference.
To enable compatibility for applications that written for the MGC family,
the Polycom RMX CDR file structure is based on the MGC CDR file
structure.
The unformatted and formatted text files contain basically the same
information. The following differences should be noted between the
contents of the unformatted and formatted text files:
•
In many cases a formatted text file field contains a textual value,
whereas the equivalent unformatted file field contains a numeric
value that represents the textual value.
16-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
For reading clarity, in a few instances, a single field in the
unformatted file is converted to multiple fields in the formatted text
file, and in other cases, multiple fields in the unformatted file are
combined into one field in the formatted file.
•
To enable compatibility between MGC CDR files and RMX CDR files,
the unformatted file contains fields that were applicable to the MGC
MCUs, but are not supported by the RMX MCUs. These fields are
omitted from the formatted text file.
Appendix C: "CDR Fields - Unformatted File” on page C-1, contains a full list of
the events, fields and values that appear in the unformatted file. This appendix
can be referred to for information regarding the contents of fields in the
unformatted text file, but does not reflect the exact contents of the formatted text
file.
Viewing, Retrieving and Archiving Conference
Information
Viewing the Conference Records
To open the CDR utility:
• On the RMX menu, click Administration > CDR.
The CDR List pane opens, displaying a list of the conference CDR
records stored in the MCU memory.
16-4
Chapter 16-The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
The following fields are displayed:
Table 16-1 Conference Record Fields
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name of the conference and an icon
indicating whether or not the CDR record has been
retrieved and saved to a formatted text file.
The following icons are used:
The CDR record has not been saved.
The CDR record has been saved.
Start Time
The actual time the conference started.
Duration
The actual conference duration.
Reserved Duration
The time the conference was scheduled to last.
Discrepancy between the scheduled and the actual
duration may indicate that the conference duration
was prolonged or shortened.
Status
The conference status. The following values may be
displayed:
• Ongoing Conference
•
•
•
Terminated by User
•
Conference never became ongoing due to a
problem
Terminated when end time passed
Automatically terminated when conference
was empty – The conference ended
automatically because no participants joined the
conference for a predefined time period, or all
the participants disconnected from the
conference and the conference was empty for a
predefined time period.
•
Unknown error
Note: If the conference was terminated by an MCU
reset, the status Ongoing Conference will be
displayed.
16-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 16-1 Conference Record Fields (Continued)
Field
Description
File Retrieved
Indicates whether the conference record was
retrieved to a formatted text file. (Yes/No)
Refreshing the CDR List
To refresh the CDR list:
•
16-6
Click the Refresh
button, or right-click on any record and then
select Refresh.
Updated conference CDR records are retrieved from the MCU
memory.
Chapter 16-The Call Detail Record (CDR) Utility
Retrieving and Archiving Conference CDR Records
To retrieve and archive CDR records:
1 To retrieve a single CDR record, right-click the record to retrieve and
then select the required format (as detailed in Table 16-2).
Alternatively, select the record to retrieve, and then click the
appropriate button on the toolbar (as detailed in Table 16-2).
To retrieve multiple CDR records simultaneously, use standard
Windows multi-selection methods.
Table 16-2 Conference Information Retrieval Options
Menu Option
Button
Action
Retrieve
Retrieves the conference information as
unformatted data into a file whose
extension is .cdr.
Retrieve
Formatted XML
Retrieves the conference information as
formatted text into a file whose
extension is .xml.
Note: Viewed when logged in as
SUPPORT; SUPPORT
Retrieve
Formatted
Retrieves the conference information as
formatted text into a file whose
extension is .txt.
The Retrieve dialog box opens.
The dialog box displays the names of the destination CDR files.
2
Select the destination folder for the CDR files and then click OK.
If the destination file already exists, you will be asked if you want to
overwrite the file or specify a new name for the destination file.
The files are saved to the selected folder.
16-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
16-8
17
Gateway Calls
The RMX can be used as a gateway that provides connectivity across
different physical networks and translates multiple protocols for pointto-point rich media communications.
The RMX supports the widest range of video and audio algorithms. It
allows sites with different frame rates, connection speeds, audio
algorithms, video resolutions and network protocols to transparently
connect with one another. It also enables multipoint conference creation
from an endpoint.
A special conference acting as a Gateway Session is created on the RMX. It
includes one dial-in connection of the endpoint initiating the Gateway
Session and one or several dial-out connections to endpoints. It provides
connectivity between the various protocols: H.323, SIP, ISDN and PSTN.
To enable the gateway functionality a special Gateway Profile is defined
on the RMX.
Gateway Functionality
The following features and capabilities are supported in gateway calls:
•
Gateway Sessions are in CP mode only.
If Video Switching is selected in the Profile assigned to the Gateway
Session, the system ignores this setting and will run the Gateway
Session in CP mode.
•
H.239 Content
•
FECC (IP participants)
•
Recording. The Recording Link is not considered as a participant and
therefore, the gateway session will automatically end when only
one of the participants remains connected in addition to the
recording link. The video of the Recording Link is not included in the
display of the video of the gateway call.
17-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Forwarding of DTMF codes from the Gateway Session to a conference
running on another gateway, MCU or DMA. This enables the
participant to enter the required conference and/or chairperson
password when connecting to another conference.
DTMF forwarding is enabled when there are only two participants
connected to the Gateway Session.
•
Up to 80 gateway calls (same as conferences) may be run on a fully
configured RMX 1500/2000/4000.
•
Gateway Profiles are included in the Backup and Restore Configuration
operations.
•
CDR files are generated for Gateway Sessions in the same way as for
conferences.
•
Cascading. To support cascading, the gateway indicates a lower
number than the MCU for master-slave relation (directly or through
DMA).
•
Gateway calls are supported in Microsoft and Avaya environments.
Call Flows
Call flow changes according to the connection protocols: IP or ISDN. This
section describes the call flows between two endpoints connect via one
gateway. For call flows describing connections between two endpoints via
two gateways, or a connection of an endpoint to a conference running on
MCU via a gateway, see "Basic Cascading using ISDN Cascaded Link” on
page 3-7.
IP Participants
Two calling methods are available:
17-2
•
Direct - the dialing string includes the destination number/
conference ID and the call is routed directly to the destination
endpoint/conference. This is the recommended method.
•
Via Gateway IVR - the call connects to the gateway, where through
interaction with the IVR, the destination number is entered using
DTMF codes.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Direct Dialing
The calling endpoint enters the dialing string that includes the access
numbers to the RMX Gateway Profile and the number of the destination
endpoint. Up to 10 destination numbers can be entered in one string.
The call connects to the RMX Gateway Profile and a Gateway Session is
created. The dial-in participant is automatically connected to it.
During the connection phase, the number being dialed is displayed on the
screen of the calling endpoint.
If the call is not answered or it cannot be completed using one
communication protocol, the system will try to connect the endpoint
using the next communication protocol according to the selected
protocols in the following order: H.323, SIP and ISDN. PSTN numbers are
identified separately and are dialed immediately without trying other
connections.
If the call is busy, the system will not try to connect the endpoint using
another protocol.
If the call is not completed after trying all possible protocols, the system
displays the number that was dialed on the calling endpoint’s screen and
the reason for not completing the call. For details, see "Connection
Indications” on page 17-24.
When the call is connected, a new Gateway Session is created and added to
the ongoing Conferences list.
17-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Dialing from H.323 Endpoints
Figure 17-1Dialing String and Call Flow from H.323 Endpoint to One, Two or
Three Endpoints
The calling endpoints can dial to one, two or several endpoints (up to ten)
in one dialing string.
The dialing string includes the following components:
[MCU prefix in GK] - the prefix with which the RMX is registered to
the gatekeeper.
[GW Profile ID] - The ID of the Gateway Profile to be used for routing
the call to the destination endpoint or DMA, as defined in the RMX
Gateway Profiles. It includes the parameters of the call to the destination.
* - indicates H.323, SIP or ISDN connection protocol to the destination
endpoint (followed by the appropriate destination number). Placing this
delimiter before the destination number causes the system to try to
connect the endpoint using H.323 first, then SIP and lastly ISDN
according to the selected protocols.
** - indicates a PSTN connection to the destination endpoint (followed by
the appropriate destination number).
17-4
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
[Destination number] - the destination number as alias, IPv4 address
or ISDN/PSTN number.
The dialing string:
[MCU prefix in GK][GW Profile ID]*[Destination Number,
first participant]*[Destination Number, second
participant]**[Destination number]......*[Destination
Number, tenth participant]
For example, If the MCU Prefix in the GK is 91 and the GW Profile ID is
2000, and the destination number is 3456 (SIP) enter: 912000*3456.
To invite two participants: SIP: 3456 and ISDN: 9251444, enter:
912000*3456*9251444.
To invite two participants: SIP: 3456 and a PSTN participant whose
number is 9251234, enter: 912000*3456**9251234.
Dialing from SIP Endpoints
Figure 17-2Dialing String and Call Flow from SIP Endpoint to One, Two or Three
Endpoints
17-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The calling endpoints can dial to one, two or several endpoints (up to ten)
in one dialing string. The dialing string includes the following
components:
[MCU Prefix in SIP Proxy] - The prefix with which the RMX is
registered to the SIP Proxy. This component is optional and is not
required in most cases.
[GW Profile ID] - The ID of the Gateway Profile to be used for routing
the call to the destination endpoint or DMA, as defined in the RMX
Gateway Profiles. It includes the parameters of the call to the destination.
* - indicates H.323, SIP or ISDN connection protocol to the destination
endpoint (followed by the appropriate destination number). Placing this
delimiter before the destination number causes the system to try to
connect the endpoint using H.323 first, then SIP and lastly ISDN
according to the selected protocols.
** - indicates a PSTN connection to the destination endpoint (followed by
the appropriate destination number).
[Destination number] - the destination number as alias, IPv4 address
or ISDN/PSTN number.
[@domain name] - the RMX domain name as registered to the SIP Proxy
The dialing string:
[GW Profile ID]*[Destination Number, first
participant]*[Destination Number, second
participant]**[destination number]......*[Destination
Number, tenth participant]@domain name
Optional:
[GW Profile ID]*[Destination Number, first
participant]*[Destination Number, second
participant]**[destination number]......*[Destination
Number, tenth participant]@IP address of the RMX
signaling host
Optional:
[MCU prefix in SIP Proxy][GW Profile ID]*[Destination
Number, first participant]*[Destination Number, second
participant]**[destination number]......*[Destination
Number, tenth participant]@domain name
For example, if the GW Profile ID is 2000, the domain name is
service.polycom.com, and the destination number is 3456, enter:
2000*3456@service.polycom.com.
17-6
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
If using the IP address of the RMX signaling host (for example,
172.22.188.22) instead of the domain name enter:
2000*3456@172.22.188.22.
To invite two participants IP: 3456 and ISDN: 9251444, enter:
2000*3456*9251444@service.polycom.com.
To invite two participants IP: 3456 and PSTN: 9251234, enter:
912000*3456**9251234@service.polycom.com.
Gateway IVR
Can be used by IP endpoints when the destination dialing string includes
the address of the MCU only. This is the same flow as the dialing method
used for ISDN/PSTN calls, however it is less recommended for IP
participants. For details, see page 17-9.
Dialing from H.323 Endpoints
Figure 17-3Dialing String and Call Flow from IP Endpoint to ISDN Endpoint
[MCU prefix in GK] - the prefix with which the RMX is registered to
the gatekeeper.
[GW Profile ID] - The ID of the Gateway Profile to be used for the
gateway call and the IVR message.
The dialing string format is:
[MCU prefix in GK][GW Profile ID]
For example, if the MCU Prefix in the GK is 91 and the GW Profile ID is
2000 enter: 912000.
17-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Once the participant is connected to the Gateway Profile and hears the IVR
message requesting the destination number, using the DTMF input
keypad, the participant enters the number of the destination endpoint
followed by the # key. PSTN numbers are identified by an * before the
number.
For example, enter 3456# for IP endpoint, or 9253456# for ISDN, or
*9253456# for PSTN phone.
To enter an IP address as the destination number, replace the periods (.)
with asterisks (*) in the format n*n*n*n followed by the # key. For
example, if the IP address is 172.22.188.22, enter 172*22*188*22#.
Dialing from SIP Endpoints
Optional. [MCU prefix in SIP Proxy] - the prefix with which the
RMX is registered to the gatekeeper.
[GW Profile ID] - The ID of the Gateway Profile to be used for the
gateway call and the IVR message.
[@domain name] - the RMX domain name as registered to the SIP
Proxy.
The dialing string:
[GW Profile ID]@domain name
Optional:
[GW Profile ID]@IP address of the RMX signaling host
Optional:
[MCU prefix in SIP proxy][GW Profile ID]@domain name
Once the participant is connected to the Gateway Profile and hears the IVR
message requesting the destination number, using the DTMF input
keypad, the participant enters the number of the destination endpoint
followed by the # key. PSTN numbers are identified by an * before the
number.
For example, enter 3456# for IP endpoint, or 9253456# for ISDN, or
*9253456# for PSTN phone.
To enter an IP address as the destination number, replace the periods (.)
with asterisks (*) in the format n*n*n*n followed by the # key. For
example, if the IP address is 172.22.188.22, enter 172*22*188*22#.
17-8
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
ISDN Participants
Two dialing methods are available to ISDN/PSTN participants:
•
Via Gateway IVR
•
Direct with automatically generated destination dial strings from
dial-in strings. This dialing method is available from Version 7.1 and
is supported on RMX with MPM+ and MPMx cards.
In addition, PSTN participants can dial the Gateway IVR and can use the
MCU or DMA prefix in the gatekeeper together with the conference ID/
endpoint alias as the destination string to simplify the input. This is one of
the methods for PSTN participants to connect to a virtual Meeting Room
on the DMA.
Gateway IVR
In this flow, the calling endpoint enters the dialing string that includes the
access number to the RMX Gateway Profile.
The endpoint connects to the RMX and is welcomed by the IVR Welcome
slide and message: “Please enter the destination number” followed by the
dial tone.
Using the endpoint’s DTMF input device such as remote control, the
participant enters the number of the destination endpoint followed by the
# key. Only one number can be dialed.
While the system dials to the destination endpoints, the participant hears
the dialing rings. During the connection phase, the number being dialed is
displayed on the screen of the calling endpoint.
If the call is not answered or it cannot be completed using one
communication protocol, the system will try to connect the endpoint
using the next communication protocol according to the selected
protocols in the following order: H.323, SIP and ISDN.
PSTN numbers are identified separately and are dialed immediately
without trying other connections.
If the endpoint is busy, the system will not try to connect the endpoint
using another protocol.
If the call is not completed after trying all possible protocols, the system
displays the number that was dialed on the calling endpoint’s screen and
the reason for not completing the call. For details, see "Connection
Indications” on page 17-24.
17-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Dialing from ISDN/PSTN Endpoints
Figure 17-4Dialing String and Call Flow from ISDN Endpoint to IP Endpoint
[GW Profile ISDN/PSTN number] - the dial-in number assigned to
the Gateway Profile, including the required country and area codes.
For example, if the dial-in number assigned to the Gateway Profile is
5705555, enter this number with the appropriate area code: 2125705555.
Once the participant is connected to the Gateway Profile and hears the IVR
message requesting the destination number, using the DTMF input
keypad, the participant enters the number of the destination endpoint
followed by the # key. For example, enter 3456# for IP endpoint.
To enter an IP address as the destination number, replace the periods (.)
with asterisks (*) in the format n*n*n*n followed by the # key. For
example, if the IP address is 172.22.188.22, enter 172*22*188*22#.
PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix
When connecting to an RMX that is standalone or part of a DMA solution
deployment, PSTN participants are prompted by an IVR message
requesting the Destination Conference ID followed by the # key to be
entered using the DTMF input keypad.
Including the Gatekeeper Prefix in the DTMF input string enables PSTN
participants to use the input string when connecting to an RMX whether
the RMX is a standalone MCU or part of a DMA solution deployment. For
a detailed description, see "PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix” on page 17-10.
17-10
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Direct Dial-in to Endpoints or DMA VMR using Automatically
Generated Destination Numbers
ISDN/PSTN participants can call the destination endpoints without
interaction with the IVR of the gateway. This dialing method is enabled
when the administrator configures the Gateway Profile to automatically
generate the dial string of the destination endpoint or Meeting Room on
the DMA by truncating the dial in string and replacing the truncated
digits by other digits that can be used as the destination number.
For a detailed description of the call flow when dialing the DMA using
this method, see "Calling a DMA Direct with Automatically Generated
Destination Dial Strings” on page 17-27.
Calling an IP Endpoint via Gateway
If the call destination is an IP endpoint, the endpoints must be registered
to the same gatekeeper to which the RMX is registered. There should be a
mapping between the dial-in numbers in the range defined for the ISDN
Network Service and also assigned to the Gateway Profile and the IP
endpoints, in such a way that the alias of each endpoint is the number that
will be appended to the ISDN prefix.
When the call arrives to the gateway, this prefix is truncated and replaced
by digits that correspond to the MCU prefix in the gatekeeper and the call
is forwarded to the destination endpoint.
Figure 18 Call Flow from ISDN Endpoint to H.323 Endpoint with Automatically
Generated Forwarded Dial String
17-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
For example:
•
The ISDN prefix is 9251.
•
The dial in number range defined in the ISDN Network Service can
be 100 to 400 (that is, 9251100 to 9251400).
•
The dial in numbers assigned to the Gateway Profile can the entire
range, or part of the range of other Gateway Profiles are to be used:
100 to 200. (that is 9251100 to 9251200)
•
The aliases assigned to the IP endpoints will range between 100 to 200
or 400 (for the full range) as well.
•
MCU Prefix in the gatekeeper: 79.
•
Number of digits to append (same as the ISDN prefix is this
example): 3
•
The destination endpoint alias is 123.
•
The ISDN endpoint dials 9251123. The RMX truncates the four first
digits 9251 replacing them with 79 and appends 123 to 79, to create
the destination number 79123 which is sent to the gatekeeper for
routing.
Interoperability with CMA
The RMX does not register to the gatekeeper as a Gateway, therefore it is
recommended to create and use the CMA Dialing Rules to enable the CMA
Dial One Method.
When the caller enters the Dial One digit as the destination number prefix,
the CMA replaces this digit with the MCU prefix in the Gatekeeper and
the ID of the Gateway Profile. For example, the calling participant can
enter 99251444, where 9 is the digit that is used as the MCU prefix
registered in gatekeeper and is replaced by the gatekeeper with * and the
Gateway Profile ID (for example, *2000) as defined in the Dialing Rule.
For more details on Dialing Rules definition in the CMA, see the Polycom
CMA System Operations Guide, “Dial Rule Operations”.
17-12
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Configuring the Gateway Components on the RMX
To enable gateway calls in the RMX, the following components have to be
configured:
•
Conference IVR Service to be used with the Conference Profile assigned
to the Gateway Profile. The IVR Services are used for Gateway IVR
connections.
•
Conference Profile that includes the IVR Service for the Gateway
Session and the settings to automatically terminate the Gateway
Session: when one participant is still connected or when no
participants are connected
•
Gateway Profile for call routing.
Defining the IVR Service for Gateway Calls
The system is shipped with a default Conference IVR Services for gateway
calls named GW IVR Service that enables you to run gateway calls
without defining a new Conference IVR Service. This IVR Service includes
the following settings:
•
Welcome slide and message - disabled
•
Conference and Chairperson Passwords - disabled
•
General Messages - all messages including the gateway messages and
dial tones are selected
•
Roll Call - disabled
•
Video Services - Click&View - enabled
•
Video Services - Video Welcome Slide - Default_GW_Welcom_Slide
•
Operator Assistance - disabled
You can define a new Conference IVR Service to be used for gateway calls.
This Conference IVR Service will be assigned to the appropriate Gateway
Profile.
To define a new Conference IVR Service for gateway calls:
1 In the RMX Management pane, expand the Rarely Used list and click
the IVR Services ( ) entry.
The list pane displays the Conference IVR Services list.
17-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
On the IVR Services toolbar, click the New Conference IVR Service
(
) button.
The New Conference IVR Service - Global dialog box opens.
3
In the Conference IVR Service Name field, enter a name that will
identify this service as a gateway IVR service.
4
Define the IVR Service Global parameters (it is recommended to use
the system defaults). For more details, see RMX 1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, "Conference IVR Service Properties - Global
Parameters” on page 15-10.
5
When defining a gateway IVR Service, the following options should
remain disabled:
6
— Welcome Messages (in the Conference IVR Service - Welcome
dialog box).
— Chairperson Messages (in the Conference IVR Service - Conference
Chairperson dialog box).
— Password Messages (in the Conference IVR Service - Conference
Password dialog box)
Click the General tab.
The General dialog box lists messages that are played during the
conference. These messages are played when participants or the
conference chairperson perform various operations or when a change
occurs.
17-14
7
To assign the appropriate audio file to the message type, click the
appropriate table entry, in the Message File column. A drop-down list
is enabled.
8
From the list, select the audio file to be assigned to the event/
indication.
9
Repeat steps 7 and 8 to select the audio files for the required
messages.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
10 For a gateway IVR Service, select the audio file for the following
message types:
Table 17-1 Conference IVR Service Properties - Gateway General Voice
Messages
Message Type
Description
Enter Destination
ID
Prompts the calling participant for the destination
number. Default message prompts the participant
for the conference ID (same message as in the
Entry Queue IVR Service).
Incorrect
Destination ID
If the participant entered an incorrect conference ID
(in gateway calls it is the destination number),
requests the participant to enter the number again.
Dial Tone
The tone that will be played to indicate a dialing
tone, to let the calling participant enter the
destination number.
Ringing Tone
The tone that will be played to indicate that the
system is calling the destination number.
11 When defining a gateway IVR Service, it is recommended that the
Roll Call option remains disabled.
12 Click the Video Services tab.
17-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The New Conference IVR Service - Video Services dialog box opens.
13 Define the following parameters:
Table 17-2 New Conference IVR Service Properties - Video Services
Parameters
Video
Services
Description
Click&View
Select this option to enable endpoints to run the
Click&View application that enables participants to
select a video layout from their endpoint.
Video
Welcome Slide
Select the video slide file to be displayed when
participants connect to the conference. To view any
slide, click the Preview Slide (
) button.
If the video slide file was not uploaded to the MCU prior
to the IVR Service definition, click the Add Slide button.
The Install File dialog box opens. The uploading
process is similar to the uploading of audio files. For
more information, see step 7 on page 17-14 in the RMX
1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide.
Notes:
• When using one of the default Polycom slides, the
slide will be displayed in the resolution defined in the
profile, i.e. CIF, SD, HD 720p or HD 1080p.
•
When defining a gateway IVR Service, the
recommended default slide is:
Default_GW_Welcome_Slide.
14 Click the DTMF Codes tab.
The New Conference IVR Service - DTMF Codes dialog box opens.
15 If required, modify the DTMF codes or permissions. For more details,
see RMX 1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "New Conference IVR
Service Properties - DTMF Codes” on page 15-27.
16 Click the Operator Assistance tab.
17 If Operator Assistance will not be available to participants, clear the
Enable Operator Assistance option, which is automatically selected
to disable it.
18 Click OK to complete the IVR Service definition.
The new Conference IVR Service is added to the IVR Services list.
17-16
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Defining the Conference Profile for Gateway Calls
The Conference Profile that will be later assigned to the Gateway Profile
determine the parameters of the gateway call, such as the line rate and
video resolution and if to automatically terminate the gateway session
when one participant or no participants are connected to the Gateway
Session.
To define a Conference Profile for Gateway Sessions:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click Conference Profiles.
2
In the Conference Profiles pane, click the New Profile button.
The New Profile – General dialog box opens.
3
Define the Profile name and select the line rate for the gateway
session.
4
Click the Advanced tab.
The New Profile – Advanced dialog box opens.
5
Define the required settings for Encryption and LPR.
17-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
6
Set the Auto Terminate - At the End option to When Last Participant
Remains ensuring that the gateway call will end when only one
participant is connected. For more details, see Table 1-5, “New Profile Advanced Parameters,” on page 1-12.
7
Define the remaining Profile parameters as described in "Defining
Profiles” on page 1-8.
Defining the Gateway Profile
A Gateway Profile is a conferencing entity, based on the Conference
Profile assigned to it, that enables endpoints to dial-in and initiate Gateway
Sessions. The system is shipped with a default Gateway Profile, named
Default_GW_Session.
When an endpoint calls the Gateway Profile, a new Gateway Session is
automatically created based on the Profile parameters, and the endpoint
joins the gateway call which can also be a multipoint conference if more
than two participants are connected to the conference.
The Gateway Profile defines the parameters of the gateway call that are
taken from the Conference Profile assigned to it, such as line rate,
resolution, the IVR Service to be used and the dial-in numbers.
Up to 1000 Gateway Profiles, Entry Queues, IP Factories and Meeting Rooms
can be defined in the RMX (they are all part of one repository whose size is
1000 entries).
To define a new Gateway Profile:
1 In the RMX Management - Rarely Used pane, click Gateway Profiles
.
2
17-18
In the Gateway Profiles list pane, click the New Gateway Profile
button.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
The New Gateway Profile dialog box opens.
3
Define the following parameters:
Table 17-3 New Gateway Profile Properties
Option
Description
Display Name
Enter a unique-per-MCU name for the Gateway
Profile in native language character sets to be
displayed in the RMX Web Client.
The system automatically generates an ASCII name
for the Display Name field that can be modified using
Unicode encoding.
• English text uses ASCII encoding and can contain
the most characters (Maximum length in ASCII is
80 characters).
•
European and Latin text length is approximately
half the length of the maximum.
•
Asian text length is approximately one third of the
length of the maximum.
The maximum length also varies according to the
mixture of Unicode and ASCII.
17-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 17-3 New Gateway Profile Properties (Continued)
Option
Description
Routing Name
The Routing Name is defined by the user, however if
no Routing Name is entered, the system will
automatically assign a new name when the Profile is
saved as follows:
• If an all ASCII text is entered in Display Name, it is
used also as the Routing Name.
•
17-20
If any combination of Unicode and ASCII text (or
full Unicode text) is entered in Display Name, the
ID (such as Conference ID) is used as the Routing
Name.
Conference
Profile
The default Conference Profile is selected by default.
If required, select the appropriate Profile from the list
of Profiles defined in the MCU.
Note: In the Conference Profile - Advance dialog box,
the Auto Terminate option enables you to
automatically terminate the Gateway Session when
one participant remains connected (excluding the
Recording Link).
A new Gateway Session is created using the
parameters defined in the Profile.
ID
Enter a unique number identifying this conferencing
entity for dial in. Default string length is 4 digits.
If you do not manually assign the ID, the MCU assigns
one after the completion of the definition. The ID
String Length is defined by the flag
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_LEN in the System
Configuration.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Table 17-3 New Gateway Profile Properties (Continued)
Option
Description
Gateway Dial
out Protocols
Select the communication protocols to be used for
dialing out to the destination participant(s).
The system starts by connecting the participant using
the first selected protocol. If the call is not answered or
it cannot be completed using one communication
protocol, the system will try to connect the endpoint
using the next communication protocol in the following
order: H.323, SIP and ISDN. PSTN numbers are
identified separately and are dialed right away without
trying other connections.
By default, all protocols (H.323, SIP, ISDN and PSTN)
are selected. Clear the protocol that should not be
used for connecting the destination endpoint.
Enable ISDN/
PSTN Access
Select this check box to allocate dial-in numbers for
ISDN/PSTN connections.
To define the first dial-in number using the default
ISDN/PSTN Network Service, leave the default
selection. When the Entry Queue is saved on the
MCU, the dial-in number will be automatically
assigned to the Entry Queue. This number is taken
from the dial-in numbers range in the default ISDN/
PSTN Network Service.
Note: Even if ISDN/PSTN is disabled for dial-in, if an
ISDN/PSTN Network Service is defined in the system,
and ISDN and/or PSTN are enabled for dialed out, the
system will used the default ISDN Network Service for
dialing out to the target number.
ISDN/PSTN
Network Service
The default Network Service is automatically selected.
To select a different ISDN/PSTN Network Service in
the service list, select the name of the Network
Service.
17-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 17-3 New Gateway Profile Properties (Continued)
17-22
Option
Description
First Phone
Number
Enter the first number in the Dial-in number range to
be used for dialing into the gateway. This number
must be part of the dial-in number range defined in the
selected ISDN/PSTN Network Service.
This field cannot be left empty. If left empty an error
message, Please enter the First Dial in Number is
displayed.
Length: 0-25 digits.
Note: This number must be numerically smaller than
the Last Dial-in Number in the range.
Last Phone
Number
Enter the last number in the Dial-in number range to
be used for dialing into the gateway. This number
must be part of the dial-in number range defined in the
selected ISDN/PSTN Network Service.
This field cannot be left empty. If left empty an error
message, Please enter the Last Dial in Number is
displayed.
Length: 0-25 digits.
Note: This number must be numerically larger than
the First Dial-in Number in the range.
Use Dial-In
Numbers as
Prefix Range
When selected - Dial-in numbers are used to
automatically generate the dial string of the
destination endpoint or DMA Meeting Room or the IP
endpoint, skipping the interaction with the Gateway
IVR system for entering the destination ID. For more
details see "Direct Dial-in to Endpoints or DMA VMR
using Automatically Generated Destination Numbers”
on page 17-11.
When cleared - The participant must interact with the
IVR Service to enter the ID of the destination endpoint
of the DMA Meeting Room.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Table 17-3 New Gateway Profile Properties (Continued)
4
Option
Description
Forward Prefix
Enter the DMA prefix or the RMX prefix in the
Gatekeeper for use in automatic dial string generation.
This prefix replaces the digits that are truncated from
the dial-in strings and to which the remaining dial in
digits are appended to create the destination number.
For example, if the DMA Prefix in the Gatekeeper is
26, enter this prefix in this field.
Number of Digits
to Forward
Enter the number of rightmost digits of the dialed
string to be appended to the Destination Prefix (DMA/
RMX prefix in the gatekeeper) when automatically
generating the forwarded dial string. For example, if
the number of digits to append is 4 and the dialing
string is 5705555, the system will append the digits
5555 to the DMA prefix (26) and creates the
destination number 265555.
Click OK.
The new Gateway Profile is added to the list.
System Configuration
For details about adding and modifying system flags, see RMX 1500/2000/
4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags” on
page 19-21
Displaying the Connection Information
You can hide the connection indications displayed on the participant’s
screen during the connection phase by changing the system configuration
and manually adding and setting the system flag
DISABLE_GW_OVERLAY_INDICATION to YES in the
MCMS_PARAMETERS_USER tab.
By default, this flag is set to NO and all connection indications are
displayed.
17-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Enabling PSTN dial-in using GK prefix
The feature is enabled when setting the flag
USE_GK_PREFIX_FOR_PSTN_CALLS to Yes.
For more details, see "PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix” on page 17-30.
Monitoring Ongoing Gateway Sessions
Ongoing Gateway Sessions that are created when calling the Gateway
Profile, are listed in the ongoing Conferences list pane.
Gateway Sessions are monitored in the same way as the conferences. For
more details on monitoring conferences, see RMX 1500/2000/4000
Administrator’s Guide, "Conference Level Monitoring” on page 11-2.
Additional ISDN and PSTN Participants cannot dial in directly to the Gateway
Session once it was started.
Connection Indications
During the connection process to the other endpoints, the system displays
on the calling participant’s screen the called number and the connection
status.
17-24
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
A Maximum of 32 characters can be displayed for connection indications.
If the displayed information is longer than 32 characters the text is
truncated.
If the system dials out to only one destination endpoint, the dialed
number is not shown, only the connection status.
If the destination endpoint is ISDN, the system displays the connection
progress in percentages, where the percentages represent various stages
in the connection process as follows:
•
Up to 60% the connection of the ISDN channels (up to 30 channels
can be connected when E1 is used for the connection).
•
60% - 80% BONDING stage
•
80% - 90% Capability exchange stage
•
90% - 99% Media connection stage
Once the call is completed, the indications are cleared.
If the call is not completed after trying all possible protocols, the system
displays the number that was dialed on the calling endpoint’s screen and
one of the following causes:
•
Busy - the far endpoint is in another call. In such a case, the system
does not try to connect using another communication protocol.
•
Rejected - the far endpoint has rejected the call. In such a case, the
system will try to connect using another communication protocol.
•
Unreached - the number could not be resolved by the gatekeeper or
the SIP proxy or could not be found on the network. In such a case,
the system will try to connect using another communication protocol.
•
Failed - any reason causing the system not to complete the connection
process. In such a case, the system will try to connect using another
communication protocol.
You can hide the connection indications by changing the system
configuration. For more details, see "System Configuration” on page 17-23.
Gateway Session Parameters
Gateway Session Name
The RMX creates a new conference that acts as a Gateway Session with a
unique ID whose display name is composed of the following components:
•
The prefix GW_,
17-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
The Gateway Profile display name. For example,
Default_GW_Session
•
(number) where the number is a gateway conference counter.
For example: if the Gateway Profile display name is Default_GW_Session,
the conference name will be GW_Default_GW_Session(001).
Conference ID:
The ID of the new conference is assigned randomly by the MCU.
The Gateway Session automatically ends when only one participant is left
in the session.
Connected Participant Parameters
Once this conference is created, the calling participant is connected to it
and one or several dial-out participant(s) are automatically created and
added to this gateway session. The dial-in participant is also identified as
the chairperson of the conference.
The connecting (dial-in) participant name is taken from the endpoint. If
the endpoint does not send its name, it is derived from the Gateway
Profile display name and it includes the Gateway Session name, underscore
and a random number is displayed (between brackets), for example,
GW_Default_GW_Session(001)_(000).
The name of the destination (dial-out) participant is taken from the
endpoint. If the endpoint does not send its name, it is taken from the
dialed number. If the dialed number was an IP address, the system
displays underscores instead of dots, for example, 172_22_172_89.
Participants connected to a gateway session are monitored in the same way
as participants connected to ongoing conferences. For details, see RMX
1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Participant Level Monitoring” on
page 11-17.
Dialing to Polycom® DMA™ 7000
Two dialing methods are available to ISDN/PSTN participants calling the
DMA:
•
17-26
Direct with automatically generated destination dial strings from
dial-in strings. This option is available only from version 7.1 and only
to RMX with MPM+ and MPMx cards.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
•
Via Gateway IVR.
In addition, PSTN participants can dial the Gateway IVR and can use the
MCU or DMA prefix in the gatekeeper together with the conference ID/
endpoint alias as the destination string to simplify the input. This is one of
the methods for PSTN participants to connect to a virtual Meeting Room
on the DMA. For more details, see "PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix” on
page 17-10.
Calling a DMA Direct with Automatically Generated Destination Dial
Strings
In this configuration, the gateway session initiator enters one of the dial-in
numbers assigned to the gateway profile. This number is truncated by the
RMX gateway and the truncated digits are replaced by a prefix that
corresponds either to the DMA prefix in the Gatekeeper.
Figure 19 Call Flow from ISDN Endpoint to Polycom DMA with Automatically
Generated Forwarded Dial String
Example:
Figure 1 shows the call flow assuming the following parameters:
First Dial-in Number
5705550
Last Dial-in Number
5705560
Use Dial-in Numbers as Destination ID
Selected
DMA Meeting Room ID
5555
17-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Destination Prefix (DMA prefix in Gatekeeper)
26
Number of Rightmost Digits to Append
4
PSTN participant dials
(212)5705555
Number that will be used by RMX to forward
the call to the DMA
265555
Calling the DMA via Gateway IVR
Audio PSTN/ISDN calls can be routed to Polycom DMA 7000 via the
RMX. ISDN Video endpoints connect using their audio channels (but
consume video resources). The DMA 7000 enables load balancing and the
distribution of multipoint calls on up to 10 Polycom RMX media servers.
As part of this solution, the RMX acts as a gateway for the DMA that
supports H.323 calls. The PSTN or ISDN endpoint dials the virtual
Meeting Room on the DMA via the Gateway Profile on the RMX.
Both the RMX and the DMA must be registered with the same gatekeeper.
The dialing string of the destination conference on the DMA must be
communicated to the dialing endpoint and used during the connection to
the Gateway Profile on the RMX. There are two options available for
doing this:
•
Manual Dial String Entry
•
Automatic Dial String Generation
Manual Dial String Entry
Figure 17-1Dialing String and Call Flow from ISDN Endpoint to Polycom DMA
The connection is done in two steps:
17-28
•
A PSTN/ISDN participant dials the dial-in number assigned to the
Gateway Profile (5705555), including the country and area code (if
needed) and connects to the Gateway IVR.
•
When prompted for the target conference ID, the caller enters the
string of the target meeting room on the DMA followed by the # key.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
This string is composed of the DMA prefix as registered in the
gatekeeper and the ID of the virtual meeting room running on the
DMA. For example, if the DMA prefix is 25 and the target meeting
room ID is 8000 the participant enters 258000 followed by the # key.
The RMX creates a Gateway Session with two participants, the calling
participant and the link to the conference running on the DMA.
Automatic Dial String Generation
The administrator can now configure the Gateway Profile to automatically
generate and forward the dial string from the RMX Gateway Session to the
DMA in order to connect to the required DMA Meeting Room. When this
configuration option is selected, the participant does not need to interact
with the IVR Service.
Figure 18 Call Flow from ISDN Endpoint to Polycom DMA with Automatically
Generated Forwarded Dial String
17-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Example:
Figure 1 shows the call flow assuming the following parameters:
First Dial-in Number
5705550
Last Dial-in Number
5705560
Use Dial-in Numbers as Destination ID
Selected
PSTN participant dials
(212)5705555
Destination Prefix (DMA Gatekeeper)
26
Number of Rightmost Digits to Append
4
DMA Meeting Room ID
5555
PSTN Dial-in Using GK Prefix
When connecting to an RMX that is standalone or part of a DMA solution
deployment, PSTN participants are prompted by an IVR message
requesting the Destination Conference ID followed by the # key to be
entered using the DTMF input keypad.
Including the Gatekeeper Prefix in the DTMF input string enables PSTN
participants to use the input string when connecting to an RMX whether
the RMX is a standalone MCU or part of a DMA solution deployment.
Enabling PSTN dial-in using GK prefix
The feature is enabled by the USE_GK_PREFIX_FOR_PSTN_CALLS
System Flag in system.cfg. For more information see "System Configuration”
on page 19-5.
Table 17-4 summarizes the PSTN participant’s DTMF input depending on
the flag value.
Table 17-4 PSTN Participant input via DTMF
Configuration
FLAG:
USE_GK_PREFIX_FOR_PSTN_CALLS=
NO
17-30
Standalone RMX
Conference ID= 1234
PSTN participant
enters: 1234#.
RMX with DMA
Virtual Meeting Room ID in
DMA = 1234
DMA gatekeeper prefix = 76
PSTN participant
enters: 761234#
YES
PSTN participant enters:
761234#
(The Gatekeeper
Prefix”76” is automatically
removed from the DTMF
input string for a
standalone RMX.)
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
Direct Dialing from ISDN/PSTN Endpoint to IP
Endpoint via a Meeting Room
Dialing from an ISDN endpoint to a specific IP endpoint using the
Gateway Profile is a two-step process (dialing to the Gateway and then
entering the number of the destination IP endpoint).
When dialing to specific IP endpoints you can simplify the dialing process
by creating the appropriate Meeting Room.
If CMA is involved, dialing can be simplified even further by configuring
the appropriate dialing Rule in the CMA.
To set up the Meeting Room for direct dialing in:
Set the conference parameters in the Conference Profile and make sure
that the conference will automatically end when there is only one
participant connected to the meeting.
Define the Meeting Room with the following:
•
Conference Profile in which the Auto Terminate - At the end - When
Last Participant Remains option is selected. For more details on
Conference Profile definition, see "Defining the IVR Service for Gateway
Calls” on page 17-13.
17-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
17-32
ISDN/PSTN access is enabled and a dial-in number is assigned to the
Meeting Room.
Chapter 17-Gateway Calls
•
The dial-out IP endpoint is added to the Meeting Room’s Participants
list.
17-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
17-34
18
RMX Manager Application
The RMX Manager is the Windows version of the RMX Web Client. It can
be used instead of the RMX Web Client for routine RMX management
and for RMX management via a modem connection. For more
information on using the RMX Manager via a modem connection, see
"Connecting to the RMX via Modem” on page G-10.
Using the RMX Manager application, a single user can control a single or
multiple RMX units as well as conferences from multiple RMXs. RMX
1500/2000/4000 can be managed and controlled by the RMX Manager
application.
The RMX Manager can list and monitor:
•
Up to 20 RMX systems in the MCUs pane
•
Up to 800 conferences in the Conferences pane
•
Up to 1600 participants in the Participants pane
The RMX Manager is faster than the RMX Web Client and can give added
efficiency to RMX management tasks, especially when deployed on
workstations affected by:
•
Lack of performance due to bandwidth constraints within the
LAN/WAN environment.
•
Slow operation and disconnections that can be caused by the antiphishing component of various antivirus applications.
Installing the RMX Manager
The RMX Manager application can be downloaded from one of the RMX
systems installed in your site or from Polycom web site at
http://www.polycom.com/support.
18-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To install RMX Manager (downloading the application from the RMX):
Upgrade Notes
• When upgrading the RMX Manager application, it is recommended to
backup the MCU list using the Export RMX Manager Configuration option.
For more details, see "Import/Export RMX Manager Configuration” on
page 18-30.
When upgrading the RMX Manager from a major version (for example, version
7.0) to a maintenance version of that version (for example, 7.0.x), the installation
must be performed from the same MCU (IP address) from which the major
version (for example, version 7.0) was installed.
If you are upgrading from another MCU (different IP address), you must first
uninstall the RMX Manager application using Control Panel > Add or Remove
Programs.
New RMX Installation Note
The RMX Installation and First Entry Configuration must be completed before
installing the RMX Manager application. For more details, see the RMX 1500/
2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, Chapter 2, “First Time Installation and
Configuration”.
Once the connection to the RMX unit is established and the Login window is
displayed, the RMX Manager application can be installed.
1
18-2
Start Internet Explorer and connect to one of the RMX units in your
site. It is recommended to connect to the RMX installed with the latest
software version.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
The Login screen is displayed. There is a link to the RMX Manager
Installer at the top of the right edge of the screen.
Link to
RMX
Manager
Installer
2
Click the Install RMX Manager link.
The installer verifies the application’s requirements on the
workstation.
18-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Install dialog box is displayed.
3
Click Install.
The installation proceeds.
18-4
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
The installation completes, the application loads and the RMX
Manager – Welcome screen is displayed.
This screen is displayed only on first entry. Once the language is
selected, this screen is skipped the next time you start the RMX
Manager application.
4
Select the required language by clicking its flag.
The Next button is enabled.
18-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
5
Click the Next button.
The RMX Manager - MCUs screen is displayed.
MCUs Toolbar
MCUs Pane
The first time you start the RMX Manager application, the RMX unit
used for downloading the RMX Manager application is automatically
defined and listed in the MCUs pane. If the RMX Manager was
downloaded from Polycom Support web site, this pane is empty.
When the RMX is automatically added to the MCUs list, the User Name and
Password, which enable login to the RMX, are missing. You can either enter
them manually when you login to the RMX, or you can add them to the RMX
defined parameters.
This screen becomes the opening screen from the second time the
RMX Manager application is started.
For each listed MCU, the system displays the following information:
— MCU Display Name (as defined in the Add MCU dialog box). The
MCU that was automatically added to the list, the MCU IP
address is used as the Display Name.
— IP Address of the MCU’s control unit
— Product Type - The MCU type: RMX 1500/RMX 2000/RMX 4000.
Before connecting to the MCU for the first time, the RMX type is
unknown so RMX is displayed instead as a general indication.
— Video Resources - The number of video resources that are
available for conferencing.
— Audio Resources - The number of audio resources that are
available for conferencing.
18-6
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Starting the RMX Manager Application
Once installed, the RMX Manager can be run using the http:// (nonsecured) or https:// (secured) command in the browser’s address line or
the Windows Start menu.
To use the browser:
1 In the browser’s command line, enter:
http://<MCU Control Unit IP Address>/RmxManager.html
or
https://<MCU Control Unit IP Address>/RmxManager.html
2
Press Enter.
To use the Windows Start menu:
1 Click Start > Programs.
a
If the RMX Manager is displayed in the recently used programs
list, click RMX Manager in the list to start the application.
or
b
Click All Programs > Polycom > RMX Manager.
18-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The MCUs screen is displayed, listing the MCUs currently defined in
the RMX Manager.
This screen enables you to add additional MCUs or connect to any of
the MCUs listed. For details on adding MCUs, see “Adding MCUs to
the MCUs List” on page 17.
To display the RMX Manager main screen you must connect to one of
the listed RMXs. For more details, see “Connecting to the MCU” on
page 8.
Connecting to the MCU
Once an MCU is defined, the RMX Manager can be connected to it. This
allows you to set up conferences, make reservations, monitor On Going
Conferences and perform other activities on several MCUs.
The first RMX unit that is connected to the RMX Manager dictates the
Authorization Level of Users that can connect to the other MCUs on the list. For
example, if the Authorization level of the User POLYCOM is Administrator, all
Users connecting to the other MCUs on the list must be Administrators. Each
user can have a different login name and password for each of the listed MCUs
and they must be defined in the Users list of each of the listed MCUs.
18-8
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
To connect the RMX Manager to an MCU:
1 In the MCUs pane or screen, use one of the following methods:
a
Double-click the MCU icon.
b
Select the RMX to connect and click the Connect MCU
button.
c
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Connect MCU.
If you are connecting to the MCU from the MCUs opening screen and
have defined the Username and Password for the connecting MCU, the
system connects to the RMX, and the RMX Manager Main Screen is
displayed.
18-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
If you are connecting to any MCU from the MCUs pane in the RMX
Manager Main screen and have defined the Username and Password
for the connecting MCU, the MCU icon changes to connected and its
status, type and number of audio and video resources are displayed
in the MCUs pane.
If the Username and Password are missing from the MCU parameters,
or if the Remember Me check box has been cleared, the Connect dialog
box opens.
2
In the Username field, enter the user name with which you will login
to the MCU.
3
In the Password field, enter the password as defined for the user name
with which you will login to the MCU.
4
To add the Username and password to the MCU properties so you
will not have to enter them each time you login to the MCU, make
sure that the Remember Login check box is selected. Otherwise, clear
the Remember Login check box.
5
Click OK.
The system connects to the RMX, and the RMX Manager Main screen is
displayed.
If a User with the entered Username and Password is not defined in the
RMX, an error message is displayed and the system lets you re-enter
the Username and Password.
18-10
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
RMX Manager Main Screen
The RMX Manager Main Screen is displayed only when at least one MCU
is connected.
This screen is similar to the RMX Web Client Main Screen with the addition
of the MCUs pane. As in the RMX Web Client, the panes are displayed
according to the Authorization Level of the logged in User. The MCUs pane
is displayed to all users.
Ongoing Conferences Pane
MCUs Pane
The selected MCU is
highlighted
List Pane
Address Book Pane
Device
Management
Pane
Only one MCU can be selected in the MCUs pane. If only one MCU is
connected, it is automatically selected. The selected MCU is highlighted.
The menu items, the Device Management features, the Address Book and the
Conference Templates are all properties of the selected MCU and apply to it.
18-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
MCUs Pane
The MCUs pane includes a list of MCUs and a toolbar.
For each listed MCU, the system displays the following information:
•
MCU Display Name - the name of the MCU and its icon according to
its type and connection status. The following icons are available:
Table 1
Icon
MCU Icons and Statuses
Description
RMX 1500, disconnected.
RMX 1500, connected.
RMX 2000, disconnected.
RMX 2000, connected.
RMX 4000, disconnected.
RMX 4000, connected.
•
IP Address of the MCU’s control unit.
•
Status - The status of the MCU:
— Connected - the MCU is connected to the RMX Manager and can
be managed by the RMX Manager user.
— Disconnected - The MCU is disconnected from the RMX Manager
18-12
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
•
— Major - The MCU has a major problem. MCU behavior could be
affected and attention is required.
Product Type - The MCU type: RMX 1500/2000/4000.
Before connecting to the MCU for the first time, the RMX type is
unknown so RMX is displayed instead as a general indication.
•
Monitored - When checked indicates that the conferences running on
this MCU are automatically added to the Conferences list and
monitored. To stop monitoring the conferences running on this MCU,
clear the Monitored check box.
•
Video Resources - The number of video resources that are available for
conferencing.
•
Audio Resources - The number of audio resources that are available for
conferencing.
MCUs Toolbar
The MCUs toolbar contains the following buttons:
Add MCU
Connect MCU
Disconnect MCU
Delete MCU
MCU Properties
Conferences Pane
The Conferences pane lists all the ongoing conferences from all the MCUs
that are connected and monitored along with their MCU, Status,
Conference ID, Start Time and End Time data. The number of ongoing
conferences is displayed in the pane’s title.
18-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Conferences list toolbar contains the following buttons:
Save Conference
to Template
Start/Resume/Pause Recording
Stop Recording
Delete Conference
New Conference
Toolbar
List Headers
MCU Name
Conference Data
If Conference Recording is enabled the following buttons are enabled:
•
Start/Resume Recording – start/resume recording.
•
Stop Recording – stop recording.
•
Pause –
toggles with the Start/Resume button.
Monitoring conferences
New conferences run on MCUs selected for Monitoring are automatically
added to the Conferences list. You can sort the conferences by MCU by
clicking the MCU column heading in the Conferences table. Conferences
run on MCUs that are connected but not monitored are not listed.
Using Windows multiple selection methods to select conferences,
participants from several conferences running on different MCUs can be
listed in the Participants list pane.
Starting a new conference
When starting a new conference, you must first select the MCU to run the
conference in the MCUs pane.
RMX Management
The RMX Management pane lists the entities of the selected MCU that
need to be configured to enable the RMX to run conferences. Only users
with Administrators permission can modify these parameters.
The RMX Management pane is divided into two sections:
18-14
•
Frequently Used – parameters often configured monitored or
modified.
•
Rarely Used – parameters configured during initial system set-up
and rarely modified afterward.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
List Pane
The List pane displays details of the participants connected to the
conferences selected in the Conferences pane or the item selected in RMX
Management pane. The title of the pane changes according to the selected
item.
When selecting an item in the RMX Management pane it applies only to
the MCU selected in the MCUs list. In such a case, the system displays the
name of the selected MCU in the List pane title.
Total number of participants
Status Bar
The Status Bar at the bottom of the RMX Web Client contains System and
Participant Alerts tabs as well as Port Usage Gauges and an MCU State
indicator.
System Alerts
Lists system problems of all connected MCUs (even if the MCU is not
monitored). The alert indicator flashes red when at least one system alert
is active. The flashing continues until a user with Operator or
Administrator permission reviews the list.
The System Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header in
the System Alerts table.
The System Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the System Alerts
button in the left corner of the Status Bar.
Active
Alarms
Faults
List
For more information about Active Alarms and Faults List, see "System
and Participant Alerts” on page 19-1.
18-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Participant Alerts
Lists the participants of all monitored MCUs that are experiencing
connection problems. The list is sorted by MCU and conference.
The Participant Alerts can be sorted by MCU by clicking the MCU header
in the Participant Alerts table.
The Participant Alerts pane is opened and closed by clicking the
Participant Alerts button in the left corner of the Status Bar.
Port Usage Gauges
The Port Usage gauges display for the selected MCU:
•
The total number of Video or Voice ports in the system according to
the Video/Voice Port Configuration. The Audio gauge is displayed only
if Audio ports were allocated by the administrator, otherwise only the
Video port gauge is displayed.
•
The number of Video and Voice ports in use.
•
The High Port Usage threshold.
For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "Port
Usage Gauges” on page 3-8.
MCU State
The MCU State indicator displays the status of the selected MCU.
For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide, "MCU
State” on page 3-9.
Address Book
The Address Book is a list of Participants and Groups that have been defined
on the selected RMX.
The information in the Address Book can be modified only by an
administrator. All RMX users can, however, view and use the Address
Book to assign participants to conferences.
The name of the selected RMX is displayed in the title of the Address
Book pane. For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started
Guide, "Address Book” on page 3-9.
18-16
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Conference Templates
Conference Templates enable administrators and operators to create, save,
schedule and activate identical conferences.
The Conference Templates pane lists the Conference Templates that have
been defined on the selected RMX.
The Conference Templates pane is initially displayed as a closed tab. The
name of the selected RMX and the number of saved Conference Templates is
indicated on the tab.
For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Conference Templates” on page 3-10.
Adding MCUs to the MCUs List
The RMX Manager can connect to one or several RMX units
simultaneously. If the site’s configuration includes more than one MCU,
or when a new MCU is added to your configuration, and you want to
monitor and control all MCUs from within the same window, you must
add the MCU to the MCUs list.
The RMX unit must be installed and its IP addresses properly configured in the
Management Network Service before defining its connection parameters in the
RMX Manager application.
To add the MCU to the list of MCUs being managed, define the MCU’s
connection parameters.
To add an RMX unit:
1
On the MCUs toolbar, click the Add MCU
to the MCU list.
The Add MCU dialog box opens.
button to add an MCU
18-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 2
18-18
MCU Properties
Field
Description
MCU Name
Enter the name of the MCU on the network.
MCU IP
Enter the IP address of the MCU’s Control Unit. The IP
address must be identical to the one configured in the
MCU during first entry Configuration. For more details,
see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Modifying the Factory Default Management Network
Settings on the USB Key” on page 2-9.
Port
Enter the number of the port used for communication
and data transactions between the RMX unit and the
RMX Manager.
For standard connection, enter 80.
For a Secured connection (using TLS or SSL),
enter 443.
Username
Enter the user name with which you will login to the
MCU. A User with this name must be defined in the
RMX Users list. The system is shipped with a default
User whose name is POLYCOM.
Password
Enter the password as defined for the user name with
which you will login to the MCU. The system is shipped
with a default User whose password is POLYCOM.
Secure Mode
Optional. Select this check box to connect to the RMX
with SSL and work in Secure Mode.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Table 2
MCU Properties (Continued)
Field
Description
Remember Login
This check box is automatically selected, and it
enables the usage of the user name and password
entered in this dialog box when connecting to the
RMX.
If this check box is cleared, the user is prompted for
the user name and password when connecting to this
RMX unit.
3
Click OK.
The MCU is added to the MCUs pane.
4
If required, repeat steps 1-3 to define additional RMX units.
The MCUs pane contains the list of all defined MCUs.
Starting a Conference
There are several ways to start a conference:
•
Clicking the New Conference button in the Conferences pane. For more
information, see “Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane” on
page 20.
•
Dialing in to a Meeting Room defined on any of the MCUs.
18-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
— A Meeting Room is a conference that is saved on the MCU. It
remains in passive mode until it is activated by the first
participant, or the meeting organizer, dialing in.
For more information about Meeting Rooms, see "Meeting Rooms” on
page 4-1.
•
Dialing in to an Ad Hoc Entry Queue defined on one of the MCUs
which is used as the access point to the MCU.
For a detailed description of Ad Hoc Entry Queues, see
"Entry Queues” on page 5-1.
•
Start a Reservation:
— If the Start Time of the Reservation is past due the conference
becomes ongoing immediately.
— If the Start Time of the Reservation is in the future the conference
becomes ongoing, at the specified time on the specified date.
For more information, see “Starting a Reservation” on page 22.
•
Start any Conference Template saved in the Conference Templates list.
For more information, see “Starting an Ongoing Conference or
Reservation From a Template” on page 23.
Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane
To start a conference from the Conference pane:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
2
18-20
In the Conferences pane, click the New Conference ( ) button.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
The New Conference – General dialog box opens.
The system displays the conference’s default Name, Duration and the
default Profile, which contains the conference parameters and media
settings.
The RMX automatically allocates the conference ID, when the
conference starts.
In most cases, the default conference ID can be used and you can just
click OK to launch the conference. If required, you can enter a
conference ID before clicking OK to launch the conference.
If you are the meeting chairperson or organizer using the RMX Web
Client to start your own meeting, you need to communicate the
default conference ID (or the one you created) to the other conference
participants so they can dial in.
You can use the New Conference - General dialog box to modify the
conference parameters. If no defined participants are to be added to
the conference, or you do not want to add additional information,
click OK.
For more details, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Starting a Conference from the Conferences Pane” on page 3-15.
18-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Starting a Reservation
To start a conference from the Reservation Calendar:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
2
In the RMX Management pane, click the Reservation Calendar
button ( ).
The Reservation Calendar is displayed.
Name of selected MCU
3
Click the New Reservation (
) button.
For more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide,
"Starting a Reservation” on page 3-29.
18-22
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Starting an Ongoing Conference or Reservation From a Template
An ongoing conference or a Reservation can be started from any
Conference Template saved in the Conference Templates list of the selected
MCU.
To start an ongoing conference or a reservation from a Template:
1 In the MCUs pane, select the MCU to run the conference.
1
In the Conference Templates list, select the Template you want to start
as an ongoing conference.
2
Click the Start Conference from Template (
) button to start a
conference or Schedule Reservation from Template ( ) button to
schedule a reservation.
or
Right-click and select Start Conference from Template to start an
ongoing conference or Schedule Reservation from Template to
schedule a reservation.
Name of selected MCU
Name of selected MCU
The conference is started.
For detailed description of Conference Templates, see Getting Started
Guide, "Conference Templates” on page 9-1.
18-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Monitoring Conferences
When MCUs are connected to the RMX Manager, they are automatically
monitored, that is, any ongoing conference that is started on that MCU is
automatically added to the Conferences pane and its participants are
monitored.
To list participants from several conferences (running on the same or
different MCUs):
>> In the Conferences pane, using Windows multiple selection methods,
select the conferences whose participants you want to list.
The participants are displayed in the Participants list pane.
By default, the participants are grouped by conferences, and the
name of the MCU is displayed in the first column of the properties
table, enabling sorting according to MCU name.
Conferences selected for
monitoring
18-24
MCU Name.
can be used for
sorting by clicking
on the column
heading
Group by Conference
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Grouping the Participants by MCU
The Participants can be grouped by MCU and then by conferences.
To change the display mode for the Participants pane:
>> On the RMX menu, click View > Group by MCU.
The Participants pane display changes accordingly.
Group by MCU
Group by Conference
To toggle between the two display modes, click View > Group by MCU.
18-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Start Monitoring/Stop Monitoring
By default, all conferences running on connected RMXs are monitored.
You can stop the automatic monitoring of conferences on a specific MCU
in one of the following methods:
•
By clearing the check box in the Monitored column in the MCUs pane.
•
Right-clicking the MCU icon and selecting Stop Monitoring.
The check box is cleared in the Monitored column.
To start monitoring again, click the check box in the Monitored column in
the MCUs pane, or right-clicking the MCU icon and selecting Start
Monitoring.
18-26
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Modifying the MCU Properties
You can view the currently defined MCU settings, and modify them when
required, for example, change the MCU name, IP address or Secured
mode.
Use this procedure to add the Username and Password to the properties of
the MCU that was automatically added to the MCU list when installing
the RMX Manager. This enables automatic login when connecting the
MCU to the RMX Manager.
You can modify the MCU properties when the MCU is connected or
disconnected.
To view and/or modify the MCU Properties:
1 Use one of the following methods:
a
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the MCU Properties
button.
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click MCU Properties.
The MCU Properties dialog box opens.
2
Define/modify the required parameters. For details, see “MCU
Properties” on page 18.
3
Click OK.
Disconnecting an MCU
An MCU can be disconnected from the RMX Manager, without removing
it from the MCUs list.
To disconnect an MCU:
1 Use one of the following methods:
18-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
a
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Disconnect MCU
button.
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Disconnect MCU.
The MCU icon changes to disconnected and any ongoing conference
running on that MCU will not be monitored in this RMX Manager;
they are removed from the Conferences pane. This MCU can still be
monitored and controlled by other users.
Removing an MCU from the MCUs Pane
An MCU can be removed from the RMX Manager. This function should
be used if the MCU hardware was disconnected and removed from the
network.
To Remove an MCU from the list:
1 Use one of the following methods:
a
Select the MCU to disconnect and click the Delete
b
Right-click the MCU icon and then click Remove MCU.
A confirmation message is displayed.
2
Click OK to confirm or Cancel to abort the operation.
The MCU icon is removed from the MCUs pane.
18-28
button.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Changing the RMX Manager Language
If needed, you can change the language of the RMX Manager menus and
dialog boxes.
To select a language:
1 On the RMX Manager menu, click Setup > Customize Display
Settings > Multilingual Settings.
The Multilingual Settings dialog box opens, displaying the current
language selection.
2
Click the check box of the required languages.
3
Click OK.
4
Logout from the RMX Manager and login to implement the language
change.
18-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Import/Export RMX Manager Configuration
The RMX Manager configuration that includes the MCU list and the
multilingual selection can be save to any workstation/PC on the network
and imported to any Multi-RMX Manager installed in the network. This
enables the creation of the MCUs list once and distributing it to all RMX
Manager installations on the network.
In addition, when upgrading to a previous version, the MCU list is
deleted, and can be imported after upgrade.
The exported file is save in XML format and can be edited in any text
editor that can open XML files.
To Export the RMX Manager Configuration:
1 In the Multi-RMX Manager, click the Export RMX Manager
Configuration
button in the toolbar, or right-click anywhere in
the MCUs pane and then click Export RMX Manager Configuration.
The Export RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Click the Browse button to select the location of the save file, or enter
the required path in the Export Path box.
The selected file path is displayed in the Export Path box.
3
18-30
Click OK to export the RMX Manager configuration.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
To Import the RMX Manager Configuration:
1 In the Multi-RMX Manager, click the Import RMX Manager
Configuration
button in the toolbar, or right-click anywhere in
the MCUs pane and then click Import RMX Manager Configuration.
The Import RMX Manager Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Click the Browse button to select the saved file, or enter the required
path in the Export Path box.
The Open dialog box is displayed.
3
Select the XML file previously saved, and click the Open button.
The selected file path is displayed in the Import Path box.
4
Click OK to import the file.
18-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Installing RMX Manager for Secure Communication
Mode
The RMX Manager cannot be downloaded from a site, operating in Secure
Communication Mode, without a valid TLS certificate.
The following procedure describes how to obtain a TLS certificate and
download the RMX Manager from a site operating in Secure
Communication Mode.
FIPS is always enabled in Ultra Secure Mode, and when ClickOnce is used to
install RMX Manager, the workstation must have one of the following installed:
• .NET Framework 3.5 or a later version of the .NET Framework.
•
.NET Framework 2.0 plus Service Pack 1 or later.
To install the RMX Manager:
1 Set the RMX to Non Secure Communication Mode
a
In the RMX Management pane, click IP Network Services.
b
In the IP Network Services list pane, double click the Management
Network entry.
The Management Network Properties dialog box is displayed.
18-32
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
2
c
Clear the Secured RMX Communication check box.
d
Click OK.
Click the DNS tab.
MCU Host
Name
Local Domain
Name
3
Enter the Local Domain Name.
The Local Domain Name must be the same as the MCU Host Name. If the content
of these two fields are not identical an active alarm is created.
18-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
4
Create a Certificate Request.
For more information, see Guide, "Purchasing a Certificate” on
page F-1.
Certificates can also be created and issued using an Internal Certificate
Authority. For more information see “Using an Internal Certificate
Authority” on page 37.
18-34
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
5
Install the certificate.
For more information, see Appendix F, "Installing the Certificate” on
page F-3.
6
Set the RMX to Secure Communication Mode
a
In the RMX Management pane, click IP Network Services.
b
In the IP Network Services list pane, double click the Management
Network entry.
18-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Management Network Properties dialog box is displayed.
7
c
Select the Secured RMX Communication check box.
d
Click OK.
Reset the RMX:
a
In the RMX Management pane, click the Hardware Monitor
button.
The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed.
b
8
18-36
Click the Reset (
) button.
Install the RMX Manager. For more information, see the RMX
Administrator’s Guide, "Installing the RMX Manager” on page 18-1.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
Using an Internal Certificate Authority
If your TLS certificate was created and issued by an Internal Certificate
Authority, it may not be seen as having been issued by a trusted Certificate
Authority. The RMX Manager is not downloaded successfully and a
warning is received stating that the certificate was not issued by a trusted
Certificate Authority.
To add the Internal Certificate Authority as a trusted Certificate
Authority:
1 Navigate to the folder where the certificate (.cer) file is saved.
2
Open the certificate file.
3
Click the Detail tab.
4
Click the Copy to File button.
18-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Certificate Export Wizard is displayed.
5
Click the Next button.
The Export File Format dialog box is displayed.
18-38
6
Select Base-64 encoded X.509 (.CER).
7
Click the Next button.
Chapter 18-RMX Manager Application
The File to Export dialog box is displayed.
8
In the File Name field, enter the file name for the exported certificate.
9
Click the Next button.
10 The final Certificate Export Wizard dialog box is displayed.
11 Click the Finish button.
18-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The successful export message is displayed.
12 Click the OK button.
18-40
19
RMX Administration and
Utilities
System and Participant Alerts
The RMX alerts users to any faults or errors the MCU encountered
during operation. Two indication bars labeled System Alerts and
Participant Alerts signal users of system errors by blinking red in the
event of an alert.
System Alerts
indication bar
Participant Alerts
indication bar
19-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The System Alerts indication bar blinks red prompting the user to view the
active alarms. Once viewed, the System Alerts indication bar becomes
statically red until the errors have been resolved in the MCU.
The Participants Alerts indication bar blinks red indicating participant
connection difficulties in conferences. Once viewed, the Participant Alerts
indication bar becomes statically red until the errors have been resolved
in the MCU.
System Alerts
System Alerts are activated when the system encounters errors such as a
general or card error. The system errors are recorded by the RMX and can
be generated into a report that can be saved in *.txt format.
To view the System Alerts list:
1 Click the red blinking System Alerts indication bar.
The Active Alarms pane opens. This screen indicates what events have
not been resolved.
The following columns appear in the Active Alarms pane:
Table 19-1 Active Alarms Pane Columns
19-2
Field
Description
ID
An identifying number assigned to the system alert.
Time
Lists the date and time that the error occurred. This
column also includes the icon indicating the error
level (as listed in the level column).
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-1 Active Alarms Pane Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Category
Lists the type of error. The following categories may
be listed:
• File – indicates a problem in one of the files
stored on the MCU’s hard disk.
Category (cont.)
Level
•
•
•
•
Card – indicates problems with a card.
•
Startup – indicates errors that occurred during
system startup.
•
•
Unit – indicates problems with a unit.
Exception – indicates software errors.
General – indicates a general error.
Assert – indicates internal software errors that
are reported by the software program.
MPL - indicates an error related to a Shelf
Management component (MPL component)
other than an MPM, RTM or switch board.
Indicates the severity of the problem, or the type of
event. There are three fault level indicators:
– Major Error
– System Message
– Startup Event
Code
Indicates the problem, as indicated by the error
category.
Process Name
Lists the type of functional process involved.
Description
When applicable, displays a more detailed
explanation of the cause of the problem.
For more information about the Active Alarms, see Appendix B:
"Alarms and Faults” on page B-1.
2
Click one of the following two buttons to view its report in the System
Alerts pane:
19-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Active Alarms (default) – this is the default reports list
that is displayed when clicking the System Alerts
indication bar. It displays the current system errors and is
a quick indicator of the MCU status.
Faults Full List - A list of all system faults.
Faults List – a list of faults that occurred previously
(whether they were solved or not) for support or
debugging purposes.
3
To save the Active Alarms, Faults Full List or Faults report:
— to a text file, click the Save to Text
— to an XML file, click the Save to XML
button
button
The Save dialog window opens.
4
Select a destination folder and enter the file name.
5
Click Save.
Participant Alerts
Participant Alerts enables users, participants and conferences to be prompted
and currently connected. This includes all participants that are
disconnected, idle, on standby or waiting for dial-in. Alerts are intended for
users or administrators to quickly see all participants that need their
attention.
To view the Participants Alerts list:
1 Click the red blinking Participants Alerts indication bar.
The Participant Alerts pane opens.
The Participant Alerts pane displays similar properties to that of the Participant
List pane. For more information, see the RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started
Guide - "Participant Level Monitoring” on page 3-55.
19-4
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
2
To resolve participant issues that created the Participant Alerts, the
administrator can either Connect
, Disconnect
or Delete
a
participant.
System Configuration
The system’s overall behavior can be configured by modifying the default
values of the System Flags.
For flag changes to take effect, the MCU must be reset. For more information,
see Chapter 19, “Resetting the RMX” on page 19-127.
Modifying System Flags
To modify system flags:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
19-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, the following flags can be modified:
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
19-6
Flag
Description
ALLOW_NON_
ENCRYPT_PARTY_IN_
ENCRYPT_CONF
If YES, allows non-encrypted participants to
connect to encrypted conferences.
Default: No
ALLOW_NON_ENCRYPT
_RECORDING_LINK_IN_
ENCRYPT_CONF
When set to NO (default), the Recording Link
inherits the encryption settings of the
conference. If the conference is encrypted,
the recording link will be encrypted.
When set to YES, it disables the encryption
of the recording link, regardless of the
Encryption settings of the conference and
RSS recorder.
ALWAYS_FORWARD
_DTMF_IN_GW
_SESSION_TO_PSTN
When set to YES, all DTMF codes sent by
participants in the GW session are be
forwarded to all PSTN and ISDN participants
in the same GW session.
Default Value: NO
Possible values: YES / NO
APACHE_KEEP
_ALIVE
_TIMEOUT
If the connection is idle for longer than the
number of seconds specified by this flag, the
connection to the RMX is terminated.
Value: 0 - 999
Default: 120
Default (JITC_MODE=YES): 15
Note: A value of 0 results in an unlimited
keep-alive duration. This value should never
be used in Ultra Secure Mode.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
AUTHENTICATE_USER
If the external database application is to be
used to verify that operators are authorized to
log in to the MCU, set the value of this flag to
YES.
If the value of this flag is set to NO, the MCU
database is used to verify that operators are
authorized to log in to the MCU.
Note: If the flag is set to YES, the flow is first
to look in the internal DB and then go out to
the external one.
Flags for SE200 need to be added manually.
AVOID_VIDEO
_LOOP_BACK_IN
_CASCADE
When set to YES the current speaker’s
image is not sent back through the participant
link in cascaded conferences with conference
layouts other than 1x1.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
CASCADE_LINK_PLAY
_TONE_ON
_CONNECTION
When set to YES, the RMX plays a tone
when a cascading link between conferences
is established. The tone is played in both
conferences.
This tone is not played when the cascading
link disconnects from the conferences.
The tone used to notify that the cascading
link connection has been established cannot
be customized.
Default value: NO.
The tone volume is controlled by the same
flag as the IVR messages and tones:
IVR_MESSAGE_VOLUME.
19-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
CHANGE_AD_HOC_CO
NF_DURATION
The duration of an ad-hoc conference* can
be configured on a system level by setting
the flag to one of the following values (in
minutes): 60 (default), 90, 180 and 270.
* An ad-hoc conference is automatically created
when the participant dials into an Ad-hoc Entry
Queue and enters a conference ID that is not being
used by any other conferencing entity. It is based
on the Conference Profile assigned to the EQ.
19-8
CPU_TCP_KEEP_ALIVE
_TIME_SECONDS
This flag indicates when to send the first
KeepAlive indication to check the TCP
connection.
Default value: 7200 second (120 minutes)
Range: 600-18000 seconds
When there are NAT problems, this default
may be too long and the TCP connection is
lost. In such a case, the default value should
be changed to 3600 seconds (60 minutes) or
less.
CPU_TCP_KEEP_
INTERVAL_SECONDS
This flag indicates the interval in seconds
between the KeepAlive requests.
Default value: 75 second
Range: 10-720 seconds.
DISABLE_INACTIVE_
USER
Users can be automatically disabled by the
system when they do not log into the RMX
application for a predefined period.
Possible Values: 0 - 90 days.
Default: 0 (disables this option).
Default (JITC_MODE=YES): 30
ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_
SYSTEM
_ALARMS
Enables or disables the display of Active
Alarms before overwriting the older CDR/
Auditor/Log files, enabling the users to
backup the older files before they are
deleted.
Default: NO
Default (JITC_MODE=YES): YES
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
ENABLE_EXTERNAL_
DB_ACCESS
If YES, the RMX connects to an external
database application, to validate the
participant’s right to start a new conference or
access a conference.
Default: NO
ENABLE_AUTO_
EXTENSION
Allow conferences running on the RMX to be
automatically extended as long as there are
participants connected.
Default: YES
ENABLE_CASCADED_
LINK_TO_JOIN_
WITHOUT_PASSWORD
Enables a cascaded link to enter a
conference without a password.
Default: NO, for security reasons.
ENABLE_SIP_PEOPLE_
PLUS_CONTENT
If security is of higher priority than SIP
content sharing, SIP People+Content can be
disabled by setting this System Flag to NO.
(The content management control (BFCP)
utilizes an unsecured channel even when SIP
TLS is enabled.)
Default: YES
ENABLE_SIP_PPC_FOR
_ALL_USER_AGENT
When set to YES, SIP People+Content and
BFCP capabilities are declared in all
environments.
Default: NO
Range: YES / NO
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
DIRECTORY
The Web Server folder name. Change this
name if you have changed the default names
used by the CMA application.
Default: /PlcmWebServices
19-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
19-10
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_IP
Version 4.x and earlier - enter the IP
address of the CMA server.
Version 5.0 - enter the IP address of the
CMA server in the format:
http://[IP address of the CMA server].
For example, http://172.22.185.89.
This flag is also the trigger for replacing the
internal RMX address book with the CMA
global Address Book.
When empty, the integration of the CMA
address book with the RMX is disabled.
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
PASSWORD
The password associated with the user name
defined for the RMX in the CMA server.
EXTERNAL_
CONTENT_
USER
The login name defined for the RMX in the
CMA server defined in the format:
domain name/user name.
EXTERNAL_DB_
DIRECTORY
The URL of the external database
application. For the sample script application,
the URL is:
<virtual directory>/SubmitQuery.asp
EXTERNAL_DB_IP
The IP address of the external database
server, if one is used.
Default: 0.0.0.0
EXTERNAL_DB_LOGIN
The login name defined for the RMX in the
external database server.
Default: POLYCOM
EXTERNAL_DB_
PASSWORD
The password associated with the user name
defined for the RMX on the external database
server.
Default: POLYCOM
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
EXTERNAL_DB_PORT
The external database server port used by
the RMX to send and receive XML requests/
responses.
For secure communications set the value to
443.
Default: 5005.
FADE_IN_FADE_OUT
Enables or disables the transition format
between speakers in a Continuous Presence
conference.
When set to YES (default), the system fades
in the current speaker while fading out the
previous speaker.
When set to NO, the transition is sharp and
immediate.
Note: Fade In / Fade Out is not supported
with MPMx cards.
FORCE_STRONG_
PASSWORD_POLICY
When set to YES (default when
JITC_MODE=YES), implements the Strong
Password rules. For more details, see
“Implementing Strong Passwords” on
page 13-11.
Default: NO
G728_IP
Enables or disables declaration of G.728
Audio Algorithm capabilities in IP calls.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
G728_ISDN
Enables or disables declaration of G.728
Audio Algorithm capabilities in ISDN calls.
Range: YES / NO
Default: NO
H.263_ANNEX_T
Set to NO to send the Content stream without
Annex T and enable Aethra and Tandberg
endpoints, that do not support Annex T, to
process the Content.
Default: YES
19-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
HD_THRESHOLD_
BITRATE
Sets the minimum bit rate required by
endpoints to connect to an HD Conference.
Endpoints that cannot support this bit rate are
connected as audio only.
Range: 384kbps - 4Mbs (Default: 768)
HIDE
_CONFERENCE
_PASSWORD
If set to YES: (default in Ultra Secure Mode):
Conference and Chairperson Passwords
that are displayed in the RMX Web Client
or RMX Manager are hidden when
viewing the properties of the conference.
•
•
Automatic generation of passwords (both
conference and chairperson passwords)
is disabled, regardless of the settings of
the flags:
•
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT
_LEN
• NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT
_LEN.
For more information see "Automatic
Password Generation Flags” on page 19-47
Default: NO.
19-12
HIDE_SITE_NAMES
Set this flag to ON to cancel the display of
site names. When set to ON and the display
is disabled, the flag
SITE_NAMES_ALWAYS_ON =YES is
ignored.
Default: OFF
ISDN_COUNTRY_ CODE
The name of the country in which the MCU is
located.
Default: COUNTRY_NIL
ISDN_IDLE_CODE_E1
The Idle code (silent), transmitted on the
ISDN E1 B channels, when there is no
transmission on the channels.
Default: 0x54
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
ISDN_IDLE_CODE_T1
The Idle code (silent), transmitted on the
ISDN T1 B channels, when there is no
transmission on the channels.
Default: 0x13
ISDN_NUM_OF DIGITS
When using ISDN Overlap sending dialing
mode, this field holds the number of digits to
be received by the MCU.
Default: 9
JITC_MODE
When set to YES enables the Ultra Secure
Mode. When enabled, affects the ranges and
defaults of the System Flags that control:
• Network Security
•
•
•
•
User Management
Strong Passwords
Login and Session Management
Cyclic File Systems alarms
Default: NO
For a list of flags affected when the Ultra
Secure Mode is enabled, see "JITC_MODE
System Flag” on page 19-38.
LAN_REDUNDANCY
Enables Local Area Network port redundancy
on RMX 2000/4000 RTM LAN Card and RMX
1500 Lan ports on the RTM IP 1500.
Default: YES
Range: YES / NO
LAST_LOGIN
_ATTEMPTS
If YES, the system displays a record of the
last Login of the user.
Default: NO.
For more details, see "User Login Record” on
page 13-15.
19-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
LEGACY_EP_
CONTENT_DEFAULT_
LAYOUT
Defines the video layout to be displayed on
the screen of the legacy endpoints when
switching to Content mode.
Default value: CP_LAYOUT_1P7 (1+7).
For a detailed list of possible flag values for
the various video layouts, see Table 19-7,
“LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYO
UT Flag Values,” on page 19-45.
MAX_CP_RESOLUTION
The MAX_CP_RESOLUTION flag value is
applied to the system during First Time
Power-on and after a system upgrade. The
default value is HD1080.
All subsequent changes to the Maximum CP
Resolution of the system are made using the
Resolution Configuration dialog box.
Possible flag values:
• HD1080 – High Definition at 30 fps
(MPM+ / MPMx)
•
HD720 – High Definition at 60 fps
(MPM+ / MPMx)
•
•
•
•
HD – High Definition at 30 fps
SD30 – Standard Definition at 30 fps
SD15 – Standard Definition at 15 fps
CIF – CIF resolution
Default: HD1080
For more information see "Resolution
Configuration” on page 2-16.
MAX_NUMBER
_OF_MANAGEMENT
_SESSIONS_PER
_SYSTEM
19-14
Defines the maximum number of concurrent
management sessions (http and https
connections) per system.
Value: 4 - 80
Default: 80
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
MAX_NUMBER
_OF_MANAGEMENT
_SESSIONS_PER
_USER
Defines the maximum number of concurrent
management sessions (http and https
connections) per user.
Value: 4 - 80
Default: 10
MCU_DISPLAY_NAME
The name of the MCU that is displayed on
the endpoint’s screen when connecting to the
conference.
Default: POLYCOM RMX 1500/POLYCOM
RMX 2000/ POLYCOM RMX 4000 depending
on the product type.
MIN_H239_HD1080
_RATE
Used to set the threshold line rate for HD
Resolution Content: the line rate at which the
RMX will send Content at HD1080
Resolution. Setting the flag to 0 disables HD
Resolution Content.
Default: 768 kbps.
MIN_PASSWORD
_LENGTH
The length of passwords.
Possible value: between 0 and 20.
0 means this rule is not enforced, however
this rule cannot be disabled when the RMX is
in Ultra Secure Mode.
In Ultra Secure Mode, passwords must be at
least 15 characters in length (default) and
can be up to 20 characters in length.
For more details, see "Password Length” on
page 13-12.
MIN_PWD_CHANGE
_FREQUENCY_IN
_DAYS
Defines the frequency with which a user can
change a password.
Values: 0 -7.
0 (standard default) - users do not have to
change their passwords.
In Ultra Secure Mode the retention period is
between 1 (default) and 7.
For details, see "Defining Password Change
Frequency” on page 13-13.
19-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
19-16
Flag
Description
MS_ENVIRONMENT
If YES, sets the RMX SIP environment to
integrate with Microsoft OCS solution.
Default: NO
MULTIPLE_SERVICES
Determines whether the Multiple Services
option is be activated once the appropriate
license is installed.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: NO
Note: If the MULTIPLE_SERVICES System
Flag is set to YES and no RTM ISDN or RTM
LAN card is installed in the RMX 2000, an
Active Alarm is displayed.
NUMERIC_CHAIR
_PASS_MIN_LEN
Defines the minimum length required for the
Chairperson password.
Value: 0-16
0 - this rule is not enforced, however these
rules cannot be disabled when the RMX is in
Ultra Secure Mode.
In Ultra Secure Mode, Chairperson password
must be at least 9 characters in length
(default) and can be up to 16 characters in
length.
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_
LEN
Defines the number of digits in the
Conference ID that will be assigned by the
MCU. Enter 0 to disable the automatic
assignment of IDs by the MCU and let the
Operator manually assign them.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 4).
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_
MAX_LEN
The maximum number of digits that the user
can enter when manually assigning an ID to a
conference.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 8)
Note: Selecting 2 limits the number of
simultaneous ongoing conferences to 99.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CONF_ID_
MIN_LEN
The minimum number of digits that the user
must enter when manually assigning an ID to
a conference.
Range: 2-16 (Default: 4)
Note: Selecting 2 limits the number of
simultaneous ongoing conferences to 99.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS
_MIN_LEN
Defines the minimum length required for the
Conference password.
Value: 0-16
0 - this rule is not enforced, however these
rules cannot be disabled when the RMX is in
Ultra Secure Mode.
In Ultra Secure Mode, Conference password
must be at least 9 characters in length
(default) and can be up to 16 characters in
length.
PAL_NTSC_VIDEO
_OUTPUT
When set to AUTO (default), the video output
sent by the RMX is either PAL or NTSC
format, depending on the current speaker in
the layout. This ensures full synchronization
between the frame rate of the speaker and
the video encoder, ensuring smoother video.
In environments where the majority of
endpoints are configured to either NTSC or
PAL, the flag can be set accordingly to
change the video encoding of the RMX to be
compatible with the majority of endpoints in
the call.
Possible Values: AUTO, PAL, NTSC
PASSWORD
_EXPIRATION_DAYS
Determines the duration of password validity.
Value: between 0 and 90 days.
0 - user passwords do not expire.
In Ultra Secure Mode: default - 60 days, the
minimum duration is 7 days.
For details, see "Defining Password Aging”
on page 13-13.
19-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
19-18
Flag
Description
PASSWORD
_EXPIRATION
_WARNING_DAYS
Determines the display of a warning to the
user of the number of days until password
expiration.
Value: between 0 and 14 days.
0 - password expiry warnings are not
displayed.
In Ultra Secure Mode, the earliest display 14 days, the latest 7 days (default).
For details, see "Defining Password Aging”
on page 13-13.
PASSWORD
_HISTORY
_SIZE
The number of passwords that are recorded
to prevent users from re-using their previous
passwords.
Values are between 0 and 16.
0 (standard default) - the rule is not enforced,
however this rule cannot be disabled when
the RMX is in Ultra Secure Mode.
In Ultra Secure Mode, at least 10 passwords
(default) and up to 16 passwords must be
retained.
For more details, see "Implementing
Password Re-Use / History Rules” on
page 13-12.
RMX2000_RTM_LAN
This flag is used after installation on and
RTM-LAN card to activate the card. The flag
must be set to YES. (RMX2000 only.)
SEPARATE
_MANAGEMENT
_NETWORK
Enables/disables the Network Separation.
Can only be disabled in the Ultra Secure
Mode (JITC_MODE=YES).
Default: NO.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
SESSION
_TIMEOUT_IN
_MINUTES
If there is no input from the user or if the
connection is idle for longer than the number
of minutes specified by this flag, the
connection to the RMX is terminated.
Value: 0-99
0 - Session Timeout is disabled, however this
feature cannot be disabled when the RMX is
in Ultra Secure Mode.
Default: 0
Default (JITC_MODE=YES): 15
SITE_NAMES
_LOCATION
The default location of the Endpoint Name in
the video layout can be changed.
Default: DOWN CENTER = Bottom, centered
Range:
• UP_RIGHT = Top, right justified
•
•
•
•
•
UP_LEFT = Top, left justified
DOWN_RIGHT = Bottom, right justified
DOWN_LEFT = Bottom, left justified
UP_CENTER = Top, centered
DOWN_CENTER = Bottom, centered
TERMINATE_CONF_
AFTER_CHAIR_
DROPPED
If YES, sets conferences to automatically
terminate if the Chairperson disconnects from
the conference.
Default: YES
USER_LOCKOUT
If YES, a user is locked out of the system
after three consecutive Login failures with
same User Name. The user is disabled and
only the administrator can enable the user
within the system.
Default: NO
Default in Ultra Secure Mode: YES
For details, see "User Lockout” on
page 13-14.
19-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-2 System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS (Continued)
Flag
Description
USER
_LOCKOUT
_DURATION
_IN_MINUTES
Defines the duration of the Lockout of the
user.
Value: 0 - 480
0 means permanent User Lockout until the
administrator re-enables the user within the
system.
Default: 0
USER_LOCKOUT_
WINDOW_IN_MINUTES
Defines the time period during which the
three consecutive Login failures occur.
Value: 0 - 45000
0 means that three consecutive Login failures
in any time period will result in User Lockout.
Default: 60
Currently no flags are defined in the CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS
section.
3
To modify a flag value, double-click or select the flag and click the
Edit Flag button.
4
In the New Value field, enter the flag’s new value.
5
Click OK to close the Update Flag dialog box.
6
Repeat steps 2–4 to modify additional flags.
7
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box
For flag changes to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information, see the
RMX Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on page 19-127.
19-20
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Manually Adding and Deleting System Flags
To add a flag:
1
In the System Flags dialog box, click the New Flag (
) button.
The New Flag dialog box is displayed.
2
In the New Flag field enter the flag name.
3
In the Value field enter the flag value.
The following flags can be manually added to the
MCMS_PARAMETERS tab:
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
BONDING_CHANNEL
_DELAY
When connecting a bonding group, this is the
delay (number of 1/100 seconds) between
dialing attempts to connect sequential
channels.
The channel per second connection
performance of ISDN switches can vary and
can cause timing issues that result in bonding
channel disconnection.
Default: 6
(ISDN)
BONDING_GROUP
_DELAY
(ISDN)
When connecting several bonding groups, this
is the delay (number of 1/100 seconds)
preceding the first dialing attempt to connect
the next bonding group.
Default: 500
19-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
BONDING_NUM_CHAN
NELS _IN_GROUP
The number of channels in the bonding group
to be connected before dialing the next
sequential channel.
Default: 50
(ISDN)
BONDING_DIALING
_METHOD
(ISDN)
When set to:
• SEQUENTIAL
The MCU initiates channel connections
sequentially until it reaches the number of
channels defined by the
BONDING_NUM_CHANNELS_IN
_GROUP flag.
When a channel is connected, dialing
begins for the next channel in the group.
•
BY_TIMERS
The MCU initiates channel connections
sequentially using the values of the
BONDING_CHANNEL _DELAY and
BONDING_GROUP_DELAY flags.
The first group of channels is dialed, using
the BONDING_CHANNEL_DELAY
between dialing attempts for each channel
in the group.
The RMX then implements the
BONDING_GROUP_DELAY, before
dialing the first channel of the next group.
Default: SEQUENTIAL
BURN_BIOS
19-22
Although, not recommended, setting this flag’s
value to NO will prevent BIOS upgrade.
Default: YES.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
CONF_GATHERING
_DURATION_SECONDS
The value of this System Flag sets the
duration of the Gathering Phase in seconds.
The Gathering Phase duration of the
conference is measured from the scheduled
start time of the conference.
Range: 0 - 3600
Default: 180
For more information see "Video Preview” on
page 2-45.
CP_REGARD_TO
_INCOMING_SETUP
_RATE
For use in the Avaya Environment.
If set to YES, the RMX calculates the line rate
for incoming calls in CP conferences,
according to the line rate which is declared by
the endpoint in the H.225 setup message.
If set to NO, the rate is calculated according to
the conference line rate regardless of the rate
in the H.225 setup message.
Default: YES.
DELAY_BETWEEN
_H320_DIAL_OUT
_PARTY
The delay in milliseconds that the MCU waits
when connecting dial out ISDN and PSTN
participants.
Default: 1000
(ISDN)
DISABLE_GW_
OVERLAY_INDICATION
When set to NO (default), displays progress
indication during the connection phase of a
gateway call.
Set the value to YES to hide the connection
indications displayed on the participant’s
screen during the connection phase of a
gateway call.
19-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
19-24
Flag and Value
Description
DISABLE_WIDE_RES_
TO_SIP_DIAL_OUT
When set to NO (default), the RMX sends
wide screen resolution to dial-out SIP
endpoints. Endpoint types that do not support
wide screen resolutions are automatically
identified by the RMX according to their
product type and version and will not receive
the wide resolution even if the flag is set to
YES.
When manually added and set to YES, the
RMX does not send wide screen.
Default: NO.
ENABLE_AGC
Set this flag to YES to enable the AGC option.
(Default setting is NO.) When disabled,
selecting the AGC option in the Participant
Properties has not effect on the participant
audio. For more information see "Adding a
Participant to the Address Book” on page 6-3.
The Auto Gain Control mechanism regulates
noise and audio volume by keeping the
received audio signals of all participants
balanced.
Note:
Enabling AGC may result in amplification of
background noise.
ENABLE_CLOSED_
CAPTION
Enables or disables the Closed Captions
option that allow endpoints to endpoints to
provide real-time text transcriptions or
language translations of the video conference.
When set to NO (default), Closed Captions
are disabled.
When set to YES, Closed Captions are
enabled.
ENABLE_CISCO_GK
When set to YES, it enables the use of an
identical prefix for different RMXs when
registering with a Cisco MCM Gatekeeper.
Default: NO.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
ENABLE_H239
When set to YES, Content is sent via a
separate Content channel. Endpoints that do
not support H.239 Content sharing will not be
able to receive Content
When set to NO, the Content channel is
closed. In such a case, H.239 Content is sent
via the video channel (“people” video)
enabling endpoints that do not support H.239
Content sharing to receive the Content in their
video channel.
Default: YES.
ENABLE_H239_ANNEX
_T=YES
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC
is on level 1, enables sending Content using
Annex T.
ENABLE_IP_REDIAL
In all versions up to version 7.0, when set to
YES (default), it enables re-dialing if H.323 or
SIP dial out calls fail.
In version 7.0 and later, this flag functionality
is replaced by the Auto Redialing check box
in the Profile Properties - Advanced dialog box
ENABLE_EPC
When set to YES (default), enables Polycom
proprietary People+Content.
When set to NO, disables this feature for all
conferences and participants.
ENABLE_TEXTUAL
_CONFERENCE
_STATUS=YES
Set the value of this flag to NO to disable Text
Indication. This setting is recommended for
MCUs running Telepresence conferences.
Default: YES.
19-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
FORCE_1X1_LAYOUT
_ON_CASCADED_LINK
_CONNECTION
When set to YES, the cascaded link is
automatically set to Full Screen (1x1) in CP
conferences forcing the speaker in one
cascaded conference to display in full window
in the video layout of the other conference.
Set this flag to NO when connecting to an
MGC using a cascaded link, if the MGC is
functioning as a Gateway and participant
layouts on the other network are not to be
forced to 1X1.
Default: YES
FORCE_CIF_PORT_
ALLOCATION
Sets the MCU to allocate one CIF video
resource to an endpoint, regardless of the
resolution determined by the Conference
Profile parameters. You can specify the
endpoint types for which resource allocation
can be forced to CIF resource, enabling other
types of endpoints to use higher resolutions in
the same conference.
Enter the product type to which the CIF
resource should be allocated. Possible values
are:
• CMA Desktop - for CMA desktop client
•
FORCE_RESOLUTION
19-26
VSX nnnn - where nnnn represents the
model number for example, VSX 8000.
Use this flag to specify IP (H.323 and SIP)
endpoint types that cannot receive wide
screen resolution and that were not
automatically identified as such by the RMX.
Possible values are endpoint types, each type
followed by a semicolon. For example, when
disabling Wide screen resolution in an HDX
endpoint enter the following string: HDX;
Note: Use this flag when the flag
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_IP is set to YES.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
FORCE_STATIC_MB_
ENCODING
This flag supports Tandberg MXP mode of
sending and receiving video by IP endpoint in
HD 720p resolution and Video Quality set to
Motion. This mode is not supported for ISDN
endpoints.
Default value: Tandberg MXP.
To disable this flag, enter NONE.
H323_FREE_VIDEO
_RESOURCES
For use in the Avaya Environment.
In the Avaya Environment there are features
that involve converting undefined dial-in
participants’ connections from video to audio
(or vice versa). To ensure that the participants’
video resources remain available for them,
and are not released for use by Audio Only
calls, set this flag to NO.
If set to YES, the RMX will release video
resources for Audio Only calls.
Default: YES.
H245_TUNNELING
For use in the Avaya Environment.
This flag is defined in the System Flags –
CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS section.
In the Avaya Environment, set the flag to YES
to ensure that H.245 is tunneled through
H.225. Both H.245 and H.225 will use the
same signaling port.
Default: NO.
H239_FORCE_
CAPABILITIES
When the flag is set to NO, the RMX only
verifies that the endpoint supports the Content
protocols: Up to H.264 or H.263.
When set to YES, the RMX checks frame rate,
resolution and all other parameters of the
Content mode as declared by an endpoint
before receiving or transmitting content.
Default: NO.
19-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
19-28
Flag and Value
Description
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_SD30
_SHARPNESS
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for SD30 resolution using Sharpness
Video Quality.
Default: 256kbps
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD720P30
_SHARPNESS
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for HD720P30 resolution using
Sharpness Video Quality.
Default: 1024kbps
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD1080P30
_SHARPNESS
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for HD1080P30 resolution using
Sharpness Video Quality.
Default: 1536kbps
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_CIF60
_MOTION
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for SD30 resolution using Motion Video
Quality.
Default: 256kbps
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_SD60
_MOTION
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for SD30 resolution using Motion Video
Quality.
Default: 1024kpps
H264_BASE_PROFILE_
MIN_RATE_HD720P60
_MOTION
This flags sets the minimum bitrate threshold
for endpoints that don’t support H.264 High
Profile for SD30 resolution using Motion Video
Quality.
Default: 1536kbps
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
INTERNAL_
SCHEDULER
When set to NO (default) this flag prevents
potential scheduling conflicts from occurring
as a result of system calls from external
scheduling applications such as Polycom
ReadiManager®, CMA™ 4000/5000 and
others via the API.
Set to YES to schedule conference
reservations using an external scheduling
application.
IP_ENVIRONMENT
_LINK=NO
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC
is on level 1, setting this flag to YES will adjust
the line rate of HD Video Switching
conferences run on the RMX 1500/2000/4000
from 1920Kbps to 18432, 100bits/sec to
match the actual rate of the IP Only HD Video
Switching conference running on the MGC.
Note: If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
is set to NO, the IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK
flag must be set to YES.
19-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
ISDN_RESOURCE
_POLICY=
LOAD_BALANCE
The flag value determines how the ISDN Bchannels within configured spans are
allocated.
The robustness of the ISDN network can be
improved by allocating channels evenly (load
balancing) among the spans, minimizing the
effect of channel loss resulting from the
malfunction of a single span.
Set the flag value to:
• LOAD_BALANCE to allocate channels
evenly among all configured spans.
(ISDN)
•
FILL_FROM_FIRST_CONFIGURED_SPAN
To allocate all channels on the first
configured span before allocating
channels on other spans.
•
FILL_FROM_LAST_CONFIGURED_SPAN
To allocate all channels on the last
configured span before allocating
channels on other spans.
Default: LOAD_BALANCE
19-30
ITP_CERTIFICATION
When set to NO (default), this flag disables
the telepresence features in the Conference
Profile.
Set the flag to YES to enable the telepresence
features in the Conference Profile (provided
that the appropriate License is installed).
IVR_MUSIC_VOLUME
The volume of the IVR music played when a
single participant is connected to the
conference varies according to the value of
this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 5).
0 – disables playing the music
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
IVR_MESSAGE
_VOLUME
The volume of IVR messages varies
according to the value of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the IVR messages
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: It is not recommended to disable IVR
messages by setting the flag value to 0.
IVR_ROLL_CALL
_VOLUME
The volume of the Roll Call varies according
to the value of this flag.
Possible value range: 0-10 (Default: 6).
0 – disables playing the Roll Call
1 – lowest volume
10 – highest volume
Note: It is not recommended to disable the
Roll Call by setting the flag value to 0.
MIX_LINK
_ENVIRONMENT=YES
In H.239-enabled MIH Cascading, when MGC
is on level 1, setting this flag to YES will adjust
the line rate of HD Video Switching
conferences run on the RMX 1500/2000/4000
from 1920Kbps to 17897, 100bits/sec to
match the actual rate of the HD Video
Switching conference running on the MGC.
Note: If the flag MIX_LINK_ENVIRONMENT
is set to YES, the IP_ENVIRONMENT_LINK
flag must be set to NO.
NUMBER_OF_REDIAL
Enter the number re dialing attempts required.
Dialing may continue until the conference is
terminated.
Default: 3
19-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
19-32
Flag and Value
Description
PARTY_GATHERING
_DURATION_SECONDS
The value of this System Flag sets the
duration, in seconds, of the display of the
Gathering slide for participants that connect to
the conference after the conference start time.
Range: 0 - 3600
Default: 15
For more information see "Video Preview” on
page 2-45.
PCM_FECC
Determines whether the DTMF Code, ##, the
Far/Arrow Keys (FECC) or both will activate
the PCM interface. This flag can be also be
used in combination with DTMF code
definitions to disable PCM.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: YES.
PCM_LANGUAGE
Determines the language of the PCM
interface.
Possible Values are: ENGLISH,
CHINESE_SIMPLIFIED,
CHINESE_TRADITIONAL, JAPANESE,
GERMAN, FRENCH, SPANISH, KOREAN,
PORTUGUESE, ITALIAN, RUSSIAN,
NORWEGIAN
Default: Current RMX Web Client language.
REDIAL_INTERVAL_IN_
SECONDS
Enter the number of seconds that the RMX
should wait before successive re dialing
attempts.
Range: 0-30 (Default: 10)
RMX_MANAGEMENT
_SECURITY
_PROTOCOL
Enter the protocol to be used for secure
communications.
Default: TLSV1_SSLV3 (both).
Default for U.S. Federal licenses: TLSV1.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX
_EXTENSION
Used to automatically add a suffix to a SIP
address (To Address) instead of adding it
manually in the RMX Web Client (SIP
address) when the SIP call is direct-dial and
not through a Proxy.
Example:
Participant Name = john.smith
Company Domain = maincorp.com
SIP_AUTO_SUFFIX_EXTENSION flag value
= @maincorp.com
Entering john.smith will generate a SIP URI =
john.smith@maincorp.com
SIP_ENABLE_FECC
=NO
By default, FECC support for SIP endpoints is
enabled at the MCU level. You can disable it
by manually adding this flag and setting it to
NO.
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_
INTERVAL_ENV
Default setting is 0 to prevent the RMX from
automatically sending an Intra request to all
SIP endpoints.
Enter n (where n is any number of seconds
other than 0) to let the RMX automatically
send an Intra request to all SIP endpoints
every n seconds.
It is recommended to set the flag to 0 and
modify the frequency in which the request is
sent at the endpoint level (as defined in the
next flag).
SIP_FAST_UPDATE_
INTERVAL_EP
Default setting is 6 to let the RMX
automatically send an Intra request to
Microsoft OC endpoints only, every 6
seconds.
Enter any other number of seconds to change
the frequency in which the RMX send the Intra
request to Microsoft OC endpoints only.
Enter 0 to disable this behavior at the endpoint
level (not recommended).
19-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
19-34
Flag and Value
Description
SIP_FREE_VIDEO
_RESOURCES
For use in Avaya and Microsoft Environments.
When set to NO (required for Avaya and
Microsoft environments), video resources that
were allocated to participants remain allocated
to the participants as long as they are
connected to the conference even if the call
was changed to audio only. The system
allocates the resources according to the
participant’s endpoint capabilities, with a
minimum of 1 CIF video resource.
Enter YES to enable the system to free the
video resources for allocation to other
conference participants. The call becomes an
audio only call and video resources are not
guaranteed to participants if they want to add
video again.
Default value in Microsoft environment: NO.
SEND_SIP_BUSY_
UPON_RESOURCE_TH
RESHOLD
When set to YES, it enables the RMX to send
a busy notification to a SIP audio endpoint or
a SIP device when dialing in to the RMX
whose audio resource usage exceeded the
Port Usage threshold.
When set to NO, the system does limit the SIP
audio endpoint connections to a certain
capacity and will not send a busy notification
when the resource capacity threshold is
exceeded.
Default: NO
SITE_NAME
_TRANSPARENCY
=YES
Set the value of this flag to NO to disable
Endpoint Name Transparency.
Default: YES.
SITE_NAMES_ALWAYS
_ON =NO
Set the value of this flag to YES to enable the
permanent display of Endpoint Names.
Default: NO.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_
ISDN
When set to YES, the RMX sends wide
screen resolution to ISDN endpoints.
When set to NO (default), the RMX does not
send wide screen resolution to ISDN
endpoints.
Default: NO.
SEND_WIDE_RES_TO_
IP
When set to YES (default), the RMX sends
wide screen resolution to IP endpoints.
Endpoint types that do not support wide
screen resolutions are automatically identified
by the RMX according to their product type
and version and will not receive the wide
resolution even when the flag is set to YES.
When manually added and set to NO, the
RMX does not send wide screen resolution to
all IP endpoints.
Default: YES.
19-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
SET_AUDIO_CLARITY
Audio Clarity improves received audio from
participants connected via low audio
bandwidth connections, by stretching the
fidelity of the narrowband telephone
connection to improve call clarity. The
enhancement is applied to the following low
bandwidth (4kHz) audio algorithms:
• G.729a
•
•
G.711
Guidelines
Note:
This flag sets the initial value for Audio Clarity
during First-time Power-up. Thereafter the
feature is controlled via the New Profile Audio Settings dialog box.
Audio Clarity is supported with MPM+ cards
only
Possible Values: ON / OFF
Default: OFF
For more information see "Defining Profiles”
on page 1-8.
SET_AUDIO_PLC
Packet Loss Concealment (PLC) for Siren
audio algorithms improves received audio
when packet loss occurs in the network.
The following audio algorithms are supported:
• Siren 7 (mono)
•
•
Siren 14 (mono/stereo)
Siren 22 (mono/stereo)
Note: PLC for Audio is supported with MPM+ /
MPMx cards only. The speaker’s endpoint
must use a Siren algorithm for audio
compression.
Possible Values: ON / OFF
Default: ON
19-36
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Manually Added System Flags – MCMS_PARAMETERS
Flag and Value
Description
SET_AUTO
_BRIGHTNESS
Auto Brightness detects and automatically
adjusts the brightness of video windows that
are dimmer than other video windows in the
conference layout. Auto Brightness only
increases brightness and does not darken
video windows.
Note:
This flag sets the initial value for Auto
Brightness during First-time Power-up.
Thereafter the feature is controlled via the
New Profile - Video Quality dialog box.
Auto Brightness is supported with MPM+ /
MPMx cards only.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: NO
For more information see "Defining Profiles”
on page 1-8.
USE_GK_PREFIX_FOR
_PSTN_CALLS
When set to YES the Gatekeeper Prefix is
included in the DTMF input string enabling
PSTN participants to use the same input string
when connecting to an RMX whether the RMX
is a standalone MCU or part of a DMA solution
deployment.
Possible Values: YES / NO
Default: NO
For more information see "PSTN Dial-in Using
GK Prefix” on page 17-10.
4
Click OK to close the New Flag dialog box.
The new flag is added to the flags list.
5
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box.
For flag changes to take effect, reset the MCU. For more information, see the
RMX Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on page 19-127.
19-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To delete a flag:
1 In the System Flags dialog box, select the flag to delete and click the
Delete Flag button.
2
In the confirmation message box, click Yes to confirm.
3
Click OK to close the System Flags dialog box.
JITC_MODE System Flag
The Ultra Secure Mode is enabled or disabled depending on the value of
the JITC_MODE System Flag.
In the Ultra Secure Mode (JITC_MODE =YES) the enhanced security
features of the version are rigorously enforced. The JITC_MODE System
Flag affects the ranges and defaults of the System Flags that control:
•
Network Security
•
User Management
•
Strong Passwords
•
Login and Session Management
•
Cyclic File Systems alarms
After modifying the value of the JITC_MODE System Flag to YES, all
RMX users are forced to change their Login passwords.
Table 19-4 summarizes the interaction between the JITC_MODE System
Flag and the following System Flags:
Table 19-4 JITC_MODE Flag Value – Effect on System Flags
JITC_MODE =
Flag
YES
NO
Range
Default
Range
Default
YES/
NO
YES
NO
NO
Network Security
SEPARATE
_MANAGEMENT
_NETWORK
19-38
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-4 JITC_MODE Flag Value – Effect on System Flags (Continued)
JITC_MODE =
Flag
YES
NO
Range
Default
Range
Default
1-90
30
0-90
0
APACHE_KEEP
_ALIVE
_TIMEOUT
1-999
15
1-999
120
SESSION
_TIMEOUT_IN
_MINUTES
1-999
15
0-999
0
USER_LOCKOUT
YES/
NO
YES
YES/
NO
NO
USER_LOCKOUT
_WINDOW_IN_
MINUTES
0-45000
60
0-45000
60
LAST_LOGIN
_ATTEMPTS
YES/
NO
YES
YES/
NO
NO
USER
_LOCKOUT
_DURATION
_IN_MINUTES
0-480
0
0-480
0
MAX_NUMBER
_OF
_MANAGEMENT
_SESSIONS_PER
_USER
4-80
10
4-80
10
User Management
DISABLE
_INACTIVE
_USER
Session Management
19-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-4 JITC_MODE Flag Value – Effect on System Flags (Continued)
JITC_MODE =
Flag
MAX_NUMBER
_OF
_MANAGEMENT
_SESSIONS_PER
_SYSTEM
YES
NO
Range
Default
Range
Default
4-80
80
4-80
80
Password Management
FORCE
_STRONG
_PASSWORD
_POLICY
YES
YES
YES/NO
NO
MIN_PASSWORD
_LENGTH
15-20
15
0-20
0
NUMERIC_CONF
_PASS_MIN_LEN
9-16
9
0-16
0
NUMERIC_CHAIR
_PASS_MIN_LEN
9-16
9
0-16
0
YES/NO
NO
YES/NO
NO
PASSWORD
_HISTORY
_SIZE
10-16
10
0-16
0
PASSWORD
_EXPIRATION
_DAYS
7-90
60
0-90
0
PASSWORD
_EXPIRATION
_WARNING
_DAYS
7-14
7
0-14
0
HIDE_
CONFERENCE_
PASSWORD
19-40
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-4 JITC_MODE Flag Value – Effect on System Flags (Continued)
JITC_MODE =
Flag
MIN_PWD
_CHANGE
_FREQUENCY
_IN_DAYS
HIDE
_CONFERENCE
_PASSWORD
YES
NO
Range
Default
Range
Default
1-7
1
0-7
0
YES/NO
NO
YES/NO
NO
YES/NO
YES
YES/NO
NO
Cyclic File Systems
ENABLE_CYCLIC
_FILE_SYSTEM
_ALARMS
Auto Layout Configuration
The Auto Layout option lets the RMX automatically select the conference
video layout based on the number of participants currently connected to
the conference. You can modify the default selection of the conference
video layout to customize it to your conferencing preferences.
Customizing the Default Auto Layout
The default Auto Layout is controlled by 13 flags:
PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0, ... , PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_12
Each of the 11 Auto Layout flags can be left at its default value, or set to any
of the Possible Values listed in Table 19-5.
The flag that controls the Auto Layout you wish to modify must be added
to the System Configuration file. For more information see "Modifying
System Flags” on page 19-5.
19-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-5 Flags: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0,...,10
Flag Name: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n (n = Number of
Participants)
n
Possible Values
0
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
1
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2
2
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR
3
CP_LAYOUT_1x2VER
CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER
4
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_2X1
5
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR
6
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP
7
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER
8
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
9
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR
10
11
12
19-42
Default Value
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-5 Flags: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_0,...,10 (Continued)
Flag Name: PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_n (n = Number of
Participants)
n
Default Value
Possible Values
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT
CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_3X3
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_4X4
19-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Example:
Table 19-6 illustrates the effect of modifying the
PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_5 flag in conferences with fewer or more
participants than the number of windows selected in the default layout.
Table 19-6 Example: Modifying PREDEFINED_AUTO_LAYOUT_5 Flag
Flag
Set to
Possible
Value
Number of
Participants
3
CP_LAYOUT
_1x2VER
7
PREDEFINED
_AUTO_LAYOUT_5
Participant’s View
Voice activated
switching displays the
current speaker in the
left window of the video
layout and only the two
last speakers are
displayed.
Default =
3
CP_LAYOUT
_1P5
7
19-44
Voice activated
switching displays the
current speaker in the
large (top left) window of
the video layout.
Voice activated
switching displays the
current speaker in the
top left window of the
video layout.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Table 19-7 lists the value for each video layout that can be defined for the
LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag. It allows the
selection of video layout that will be displayed on the screen of the legacy
endpoint when switching to Content mode.
Table 19-7 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1X1
CP_LAYOUT_1X2
CP_LAYOUT_1X2HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1X2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X1
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P2HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P2VER
CP_LAYOUT_2X2
CP_LAYOUT_1P3HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P3VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR_UP
19-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-7 LEGACY_EP_CONTENT_DEFAULT_LAYOUT Flag Values
Layout
Flag Value
CP_LAYOUT_1P4HOR
CP_LAYOUT_1P4VER
CP_LAYOUT_1P5
CP_LAYOUT_1P7
CP_LAYOUT_1P8UP
CP_LAYOUT_1P8CENT
CP_LAYOUT_1P8HOR_UP
CP_LAYOUT_3X3
CP_LAYOUT_2P8
CP_LAYOUT_1P12
CP_LAYOUT_4X4
CS_ENABLE_EPC Flag
Endpoints that support People+Content may require a different signaling
(for example, FX endpoints). For these endpoints, manually add the flag
CS_ENABLE_EPC with the value YES (default value is NO) to the
CS_MODULE_PARAMETERS tab.
19-46
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Automatic Password Generation Flags
The RMX can be configured to automatically generate conference and
chairperson passwords when the Conference Password and Chairperson
Password fields are left blank.
Guidelines
•
If the flag HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD is set to YES, the
automatic generation of passwords (both conference and chairperson
passwords) is disabled, regardless of the settings of the flags
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN and
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN.
•
The automatic generation of conference passwords is enabled/
disabled by the flag NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN.
•
The automatic generation of chairperson passwords is enabled/
disabled by the flag NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT _LEN.
•
The automatically generated passwords will be numeric and random.
•
The passwords are automatically assigned to ongoing conferences,
Meeting Rooms and Reservations at the end of the creation process
(once they are added to the RMX).
•
Automatically assigned passwords can be manually changed
through the Conference/Meeting Room/Reservation Properties dialog
boxes.
•
Deleting an automatically created password will not cause the system
to generate a new password and the new password must be added
manually or the field can be left blank.
•
If a password was assigned to the conference via Microsoft Outlook
using the PCO add-in, the system does not change these passwords
and additional passwords will not be generated (for example, if only
the conference password was assigned a chairperson password will
not be assigned).
•
If the flag values (i.e. the password lengths) are changed, passwords
that were already assigned to conferences, Meeting Rooms and
Reservations will not change and they can be activated using the
19-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
existing passwords. Only new conferencing entities will be affected
by the change.
Do not enable this option in an environment that includes a Polycom DMA
system.
Enabling the Automatic Generation of Passwords
To enable the automatic generation of passwords, the following flags have
to be defined:
Table 19-8 Automatic Password Generation Flags
19-48
Flag
Description
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD
NO (default) - Conference and
chairperson passwords are displayed
when viewing the Conference/
Meeting Room/ Reservation
properties. It also enables the
automatic generation of passwords in
general.
Yes - Conference and Chairperson
Passwords are hidden (they are
replaced by asterisks). It also
disables the automatic generation of
passwords.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MIN_LEN
Enter the minimum number of
characters required for conference
passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16.
0 (default in non-secured mode)
means no minimum length. However
this setting cannot be applied when
the RMX is in Enhanced Security
Mode.
9 (default in Enhanced Security
Mode) Conference password must
be at least 9 characters in length.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-8 Automatic Password Generation Flags (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MIN_LEN
Enter the minimum number of
characters required for chairperson
passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16.
0 (default in non-secured mode)
means no minimum length. However
this setting cannot be applied when
the RMX is in Enhanced Security
Mode.
9 (default in Enhanced Security
Mode), Chairperson password must
be at least 9 characters in length.
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_MAX_LEN
Enter the maximum number of
characters permitted for conference
passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16 (non-secured
mode) or 9 – 16 (Enhanced Security
Mode).
16 (default) - Conference password
maximum length is 16 characters.
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_MAX_LEN
Enter the maximum number of
characters permitted for chairperson
passwords.
Possible values: 0 – 16 (non-secured
mode) or 9 – 16 (Enhanced Security
Mode).
16 (default) - chairperson password
maximum length is 16 characters.
19-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-8 Automatic Password Generation Flags (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_
LEN
This flag enables or disables the
automatic generation of conference
passwords. The length of the
automatically generated passwords
is determined by the flag value.
Possible values:
• 0 – 16, 6 default (non-secured
mode)
•
0 and 9 – 16, 9 default
(Enhanced Security Mode).
Enter 0 to disable the automatic
generation of passwords.
Any value other than 0 enables the
automatic generation of conference
passwords provided the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD
is set to NO.
If the default is used, in non-secured
mode the system will automatically
generate conference passwords that
contain 6 characters.
19-50
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-8 Automatic Password Generation Flags (Continued)
Flag
Description
NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_ DEFAULT
_LEN
This flag enables or disables the
automatic generation of chairperson
passwords. The length of the
automatically generated passwords
is determined by the flag value.
Possible values:
• 0 – 16, 6 default (non-secured
mode)
•
0 and 9 – 16, 9 default
(Enhanced Security Mode).
Enter 0 to disable the automatic
generation of passwords.
Any value other than 0 enables the
automatic generation of chairperson
passwords provided the flag
HIDE_CONFERENCE_PASSWORD
is set to NO.
If the default is used, in non-secured
mode the system will automatically
generate chairperson passwords that
contain 6 characters.
If the default password length defined by the
NUMERIC_CONF_PASS_DEFAULT_LEN or NUMERIC_CHAIR_PASS_
DEFAULT LEN does not fall within the range defined by the minimum and
maximum length an appropriate fault is added to the Faults list.
19-51
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
RMX Time
To ensure accurate conference scheduling, the RMX has an internal clock
that can function in standalone mode, or in synchronization with up to
three Network Time Protocol (NTP) servers.
Guidelines
•
NTP Version 4 is the only supported protocol.
•
If applicable, daylight saving adjustments must be implemented by
the administrator whether the RMX is in standalone mode or
synchronized with NTP Servers.
Altering the clock
The RMX’s date and time can be set manually or enabled to synchronize
with external NTP servers.
To Alter the RMX Time:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > RMX Time to open the RMX Time
dialog box.
19-52
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
2
View or modify the following fields:
Table 19-9 RMX Time – Fields Properties
Field
Description
GMT Date
The date at Greenwich, UK.
Local Time
The RMX’s local time settings, are calculated from
the GMT Time and the GMT Offset.
GMT Time
The RMX’s current GMT Time settings.
Select the Up or Down cursor to alter the GMT Time
on the RMX.
GMT Offset
The time zone difference between Greenwich and
the RMX’s physical location.
Select the Up or Down cursor to alter the GMT
Offset time on the RMX.
Get Client Time
Click this button to automatically update the RMX's
GMT Date, Time and Offset to match that of the
workstation.
Use NTP Server
Select this check box to synchronize the time with
up to three NTP servers. When selected, the
manual GMT Date and GMT Time setting options
are disabled. The GMT Offset fields are still active.
To implement this mode an external connection to
an NTP server must be enabled.
Enter the IP addresses of the required NTP servers
in order of precedence.
The Status field indicates whether registration with
the NTP Server failed or succeeded.
Adjust
Reservations Time
(Button)
Use this button to adjust the start time of all the
reservations in one operation. For more information
see "Adjusting the Start Times of all Reservations”
on page 7-20
After resetting the MCU a delay may occur when synchronizing with the external
NTP server.
19-53
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Resource Management
Resource Capacity
The RMX 1500 support one card type: MPMx.
Three assembly variations, MPMx-S, MPMx-D and MPMx-Q, differing in
resource capacity, are available for the RMX1500.
The RMX 2000 can support three card types: MPM, MPM+ and MPMx.
The RMX 4000 supports only: MPM+ and MPMx cards.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Table 19-10 summarizes the resource capacities of fully configured RMXs
with the various card types per resolution in CP Conferencing mode.
The numbers in Table 19-10 are for MPM card assemblies with maximum
resource capacities. For detailed resource capacity information see the relevant
RMX Hardware Guide.
Table 19-10 Resource Capacities for Full Capacity RMX per Resolution in CP
Maximum Possible Resources
Resource
Type
19-54
RMX 1500
RMX 2000
RMX 4000
MPMx
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
MPM+
MPMx
Voice (IP)
360
400
800
720
1600
1440
Voice (PSTN)
120
400
400
400
400
400
CIF H.263
60
80
160
120
320
240
CIF H.264
90
80
160
180
320
360
CIF 60 H.264
60
–
60
120
120
240
SD30 H.264
60
20
60
120
120
240
4CIF H.263
30
20
60
60
120
120
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-10 Resource Capacities for Full Capacity RMX per Resolution in CP (Continued)
Maximum Possible Resources
Resource
Type
RMX 1500
RMX 2000
RMX 4000
MPMx
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
MPM+
MPMx
4CIF 60 /
SD 60
30
–
40
60
80
120
HD720p30
30
20
40
60
80
120
HD1080p30/
HD720p60
Asymmetric
15
–
20
30
40
60
HD1080p30/
HD720p60
Symmetric
15
–
–
30
–
60
Table 19-11 summarizes the resource capacities of fully configured RMXs
with the various card types per line rate in VSW Conferencing mode.
Table 19-11 Resource Capacities for Full Capacity RMX per Line Rate in VSW
Maximum Possible Resources
Resource
Type
RMX 1500
RMX 2000
RMX 4000
MPMx
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
MPM+
MPMx
Voice (IP)
360
400
800
720
1600
1440
Voice (PSTN)
120
400
400
400
400
400
VSW 2Mb
80
80
160
160
320
320
VSW 4Mb
40
40
80
80
160
160
VSW 6Mb
20
Not
Applicable
40
40
80
80
19-55
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
RMX’s with 500MB of memory can support a maximum of 400 simultaneous
participant calls, regardless of how system resources are allocated.
RMX’s with 1000MB of memory are not subject to this limitation.
•
RMX memory size is listed in the Administration > System Information
properties box. For more information see "System Information” on
page 19-78.
Resource Capacity Modes
The installed media card type (MPM, MPM+ or MPMx) determines the
Card Configuration Mode, which in turn determines the resource allocation
method that can be selected for the RMX. The resource allocation method
determines how the system resources are allocated to the connecting
endpoints and it is defined in the Video/Voice Port Configuration. Two
allocation methods are available:
•
Flexible Resource Capacity™ – This is the default allocation mode
that is used in all versions and can be used in all Card Configuration
Modes. The resources are only set to audio and video as a pool and the
system allocates the resources according to the connecting endpoints.
This mode offers flexibility in resource allocation and is available in
MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration Modes.
In Flexible Resource Capacity mode, in MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Modes, the maximum number of resources is based on
the system license, regardless of the hardware configuration of the
RMX. These resources are allocated as CIF resources by default.
Example: If the RMX is licensed for 80 video resources, but only one
MPM card is currently installed in the RMX, the system lets you
allocate 80 ports although only 40 video resources are available for
participant connection. (However, an active alarm will be added to
the Active Alarms list indicating a resource deficiency).
•
Fixed Resource Capacity™ – This mode offers precise usage of
resources, allowing the administrator to set the number of resources
guaranteed to each Audio Only and video connection type in advance.
This mode is available only in MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration
Modes.
In Fixed Resource Capacity mode, the maximum number of resources is
based on the system license and the hardware configuration of the
RMX. By default, these resources are allocated as HD720p30
resources, the first time Fixed Resource Capacity mode is activated.
19-56
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Example: If two MPM+ cards are installed in the RMX, providing 160
video resources, and the license was not upgraded accordingly,
although the system capacity is higher, resource availability for
allocation does not change and remains according to the license (80).
Conversely, if two MPM+ cards are installed in the RMX, providing
160 video resources, and the license is for 160 video resources, and
one of the MPM+ cards is removed, the resource availability for
allocation is changed to 80.
Resource Usage
Continuous Presence
Video resources usage varies according to the video resolution used by
the endpoints. The higher the video resolution (quality), the greater the
amount of video resources consumed by the MCU.
Table 19-12 shows the number of video resources used for each
resolution.
Table 19-12
Video Resource Usage vs. Resolution (MPM, MPM+, MPMx)
Video Resources Used
Resolution/fps
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
1
1
1 (H.264)/
1.5 (H.261/H.263)
2
2.66
2
2
2.66
3 (H.263 only)
CIF/30
QCIF/30
SIF/30
WCIF/25
WSIF/30
432X336/30
480X352/30
SD/15
WSD/15
4CIF/15
19-57
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-12
Video Resource Usage vs. Resolution (MPM, MPM+, MPMx)
Video Resources Used
Resolution/fps
MPM
MPM+
MPMx
WSD/30
4CIF/30
4SIF/30
1.5
WVGA/30
2.66
4
WVGA/25
SD/30
WSD/60
3
HD720p/30
4
CIF/60
SIF/60
WSIF/60
2.66
1.5
4
3
8
6
WCIF/60
432X336/60
480X352/60
WSD/50
Not Supported
4CIF/50
4SIF/60
WVGA/60
WVGA/50
HD720p/60
HD1080p/30
19-58
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
High Definition Video Switching
During a High Definition Video Switching conference, each endpoint uses
one video (CIF) port.
Voice
One Audio Only resource is used to connect a single voice participant
when CIF resources have been converted to Audio Only. However, if no
CIF resources were converted, Audio Only endpoints use one CIF video
resource per connection.
When video ports are fully used, the system cannot use free audio ports
for video. When audio port resources are fully used, video ports can be
used, using one video port to connect one voice participant.
Video/Voice Port Configuration
The Video/Voice Port Configuration enables you to configure the resources
per resource type and if in MPM+ or MPMx System Card Configuration
Mode, select the RMX Resource Capacity Mode.
Flexible Resource Capacity Mode
All resources are initially allocated as CIF video ports as it is a resolution
commonly supported by all endpoints.
The administrator can allocate some or all of these resources asVoice
resources and let the system allocate the remaining Video resources
automatically as participants connect to conferences. The number of
resources automatically allocated by the system resources per endpoint is
according to the participant’s endpoint type, capabilities and line rate.
If the system runs out of voice ports, voice endpoints cannot connect to available
video ports. Conversely, video endpoints cannot connect to available voice
ports.
Flexible Resource Capacity mode is available and is the default selection in
both MPM, MPM+ and MPMx System Card Configuration Modes. It is the
only allocation method in MPM System Card Configuration Mode.
Fixed Resource Capacity
Fixed Resource Capacity enables the administrator to configure in advance
the maximum number of resources available for participant connections
per video resolution and Audio Only connections. In Fixed Resource
Capacity mode, the system is always in a known state, and when used in
19-59
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
conjunction with the Resource Report, it gives the administrator precise
control over resource allocation and optimization. Fixed Resource Capacity
mode is available only in MPM+ and MPMx System Card Configuration
Modes.
If all resources configured to a specific video resolution are in use and an
endpoint tries to connect to the RMX with that resolution, the RMX first
attempts to connect the endpoint using resources of the next highest
resolution level. If no resources are available at that level, the RMX tries to
connect the endpoint using resources of progressively decreasing
resolutions.
Example: In a system that has 10 SD ports allocated and in use, If another
SD endpoint (11th) attempts to connect, the system first tries to allocate
resources to the SD endpoint first from HD720 and then from HD1080
resources.
If HD resources are allocated to an SD endpoint, HD endpoints may
experience a resource deficiency when trying to connect and may not be
connected at HD resolution.
If there are no available HD resources the system tries to allocate
resources to the SD endpoint from any available CIF resources.
If there are no available CIF resources the system tries to allocate
resources to the SD endpoint from any available Audio Only resources. If
Audio Only resources are allocated the HD endpoint, the participant
receives an "Audio Only" message from the Conference/Entry Queue IVR
Service and is connected as an Audio Only participant.
Configuring the Video/Voice Resources in MPM Mode
Resource re-configuration should only be performed when no conferences are
running on the RMX.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
19-60
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
To allocate Audio Only resources:
1 In the RMX menu, click Setup > Video/Voice Port Configuration.
The Video/Voice Port Configuration dialog box opens.
Resource Maximum from License
A single slider is displayed, calibrated according to licensed video
resources indicated in CIF ports in the RMX.
2
Move the slider to the number of Audio Only ports to be allocated.
The slider moves in multiples of two (in MPM and MPM+ Card
configuration Modes) or three (in MPMx Card Configuration Mode),
converting CIF video ports to voice ports in groups of two/three,
with each CIF video port converting to five voice ports in MPM and
MPM+ Card configuration Modes and four voice ports in MPMx Card
Configuration Mode. The minimum number of voice ports that can be
allocated is 10 (2 video ports x 5 voice ports per video port) in MPM
and MPM+ Card configuration Modes and 12 (3 video ports x 4 voice
ports per video port) in MPMx Card configuration Mode.
3
Click OK.
Configuring the Video/Voice Resources in MPM+ and MPMx
Mode
Resource re-configuration should only be performed when no conferences are
running on the RMX.
19-61
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
There are two Resource Capacity modes in MPM+ and MPMx Mode:
•
Flexible Resource Capacity
•
Fixed Resource Capacity
Flexible Resource Capacity
Flexible Resource Capacity is the default resource allocation mode in MPM+
and MPMx Mode and is functionally identical to the MPM Flexible Resource
Capacity described above.
On the RMX1500 MPMx-Q assembly, the use of HD with Continuous Presence
requires an additional license. In the Resource Report and Resolution
Configuration panes, HD settings are displayed but are not enabled and if HD is
selected the system will enable SD by default.
To allocate Audio Only ports in MPM+ and MPMx mode:
1 Optional (otherwise skip to step 2): If the RMX is in Fixed Resource
Capacity mode:
2
a
In the RMX menu, click Setup > Video/Voice Port
Configuration.
The Video/Voice Port Configuration dialog box opens.
b
In the Resource Capacity Mode box, select Flexible Resource
Capacity.
c
Click OK.
In the RMX menu, click Setup > Video/Voice Port Configuration.
The Video/Voice Port Configuration dialog box opens.
If switching from Fixed mode, all video resources are allocated as CIF
video ports.
3
Continue with Step 2 of the MPM Mode Flexible Resource Capacity
procedure described above.
Fixed Resource Capacity
To allocate resources in Fixed Resource Capacity mode:
Resource re-configuration (if the system is already set to Fixed Resource
Capacity mode) should only be performed when no conferences are running on
the RMX.
1
19-62
Optional (otherwise skip to step 2): If the RMX is not in Fixed Capacity
Mode.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
a
In the RMX menu, click Setup > Video/Voice Port
Configuration.
The Video/Voice Port Configuration dialog box opens.
b
In the Resource Capacity Mode box, click Fixed.
Capacity Mode Radio Buttons
c
2
Click OK.
In the RMX menu, click Setup > Video/Voice Port Configuration.
The Video/Voice Port Configuration dialog box opens.
Number of Resources allocated
to each type
Maximum Number of Resources
from License and Hardware
On the RMX1500 MPMx-Q assembly, the use of HD with Continuous Presence
requires an additional license. In the Resource Report and Resolution
Configuration panes, HD settings are displayed but are not enabled and if HD is
selected the system will enable SD by default.
19-63
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Fixed Resource Capacity mode displays five sliders, one for each
resource type: Audio Only, CIF, SD, HD 720p 30fps, HD 1080p / HD
720p 60fps (HD 1080p / HD 720p 60fps resources are represented on
the same slider) where each type requires different number of video
resources (in CIF ports) for connecting endpoints.
— The first time the Fixed Resource Capacity is selected, all resources
are allocated to HD720p30 by default.
— If the allocation mode was previously Fixed or if it was Auto but
Fixed had been selected in the past, the previous resource
allocations in the mode are displayed.
The maximum number of allocatable resources of each type per fully
licenced RMX with either MPM+ or MPMx cards is described in
Table 19-10, “Resource Capacities for Full Capacity RMX per Resolution
in CP,” on page 19-54. The Max Resolution setting of the Resolution
Configuration dialog box does not affect resource allocation.
Example: If it is set to SD30, the HD 1080p slider is still displayed and
HD 1080 resources can be allocated. However, HD 1080 participants
will connect at SD30 resolution.
Using the sliders, the administrator can manually allocate resources
to the various types of video resolutions and Audio Only connections
that can be used by connecting endpoints.
3
Move the blue slider buttons to allocate resources.
As all the resources are allocated when the dialog box opens, you
must first free resources of one type by moving the blue slider button
to the left, and then move blue slider button of the required resource
type to the number of resources to be allocated.
19-64
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
On the slider bars, red areas to the left of the blue slider buttons
indicate allocated resources and purple areas to the right of the blue
slider buttons indicate unallocated resources in the system.
Allocated Resources
Slider button
Un-allocated Resources
Decreasing CIF Resources increases the number of available
Audio Only, SD, HD720p and HD1080p Resources
When the position of a slider is changed the system calculates the
effect on the remaining system resources and adjusts the slider scales
accordingly.
For example: Decreasing the allocated CIF ports from 80 to 53, free
ports for allocation that can be used to allocate up to 135 voice ports
or 10 SD ports or 6 HD 720p ports, or any combination of the resource
types.
Allocating five Audio Only ports decreases the number of CIF ports
while allocating one SD port decreases the number of CIF ports.
4
Click OK to activate the new Resource Capacity.
19-65
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
If after resources are recalculated there are purple areas to the right of
the blue slider buttons indicating unallocated resources in the system,
the system issues a warning stating that there are un-allocated
resources in the system.
5
Optional. Repeat this procedure from Step 2 to further optimize the
resource allocation.
Un-allocated resources cannot be used by any participants.
If after recalculating the resources the system determines that there
are insufficient resources to support the configuration indicated by
the sliders:
— A major System Alert is raised with Insufficient resources in its
Description field.
— The Fixed Resource Capacity blue slider buttons are disabled.
— A warning message is displayed.
• Click OK to close the warning message box.
a Optional.
•
b
Click the Reset Configuration button to set all the blue
slider buttons to zero.
• Reconfigure the resource allocation.
• Click OK to activate the new resource allocation.
Optional. Click the Cancel button to accept the resource
allocation.
The System Alert remains active.
Forcing Video Resource Allocation to CIF Resolution
You can set the MCU to allocate one CIF video resource to an endpoint,
regardless of the resolution determined by the Conference Profile
parameters. This forcing saves resources and enables more endpoints to
connect to conferences.
The forcing is done by modifying the system configuration and it applies
to all conferences running on the MCU.
You can specify the endpoint types for which resource allocation can be
forced to CIF resource, enabling other types of endpoints to use higher
resolutions in the same conference. For example, you can force the system
to allocate one CIF video resource to CMAD and VSX endpoints while
HDX endpoints can connect using SD or HD video resources.
19-66
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Once the endpoint connects to the conference, its type is identified by the
RMX and, if applicable, the RMX will connect it using one CIF resource,
even if a higher resolution can be used.
To force CIF resource:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, click the New Flag button.
The New Flag dialog box is displayed.
3
In the New Flag field enter the flag name:
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION
4
In the Value field enter the product type to which the CIF resource
should be allocated. Possible values are:
— CMA Desktop for CMA desktop client
— VSX nnnn where nnnn represents the model number for
example, VSX 8000.
You can define several endpoint types, listing them one after the
other separated by semicolon (;).
For example, CMA Desktop;VSX 8000.
5
Click OK.
The new flag is added to the flags list.
Reset the MCU for changes to take effect. For more details, see the RMX
1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on
page 19-127.
To cancel the forcing of CIF resource:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > System Configuration.
The System Flags dialog box opens.
2
In the MCMS_PARAMETERS tab, double-click or select the flag
FORCE_CIF_PORT_ALLOCATION and click the Edit Flag button.
19-67
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
In the New Value field, clear the value entries.
4
Click OK.
Reset the MCU for changes to take effect. For more details, see the RMX
1500/2000/4000 Administrator’s Guide, "Resetting the RMX” on
page 19-127
Resource Report
The Resource Report displays the real time resource usage according to the
selected Resource Capacity Mode:
•
Flexible Resource Capacity Mode available in MPM, MPM+ and MPMx
Modes.
•
Fixed Resource Capacity Mode available only in MPM+ and MPMx
Modes
On the RMX1500 MPMx-Q assembly, the use of HD with Continuous Presence
requires an additional license. In the Resource Report and Resolution
Configuration panes, HD settings are displayed but are not enabled and if HD is
selected the system will enable SD by default.
The Resource Report also includes a graphic representation of the resource
usage.
When the RMX is working in MPM+ or MPMx Mode with Fixed Resource
Capacity Mode™ selected, additional system resources information is
displayed.
Displaying the Resource Report
1
19-68
In the main toolbar, click Administration > Resource Report.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
The Resource Report dialog box is displayed, showing the resource
usage according to the Resource Capacity Mode. For each resource
type, the Resource Report includes the following columns:
Table 19-13 Resource Report Fields Parameters
Column
Description
Type
The type of audio/video resources available.
Total
The Total column displays the total number of
resources of that type as configured in the system
(Occupied and Free). This number reflects the
current audio/video port configuration. Any changes
to the resource allocation will affect the resource
usage displayed in the Resource Report.
Occupied
The number of RMX resources that are used by
connected participants or reserved for defined
participants.
Free
The number of RMX resources available for
connecting endpoints.
Resource Report Display in Flexible Resource Capacity Mode™
The Resource Report details the current availability and usage of the system
resources displaying the number of free and occupied audio and video
ports. A Resources Graph is displayed in addition to the Resources table.
Example: An RMX 2000 in MPM+ Card Configuration Mode and Flexible
Resource Capacity Mode has:
•
80 licensed CIF resources.
•
8 of its 80 CIF resources allocated as Audio = 40 Audio resources (8x5).
•
All 40 Audio resources free (green).
•
The remaining 72 CIF resources allocated as Video resources.
•
8 of the 72 CIF resources are occupied (red) while the remaining 64
are free.
19-69
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Resource Report is displayed as follows:
Video Resources
Free (%)
Video Resources
Occupied (%)
Actual Number of Occupied and Free Audio and Video Resources
In Flexible Resource Capacity Mode, resource usage is displayed for Audio
and CIF video resources only. They are displayed as percentages of the
total resource type.
The actual number of occupied or free resources can also be displayed by
moving the cursor over the columns of the bar graph. Moving the cursor
over the Video bar displays the following:
8 Occupied Video
Resources
64 Free Video
Resources
Port Gauges
In Flexible Resource Capacity mode, the Port Gauges in the Status Bar show 0
of the 40 Audio (Voice) resources as occupied and 8 of the 72 CIF (Video)
resources as occupied.
19-70
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Resource Report in Fixed Resource Capacity Mode™
In Fixed Resource Capacity Mode, each resource type (Audio, CIF, SD,
HD 720p and HD 1080p) is displayed as a bar of the graph, indicating the
percentage of occupied and free resources for each resource type.
The data is also displayed as a Resources table indicating the actual
number of resources occupied and free for each resource type along with
a total number of each resource type.
Example: An RMX 2000 in MPM+ Card Configuration Mode and Fixed
Resource Capacity Mode has:
•
80 licensed CIF resources.
•
18 Audio resources allocated, all free (green).
•
35 CIF resources allocated, all free.
•
5
SD resources allocated, 4 occupied (red), 1 free.
•
7
HD 720 resources allocated, all free.
•
0
HD 1080 resources allocated.
The Resource Report is displayed as follows:
Total Number of Audio Resources = 18
Total Number of Video Resources = 47
The actual number of occupied or free resources can also be displayed by
moving the cursor over the columns of the bar graph (as explained above
for Flexible Resource Capacity).
19-71
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Port Gauges
Audio (Voice) resources are as displayed as in previous versions while all
Video resource types are shown as a single group of Video resources.
The gauges show 0 of the 18 Audio (Voice) resources as occupied. The
4 occupied SD resources are shown as 4 occupied resources out of the
total of 47 Video resources.
ISDN/PSTN
The RMX 1500 supports one ISDN card with 4 E1/T1 PRI lines.
On the RMX 2000/4000 a maximum of two RTM ISDN cards are
supported, each providing connection for up to either 7 E1 or 9 T1 PRI
lines.
On RMX 1500/2000/4000, E1 and T1 connections cannot be used
simultaneously.
19-72
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-14 lists the ISDN supported bit rates and their respective
participant connection capacities per RTM ISDN card:
Table 19-14 ISDN – E1/T1 Connection Capacity vs. Bit rate
Bit Rates
(Kbps)
(Bonded)
Number of Participants
per RTM ISDN Card
E1
T1
128
40
40
192
40
40
256
40
40
320
40
40
384
34
34
512
25
25
768
17
17
1152
11
11
1472
9
9
1536
8
8
1920
7
6
If the conference bit rate is 128Kbps,
participants connecting at bit rates
lower than 128Kbps are
disconnected.
If the conference bit rate is above
128Kbps but does not match any of
the bonded bit rates, participants are
connected at the highest bonded bit
rate that is less than the conference
bit rate.
For example: If the conference bit
rate is 1024Kbps, the participant is
connected at 768Kbps.
RMX Resource Management by CMA and DMA
When both CMA and DMA are part of the solution, following a request by
the CMA and DMA, the RMX will send updates on resource usage to both
CMA and DMA, with each application updating its own resource usage
for the RMX. This provides better management of the RMX resources by
CMA and DMA.
Guidelines
•
Resource usage updates from RMX to the CMA and DMA are
supported only with RMXs with MPM+ or MPMx cards.
•
Both Flexible Resource Capacity™ and Fixed Resource Capacity™ modes
are supported with DMA.
19-73
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Only Flexible Resource Capacity™ mode is supported with CMA.
•
Following requests sent by CMA and DMA, the RMX will send the
number of occupied resources for a conference or total for the MCU,
according the Resource Capacity Mode used by the system.
— In Flexible Resource Capacity Mode, CMA/DMA receive
information about how many Video (CIF) and Audio resources are
occupied per conference or MCU according the request type sent
by the CMA and DMA.
—
19-74
In Fixed Resource Capacity™ Mode, DMA receives information
about the number of occupied resources per resource type
(Audio Only, CIF, SD, HD 720p, HD 1080p) and per conference
or MCU according the request type sent by the DMA.
•
Occupied resources are resources that are connected to ongoing
conferences. Disconnected endpoints in an ongoing conference are
not counted as occupied resources.
•
An ongoing conference that does not include participants and the
Send Content to Legacy Endpoints option is disabled does not occupy
resources. If the Send Content to Legacy Endpoints option is enabled,
the conference occupies one SD resource.
•
The RMX is unaware of the resource usage split between the CMA
and DMA.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Port Usage Threshold
The RMX can be set to alert the administrator to potential port capacity
shortages. A capacity usage threshold can be set as a percentage of the
total number of licensed ports in the system.
When the threshold is exceeded, a System Alert is generated.
The default port capacity usage threshold is 80%.
The administrator can monitor the MCU’s port capacity usage via the Port
Gauges in the Status Bar of the RMX Web Client.
Setting the Port Usage Threshold
To Set the Port Usage Threshold:
1 In the Setup menu, click Port Gauge to open the Port Gauge dialog box.
Usage Threshold
Status Bar
2
Enter the value for the percentage capacity usage threshold.
The value is applied to the Audio and video resources according to
the Video/Voice Port Configuration.
The high Port Usage threshold represents a percentage of the total
number of video or voice ports available. It is set to indicate when
resource usage is approaching its maximum, resulting in no free
resources to run additional conferences. When port usage reaches or
exceeds the threshold, the red area of the gauge flashes. The default
port usage threshold is 80%.
3
Click OK.
19-75
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
SIP Dial-in Busy Notification
When the system flag
SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES (NO is
the default), it enables the RMX to send a busy notification to a SIP audio
endpoint or a SIP device when dialing in to the RMX whose audio
resource usage exceeded the Port Usage threshold.
The RMX will send a SIP busy response to SIP audio endpoints when:
•
The system flag
SEND_SIP_BUSY_UPON_RESOURCE_THRESHOLD is set to YES
(NO is the default)
•
The port usage threshold for Audio resources is exceeded. The
threshold is defined in the Setup > Port Gauge dialog box.
When the flag is set to YES, the system will allow SIP audio endpoints to
connect to the MCU until the Port Usage threshold is reached. Once this
threshold is exceeded, the SIP audio endpoints will not be able to connect,
ensuring that the remaining system resources can be used by all other
connections, including SIP video, H.323 cascaded links and ISDN video.
When the call is rejected by the MCU because of lack of resources, the
appropriate indication will be sent by the MCU to the SIP audio endpoint.
For example, if the Port Gauge threshold is set to 80%, when 80% of the
Audio resources are used, the system will not allow additional SIP audio
endpoints to connect and will send a busy notification to the endpoint.
This does not affect the video resources usage.
19-76
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Port Usage Gauges
The Port Usage Gauges are displayed in the Status Bar at the bottom of the
RMX Web Client screen.
Status Bar
Port Usage Gauges
The Port Usage gauges indicate:
•
The total number of Video or Voice ports in the system according to
the Video/Voice Port Configuration. The Audio gauge is displayed only
if Audio ports were allocated by the administrator, otherwise only the
Video port gauge is displayed.
•
The number of Video and Voice ports in use.
•
The High Port Usage threshold.
Total Allocated Video Ports In System
Video Ports In Use
Video Port Usage Indicator
Total Allocated Audio Ports In System
Audio Ports In Use
Audio Port Usage Indicator
Audio and Video Port Usage Threshold
19-77
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Port Gauges in Flexible/Fixed Capacity Modes
Audio Ports Gauge
•
In both Flexible and Fixed Capacity Modes:
The fraction displayed indicates the exact number of voice resources
in use out of the total number of voice resources.
Video Ports Gauge
•
In Flexible Capacity Mode:
All video resource usage is converted to the equivalent CIF resource
usage. The fraction displayed indicates the exact number of video
resources in use out of the total number of video resources in the
system.
•
In Fixed Capacity Mode:
All video ports are treated as a single group of Video resources
regardless of their differing consumption of CIF video resources. The
fraction displayed indicates the number of video resources in use out
of the total number video resources in the system.
System Information
System Information includes License Information, and general system
information, such as system memory size and Media Card Configuration
Mode.
To view the System Information properties box:
>> On the RMX menu, click Administration > System Information.
The System Information properties box is displayed.
19-78
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
The System Information properties box displays the following
information:
Table 19-15 System Information
Field
Description
Total Number of Video
(CIF) Participants
Displays the number of CIF video participants
licensed for the system.
19-79
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-15 System Information (Continued)
Field
Description
RMX Version
Displays the System Software Version of the
RMX.
ISDN/PSTN
The field value indicates whether RTM ISDN/
PSTN hardware has been detected in the
system.
Range: True / False
Encryption
The field value indicates whether Encryption is
included in the MCU license. Encryption is not
available in all countries.
Range: True / False
Telepresence Mode
The field value indicates whether the system is
licensed to work with RPX and TPX
Telepresence room systems.
Range: True / False
Serial Number
Displays the Serial Number of the RMX.
Multiple Services
A Multiple Services license is installed.
HD
On the RMX1500 with a MPMx-Q media card,
the use of HD with Continuous Presence
requires an additional license.
Polycom Partners
The field value indicates that the System
Software contains features for the support of
specific Polycom Partner environments.
Memory Size [MB]
This field indicates the RMX system memory
size in MBytes.
Possible values:
• 1024 MB – Version 7.1 requires 1024 or
memory.
•
19-80
500 MB – If Memory size is 512MB,
Version 7.1 is not supported.
DO NOT upgrade the system to
Version 7.1.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-15 System Information (Continued)
Field
Description
Card Configuration
Mode
Indicates the MCU configuration as derived
from the installed media cards:
• MPM: Only MPM cards are supported.
MPM+ and MPMx cards in the system are
disabled. It is the mode used in previous
RMX versions.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are
not supported.
•
MPM+: Only MPM+ cards are supported.
MPM and MPMx cards in the system are
disabled.
•
MPMx: Only MPMx cards are supported.
MPM and MPM+ cards in the system are
disabled.
Note: When started with Version 7.0 installed,
the RMX enters MPM+ mode by default, even
if no media cards are installed:
• The RMX only switches between MPM,
MPM+ and MPMx Card Configuration
Modes if MPM, MPM+ or MPMx cards are
removed or swapped while it is powered
on.
•
The Card Configuration Mode switch
occurs during the next restart.
•
Installing or swapping MPM, MPM+ or
MPMx cards while the system is off will not
cause a mode switch when the system is
restarted - it will restart in the Card
Configuration Mode that was active
previous to powering down.
19-81
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
The RMX only switches between MPM, MPM+ and MPMx Card
Configuration Modes if MPM / MPM+ / MPMx cards are removed or
swapped while it is running.
•
•
The Card Configuration Mode switch occurs during the next restart.
•
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
Installing or swapping MPM / MPM+ / MPMx cards while the system is off
will not cause a mode switch when the system is restarted – it will restart in
the Card Configuration Mode that was active previous to powering down.
SNMP (Simple Network Management Protocol)
SNMP enables managing and monitoring of the MCU status by external
managing systems, such as HP OpenView or through web applications.
The RMX’s implementation of SNMPv3 is FIPS 140 compliant.
MIBs (Management Information Base)
MIBs are a collection of definitions, which define the properties of the
managed object within the device to be managed. Every managed device
keeps a database of values for each of the definitions written in the MIB.
The SNMP systems poll the MCU according to the MIB definitions.
Traps
The MCU is able to send Traps to different managers. Traps are messages
that are sent by the MCU to the SNMP Manager when an event such as
MCU Reset occurs.
Guidelines
19-82
•
Version 1, Version 2 and Version 3 traps are supported.
•
When SNMPv3 is selected only SNMPv3 Queries and Traps receive
responses.
•
A mixture of Version 1, Version 2 and Version 3 traps is not permitted.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
MIB Files
The H.341 standard defines the MIBs that H.320 and H.323 MCUs must
comply with. In addition, other MIBs should also be supported, such as
MIB-II and the ENTITY MIB, which are common to all network entities.
The MIBs are contained in files in the SNMP MIBS sub-directory of the
RMX root directory. The files should be loaded to the SNMP external
system and compiled within that application. Only then can the SNMP
external application perform the required monitoring tasks.
The MULTI-MEDIA_MIB_TC must be compiled before compiling the other
MIBs.
Private MIBs
•
RMX-MIB (RMX-MIB.MIB)
— Contains the statuses of the RMX: Startup, Normal and Major.
— Contains all the Alarms of the RMX that are sent to the SNMP
Manager.
Support for MIB-II Sections
The following table details the MIB-II sections that are supported:
Table 19-16 Supported MIB-II Sections
Section
Object Identifier
system
mib-2 1
interfaces
mib-2 2
ip
mib-2 4
The Alarm-MIB
MIB used to send alarms. When a trap is sent, the Alarm-MIB is used to
send it.
H.341-MIB (H.341 – H.323)
•
Gives the address of the gatekeeper.
•
Supports H.341-MIB of SNMP events of H.323.
19-83
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Standard MIBs
This section describes the MIBs that are included with the RMX. These
MIBs define the various parameters that can be monitored, and their
acceptable values.
19-84
MIB Name
Description
MULTI-MEDIAMIB-TC
(MULTIMTC.MIB)
Defines a set of textual conventions used within the set
of Multi Media MIB modules.
H.320ENTITY-MIB
(H320-ENT.MIB)
This is a collection of common objects, which can be
used in an H.320 terminal, an H.320 MCU and an H.320/
H.323 gateway. These objects are arranged in three
groups: Capability, Call Status, and H.221 Statistics.
H.320MCU-MIB
(H320-MCU.MIB)
Used to identify managed objects for an H.320 MCU. It
consists of four groups: System, Conference, Terminal,
and Controls. The Conference group consists of the
active conferences. The Terminal group is used to
describe terminals in active MCU conferences. The
Controls group enables remote management of the
MCU.
H323MC-MIB
(H323-MC.MIB)
Used to identify objects defined for an H.323 Multipoint
Controller. It consists of six groups: System,
Configuration, Conference, Statistics, Controls and
Notifications. The Conference group is used to identify
the active conferences in the MCU. The Notifications
group allows an MCU, if enabled, to inform a remote
management client of its operational status.
Note: The RMX supports only one field in H.341H323MC MIB. The RMX reports the Gatekeeper address
using H.341-H323MC MIB –
323McConfigGatekeeperAddress
(0.0.8.341.1.1.4.2.1.1.4) in response to a query from a
manager.
MP-MIB (H323MP.MIB)
Used to identify objects defined for an H.323 Multipoint
Processor, and consists of two groups: Configuration and
Conference. The Configuration group is used to identify
audio/video mix configuration counts. The Conference
group describes the audio and video multi-processing
operation.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
MIB Name
Description
MIB-II/RFC1213MIB
(RFC1213.MIB)
Holds basic network information and statistics about the
following protocols: TCP, UDP, IP, ICMP and SNMP. In
addition, it holds a table of interfaces that the Agent has.
MIB-II also contains basic identification information for
the system, such as, Product Name, Description,
Location and Contact Person.
ENTITY-MIB
(ENTITY.MIB)
Describes the unit physically: Number of slots, type of
board in each slot, and number of ports in each slot.
19-85
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Traps
Three types of traps are sent as follows:
1
ColdStart trap. This is a standard trap which is sent when the MCU is
reset.
coldStart notification received from: 172.22.189.154 at 5/20/
2007 7:03:12 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:00m:00s.00th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32774 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Enterprise: enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Bindings (3)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:00m:00s.00th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid) coldStart
Binding #3: snmpTrapEnterprise.0 *** (oid)
enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Figure 1
2
An Example of a ColdStart Trap
Authentication failure trap. This is a standard trap which is sent
when an unauthorized community tries to enter.
authentication Failure notification received from:
172.22.189.154 at 5/20/2007 7:33:38 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:30m:27s.64th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32777 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Enterprise: enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Bindings (3)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:30m:27s.64th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid) authenticationFailure
Binding #3: snmpTrapEnterprise.0 *** (oid)
enterprises.8072.3.2.10
Figure 2
19-86
An Example of an Authentication Failure Trap
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
3
Alarm Fault trap. The third trap type is a family of traps defined in
the POLYCOM-RMX-MIB file, these traps are associated with the
RMX active alarm and clearance (proprietary SNMP trap).
rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault notification received
from: 172.22.189.154 at 5/20/2007 7:04:22 PM
Time stamp: 0 days 00h:01m:11s.71th
Agent address: 172.22.189.154 Port: 32777 Transport: IP/UDP
Protocol: SNMPv2c Notification
Manager address: 172.22.172.34 Port: 162 Transport: IP/UDP
Community: public
Bindings (6)
Binding #1: sysUpTime.0 *** (timeticks) 0 days
00h:01m:11s.71th
Binding #2: snmpTrapOID.0 *** (oid)
rmxFailedConfigUserListInLinuxAlarmFault
Binding #3: rmxAlarmDescription *** (octets) Insufficient
resources
Binding #4: rmxActiveAlarmDateAndTime *** (octets) 2007-619,16:7:15.0,0:0
Binding #5: rmxActiveAlarmIndex *** (gauge32) 2
Binding #6: rmxActiveAlarmListName *** (octets) Active
Alarm Table
* Binding #7: rmxActiveAlarmRmxStatus *** (rmxStatus) major
Figure 3
An Example of an Alarm Fault Trap
Each trap is sent with a time stamp, the agent address and the manager
address.
Status Trap Content
The MCU sends status traps for the status MAJOR - a trap is sent when
the card/MCU status is MAJOR.
All trap content is considered “MAJOR”.
19-87
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Defining the SNMP Parameters in the RMX
The SNMP option is enabled via the RMX Web Client application.
The addresses of the Managers monitoring the MCU and other security
information are defined in the RMX Web Client application and are saved
on the MCU’s hard disk. Only users defined as Administrator can define
or modify the SNMP security parameters in the RMX Web Client
application.
To enable SNMP option:
1 In the RMX Web Client menu bar, click Setup > SNMP.
The RMX-SNMP Properties - Agent dialog box is displayed.
This dialog box is used to define the basic information for this MCU
that will be used by the SNMP system to identify it.
2
In the Agent dialog box, click the SNMP Enabled check box.
3
Click the Retrieve MIB Files button to obtain a file that lists the MIBs
that define the properties of the object being managed.
The Retrieve MIB Files dialog box is displayed.
19-88
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
4
Click the Browse button and navigate to the desired directory to save
the MIB files.
5
Click OK.
The path of the selected directory is displayed in the Retrieve MIB
Files dialog box.
6
Click the Save button.
The MIB files are saved to the selected directory.
7
Click Close to exit the Retrieve MIB Files dialog box.
8
In the Agent dialog box, define the parameters that allow the SNMP
Management System and its user to easily identify the MCU.
Table 19-17 RMX-SNMP Properties - Agent Options
Field
Description
Contact person for
this MCU
Type the name of the person to be contacted in the
event of problems with the MCU.
MCU Location
Type the location of the MCU (address or any
description).
MCU System
Name
Type the MCU’s system name.
19-89
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
9
Click the Traps tab.
The RMX-SNMP Properties – Traps dialog box opens.
Version 3
Versions 1 & 2
Traps are messages sent by the MCU to the SNMP Managers when
events such as MCU Startup or Shutdown occur. Traps may be sent
to several SNMP Managers whose IP addresses are specified in the
Trap Destinations box.
19-90
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
10 Define the following parameters:
Table 19-18 SNMPv3 - Traps
Field
Description
SNMP Trap
Version
Specifies the version, either Version1 2 or 3 of the traps
being sent to the IP Host. Polycom software supports the
standard SNMP version 1 and 2 traps, which are taken from
RFC 1215, convention for defining traps for use with SNMP.
Note: The SNMP Trap Version parameters must be defined
identically in the external SNMP application.
Trap
Destination
This box lists the currently defined IP addresses of the
Manager terminals to which the message (trap) is sent.
IP
Enter the IP address of the
SNMP trap recipient.
All
Versions
Community
Name
Enter the Community Name of
the manager terminal used to
monitor the MCU activity
Version 1
and
Version 2
User Name
Enter the name of the user that
is to have access to the trap.
Authenticati
on Protocol
Enter the authentication
protocol: MD5 or SHA.
Privacy
Protocol
Enter the privacy protocol:
DES or AES.
Version 3
11 Click the Add button to add a new Manager terminal.
The New Trap Destination dialog box opens.
12 Type the IP Address and the Community name of the manager
terminal used to monitor the MCU activity, and then click OK.
19-91
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Community name is a string of characters that will be added to the
message that is sent to the external Manager terminals. This string is
used to identify the message source by the external Manager
terminal.
The new IP Address and Community name is added to the Trap
Destinations box.
a
To delete the IP Address of a Manager terminal, select the
address that you wish to delete, and then click the Remove
button.
The IP address in the Trap Destinations box is removed.
13 Click the Security tab.
The RMX-SNMP Properties – Security dialog box opens.
Version 3
Versions 1 & 2
19-92
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
This dialog box is used to define whether the query sent to the MCU
is sent from an authorized source. When the “Accept SNMP packets
from all Hosts” is disabled, a valid query must contain the appropriate
community string and must be sent from one of the Manager
terminals whose IP address is listed in this dialog box.
14 Define the following parameters:
Table 19-19 SNMP - Security
Field
Description
Send
Authentication
Trap
Select this check box to send a message to the
SNMP Manager when an unauthorized query is
sent to the MCU. When cleared, no indication will
be sent to the SNMP Manager.
Accept Host
Community
Name
Enter the string added to queries that are sent
from the SNMP Manager to indicate that they
were sent from an authorized source.
Note: Queries sent with different strings will be
regarded as a violation of security, and, if the
Send Authentication Trap check box is selected,
an appropriate message will be sent to the SNMP
Manager.
Accept SNMP
Packets from
all Host
Select this option if a query sent from any
Manager terminal is valid. When selected, the
Accept SNMP Packets from These Hosts option
is disabled.
Accept SNMP
Packets from
the following
Hosts
Lists specific Manager terminals whose queries
will be considered as valid. This option is enabled
when the Accept SNMP Packets from any Host
option is cleared.
Versions
1&2
19-93
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-19 SNMP - Security (Continued)
Field
19-94
Description
User Name
Enter a User Name of up to 48 characters
Default: Empty
Security Level
Select a Security Level from the drop-down
menu.
Range: No Auth, No Priv; Auth, No Priv; Auth,
Priv
Default: Auth, Priv
Authentication
Protocol
Select the authentication
protocol
Range: MD5, SHA
Default: MD5
Authentication
Password
Enter an Authentication
Password.
Range: 8 - 48 characters
Default: Empty
Privacy
Protocol
Select a Privacy Protocol.
Range: DES, AES
Default: DES
Privacy
Password
Enter a Privacy
Password.
Range: 8 - 48 characters
Default: Empty
Engine ID
Enter an Engine ID to be
used for both the Agent
and the Trap.
Default: Empty
These fields are
enabled if
Authentication is
selected in the
Security Level field.
These fields are
enabled if Privacy is
selected in the
Security Level. field.
Version3
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
15 To specifically define one or more valid terminals, ensure that the
Accept SNMP Packets from any Host option is cleared and then click the
Add button.
The Accepted Host IP Address dialog box opens.
16 Enter the IP Address of the Manager terminal from which valid
queries may be sent to the MCU, and then click OK.
Click the Add button to define additional IP Addresses.
The IP Address or Addresses are displayed in the Accept SNMP Packets
from These Hosts box.
Queries sent from terminals not listed in the Accept SNMP Packets from These
Hosts box are regarded as a violation of the MCU security, and if the Send
Authentication Trap check box is selected, an appropriate message will be sent
to all the terminals listed in the SNMP Properties – Traps dialog box.
17 In the RMX - SNMP Properties - Security dialog box, click OK.
Hot Backup
Hot Backup implements a high availability and rapid recovery solution.
Two RMX’s are configured in a Master/Slave relationship: the Master MCU
is active while the Slave acts as a passive, fully redundant Hot Backup of
the Master MCU.
All conferencing activities and configuration changes that do not require a
System Reset are mirrored on the Slave MCU five seconds after they occur
on the Master MCU.
In the event of failure of the Master MCU, the Slave MCU transparently
becomes active and assumes the activities and functions with the backed
up settings of the failed Master MCU.
19-95
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Both dial-in and dial-out participants are automatically dialed out and
reconnected to their conferences. However, the Hot Backup solution is
optimized for dial-out participants as all the dial-out numbers are defined
in the system and are available for redialing.
The following entities are automatically backed up and updated on the
Slave MCU:
•
Ongoing Conferences
•
— Layout
— Video Force
— Participant Status (Muted, Blocked, Suspended)
Reservations
•
Meeting Rooms
•
Entry Queues
•
SIP Factories
•
Gateway Profiles
•
IVR services (excluding .wav files)
•
Recording Link
•
Profiles
•
IP Network Settings:
—
—
—
—
—
H.323 settings
SIP settings
DNS settings
Fix Ports (TCP, UDP) settings
QoS settings
Guidelines
19-96
•
Both Master and Slave MCUs must have the same software version
installed.
•
The Users list and Passwords must be the same on both the Master and
Slave MCUs.
•
There must be connectivity between the Master and Slave MCUs,
either on the same network or on different networks connected
through routers.
•
In the event of failure of the Master MCU the Slave MCU assumes the
role of the Master MCU. The Master/Slave relationship is reversed: the
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Slave, now active, remains the Master and the previous Master MCU,
when restarted, assumes the role of Slave MCU.
•
No changes to the Slave MCU are permitted while it is functioning as
the Hot Backup. Therefore no ongoing conferences or reservations can
be added manually to the Slave MCU.
•
If Hot Backup is disabled, all ongoing conferences and Reservations
backed up on the Slave MCU are automatically deleted.
•
Master and Slave initial roles can be reversed only after all ongoing
conferences and Reservations are deleted.
•
Changes to the Master MCU that require a System Reset can only be
made after Hot Backup is disabled.
Enabling Hot Backup
To enable Hot Backup:
1
On the RMX menu, click Setup > Hot Backup.
The RMX Hot Backup dialog box is displayed.
2
Complete or modify the following fields:
Table 19-20 Hot Backup
Field
Description
Hot Backup
Enabled
Select this check box to enable Hot Backup.
19-97
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-20 Hot Backup
Field
Description
MCU Role:
This setting determines the role of the MCU in the Hot
Backup configuration.
Select either Master MCU or Slave MCU from the
drop-down menu.
Paired MCU IP
Address
Synchronization
Status
3
Enter the Control Unit IP Address of the:
Slave MCU (if this MCU is the Master)
•
•
Master MCU (if this MCU is the Slave)
The status of the synchronization between the Master
and Slave MCUs in the Hot Backup configuration is
indicated as:
• OK - Hot Backup is functioning normally, and the
Master and Slave MCUs are synchronized.
•
Attempting - Hot Backup is attempting to
synchronize the Master and Slave MCUs.
•
Fail - A failure occurred while trying to synchronize
the paired MCUs.
•
None - Hot Backup has not been enabled.
Click OK.
Modifications to the Master MCU Requiring System Reset
Modifications to the configuration of the Master MCU that require a
System Reset cannot be performed while Hot Backup is enabled.
To modify the Master MCU configuration:
1 Disable the Hot Backup on the Master and Slave MCUs.
19-98
2
Modify the Master MCUs configuration.
3
Reset the Master MCU.
4
When the reset is complete, enable Hot Backup on the Master and Slave
MCUs.
5
If required, reset the Slave MCU.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Audible Alarms
In addition to the visual cues used to detect events occurring on the RMX,
an audible alarm can be activated and played when participants request
Operator Assistance.
Using Audible Alarms
The Audible Alarm functionality for Operator Assistance requests is
enabled for each MCU in either the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager.
The Audible Alarm played when Operator Assistance is requested is
enabled and selected in the Setup > Audible Alarm > User
Customization. When the Audible Alarm is activated, the *.wav file
selected in the User Customization is played, and it is repeated according to
the number of repetitions defined in the User Customization.
If more than one RMX is monitored in the RMX Manager, the Audible
Alarm must be enabled separately for each RMX installed in the site/
configuration. A different *.wav file can be selected for each MCU.
When multiple Audible Alarms are activated in different conferences or
by multiple MCUs, the Audible Alarms are synchronized and played one
after the other. It is important to note that when Stop Repeating Alarm is
selected from the toolbar from the RMX Web Client or RMX Manager, all
activated Audible Alarms are immediately halted.
Audible Alarm Permissions
An operator/administrator can configure the Request Operator
Assistance audible alarm, however Users with different authorization
level have different configuration capabilities as shown in Table 19-21.
Table 19-21 Audible Alarm Permissions
Option
User Customization
Download Audible Alarm File
Stop Repeating Alarms
Operator
Administrator






19-99
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Stop Repeating Message
The RMX User can stop playing the audible alarm at any time. If more
than one audible alarm has been activated, all activated alarms are
immediately stopped.
If after stopping the Audible Alarms a new Operator Assistance request
event occurs, the audible alarm is re-activated.
To stop the Audible Alarm on the RMX Client or RMX Manager:
>> On the RMX menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms >Stop Repeating
Alarm.
When selected all audible alarms are immediately stopped.
Configuring the Audible Alarms
User Customization
The operators and administrators can:
•
Enable/Disable the Audible Alarm.
•
Select whether to repeat the Audible Alarm.
•
Define the number of repetitions and the interval between the
repetitions.
To Customize the Audio Alert on the RMX Client or RMX Manager:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms > User
Customization.
The User Customization window opens.
19-100
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
2
Define the following parameters:
Table 19-22 Audible Alarm - User Customization Options
3
Option
Description
Enable Audible
Alarm
Select this check box to enable the Audible Alarm
feature and to define its properties.
When this check box is cleared, the Audible Alarm
functionality is disabled.
Repeat Audible
Alarm
Select this check box to play the Audible Alarm
repeatedly. When selected, it enables the definition
of the number of repetitions and the interval between
repetitions.
When cleared, the Audible Alarm will not be
repeated and will be played only once.
Number of
Repetitions
Define the number of times the audible alarm will be
played.
Default number of repetitions is 4.
Repetition interval
in seconds
Define the number of seconds that the system will
wait before playing the Audible Alarm again.
Default interval is 20 seconds.
Click OK.
Replacing the Audible Alarm File
Each RMX is shipped with a default tone file in *.wav format that plays a
specific tone when participants request Operator Assistance. This file can
be replaced by a *.wav file with your own recording. The file must be in
*.wav format and its length cannot exceed one hour.
Only the User with Administrator permission can download the Audible
Alarm file.
19-101
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To replace the Audio file on the RMX Client or RMX Manager:
1 On the RMX menu, click Setup > Audible Alarms > Download
Audible Alarm File.
The Download Audible Alarm File window opens.
2
Click the Browse button to select the audio file (*.wav) to download.
The Open dialog box opens.
3
Select the appropriate *.wav file and then click the Open button.
The selected file name is displayed in the Install Audible Alarm File
dialog box.
4
Optional. You can play the selected file or the currently used file by
clicking the Play ( ) button as follows:
5
19-102
a
Click Play Selected File to play a file saved on your computer.
b
Click Play RMX File to play the file currently saved on the RMX.
In the Download Audible Alarm File dialog box, click OK to download
the file to the MCU.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
The new file replaces the file stored on the MCU. If multiple RMXs are
configured in the RMX Manager, the file must be downloaded to each of
the required MCUs separately.
Multilingual Setting
Each supported language is represented by a country flag in the Welcome
Screen and can be selected as the language for the RMX Web Client.
Customizing the Multilingual Setting
The languages available for selection in the Login screen of the RMX Web
Client can be modified using the Multilingual Setting option.
To customize the Multilingual Setting:
1
On the RMX menu, click Setup > Customize Display Settings >
Multilingual Setting.
The Multilingual Setting dialog box is displayed.
Selected
Languages
2
Click the check boxes of the languages to be available for selection.
3
Click OK.
4
Log out from the RMX Web Client and Log in for the customization
to take effect.
19-103
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Banner Display and Customization
The Login Screen and Main Screen of the RMX Web Client and the RMX
Manager can display informative or warning text banners. These banners
can include general information or they can be cautioning users to the
terms and conditions under which they may log into and access the
system, as required in many secured environments.
Banner display is enabled in the Setup > Customize Display Settings >
Banners Configuration.
When the JITC_MODE System Flag is set to YES, the banners are displayed
by default and cannot be disabled. When set to NO (default), banner display is
according to the check box selection in the Banners Configuration dialog box.
Customizing Banners
The Login and Main Screen banners can be customized to display
conference information, assistance information or warning text as
required in the Ultra Secure Mode.
To customize the banners:
1 In the RMX menu, click Setup > Customize Display Settings >
Banners Configuration.
The Banners Configuration dialog box opens.
19-104
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
2
Customize the banners by modifying the following fields:
Table 20
Banner Configuration
Description
Field
Login Page
Banner
Main Page
Banner
3
Check Box
Text Field
Select or clear
the check box
to enable or
disable the
display of the
banner.
Note: Banner
display cannot
be disabled in
when the
JITC_Mode
flag is set to
YES.
Edit the text in this field
to meet local
requirements:
•
Banner content is
multilingual and
uses Unicode, UTF8 encoding. All text
and special
characters can be
used.
•
Maximum banner
size is 100KB.
•
The banner may not
be left blank when
the JITC_Mode flag
is set to YES.
Restore
Default Button
Click the button
to restore the
default text to
the banner
Click the OK button.
Banner Display
Login Screen Banner
The Login screen banner can display any text, for example the terms and
conditions for system usage (default text) that is required in the Ultra
Secure Mode. The RMX User must acknowledge that the information was
19-105
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
read and click the Accept button to proceed to the Login screen as shown
in the following screen:
Terms of Usage
Banner
Accept
Button
When the RMX is configured to work in Ultra Secure Mode, such as
Maximum Security Environments, the display banner includes the terms
and conditions for system usage as detailed in the default text:
You are accessing a U.S. Government (USG) Information
System (IS) that is provided for USG-authorized use only.
By using this IS (which includes any device attached to
this IS), you consent to the following conditions:
— The USG routinely intercepts and monitors
—
—
19-106
communications on this IS for purposes including, but
not limited to, penetration testing, COMSEC
monitoring, network operations and defense, personnel
misconduct (PM), law enforcement (LE), and
counterintelligence (CI) investigations.
At any time, the USG may inspect and seize data stored
on this IS.
Communications using, or data stored on, this IS are
not private, are subject to routine monitoring,
interception, and search, and may be disclosed or
used for any USG authorized purpose.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
— This IS includes security measures (e.g.
—
authentication and access controls) to protect USG
interests--not for your personal benefit or privacy.
Notwithstanding the above, using this IS does not
constitute consent to PM, LE or CI investigative
searching or monitoring of the content of privileged
communications, or work product, related to personal
representation or services by attorneys,
psychotherapists, or clergy, and their assistants.
Such communications and work product are private and
confidential. See User Agreement for details.
Main Screen Banner
The Main Screen banner is displayed at the bottom of the screen, as
follows:
Banner
When the RMX is configured to work in Ultra Secure Mode, such as the
Maximum Security environment, the display banner includes the
following default text:
THIS IS A DOD SYSTEM AND IS SUBJECT TO MONITORING,
UNAUTHORIZED USE MAY SUBJECT YOU TO ADMINISTRATIVE ACTION
OR CRIMINAL PROSECUTION AND PENALTIES.
19-107
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Software Management
The Software Management menu is used to backup and restore the RMX's
configuration files and to download MCU software.
Backup and Restore Guidelines
•
Direct access to the RMX file system is disabled in both Ultra Secure
Mode and standard security mode.
•
System Backup can only be performed by an administrator.
•
The System Backup procedure creates a single backup file that can be
viewed or modified only by developers.
•
A System Backup file from one system can be restored on another
system.
•
To ensure file system consistency, all configuration changes are
suspended during the backup procedure.
•
The following parameters, settings and files are backed up:
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
—
19-108
MCMS configuration files (/mcms/Cfg):
Network and service configurations,
Rooms,
Profiles
Reservations
System Flags
Resource Allocation
IVR messages, music
RMX Web Client user setting - fonts, windows
RMX Web Client global settings – notes, address book, language
Private keys and certificates (TLS)
Conference participant settings
Operation DB (administrator list)
SNMP settings
Time configuration
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Using Software Management
To backup configuration files:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Backup Configuration.
The Backup Configuration dialog box opens.
2
Click the Browse button.
The Browse To File dialog box opens.
3
Select the Backup Directory Path and then click Backup.
To restore configuration files:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Restore Configuration.
2
Browse to the Restore Directory Path where the backed up
configuration files are stored and then click Restore.
To download MCU software files:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Software Management >
Software Download.
2
Browse to the Install Path and then click Install.
Ping RMX
The Ping administration tool enables the RMX Signaling Host to test
network connectivity by Pinging IP addresses.
19-109
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Guidelines
•
The IP addressing mode can be either Ipv4 or Ipv6.
•
Both explicit IP addresses and Host Names are supported.
•
The RMX Web Client blocks any attempt to issue another Ping
command before the current Ping command has completed. Multiple
Ping commands issued simultaneously from multiple RMX Web
Clients are also blocked.
Using Ping
To Ping a network entity from the RMX:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Tools > Ping.
The Ping dialog box is displayed:
2
Modify or complete the following fields:
Table 21 Ping
3
19-110
Field
Description
IP Version
Select IPv4 or IPv6 from the drop-down
menu.
Host Name or Address
Enter the Host Name or IP Address of the
network entity to be Pinged.
Click the Ping button.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
The Ping request is sent to the Host Name or IP Address of the RMX
entity.
The Answer is either:
— OK
or
— FAILED
Notification Settings
The RMX can display notifications when:
• A new RMX user connects to the MCU.
•
A new conference is started.
•
Not all defined participants are connected to the conference or when
a single participant is connected
•
A change in the MCU status occurs and an alarm is added to the
alarm’s list.
A welcome message is displayed to the RMX user upon connection.
To configure the notifications:
1 On the RMX menu, select Setup > Notification Settings.
The Notification Settings dialog box is displayed.
19-111
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The following notification options are displayed.
Table 19-1 Notification Settings Parameters
19-112
Field
Description
New Connection
Notification of a new user/administrator connecting
to the RMX
New Conference
Created
New conference has been created.
Conference Not
Full
The conference is not full and additional participants
are defined for the conference.
Welcome
Message
A welcome message after user/administrator logon.
Active Alarms
Update
Updates you of any new alarm that occurred.
Fault List Updated
Updates you when the faults list is updated (new
faults are added or existing faults are removed).
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
2
Enable/Disable All Notifications or Custom to select specific
notifications to display.
3
Click OK.
Logger Diagnostic Files
The Logger utility is a troubleshooting tool that continually records MCU
system messages and saves them to files in the MCU hard drive. For each
time interval defined in the system, a different data file is created. The
files may be retrieved from the hard drive for off-line analysis and
debugging purposes.
The Logger utility is activated at the MCU startup. The Logger is disabled
when the MCU is reset manually or when there is a problem with the
Logger utility, e.g. errors on the hard drive where files are saved. In such
cases, data cannot be retrieved.
When the MCU is reset via the RMX, the files are saved on the MCU hard
drive.
To access the Logger Diagnostic Files:
>> On the RMX menu, click Administration > Tools > Logger
Diagnostic Files.
19-113
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The following tasks can be performed:
Table 19-2 Diagnostic File Button Options
Button
Description
Refresh List
Refreshes the list and adds newly generated logger
files.
Select All
Selects all the logger files listed.
Browse
Selects the destination folder for download.
Retrieve Files
Saves files to the destination folder.
When retrieved, the log file name structure is as follows:
•
Sequence number (starting with 1)
•
Date and Time of first message
•
Date and Time of last message
•
File size
•
Special information about the data, such as Startup
File name structure:
Log_SNxxxxxxxxxx_FMDddmmyyy_FMThhmm_LMDddmmyyyy_LMThhmm_SZxxxxx
xxxxx_SUY.log
File name format:
• SN = Sequence Number
•
FM = First Message, date and time
•
LM = Last Message, date and time
•
SZ = Size
•
SU = Startup (Y/N) during the log file duration
Example:
Log_SN0000000002_FMD06032007_FMT083933_LMD06032007_LMT084356_SZ18
4951_SUY.log.
Retrieving the Logger Files:
1 Select the log files to retrieve. Multiple selections of files are enabled
using standard Windows conventions.
2
19-114
In the Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box, click the Browse button.
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
3
In the Browse for Folder window, select the directory location to save
the Logger files and click OK.
You will return to the Logger Diagnostic Files dialog box.
4
Click the Retrieve Files button.
The log files (in *.txt format) are saved to the defined directory and a
confirmation caption box is displayed indicating a successful
retrieval of the log files.
Viewing the Logger File contents:
To analyze the log files generated by the system, open the retrieved *.txt
files in any text editor application, i.e. Notepad, Textpad or MS Word.
1
Using Windows Explorer, browse to the directory containing the
retrieved log files.
2
Use any text editor application to open the log file(s).
Auditor
An Auditor is a user that can view Auditor and CDR files for system
auditing purposes.
19-115
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The Event Auditor enables administrators and auditors to analyze
configuration changes and unusual or malicious activities in the RMX
system.
Auditor operates in real time, recording all administration activities and
login attempts from the following RMX modules:
•
Control Unit
•
Shelf Manager
For a full list of monitored activities, see Table 19-4 on page 19-118 and
Table 19-5 on page 19-120.
The Auditor must always be active in the system. A System Alert is
displayed if it becomes inactive for any reason.
The Auditor tool is composed of the Auditor Files and the Auditor File
Viewer that enables you to view the Auditor Files.
Time stamps of Audit Events are GMT.
Auditor Files
Auditor Event History File Storage
All audit events are saved to a buffer file on hard disk in real time and
then written to a file on hard disk in XML in an uncompressed format.
A new current auditor event file is created when:
•
the system is started
•
the size of the current auditor event file exceeds 2 MB
•
the current auditor event file’s age exceeds 24 hours
Up to 1000 auditor event files are stored per RMX. These files are retained
for at least one year and require 1.05 GB of disk space. The files are
automatically deleted by the system (oldest first) when the system reaches
the auditor event file limit of 1000.
A System Alert is displayed with Can't store data displayed in its
Description field if:
19-116
•
the system cannot store 1000 files
•
the RMX does not have available disk space to retain files for one year
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Audit Event Files are retained by the RMX for at least 1 year. Any attempt
to delete an audit event file that is less than one year old raises a System
Alert with File was removed listed in the Description field.
Using the Restore Factory Defaults of the System Restore procedure erases
Audit Files.
Retrieving Auditor Files
You can open the Auditor file directly from the Auditor Files list or you can
retrieve the files and save them to a local workstation.
To access Auditor Files:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Tools > Auditor Files.
The Auditor Files dialog box is displayed.
File List
Directory
Path
The Auditor Files dialogue box displays a file list containing the
following file information:
—
—
—
—
—
Name
Size (Bytes)
First Message – date and time of the first audit event in the file
Last Message – date and time of the last audit event in the file
StartUp:
• True – file was created when the system was started
19-117
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
False – file was created when previous audit event file
reached a size of 2 MB or was more than 24 hours old
The order of the Auditor Files dialog box field header columns can be
changed and the fields can be filtered to enable searching.
For more information, see "Auditor File Viewer” on page 19-118.
To retrieve files for storage on a workstation:
1 Click Browse and select the folder on the workstation to receive the
files and then click OK.
The folder name is displayed in the directory path field.
2
Select the file(s) to be retrieved by clicking their names in the file list
or click Select All to retrieve all the files. (Windows multiple
selection techniques can be used.)
3
Click Retrieve Files.
The selected files are copied to the selected directory on the
workstation.
To open the file in the Auditor File Viewer:
>> Double-click the file.
Auditor File Viewer
The Auditor File Viewer enables Auditors and Administrators to view the
content of and perform detailed analysis on auditor event data in a
selected Auditor Event File.
You can view an Auditor Event File directly from the Auditor Files list or by
opening the file from the Auditor File Viewer.
To open the Auditor Viewer from the Administration Menu:
1 On the RMX menu, click Administration > Tools > Auditor File
Viewer.
The Auditor File Viewer is displayed.
19-118
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
If you previously double clicked an Auditor Event File in the Auditor
Files list, that file is automatically opened.
Local File
Event
List (ID)
Request Transaction
Tree
Response Transaction
Tree
The following fields are displayed for each event:
Table 19-3 Auditor Event Columns
Field
Description
Event ID
The sequence number of the event generated by
the RMX.
Date & Time
The date and time of the event taken from the
RMX’s Local Time setting.
User Name
The Username (Login Name) of the user that
triggered the event.
19-119
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-3 Auditor Event Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Reporting Module
The RMX system internal module that reported the
event:
• MCMS
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Central Signaling
MPL Simulation
RMX Web Client
CM Switch
Shelf Management
ART
Video
Card Manager
RTM
MUX
Workstation
The name (alias) of the workstation used to send
the request that triggered the event.
IP Address
(Workstation)
The IP address of the workstation used to send
the request that triggered the event.
Event Type
Auditor events can be triggered by:
• API
•
•
19-120
MPL
HTTP
RMX Internal Event
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-3 Auditor Event Columns (Continued)
Field
Description
Event
The process, action, request or transaction that
was performed or rejected.
• POST:SET transactions (API)
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Process Completed
Configuration changes via XML (API)
Login/Logout (API)
GET (HTTP)
PUT (HTTP)
MKDIR (HTTP)
RMDIR (HTTP)
Startup (RMX Internal Event)
Shutdown (RMX Internal Event)
Reset (RMX Internal Event)
Enter Diagnostic Mode (RMX Internal Event)
IP address changes via USB (RMX Internal
Event)
Status of the process, action, request or
transaction returned by the system:
• Yes – performed by the system.
•
No – rejected by the system.
Description
A text string describing the process, action,
request or transaction.
Additional
Information
An optional text string describing the process,
action, request or transaction in additional detail.
The order of the Auditor File Viewer field header columns can be
changed and the fields can be sorted and filtered to facilitate different
analysis methods.
2
In the event list, click the events or use the keyboard’s Up-arrow and
Down-arrow keys to display the Request Transaction and Response
Transaction XML trees for each audit event.
The transaction XML trees can be expanded and collapsed by clicking
the expand
( ) and collapse ( ) buttons.
19-121
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To open an auditor event file stored on the workstation:
1
Click the Local File button (
2
Navigate to the folder on the workstation that contains the audit
event file.
3
Select the audit event file to be opened.
4
Click Open.
) to open the Open dialogue box.
The selected file is opened in the Auditor Viewer.
Audit Events
Alerts and Faults
Table 1 lists Alerts and Faults that are recorded by the Auditor.
Table 19-4 Alerts and Faults
Event
Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management session per user
Attempt to exceed the maximum number of management sessions per
system
Central Signaling indicating Recovery status.
Failed login attempt
Failed to open Apache server configuration file.
Failed to save Apache server configuration file.
Fallback version is being used.
File system scan failure.
File system space shortage.
Internal MCU reset.
Internal System configuration during startup.
Invalid date and time.
Invalid MCU Version.
19-122
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-4 Alerts and Faults (Continued)
Event
IP addresses of Signaling Host and Control Unit are the same.
IP Network Service configuration modified.
IP Network Service deleted.
Login
Logout
Management Session Time Out
MCU Reset to enable Diagnostics mode.
MCU reset.
Music file error.
New activation key was loaded.
New version was installed.
NTP synchronization failure.
Polycom default User exists.
Private version is loaded.
Restoring Factory Defaults.
Secured SIP communication failed.
Session disconnected without logout
SSH is enabled.
System Configuration modified.
System is starting.
System Resets.
TCP disconnection
Terminal initiated MCU reset.
The Log file system is disabled.
19-123
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 19-4 Alerts and Faults (Continued)
Event
The software contains patch(es).
USB key used to change system configuration.
User closed the browser
User initiated MCU reset.
Transactions
Table 2 lists Transactions that are recorded by the Auditor.
Table 19-5 Transactions
Transaction
TRANS_CFG:SET_CFG
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:DEL_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:NEW_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:SET_DEFAULT_H323_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:SET_DEFAULT_SIP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:UPDATE_IP_SERVICE
TRANS_IP_SERVICE:UPDATE_MANAGEMENT_NETWORK
TRANS_ISDN_PHONE:ADD_ISDN_PHONE
TRANS_ISDN_PHONE:DEL_ISDN_PHONE
TRANS_ISDN_PHONE:UPDATE_ISDN_PHONE
TRANS_ISDN_SERVICE:DEL_ISDN_SERVICE
TRANS_ISDN_SERVICE:NEW_ISDN_SERVICE
TRANS_ISDN_SERVICE:SET_DEFAULT_ISDN_SERVICE
TRANS_ISDN_SERVICE:UPDATE_ISDN_SERVICE
TRANS_MCU:BEGIN_RECEIVING_VERSION
19-124
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
Table 19-5 Transactions (Continued)
Transaction
TRANS_MCU:COLLECT_INFO
TRANS_MCU:CREATE_DIRECTORY
TRANS_MCU:FINISHED_TRANSFER_VERSION
TRANS_MCU:LOGIN
TRANS_MCU:LOGOUT
TRANS_MCU:REMOVE_DIRECTORY
TRANS_MCU:REMOVE_DIRECTORY_CONTENT
TRANS_MCU:RENAME
TRANS_MCU:RESET
TRANS_MCU:SET_PORT_CONFIGURATION
TRANS_MCU:SET_RESTORE_TYPE
TRANS_MCU:SET_TIME
TRANS_MCU:TURN_SSH
TRANS_MCU:UPDATE_KEY_CODE
TRANS_OPERATOR:CHANGE_PASSWORD
TRANS_OPERATOR:DELETE_OPERATOR
TRANS_OPERATOR:NEW_OPERATOR
TRANS_RTM_ISDN_SPAN:UPDATE_RTM_ISDN_SPAN
TRANS_SNMP:UPDATE
19-125
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
ActiveX Bypass
At sites that, for security reasons, do not permit Microsoft® ActiveX®
to be installed, the MSI (Windows Installer File) utility can be used to
install .NET Framework and .NET Security Settings components on
workstations throughout the network.
All workstation that connect to RMX systems must have both .NET
Framework and .NET Security Settings running locally. These
components are used for communication with the RMX and can only
be installed on workstations by users with administrator privileges.
The MSI utility requires the IP addresses of all the RMX systems
(both control unit and Shelf Management IP addresses) that each
workstation is to connect to.
If the IP address of the any of the target RMXs is changed, the
ActiveX components must be reinstalled.
Installing ActiveX
To install ActiveX components on all workstations in the network:
1 Download the MSI file EMA.ClassLoaderInstaller.msi from the
Polycom Resource Center.
The MSI file contains installation scripts for both .NET Framework
and .NET Security Settings.
2
Create a text file to be used during the installation containing the IP
addresses of all the RMX systems (both control unit and Shelf
Management IP addresses) that each workstation in the network is to
connect to.
The file must be named url_list.txt and must be saved in the same
folder as the downloaded MSI file.
19-126
Chapter 19-RMX Administration and Utilities
3
Install the ActiveX components on all workstations on the network
that connect to RMX systems.
The installation is done by the network administrator using a 3rd
party network software installation utility and is transparent to all
other users.
Resetting the RMX
System Reset saves system configuration changes and restarts the system
with the latest settings.
To reset the RMX:
1 In the RMX Management pane, click the Hardware Monitor button.
The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed.
2
Click the Reset (
) button.
When the RMX system is reset, during RMX Startup the Progress Bar
appears at the bottom of the RMX Status pane.
19-127
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The progress bar displays the amount of time remaining for the reset
process to complete:
. The Startup progress is also
indicated by a green bar moving from left to right.
The duration of the Startup depends on the type of activity that preceded
the MCU reset. For example: Fast Configuration Wizard, New Version
installation, Version Upgrade, Restore Last Configuration etc.
19-128
20
RMX Hardware Monitoring
The status and properties of the RMX hardware components can be
viewed and monitored in the Hardware Monitor list pane.
Viewing the Status of the Hardware Components
The Hardware Monitor’s status column displays the present status of the
hardware components. In addition to the status, temperature and
voltage indications are provided for each component.
The MCU’s Shelf Management Server is what users are connecting to
when accessing the Hardware Monitor pane. This pane can be accessed in
either two ways: through the RMX Web Client or the Shelf Management
Server. Connection via the Shelf Management Server enables users to
access the Hardware Monitor even when the connection through the RMX
Web Client is unavailable. The ability to connect directly via the Shelf
Management Server enables users to: enter the Hardware Monitor and
view the problematic hardware components, reset and restart the MCU
and run diagnostics. Running diagnostics and restarting the MCU can
only be done via direct connection to the Shelf Management Server. For
more information, see "Diagnostic Mode (RMX 1500/2000/4000)” on
page 20-30
When accessing the Shelf Management server, the content displayed will be
available in English only.
20-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To view the status of the Hardware Components on the RMX 1500/2000/
4000:
In the RMX Management pane, click the Hardware Monitor button.
The Hardware Monitor pane is displayed.
The Hardware Monitor pane displays the following RMX hardware
component’s status columns:
Table 20-1 HW Monitor Pane Status Columns
20-2
Field
Description
Slot
Displays an icon according to the HW component type
and the slot number. The icon displays the hardware
status as follows:
• An exclamation point (!) indicates errors in the HW
component.
•
Card icon with the reset button ( ) indicates that the
HW component is currently resetting.
•
Card icon with diagnostic tools ( ) indicates that the
HW component is in diagnostic mode.
Type
The type of hardware component card.
Status
The current status of the HW component; Normal, Major,
Critical, Resetting, Diagnostics, or Empty.
Temperature
Monitors the temperature of the hardware components;
Normal, Major and Critical.
Note: Critical condition invokes a system shut down.
Voltage
The voltage threshold of the hardware component; either
Normal or Major.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
HW Monitor Pane Tool bar
The following buttons appear in the tool bar of the Hardware Monitor:
Table 20-2 HW Monitor Pane Tool bar Buttons
Button
Name
Description
System Reset
Resets and restarts the system. Resetting saves
settings and information that you changed in the
system, i.e. IP Services, etc...
System Shut
Down
Safely shuts down the system instead of
unplugging or manually shutting it down.
System Start Up
Starts up the system.
Note: This button is only displayed when
connecting directly to the Shelf Management
server.
Shelf Manager
Sets the MFA, CPU and Switch (Cards: MPM/
MPM+/MPMx, CNTL and RTM IP) into
diagnostic mode. For more information, see
"Diagnostic Mode (RMX 1500/2000/4000)” on
page 20-30.
Note: This button is only displayed when
connecting directly to the Shelf Management
server.
Logger Mode
Diagnostics Tests selection and Tests
monitoring.
Note: This button is only displayed when
connecting directly to the Shelf Management
server.
Viewing Hardware RMX 1500 Component’s
Properties
The properties displayed for the hardware components will vary
according to the type of component viewed. These component properties
can be grouped as follows:
20-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
MCU Properties (RMX 1500)
•
Card Properties (MPMx, CPU, RTM IP, RTM ISDN)
•
Supporting Hardware Components Properties (Backplane, FANS,
LAN)
No properties are provided for Power Supply (PWR). For more information, see
the RMX 1500 Hardware Guide, "RMX 1500 Power Supply” on page 1-20.
The Hardware Properties dialog box has the following structure:
Slot number
HW component type
Component
Information
(changes
according to
selected
type)
20-4
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
To view the MCU Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select Properties for RMX 1500, slot 0.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-3 MCU Properties - General Info
Field
Description
Chassis File ID
The ID assigned to the MCU’s chassis file.
Chassis Serial
Number
The serial number assigned to the MCU’s chassis.
Part Number
The chassis part number. The Part Number contains
the letter A/B/C/D that represents the chassis type.
Card Type
The name of the hardware product or component,
i.e. RMX 2000, Backplane.
Chassis HW
Version
Indicates the MCU’s current chassis hardware
version.
Turn SSH
Enables/disables the SSH monitor. This is a secured
terminal enabling access to the operating system in
order to define Linux commands.
20-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events that were recorded by
the system for the RMX.
The logged events can be saved to a *.xls file by clicking the Save
Event Log button. It is not possible to save individual or multiple
selected events; the entire log file must be saved.
Table 20-4 MCU Properties - Event Log
20-6
Column
Description
Record ID
The recorded ID number of the logged event.
Time Stamp
Lists the date and time that the event occurred.
Type
Displays the type of event recorded in the log.
Sensor Number
The number of the LED sensor on the RMX unit.
Sensor Description
Describes which sensor the event is being logged.
Status
The sensor’s active status.
Ipmb Address(hex)
Contains all the internal IPMI network addresses on
the IPMB bus, i.e. 0x20 (Switch), 0x86 (MFA), etc...
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
3
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the RMX, i.e.
temperatures and main power sensors.
The Active Alarms dialog box displays fields that relate to faults and
errors detected on the RMX by sensors. The Active Alarms dialog box
is divided into two sections: HW Alarm List and SW Alarm List.
Each section’s alarm list can be saved as a *.xls file by clicking the
Save HW Alarm List and Save SW Alarm List buttons respectively.
Each alarm list color codes the severity of the alarm; Critical (RED),
Major (ORANGE) and Normal (GREEN).
If you connected to the Hardware Monitoring via the Shelf Management server,
the SW Alarm List section will not be displayed.
To view the Card Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for the desired hardware component.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-5 Card Properties - General Info
Field
Description
Hardware
Version
The hardware component’s version number.
Software
Version
The version number of the software installed on
card.
20-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 20-5 Card Properties - General Info (Continued)
Field
Description
Serial Number
The hardware component’s serial number.
Card Type
Displays the type of card that occupies the slot.
Card Part Number
The part number of the HW component’s board.
Card
Mac Address 1
Specific hardware address of the component. This
address is burnt onto the component and is
automatically identified by the system.
Card
MAC Address 2
(If applicable) second MAC address.
Mezzanine A
Hardware
Version
The Mezzanine A hardware component’s version
number.
Serial Number
The Mezzanine A hardware component’s serial
number.
Card Part Number
The part number of the Mezzanine A hardware
component’s board.
Mezzanine B
2
Hardware
Version
The Mezzanine B hardware component’s version
number.
Serial Number
The Mezzanine B hardware component’s serial
number.
Card Part Number
The part number of the Mezzanine B hardware
component’s board.
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events recorded by the
system on the HW component.
For more information, see "MCU Properties - Event Log” on
page 20-15.
3
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the hardware
component, i.e. temperatures and main power sensors.
For more information, see “Active Alarms” on page 20-16.
20-8
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
4
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
When using the Hardware Monitor to monitor units on MPMx cards
installed in the RMX’s slots, ISDN related DSPs are named smart,
indicating their additional MUX (Multiplexing) functionality.
MPMx Card
System
Components
in MCU Slots
Units on
MPMx Card
20-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To View the Supporting Hardware Components Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for the desired supporting hardware component.
The component’s properties dialog box will appear with the General
Info tab displayed.
Backplane Properties:
The RMX unit’s backplane properties provides the following
information:
Table 20-6 Backplane Properties- General Info
20-10
Field
Description
HW Version
The Backplane’s current hardware version.
SW Version
The Backplane’s current software version.
Serial Number
The Backplane’s serial number.
Card Type
The name of the hardware component for which
information is being displayed, e.g. Backplane.
Card Part Number
The Backplane’s part number.
Card MAC Address 1
The Backplane’s hardware address.
Card MAC Address 2
(If applicable) second Backplane MAC address.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
FAN Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 fans that regulate the unit’s
temperature. If the temperature increases, the fans speed will
increase and vice-versa. A “Critical” condition in the fans operation
will result in a system shut down.
Table 20-7 FANS Properties - General Info
Field
Description
General Settings
Min. Speed Level (rpm)
The minimum speed level of the fans.
Max. Speed Level (rpm)
The maximum speed level of the fans.
Normal Operating Level
(rpm)
The normal operating level defined for the fans.
Current Fan Level (rpm)
The current operating level of the fans.
Fans
Fan 1 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 1.
Fan 2 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 2.
Fan 3 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 3.
20-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
LAN 1, LAN 2, LAN 3 Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 external LAN connectors which
register the following information listed below. The information will
be refreshed every 8 seconds and also contains a peek detector to log
the maximal values, since the last peek values reset.
2
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
Viewing Hardware RMX 2000 Component’s
Properties
The properties displayed for the hardware components will vary
according to the type of component viewed. These component properties
can be grouped as follows:
20-12
•
MCU Properties (RMX 2000)
•
Card Properties (MPM/F/P, MPM+, MPMx, CPU, RTM IP, RTM
ISDN, RTM LAN)
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
•
Supporting Hardware Components Properties (Backplane, FANS,
LAN)
No properties are provided for Power Supply (PWR). For more information, see
the RMX 2000 Hardware Guide, "RMX 2000 Specifications” on page 1-2.
From Version 7.1, MPM media cards are not supported.
The Hardware Properties dialog box has the following structure:
Slot number
HW component type
Component
Information
(changes
according to
selected type)
20-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To view the MCU Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for RMX 2000, slot 0.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-8 MCU Properties - General Info
20-14
Field
Description
Chassis File ID
The ID assigned to the MCU’s chassis file.
Chassis Serial
Number
The serial number assigned to the MCU’s chassis.
Part Number
The chassis part number. The Part Number contains
the letter A/B/C/D that represents the chassis type.
Card Type
The name of the hardware product or component,
i.e. RMX 2000, Backplane.
Chassis HW
Version
Indicates the MCU’s current chassis hardware
version.
Turn SSH
Enables/disables the SSH monitor. This is a secured
terminal enabling access to the operating system in
order to define Linux commands.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
2
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events that were recorded by
the system for the RMX.
The logged events can be saved to a *.xls file by clicking the Save
Event Log button. It is not possible to save individual or multiple
selected events; the entire log file must be saved.
Table 20-9 MCU Properties - Event Log
Column
Description
Record ID
The recorded ID number of the logged event.
Time Stamp
Lists the date and time that the event occurred.
Type
Displays the type of event recorded in the log.
Sensor Number
The number of the LED sensor on the RMX unit.
Sensor Description
Describes which sensor the event is being logged.
Status
The sensor’s active status.
Ipmb Address(hex)
Contains all the internal IPMI network addresses on
the IPMB bus, i.e. 0x20 (Switch), 0x86 (MFA), etc...
20-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
3
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the RMX, i.e.
temperatures and main power sensors.
The Active Alarms dialog box displays fields that relate to faults and
errors detected on the RMX by sensors. The Active Alarms dialog box
is divided into two sections: HW Alarm List and SW Alarm List.
Each section’s alarm list can be saved as a *.xls file by clicking the
Save HW Alarm List and Save SW Alarm List buttons respectively.
Each alarm list color codes the severity of the alarm; Critical (RED),
Major (ORANGE) and Normal (GREEN).
If you connected to the Hardware Monitoring via the Shelf Management server,
the SW Alarm List section will not be displayed.
To view the Card Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for the desired hardware component.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-10 Card Properties - General Info
20-16
Field
Description
HW Version
The hardware component’s version number.
SW Version
The version number of the software installed on
card.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Table 20-10 Card Properties - General Info (Continued)
2
Field
Description
Serial Number
The hardware component’s serial number.
Card Type
Displays the type of card that occupies the slot.
Card Part Number
The part number of the HW component’s board.
Card MAC
Address 1
Specific hardware address of the component. This
address is burnt onto the component and is
automatically identified by the system.
Card MAC
Address 2
(If applicable) second Mac address.
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events that was recorded by
the system on the HW component.
For more information, see "MCU Properties - Event Log” on
page 20-15.
3
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the hardware
component, i.e. temperatures and main power sensors.
For more information, see “Active Alarms” on page 20-16.
4
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
20-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
When using the Hardware Monitor to monitor units on MPM cards
installed in the RMX’s slots, ISDN related DSPs are named smart,
indicating their additional MUX (Multiplexing) functionality.
MPM Card
System
Components
in MCU Slots
Units on
MPM Card
20-18
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
To View the Supporting Hardware Components Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for the desired supporting hardware component.
The component’s properties dialog box will appear with the General
Info tab displayed.
Backplane Properties:
The RMX unit’s backplane properties provides the following
information:
Table 20-11 Backplane Properties- General Info
Field
Description
HW Version
The Backplane’s current hardware version.
SW Version
The Backplane’s current software version.
Serial Number
The Backplane’s serial number.
Card Type
The name of the hardware component for which
information is being displayed, e.g. Backplane.
Board Part Number
The Backplane’s part number.
Board Mac Address 1
The Backplane’s hardware address.
Board Mac Address 2
(If applicable) second Backplane Mac address.
20-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
FAN Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 fans that regulate the unit’s
temperature. If the temperature increases, the fans speed will
increase and vice-versa. A “Critical” condition in the fans operation
will result in a system shut down.
Table 20-12 FANS Properties - General Info
Field
Description
General Settings
Min. Speed Level (rpm)
The minimum speed level of the fans.
Max. Speed Level (rpm)
The maximum speed level of the fans.
Normal Operating Level
(rpm)
The normal operating level defined for the fans.
Current Fan Level (rpm)
The current operating level of the fans.
Fans
20-20
Fan 1 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 1.
Fan 2 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 2.
Fan 3 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 3.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
LAN 0, LAN 1, LAN 2 Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 external LAN connectors which
register the following information listed below. The information will
be refreshed every 8 seconds and also contains a peek detector to log
the maximal values, since the last peek values reset.
2
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
Viewing Hardware RMX 4000 Component’s
Properties
The properties displayed for the hardware components will vary
according to the type of component viewed. These component properties
can be grouped as follows:
•
MCU Properties (RMX 4000)
•
Card Properties (MPM+/MPMx, CNTL 4000, RTM-IP 4000, RTM
ISDN, RTM LAN)
20-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
•
Supporting Hardware Components Properties (Backplane, FANS,
LAN)
No properties are provided for Power Supply (PWR). For more information, see
the RMX 4000 Hardware Guide.
The Hardware Properties dialog box has the following structure:
Slot number
HW component type
Component
Information
(changes
according to
selected type)
20-22
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
To view the MCU Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select Properties for RMX 4000, slot 0.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-13 MCU Properties - General Info
Field
Description
Chassis File ID
The ID assigned to the MCU’s chassis file.
Chassis Serial
Number
The serial number assigned to the MCU’s chassis.
Part Number
The chassis part number. The Part Number contains
the letter A/B/C/D that represents the chassis type.
Card Type
The name of the hardware product or component,
i.e. RMX 4000, Backplane.
20-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 20-13 MCU Properties - General Info (Continued)
2
Field
Description
Chassis HW
Version
Indicates the MCU’s current chassis hardware
version.
Turn SSH
Enables/disables the SSH monitor. This is a secured
terminal enabling access to the operating system in
order to define Linux commands.
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events that were recorded by
the system for the RMX.
The logged events can be saved to a *.xls file by clicking the Save
Event Log button. It is not possible to save individual or multiple
selected events; the entire log file must be saved.
Table 20-14 MCU Properties - Event Log
20-24
Column
Description
Record ID
The recorded ID number of the logged event.
Time Stamp
Lists the date and time that the event occurred.
Type
Displays the type of event recorded in the log.
Sensor Number
The number of the LED sensor on the RMX unit.
Sensor Description
Describes which sensor the event is being logged.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Table 20-14 MCU Properties - Event Log (Continued)
3
Column
Description
Status
The sensor’s active status.
Ipmb Address(hex)
Contains all the internal IPMI network addresses on
the IPMB bus, i.e. 0x20 (Switch), 0x86 (MFA), etc...
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the RMX, i.e.
temperatures and main power sensors.
The Active Alarms dialog box displays fields that relate to faults and
errors detected on the RMX by sensors. The Active Alarms dialog box
is divided into two sections: HW Alarm List and SW Alarm List.
Each section’s alarm list can be saved as a *.xls file by clicking the
Save HW Alarm List and Save SW Alarm List buttons respectively.
Each alarm list color codes the severity of the alarm; Critical (RED),
Major (ORANGE) and Normal (GREEN).
If you connected to the Hardware Monitoring via the Shelf Management server,
the SW Alarm List section will not be displayed.
20-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To view the Card Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select Properties for the desired hardware component.
The following information is displayed:
Table 20-15 Card Properties - General Info
2
Field
Description
HW Version
The hardware component’s version number.
SW Version
The version number of the software installed on
card.
Serial Number
The hardware component’s serial number.
Card Type
Displays the type of card that occupies the slot.
Board Part
Number
The part number of the HW component’s board.
Board Mac
Address 1
Specific hardware address of the component. This
address is burnt onto the component and is
automatically identified by the system.
Board Mac
Address 2
(If applicable) second Mac address.
Click the Event Log tab to view a log of events that was recorded by
the system on the HW component.
For more information, see "MCU Properties - Event Log” on
page 20-15.
3
Click the Active Alarms tab to view alarms related to the hardware
component, i.e. temperatures and main power sensors.
For more information, see “Active Alarms” on page 20-16.
4
20-26
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
When using the Hardware Monitor to monitor units on MPM+ cards
installed in the RMX’s slots, ISDN related DSPs are named smart,
indicating their additional MUX (Multiplexing) functionality.
MPM+
Card
System
Components
in MCU Slots
Units on
MPM+ Card
20-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
To View the Supporting Hardware Components Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, either double-click or right-click and
select properties for the desired supporting hardware component.
The component’s properties dialog box will appear with the General
Info tab displayed.
Backplane+ Properties:
The RMX unit’s backplane properties provides the following
information:
Table 20-16 Backplane+ Properties- General Info
20-28
Field
Description
HW Version
The Backplane’s current hardware version.
SW Version
The Backplane’s current software version.
Serial Number
The Backplane’s serial number.
Card Type
The name of the hardware component for which
information is being displayed, e.g. Backplane.
Board Part Number
The Backplane’s part number.
Board Mac Address 1
The Backplane’s hardware address.
Board Mac Address 2
(If applicable) second Backplane Mac address.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
FAN Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 fans that regulate the unit’s
temperature. If the temperature increases, the fans speed will
increase and vice-versa. A “Critical” condition in the fans operation
will result in a system shut down.
Table 20-17 FANS Properties - General Info
Field
Description
General Settings
Min. Speed Level (rpm)
The minimum speed level of the fans.
Max. Speed Level (rpm)
The maximum speed level of the fans.
Normal Operating Level
(rpm)
The normal operating level defined for the fans.
Current Fan Level (rpm)
The current operating level of the fans.
Fans
Fan 1 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 1.
Fan 2 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 2.
Fan 3 Speed (rpm)
Present speed of fan 3.
20-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
LAN 0, LAN 1, LAN 2 Properties:
The RMX unit’s chassis contains 3 external LAN connectors which
register the following information listed below. The information will
be refreshed every 8 seconds and also contains a peek detector to log
the maximal values, since the last peek values reset.
2
Click Close to return to the HW Monitor pane.
Diagnostic Mode (RMX 1500/2000/4000)
You cannot run diagnostics on the MPM card.
Diagnostic Mode is a debugging tool for performing hardware
diagnostics that detect malfunctions in the hardware component’s
performance. Diagnostics are performed only for the MFA, CPU and
Switch (Cards: MPM+/MPMx, CPU, RTM IP and RTM ISDN). Two types
of Diagnostic Modes are available:
•
20-30
Basic Mode
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
•
Advanced Mode
A user using an Administrator Login, will be able to view and access the
Basic Mode. However, a Administrator “user” with Administrator
permissions must be defined on the RMX system. For more information
see "Adding a New User” on page 13-3. A SUPPORT user can access both
the Basic Mode and Advanced Mode Diagnostics.
When Diagnostic Mode is initialized, the MCU is reset and upon
restarting, the MCU will enter Diagnostic Mode. Entering this mode
causes the MCU to terminate all active conferences and prohibits
conferences from being established.
Diagnostic Mode is only enabled when connecting directly to the Shelf
Management server.
Connecting to the Shelf Management Server:
When accessing the Shelf Management server, the content displayed will be
available in English only.
To run Diagnostics you are required to Login with Administrator permissions. A
user with Administrator permissions must be defined on the RMX.
Access the RMX browser and click Hardware Monitor. The Hardware
Monitor pane opens.
On the Hardware Monitor toolbar click the Shelf Manager icon.
Type in the URL address of the Shelf Management (IP address).
20-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
For example; 172.22.189.51. You must also Login as a “Administrator” user
to run diagnostics
Login to the Shelf Manager.
On the Hardware Monitor toolbar select either the Basic Mode or
Advanced Mode diagnostics. Depending on your selection proceed with
one of the following sections:
20-32
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Performing Basic Mode Diagnostics
To run Basic Mode Diagnostics on a Hardware Component:
•
Most of the user interfaces illustrated in this section show the RMX 2000
with MPMx cards. The Basic Mode for other RMXs with MPM+ card(s) are
identical.
•
On the RMX 1500 less “slots” are used and the module naming conventions
used on elements are different.
1
In the list pane tool bar, click the Basic Mode (
) button.
RMX 2000/4000 &
RMX 1500 Hardware
Monitor panes
20-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
In the Reset Confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
3
The RMX resets. Re-enter the Shelf Manager IP address in the browser
and Login under POLYCOM or with an “Administrator” Login.
After login the following screen appears. The MPM+/MPMx cards
indicate “Resetting” and later switch to “Diagnostics”. The status of
RTM-IP/RTM IP 1500/RTM-IP 4000 and CNTL/CNTL 1500/CNTL
4000 components change to “Diagnostics”.
RMX 2000/4000 &
RMX 1500 Hardware Monitor panes
20-34
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
4
You can select any one of the Hardware components indicating
“Diagnostics/Normal” in the status column and right-click
Properties from the menu. The card’s General Info/Event Log/Active
Alarms properties are displayed.
5
Run Diagnostic Tests & Tests Monitoring by clicking the Run Tests
button. In the Hardware Monitor pane, the toolbar and card statuses
change to Tests in progress.
Table 20-18 Run Tests - Parameters
Parameter
Description
Diagnostic Status
Basic Diagnostic Status:
• Ready - ready to run diagnostics
•
•
Test in Progress - running diagnostics
Passed/Failed - Passed/Failed the diagnostics
tests
20-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table 20-18 Run Tests - Parameters
Parameter
Description
Estimated
Duration
Estimated time needed to run Basic Diagnostic
tests.
Time Left
Estimated time to complete Basic Diagnostic tests.
When the RMX enters “Diagnostics Mode”, the status MPM+/MPMx,
CNTL/CNTL 1500/CNTL 4000 and RTM IP/RTM IP 1500/RTM IP
4000 changes to “Diagnostics”
6.
The Diagnostics Summary pane is displayed at the bottom of the
Hardware Monitoring pane.
Figure 20-1RMX 2000/4000 Diagnostics Tests & Monitoring Tests
Figure 20-2RMX 1500 Diagnostics Tests & Monitoring Tests
20-36
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
7
Select the Run all Tests box and then click Run Selected Tests.
Table 20-19 Tests Selection - Additional Test Parameters
Parameter
Description
Loop Test
Enter the amount of times the test is to repeat itself
in succession.
Stop On Failure
Stops tests upon a failure.
Run All Test
Runs all tests listed in the TestActive column for the
hardware component.
8
The selected tests are initialized. In the Tests Monitoring pane there is
an indication of the Status of the Tests.
9
This process may take some time. Click Stop Running Test to end all
the diagnostic tests. The MCU completes the current test running and
then stops all remaining tests.
10 When the Test are completed, you have the option to download a
report in Excel format for analysis by your next level of support by
clicking the Export Diagnostics Result button.
11 The Diagnostics Mode can be exited by pressing the red System Reset
icon.
12 The RMX then resets.
20-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Performing Advanced Mode Diagnostics
To run Diagnostics you are required to Login with administrator permissions.
To run Advanced Mode Diagnostics on a Hardware Component:
20-38
•
Most of the user interfaces illustrated in this section show the RMX 2000
with MPMx cards. The Advanced Mode for other RMXs with MPM+ card(s)
are identical.
•
On the RMX 1500 less “slots” are used and the module naming conventions
used on elements are different.
•
Before running Advanced Mode Diagnostic testing on the CNTL module,
you must insert two formatted FAT32 USB keys in the two slots of the CNTL
panel USB ports of the RMX 2000/4000. On the RMX1500 insert the USB
key in the front panel mouse or keyboard slot.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
1
In the list pane tool bar, click the Advanced Mode (
) button.
RMX 2000/4000 &
RMX 1500 Hardware
Monitor panes
2
In the Reset Confirmation dialog box, click Yes.
3
The RMX resets. Re-enter the Shelf Manager IP address in the browser
and Login using an “Administrator” Login.
The MPM+/MPMx cards indicate “Resetting” and later switch to
“Diagnostics”. The status of RTM-IP/RTM IP 1500/RTM-IP 4000 and
CNTL/CNTL 1500/CNTL 4000 components change to
“Diagnostics”.
20-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
RMX 2000/4000 &
RMX 1500 Hardware
Monitor panes
4
You can select any one of the Hardware components indicating
“Diagnostics/Normal” in the status column and right-click
Properties from the menu. The card’s General Info/Event Log/Active
Alarms properties are displayed.
You can view Diagnostic Tests & Tests Monitoring by clicking the
Advanced Diagnostics Tab.
When you click the Advanced Mode the RMX enters a “Diagnostics Mode”.
The Advanced Mode can be exited by pressing the yellow System Reset icon.
The RMX then resets.
20-40
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Advanced
Diagnostics
The Diagnostics Tests & Monitoring Tests panes are displayed on the
right side of the window pane.
Run all Test Selection
Diagnostics Test Monitoring
Figure 20-3 RMX 2000/4000 Diagnostics Tests & Monitoring Tests
20-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Run all Test Selection
Diagnostics Test Monitoring
Figure 20-4 RMX 1500 Diagnostics Tests & Monitoring Tests
5
When the RMX enters “Diagnostics Mode”, the status MPM+/MPMx,
CNTL/CNTL 1500/CNTL 4000 and RTM IP/RTM IP 1500/RTM IP
4000 changes to “Diagnostics”.
You can run “Diagnostics” tests on a MPM+/MPMx card by double
clicking any one of the hardware components indicating
“Diagnostics” in the status column.
Figure 20-5 RMX 2000/4000 MPMx D - DSP DSP Sub Test selection
Run a “Diagnostics” test on a CTNL card by clicking the CTNL hardware
component that indicates “Diagnostics” in the status column.
20-42
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
6
Select the Run all Tests box and then click Run Selected Tests.
Optional. In the Diagnostics - Active Test box you can select specific tests to
run and then click Run Selected Tests.
Table 20-20 Tests Selection - Additional Test Parameters
7
Parameter
Description
Loop Test
Enter the amount of times the test is to repeat itself
in succession.
Stop On Failure
Stops tests upon a failure.
Run All Test
Runs all tests listed in the TestActive column for the
hardware component.
The selected tests are initialized. In the Tests Monitoring pane there is
an indication of the Connection Status of the Tests.
Connection Status
8
This process may take some time. Click Stop Running Test to end all
the diagnostic tests. The MCU completes the current test running and
then stops all remaining tests.
9
The Diagnostics Mode can be exited by pressing the yellow System
Reset icon. The RMX then resets.
20-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Diagnostics Monitoring
A hardware component’s test status can be viewed in the Diagnostics Test
Monitoring section before, during and after tests have been initiated. Test
results will only be displayed after tests are completed. The Diagnostic
Tests Monitoring section is comprised of three tabs: MCU Monitor, Cards
Monitor and Error Buffer, which are further described below.
MCU Monitor
The MCU Monitor tab lists the status of all the cards that can be tested in
Diagnostic Mode. Described below are the columns:
Table 20-21 Tests Monitoring - MCU Monitor Parameters
20-44
Column
Description
Card
The card’s slot number, i.e. 5 - slot where the RTM IP
card resides.
Pass
Indicates the number of tests that the card passed
successfully.
Fail
Indicates the number of tests that the card failed.
Status
The card’s current test status: No test running or Test in
progress.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Cards Monitor
The Cards Monitor tab displays the status of the selected tests being run
on the currently viewed card, i.e. slot 5, described below.
Table 20-22 Tests Monitoring - Card Monitor Parameters
Column
Description
Unitid
The test ID number
Testname
The name of the test
Loop
Indicates the number of times the test will repeat
itself in succession.
Pass
Indicates the number of times the test passed
successfully.
Failed
Indicates the number of times the test failed.
Quick
Indicates the number of Quick tests that have been
run on the card.
Duration
The duration of the test (in seconds).
Status
The card’s current test status: Test in Progress or
Ready.
20-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Error Buffer
The Error Buffer tab displays the errors encountered during testing of the
cards.
Table 20-23 Tests Monitoring - Card Monitor Parameters
20-46
Column
Description
Testid
The test ID number.
ErrorString
Indicates the error encountered during testing.
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
Temperature Thresholds
On each RMX card or there are a few temperature sensors that are placed
near specific components on the card. The active alarms of all cards and
elements can be accessed from the Hardware Monitor right clicking on any
card.
Figure 20-6RMX 2000 Hardware Monitor - RTM IP pane
To view the card’s (RTM-IP) Properties:
1 In the Hardware Monitor pane, right-click the RTM IP entry and then
select Properties.
20-47
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
2
Click Active Alarms.
The RTM-IP (as shown in Figure 20-7, “RMX 2000 RTM - IP Properties
Slot ID -5”) and RTM-IP+ card (RMX-4000) is populated with 4
temperature sensors: sensors 12-14.
On the Slot ID: 5 - RTM - IP Properties, Sensor 14 is called "Incoming
ambient" and on the right side of the table and you can see the
threshold numbers of the sensor. For example on Sensor 14, the event
"Upper Major" is activated when the temperature reaches +42°
(degrees) Centigrade.
20-48
Chapter 20-RMX Hardware Monitoring
The Upper Critical event is activated when the temperature reaches a
+50° (degrees) Centigrade.
Figure 20-7RMX 2000 RTM - IP Properties Slot ID -5
20-49
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
MPM+ Card Properties
The MPM+ and CPU (CTRL) cards have the same concept and shown in
Figure , “” MPM+ card.
Figure 20-8RMX 2000 MPM+80 Properties Slot ID -2
The hottest sensor on the MPM+80 card is sensor 16, and when this sensor
reaches 70° (degrees) Centigrade, it triggers an "Upper Major" event.
The "Upper Major" event causes the RMX fans to increase their RPM
rotation by circulating more air. If the Temperature sensors then reach
"Upper Critical" then the Shelf Manager initiates a shutdown on the overheated MPM+ card.
The following table lists the temperature thresholds that can activate
alarms and are an indication of the MCU’s state. On an MCU there are a
number of temperature sensors that will activate when their thresholds
are reached.
20-50
Appendix A
Disconnection Causes
If a participant was unable to connect to a conference or was
disconnected from a conference, the Connection Status tab in the
Participant Properties dialog box indicates the call disconnection cause. In
some cases, a possible solution may be displayed.
A video participant who is unable to connect the video channels, but is
able to connect as an audio only participant, is referred to as a Secondary
participant. For Secondary participants, the Connection Status tab in the
Participant Properties dialog box indicates the video disconnection cause.
In some cases, a possible solution may be indicated.
The table below lists the call disconnection causes that can be displayed
in the Call Disconnection Cause field and provides an explanation of
each message
IP Disconnection Causes.
Table A-1
Call Disconnection Causes
Disconnection Cause
Description
Disconnected by User
The user disconnected the endpoint from the
conference.
Remote device did not
open the encryption
signaling channel
The endpoint did not open the encryption
signaling channel.
Remote devices selected
encryption algorithm does
not match the local
selected encryption
algorithm
The encryption algorithm selected by the
endpoint does not match the MCU's encryption
algorithm.
A-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-1
A-2
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
Resources deficiency
Insufficient resources available.
Call close. Call closed by
MCU
The MCU disconnected the call.
H323 call close. No port
left for audio
Insufficient audio ports.
H323 call close. No port
left for video
The required video ports exceed the number of
ports allocated to video in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No port
left for FECC
The required data ports exceed the number of
ports allocated to data in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No control
port left
The required control ports exceed the number of
ports allocated to control data in fixed ports.
H323 call close. No port
left for videocont
The required video content ports exceed the
number of ports allocated to video content in
fixed ports.
H323 call closed. Small
bandwidth
The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth
to the connection with the endpoint.
H323 call closed. No port
left
There are no free ports left in the IP card.
Caller not registered
The calling endpoint is not registered in the
gatekeeper.
H323 call closed. ARQ
timeout
The endpoint sent an ARQ message to the
gatekeeper, but the gatekeeper did not respond
before timeout.
H323 call closed. DRQ
timeout
The endpoint sent a DRQ message to the
gatekeeper, but the gatekeeper did not respond
before timeout.
H323 call closed. Alt
Gatekeeper failure
An alternate gatekeeper failure occurred.
H323 call closed.
Gatekeeper failure
A gatekeeper failure occurred.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
H323 call closed. Remote
busy
The endpoint was busy. (Applicable only to dialout)
H323 call closed. Normal
The call ended normally, for example, the
endpoint disconnected.
H323 call closed. Remote
reject
The endpoint rejected the call.
H323 call closed. Remote
unreachable
The gatekeeper could not find the endpoint's
address.
H323 call closed. Unknown
reason
The reason for the disconnection is unknown, for
example, the endpoint disconnected without
giving a reason.
H323 call closed. Faulty
destination address
Incorrect address format.
H323 call closed. Small
bandwidth
The gatekeeper allocated insufficient bandwidth
to the connection with the endpoint.
H323 call closed.
Gatekeeper reject ARQ
The gatekeeper rejected the endpoint's ARQ.
H323 call closed. No port
left
There are no ports left in the IP card.
H323 call closed.
Gatekeeper DRQ
The gatekeeper sent a DRQ.
H323 call closed. No
destination IP address
For internal use.
H323 call. Call failed prior
or during the capabilities
negotiation stage
The endpoint did not send its capabilities to the
gatekeeper.
H323 call closed. Audio
channels didn't open
before timeout
The endpoint did not open the audio channel.
H323 call closed. Remote
sent bad capability
There was a problem in the capabilities sent by
the endpoint.
A-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-1
A-4
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
H323 call closed. Local
capability wasn't accepted
by remote
The endpoint did not accept the capabilities sent
by the gatekeeper.
H323 failure
Internal error occurred.
H323 call closed. Remote
stop responding
The endpoint stopped responding.
H323 call closed. Master
slave problem
A People + Content cascading failure occurred.
SIP bad name
The conference name is incompatible with SIP
standards.
SIP bad status
A general IP card error occurred.
SIP busy everywhere
The participant's endpoints were contacted
successfully, but the participant is busy and does
not wish to take the call at this time.
SIP busy here
The participant's endpoint was contacted
successfully, but the participant is currently not
willing or able to take additional calls.
SIP capabilities don't
match
The remote device capabilities are not
compatible with the conference settings.
SIP card rejected channels
The IP card could not open the media channels.
SIP client error 400
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 400 (Bad
Request) response.
The request could not be understood due to
malformed syntax.
SIP client error 402
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 402
(Payment Required) response.
SIP client error 405
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 405
(Method Not Allowed) response.
The method specified in the Request-Line is
understood, but not allowed for the address
identified by the Request-URI.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP client error 406
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 406 (Not
Acceptable) resources.
The remote endpoint cannot accept the call
because it does not have the necessary
responses. The resource identified by the
request is only capable of generating response
entities that have content characteristics not
acceptable according to the Accept header field
sent in the request.
SIP client error 407
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 407 (Proxy
Authentication Required) response.
The client must first authenticate itself with the
proxy.
SIP client error 409
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 409
(Conflict) response.
The request could not be completed due to a
conflict with the current state of the resource.
SIP client error 411
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 411 (Length
Required) response.
The server refuses to accept the request without
a defined Content Length.
SIP client error 413
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 413
(Request Entity Too Large) response.
The server is refusing to process a request
because the request entity is larger than the
server is willing or able to process.
SIP client error 414
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 414
(Request-URI Too Long) response.
The server is refusing to service the request
because the Request-URI is longer than the
server is willing to interpret.
SIP client error 420
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 420 (Bad
Extension) response.
The server did not understand the protocol
extension specified in a Require header field.
A-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-1
A-6
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP client error 481
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 481 (Call/
Transaction Does Not Exist) response.
SIP client error 482
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 482 (Loop
Detected) response.
SIP client error 483
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 483 (Too
Many Hops) response.
SIP client error 484
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 484
(Address Incomplete) response.
The server received a request with a To address
or Request-URI that was incomplete.
SIP client error 485
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 485
(Ambiguous) response.
The address provided in the request (RequestURI) was ambiguous.
SIP client error 488
The endpoint sent a SIP Client Error 488 (Not
Acceptable Here) response.
SIP forbidden
The SIP server rejected the request.
The server understood the request, but is
refusing to fulfill it.
SIP global failure 603
A SIP Global Failure 603 (Decline) response was
returned.
The participant's endpoint was successfully
contacted, but the participant explicitly does not
wish to or cannot participate.
SIP global failure 604
A SIP Global Failure 604 (Does Not Exist
Anywhere) response was returned.
The server has authoritative information that the
user indicated in the Request-URI does not exist
anywhere.
SIP global failure 606
A SIP Global Failure 606 (Not Acceptable)
response was returned.
SIP gone
The requested resource is no longer available at
the Server and no forwarding address is known.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP moved permanently
The endpoint moved permanently. The user can
no longer be found at the address in the
Request-URI.
SIP moved temporarily
The remote endpoint moved temporarily.
SIP not found
The endpoint was not found.
The server has definitive information that the
user does not exist at the domain specified in the
Request-URI.
SIP redirection 300
A SIP Redirection 300 (Multiple Choices)
response was returned.
SIP redirection 305
A SIP Redirection 305 (Use Proxy) response
was returned.
The requested resource MUST be accessed
through the proxy given by the Contact field.
SIP redirection 380
A SIP Redirection 380 (Alternative Service)
response was returned.
The call was not successful, but alternative
services are possible.
SIP remote cancelled call
The endpoint canceled the call.
SIP remote closed call
The endpoint ended the call.
SIP remote stopped
responding
The endpoint is not responding.
SIP remote unreachable
The endpoint could not be reached.
SIP request terminated
The endpoint terminated the request.
The request was terminated by a BYE or
CANCEL request.
SIP request timeout
The request was timed out.
SIP server error 500
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 500
(Server Internal Error) response.
The server encountered an unexpected condition
that prevented it from fulfilling the request.
A-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-1
A-8
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP server error 501
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 501 (Not
Implemented) response.
The server does not support the functionality
required to fulfill the request.
SIP server error 502
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 502 (Bad
Gateway) response.
The server, while acting as a gateway or proxy,
received an invalid response from the
downstream server it accessed in attempting to
fulfill the request.
SIP server error 503
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 503
(Service Unavailable) response.
The server is temporarily unable to process the
request due to a temporary overloading or
maintenance of the server.
SIP server error 504
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 504
(Server Time-out) response.
The server did not receive a timely response
from an external server it accessed in attempting
to process the request.
SIP server error 505
The SIP server sent a SIP Server Error 505
(Version Not Supported) response.
The server does not support, or refuses to
support, the SIP protocol version that was used
in the request.
SIP temporarily not
available
The participant's endpoint was contacted
successfully but the participant is currently
unavailable (e.g., not logged in or logged in such
a manner as to preclude communication with the
participant).
SIP remote device did not
respond in the given time
frame
The endpoint did not respond in the given time
frame.
SIP trans error TCP Invite
A SIP Invite was sent via TCP, but the endpoint
was not found.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-1
Call Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Description
SIP transport error
Unable to initiate connection with the endpoint.
SIP unauthorized
The request requires user authentication.
SIP unsupported media
type
The server is refusing to service the request
because the message body of the request is in a
format not supported by the requested resource
for the requested method.
ISDN Disconnection Causes
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes
Disconnection Cause
Number
1
Summary
Description
Unallocated
(unassigned
number)
No route to the number exists in the ISDN
network or the number was not found in the
routing table.
• Ensure that the number appears in the
routing table.
•
Ensure that it is a valid number and that
correct digits were dialed.
2
No route to
specified transit
network
(national use)
The route specified (transit network) between
the two networks does not exist.
3
No route to
destination
No physical route to the destination number
exists although the dialed number is in the
routing plan.
• The PRI D-Channel is malfunctioning.
•
Incorrect connection of the span or WAN.
A-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
A-10
Summary
Description
4
Send special
information tone
Return the special information tone to the
calling party indicating that the called user
cannot be reached.
5
Misdialed trunk
prefix (national
use)
A trunk prefix has erroneously been included in
the called user number.
6
Channel
Unacceptable
The sending entity in the call does not accept
the channel most recently identified.
7
Call awarded
and being
delivered in an
Established
channel
The incoming call is being connected to a
channel previously established for similar calls.
8
Pre-Emption
The call has been pre-empted.
9
Pre-Emption –
Circuit reserved
for reuse
Call is being cleared in response to user
request.
16
Normal Call
Clearing
Call cleared normally because user hung up.
17
User Busy
Dialed number is busy.
18
No User
Responding
The called user has not answered the call.
19
No Answer from
User (User
Alerted)
Called user has received call alert, but has not
responded within a prescribed period of time.
Internal network timers may initiate this
disconnection.
20
Subscriber
Absent
User is temporarily absent from the network - as
when a mobile user logs off.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
Summary
Description
21
Call Rejected
Called number is either busy or has
compatibility issues. Supplementary service
constraints in the network may also initiate the
disconnection.
22
Number
Changed
Same as Cause 1. The diagnostic field contains
the new called user number. Cause 1 is used if
the network does not support this cause value.
26
Non-Selected
User Clearing
The incoming call has not been assigned to the
user.
27
Destination Outof-Order
Messages cannot be sent to the destination
number because the span may not be active.
28
Invalid Number
Format (address
incomplete)
The Type of Number (TON) is incorrect or the
number is incomplete. Network, Unknown and
National numbers have different formats.
29
Facility Rejected
User requested supplementary service which
cannot be provided by the network.
30
Response to
STATUS
ENQUIRY
A STATUS message has been received in
response to a prior STATUS ENQUIRY.
31
Normal,
Unspecified
A normal, unspecified disconnection has
occurred.
34
No Circuit/
Channel
Available
No B-Channels are available for the call.
38
Network Out-ofOrder
Network is out-of-order because due to a major
malfunction.
39
Permanent
Frame Mode
Connection Outof-Service
A permanent frame mode connection is out-ofservice. This cause is part of a STATUS
message.
A-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
A-12
Summary
Description
40
Permanent
Frame Mode
Connection
Operational
A permanent frame mode connection is
operational. This cause is part of a STATUS
message.
41
Temporary
Failure
Minor network malfunction. Initiate call again.
42
Switching
Equipment
Congestion
High traffic has congested the switching
equipment. Cause 43 is included.
43
Access
Information
Discarded
Access Information elements exceed maximum
length and have been discarded. Included with
Cause 42.
44
Requested
Circuit/Channel
not Available
The requested circuit or channel is not
available. Alternative circuits or channels are
not acceptable.
47
Resource
Unavailable,
Unspecified
The resource is unavailable. No other
disconnection cause applies.
49
Quality of
Service Not
Available
Quality of Service, as defined in
Recommendation X.213, cannot be provided.
50
Requested
Facility Not
Subscribed
A supplementary service has been requested
that the user is not authorized to use.
53
Outgoing Calls
Barred Within
Closed User
Group (CUG)
Outgoing calls are not permitted for this
member of the CUG.
55
Incoming Calls
Barred within
CUG
Incoming calls are not permitted for this
member of the CUG.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
Summary
Description
57
Bearer
Capability Not
Authorized
A bearer capability has been requested that the
user is not authorized to use.
58
Bearer
Capability Not
Presently
Available
A bearer capability has been requested that the
user is not presently available.
62
Inconsistency in
Designated
Outgoing
Access
Information and
Subscriber
Class
Outgoing Access and Subscriber Class
information is inconsistent
63
Service or
Option Not
Available,
Unspecified
The service or option is unavailable. No other
disconnection cause applies.
65
Bearer
Capability Not
Implemented
The requested bearer capability is not
supported.
66
Channel Type
Not
Implemented
The requested channel type is not supported.
69
Requested
Facility Not
Implemented
The requested supplementary service is not
supported.
A-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
A-14
Summary
Description
70
Only Restricted
Digital
Information
Bearer
Capability is
Available
(national use)
Unrestricted (64kb) bearer service has been
requested but is not supported by the
equipment sending this cause.
79
Service or
Option Not
Implemented,
Unspecified
An unsupported service or unimplemented
option has been requested. No other
disconnection cause applies.
81
Invalid Call
Reference Value
A message has been received which contains a
call reference which is currently unassigned or
not in use on the user-network interface.
82
Identified
Channel Does
Not Exist
A request has been received to use a channel
which is currently inactive or does not exist.
83
A Suspended
Call Exists, but
This Call Identity
Does Not Exist
A RESUME message cannot be executed by
the network as a result of an unknown call
identity.
84
Call Identity in
Use
A SUSPEND message has been received with
a call identity sequence that is already in use.
85
No Call
Suspended
A RESUME message cannot be executed by
the network as a result of no call suspended.
86
Call Having the
Requested Call
Identity Has
Been Cleared
A RESUME message cannot be executed by
the network as a result of the call having been
cleared while suspended.
87
User Not
Member of CUG
A CUG member was called by a user that is not
a member of the CUG or a CUG call was made
to a non CUG member.
Chapter A-Disconnection Causes
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
Number
Summary
Description
88
Incompatible
Destination
User-to-user compatibility checking procedures
in a point-to-point data link have determined
that an incompatibility exists between Bearer
capabilities.
90
Non-Existent
CUG
CUG does not exist.
91
Invalid Transit
Network
Selection
(national use)
The transit network selection is of an incorrect
format. No route (transit network) exists
between the two networks.
95
Invalid Message,
Unspecified
Invalid message received. No other
disconnection cause applies.
96
Mandatory
Information
Element is
Missing
A message was received with an information
element missing.
97
Message Type
Non-Existent or
Not
Implemented
A message was received that is of a type that is
not defined or of a type that is defined but not
implemented.
98
Message is Not
Compatible with
the Call State, or
the Message
Type is NonExistent or Not
Implemented
An unexpected message or unrecognized
message incompatible with the call state has
been received
99
An Information
Element or
Parameter Does
Not Exist or is
Not
Implemented
A message was received containing elements
or parameters that are not defined or of a type
that is defined but not implemented.
A-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table A-2
ISDN Disconnection Causes (Continued)
Disconnection Cause
A-16
Number
Summary
Description
100
Invalid
Information
Element
Contents
A message other than SETUP, DISCONNECT,
RELEASE, or RELEASE COMPLETE has been
received which has one or more mandatory
information elements containing invalid content.
101
The Message is
Not Compatible
with the Call
State
A STATUS message indicating any call state
except the Null state has been received while in
the Null state.
102
Recovery on
Timer Expired
An error handling procedure timer has expired.
103
Parameter NonExistent or Not
Implemented –
Passed On
(national use)
A message was received containing parameters
that are not defined or of a type that is defined
but not implemented.
110
Message with
Unrecognized
Parameter
Discarded
A message was discarded because it contained
a parameter that was not recognized.
111
Protocol Error,
Unspecified
A protocol error has occurred. No other
disconnection cause applies.
127
Interworking,
Unspecified
An interworking call has ended.
Appendix B
Alarms and Faults
Alarms
Table B-1
Alarms
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
A new activation key was loaded. Reset
the system.
A new activation key was loaded:
Reset the MCU.
A new version was installed. Reset the
system.
A new version was installed:
Reset the MCU.
A private version is loaded
A private version is loaded: [private description].
Action redirection failure
Possible explanations:
Action redirection failure.
•
•
Action redirection map incomplete.
Alarm generated by a Central Signaling
component
A system alert was generated by a component of the
Central Signaling.
Alarm generated by an internal
component
A system alert was generated by an internal system
component.
Automatic reset is unavailable in Safe
Mode
The system switches to safe mode if many resets occur
during startup. To prevent additional resets, and allow
the system to complete the startup process the
automatic system resets are blocked.
Backup of audit files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is
set to YES (default setting when JITC_MODE System
Flag is set to YES) and a Cyclic File reaches a file
retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that audit files need to be backed up.
B-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Backup of CDR files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is
set to YES (default setting when JITC_MODE System
Flag is set to YES) and a Cyclic File reaches a file
retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that CDR files need to be backed up.
Backup of log files is required
If the ENABLE_CYCLIC_FILE_SYSTEM_ALARMS is
set to YES (default setting when JITC_MODE System
Flag is set to YES) and a Cyclic File reaches a file
retention time or file storage capacity limit, the user is
alerted that log files need to be backed up.
Bios version is not compatible with Ultra
Secure Mode.
The current BIOS version is not compatible with Ultra
Secure Mode (JITC_MODE=YES).
Card failed to switch to Ultra Secure
Mode
Card failure occurred when the system was set to
Enhance Security Mode (JITC_MODE=YES).
Card failure
Possible reasons for the card failure:
• Resetting Card
•
•
•
Resetting component
Unknown shelf error
Unknown card error
Card not found
This occurs when: the system does not receive an
indication about the card (since it does not exist…)
usually when the card was removed from the MCU and
the system did not have a chance to recalculate it
resources.
Card not responding
Possible reasons for the card not responding:
• No connection with MPM card.
•
B-2
No connection with the Switch.
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Central signaling component failure
Possible explanations:
• Central signaling component failure; unit type:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP]
Central Signaling indicating Faulty status
•
Central signaling component failure; unit type:
(invalid: [NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP])
•
Central signaling component failure - Invalid failure
type. Unit id: [id], Type:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP], Status:
[Ok\Failed\Recovered]
•
Central signaling component failure - Invalid failure
type
Central signaling failure detected in IP Network Service.
Central Signaling indicating Recovery
status
Central Signaling startup failure
Configuration of external database did not
complete.
Could not complete MPM Card startup
procedure
Possible explanations:
• Unit loading confirmation was not received.
•
•
No Media IP for this card.
•
Unspecified problem.
Media IP Configuration confirmation was not
received.
Could not complete RTM ISDN Card
startup procedure
CPU IPMC software was not updated.
CPU slot ID not identified
The CPU slot ID required for Ethernet Settings was not
provided by the Shelf Management.
D channel cannot be established
B-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
DEBUG mode enabled
Possible explanations:
• System is running in DEBUG mode.
•
System DEBUG mode initiated.
DEBUG mode flags in use
System is using DEBUG CFG flags.
DMA not supported by IDE device
Possible explanations:
• DMA (direct memory access) not supported by IDE
device: Incompatible flash card / hard disk being
used.
•
Flash card / hard drive are not properly connected to
the board / one of the IDE channels is disconnected.
•
DMA was manually disabled for testing.
DNS configuration error
DNS not configured in IP Network Service
Encryption Server Error. Failed to
generate the encryption key
FIPS 140 test failed while generating the new encryption
key.
Error in external database certificate
Error reading MCU time
Failed to read MCU time configuration file ([status]).
External NTP servers failure
Failed to access DNS server
Failed to access DNS server.
Failed to configure the Media card IP
address
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failure type: [OK Or Not supported.
•
•
•
Failed to configure the Users list in Linux
B-4
Does not exist Or IP failure.
Duplicate IP Or DHCP failure.
VLAN failure Or Invalid: [status_Number].
External NTP server failure:
NTP server failure: [server0_ip], [server1_ip],
[server2_ipStr].
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Failed to connect to application server
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failed to connect to application server:
•
Failed to establish connection to server, url = [url].
Failed to connect to recording device
The MCU could not connect to any of the defined NTP
server for synchronization due to the remote server error.
Failed to connect to SIP registrar
Cannot establish connection with SIP registrar.
Failed to create Default Profile
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failed to validate the Default Profile.
•
Failed to initialize the file system
Failed to add the Default Profile.
Possible reasons for the failure:
• Failed to initialize the file system.
•
Failed to initialize the file system and create the CDR
index.
Failed to mount Card folder
Failed to mount card folder.
Failed to open Apache server
configuration file
Failed to open Apache configuration file.
Failed to open Users list file
Failed to register with DNS server
Failed to save Apache server
configuration file
Failed to save Apache configuration file.
Failure in initialization of SNMP agent.
Fallback version is being used
Fallback version is being used. Restore current version.
Version being used: [running version]; Current version:
[current version].
B-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
File error
Possible reasons for the file error:
• XML file does not exist [file name]; Error no: [error
number].
•
Not authorized to open XML file [file name]; Error no:
[error number].
•
Unknown problem in opening XML file [file name];
Error no: [error number].
•
Failed to parse XML file [file name].
File system scan failure
File system scan failure:
Failed to scan [file system path].
File system space shortage
File system space shortage:
Out of file system space in [file system path]; Free space:
[free space percentage]% ([free space] Blocks) Minimum free space required: [minimum free space
percentage]% ([minimum free space] Blocks).
B-6
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Gatekeeper failure
Alarm Description
Possible reasons for the Gatekeeper failure:
Failed to register to alternate Gatekeeper.
•
•
Gatekeeper discovery state.
- Check GK IP address (GUI, ping)
•
•
•
•
Gatekeeper DNS Host name not found.
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to Terminal Exclusion.
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ. Reason 18.
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to duplicate alias.
- Check duplicate in aliases or in prefixes
•
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Generic Data.
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid endpoint ID.
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid revision.
Gatekeeper Registration Timeout.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to invalid revision.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to resource
unavailability.
Gatekeeper rejected GRQ due to unsupported
feature.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Discovery
Required.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid alias.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid call
signaling address.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid RAS
address.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid state.
B-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Gatekeeper failure (cont.)
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to invalid terminal
alias.
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to resource
unavailability.
•
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to Security Denial.
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported
feature.
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported QOS
transport.
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported
transport.
•
•
•
•
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ. Full registration required.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to terminal type.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ due to unsupported
Additive Registration.
Gatekeeper rejected RRQ. Reason 18.
Gatekeeper Unregistration State.
Registration succeeded.
GUI System configuration file is invalid
xml file
The XML format of the system configuration file that
contains the user interface settings is invalid.
Hard disk error
Hard disk not responding.
High CPU utilization
High system CPU usage
High system CPU usage:
System CPU usage is approaching limit.
Incorrect Ethernet Settings
Incorrect Ethernet Settings:
Ethernet should be set to 100 Full Duplex, Auto
Negotiation - off.
Insufficient resources
Insufficient resources.
Insufficient UDP Ports
B-8
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Internal MCU reset
Possible explanations:
• McmsDaemon reset due to policy decision: [Process
failed [abs crash counter: crash counter]: process
name].
•
McmsDaemon reset due to policy decision: [Process
failed [abs crash counter: crash counter]: process
name]; Cannot reset while system is in DEBUG
mode.
•
•
Power down signal was detected.
•
Reset cause unknown: [reset source]\Restore
Factory Defaults - [mcu restore name]\CM_Loaded
indication repeated; boardId: [boardId]\reset from
Cards process - simulation\No connection with MPM;
board Id:[boardId]\SmMfaFailure - boardId: [boardId].
Status: [status], problem bitmask:
[problemBitMask]\MPM failure, boardId:
[slotId]\Switch failure\No connection with Switch.
[CS Component Failure; unit type:
[NonComponent\CSMngnt\CSH323\CSSIP]\CS
Component Failure; unit type: (invalid: [unit type])\No
connection with CS]; Cannot reset while system is in
DEBUG mode.
Internal System configuration during
startup
System configuration during startup.
Invalid date and time
Invalid date and time:
MCU year ([year]) must be 2000 or later.
Invalid MCU Version
MCU Version: [Major.Minor.release.internal].
Invalid System Configuration
IP addresses of Signaling Host and
Control Unit are the same
IP Network Service configuration modified
IP Network Service was modified.
Reset the MCU.
IP Network Service deleted
IP Network Service was deleted.
Reset the MCU.
B-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
IP Network Service not found
Possible explanations:
• IP Service not found in the Network Services list.
•
m_StatusRead IpServiceList.
ISDN/PSTN Network Services
configuration changed
License not found
Low Processing Memory
Low Processing Memory:
Process is approaching memory utilization limit:
[Memory Utilization Percent]
Low system Memory
Low system Memory:
The system exceeded 80% of memory usage.
Management Network not configured
MCU is not configured for AVF
gatekeeper mode
MCU reset
The MCU was reset automatically or by the user.
MCU reset:
Reset cause: [reset source].
MCU Reset to enable Diagnostics mode
Missing Central Signaling configuration
MPL startup failure. Authentication not
received.
MPL startup failure. Management
Network configuration not received.
Music file error
The music file played during the connection to the
conference cannot be accessed.
No clock source
The system could not use any of the connected ISDN
spans as clock source
B-10
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
No default ISDN/PSTN Network Service
defined in ISDN/PSTN Network Services
list
No default IVR Service in IVR Services
list
No default IVR Service in IVR Services list: Ensure that
one conference IVR Service and one EQ IVR Service
are set as default.
No IP Network Services defined
IP Network Service parameters missing.
No ISDN/PSTN Network Services defined
No ISDN/PSTN Network Services were defined or no
default ISDN/PSTN Network was defined.
No License for ISDN/PSTN. Please
activate the RTM ISDN card through
Polycom website
No response from Central Signaling
No connection with central signaling.
No response from RTM ISDN card
No usable unit for audio controller;
NTP synchronization failure
The system failed to synchronize the MCU clock with the
NTP clock
Polycom default User exists. For security
reasons, it is recommended to delete this
User and create your own User.
Port configuration was modified
Power off
Process idle
Process idle:
Process did not finish before deadline.
Process terminated
Process terminated:
[Process name] terminated.
Product activation failure
B-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Product Type mismatch. System is
restarting.
The user is alerted to a mismatch between the product
type that is stored in MCU software and the product type
received from another system component.
In such a case the system is automatically restarted.
Recording device has disconnected
unexpectedly
Red Alarm
When a certain timeout will be reached (after startup),
MCMS will go over the configured Spans. A configured
Span that is related to nonexistent card – will produce a
'RED_ALARM' Alert. Similarly on HotSwap: if an RTM
card (or an MPM that has an RTM extension) is
removed, MCMS will go over the configured Spans. A
configured Span that is related to the removed card – will
produce a 'RED_ALARM' Alert.
Resource process did not receive the
Meeting Room list during startup.
Without the Meeting Rooms list, the system cannot
allocate the appropriate dial numbers, Conference ID
etc. and therefore cannot run conferences
Resource process failed to request the
Meeting Room list during startup.
Without the Meeting Rooms list, the system cannot
allocate the appropriate dial numbers, Conference ID
etc. and therefore cannot run conferences
Restore Failed
Restoring the system configuration has failed as the
system could not locate the configuration file in the
selected path, or could not open the file.
Restore Succeeded
Restoring the system configuration has succeeded.
Reset the MCU.
Restoring Factory Defaults. Default
system settings will be restored once
Reset is completed
Default system settings will be restored once Reset is
completed.
RTM ISDN card not found
RTM ISDN card is missing.
RTM ISDN card startup procedure error
The RTM ISDN card cannot complete its startup
procedure (usually after system reset)
Secured SIP communication failed
B-12
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
Security mode failed. Certificate has
expired.
Security mode failed. Certificate host
name does not match the RMX host
name.
Security mode failed. Certificate is about
to expire.
Security mode failed. Certificate not yet
valid.
Security mode failed. Error in certificate
file.
Single clock source
No Backup clock could be established as only one span
is connected to the system or, there is a synchronization
failure with another span. This alarm can be cancelled by
adding the appropriate flag is the system configuration.
SIP registrations limit reached
SIP registrations limit reached.
SIP TLS: Certificate has expired
The current TLS certificate files have expired and must
be replaced with new files.
SIP TLS: Certificate is about to expire
The current TLS certificate files will expire shortly and
will have to be replaced to ensure the communication
with the OCS.
SIP TLS: Certificate subject name is not
valid or DNS failed to resolve this name
This alarm is displayed if the name of the RMX in the
certificate file is different from the FQDN name defined in
the OCS.
B-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
SIP TLS: Failed to load or verify certificate
files
This alarm indicates that the certificate files required for
SIP TLS could not be loaded to the RMX. Possible
causes are:
•
Incorrect certificate file name. Only files with the
following names can be loaded to the system:
rootCA.pem, pkey.pem, cert.pem and
certPassword.txt
•
Wrong certificate file type. Only files of the following
types can be loaded to the system: rootCA.pem,
pkey.pem and cert.pem and certPassword.txt
•
The contents of the certificate file does not match the
system parameters
SIP TLS: Registration handshake failure
This alarm indicates a mismatch between the security
protocols of the OCS and the RMX, preventing the
Registration of the RMX to the OCS.
SIP TLS: Registration server not
responding
This alarm is displayed when the RMX does not receive
a response from the OCS to the registration request in
the expected time frame. Possible causes are:
SIP TLS: Registration transport error
Smart Report found errors on hard disk
B-14
•
The RMX FQDN name is not defined in the OCS
pool, or is defined incorrectly.
•
The time frame for the expected response was too
short and it will be updated with the next data refresh.
The alarm may be cleared automatically the next
time the data is refreshed.
•
The RMX FQDN name is not defined in the DNS
server. Ping the DNS using the RMX FQDN name to
ensure that the RMX is correctly registered to the
DNS.
This alarm indicates that the communication with the SIP
server cannot be established. Possible causes are:
•
•
Incorrect IP address of the SIP server
•
The OCS services are stopped
The SIP server listening port is other than the one
defined in the system
Smart Report found errors on hard disk.
Chapter B-Alarms and Faults
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
SSH is enabled
Startup process failure
Process failed:
[Process name] failed to start.
SWITCH not responding
System Configuration modified
System configuration flags were modified.
Reset the MCU.
Task terminated
Task terminated: [Task Name].
Temperature Level - Critical
Possible explanations:
• Temperature has reached a critical level. Card or if
critical system element the MCU will shut down.
Temperature Level - Major
Possible explanations:
• Temperature has reached a problematic level and
requires attention.
Terminal initiated MCU reset
MCU reset was initiated by Terminal command [reset].
The Log file system is disabled
Log file system error:
The Log File System is disabled. Log files not found.
The software contains patch(es)
The software contains patch(es).
The system has been configured for JITC
mode, but communication is not secured
until a TLS certificate is installed and the
MCU is set to Secured Communication.
Although the System Flag JITC_MODE is set to YES,
the Ultra Secure Mode is not fully implemented as the
TLS certificate was not installed. Please install the TLS
certificate and set the MCU to Secured Communication
Mode to fully enable the Enhanced Security
Environment.
Unit not responding
Unspecified problem
Possible explanations:
• Unspecified card error.
•
•
User initiated MCU reset
Unspecified shelf error.
Unspecified problem.
MCU reset was initiated by a system user.
B-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table B-1
Alarms (Continued)
Alarm Code
Alarm Description
User Name "SUPPORT" cannot be used
in Ultra Secure Mode
When Ultra Secure Mode (JITC_MODE=YES) is
enabled, the User Name "SUPPORT" cannot be used to
define a new User.
Version upgrade is in progress
Voltage problem
Possible reasons for the problem:
Card voltage problem.
•
•
•
Yellow Alarm
B-16
Shelf voltage problem.
Voltage problem
Appendix C
CDR Fields - Unformatted File
The CDR (Call Detail Records) utility is used to retrieve conference
information to a file. The CDR utility can retrieve conference information
to a file in both formatted and unformatted formats.
Unformatted CDR files contain multiple records. The first record in each
file contains information about the conference in general, such as the
conference name and start time. The remaining records each contain
information about one event that occurred during the conference, such
as a participant connecting to the conference, or a user extending the
length of the conference. The first field in each record identifies the event
type, and this is followed by values containing information about the
event. The fields are separated by commas.
Formatted files contain basically the same information as unformatted
files, but with the field values replaced by descriptions. Formatted files
are divided into sections, each containing information about one
conference event. The first line in each section is a title describing the
type of event, and this is followed by multiple lines, each containing
information about the event in the form of a descriptive field name and
value.
The field names and values in the formatted file will appear in the language
being used for the RMX Web Client user interface at the time when the CDR
information is retrieved.
The value of the fields that support Unicode values, such as the info fields, will
be stored in the CDR file in UTF8. The application that reads the CDR file must
support Unicode.
C-1
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The MCU sends the entire CDR file via API or HTTP, and the RMX or
external application does the processing and sorting. The RMX ignores
events that it does not recognize, that is, events written in a higher version
that do not exist in the current version. Therefore, to enable compatibility
between versions, instead of adding new fields to existing events, new
fields are added as separate events, so as not to affect the events from
older versions. This allows users with lower versions to retrieve CDR files
that were created in higher versions.
This appendix describes the fields and values in the unformatted CDR records.
Although the formatted files contain basically the same information, in a few
instances a single field in the unformatted file is converted to multiple lines in the
formatted file, and in other cases, multiple fields in the unformatted file are
combined into one line in the formatted file.
In addition, to enable compatibility for applications that were written for the MGC
family, the unformatted file contains fields that were supported by the MGC
family, but are not supported by the RMX, whereas these fields are omitted from
the formatted file.
The Conference Summary Record
The conference summary record (the first record in the unformatted CDR
file) contains the following fields:
Table C-1
C-2
Conference Summary Record Fields
Field
Description
File Version
The version of the CDR utility that created the file.
Conference Routing
Name
The Routing Name of the conference.
Internal Conference ID
The conference identification number as assigned by
the system.
Reserved Start Time
Not supported.
Contains the same value as the Actual Start Time
field.
Reserved Duration
The amount of time the conference was scheduled to
last.
Actual Start Time
The actual time the conference started in local time.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-1
Conference Summary Record Fields (Continued)
Field
Description
Actual Duration
The actual conference duration.
Status
The conference status code as follows:
1 - The conference is an ongoing conference.
2 - The conference was terminated by a user.
3 - The conference ended at the scheduled end time.
4 - The conference ended automatically because no
participants joined the conference for a predefined
time period, or all the participants disconnected from
the conference and the conference was empty for a
predefined time period.
5 - The conference never started.
6 - The conference could not start due to a problem.
8 - An unknown error occurred.
9 - The conference was terminated by a participant
using DTMF codes.
Note: If the conference was terminated by an MCU
reset, this field will contain the value 1 (ongoing
conference).
File Name
The name of the conference log file.
GMT Offset Sign
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
GMT Offset
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
File Retrieved
Indicates if the file has been retrieved and saved to a
formatted file, as follows:
0 - No
1 - Yes
Event Records
The event records, that is, all records in the unformatted file except the
first record, contain standard fields, such as the event type code and the
time stamp, followed by fields that are event specific.
C-3
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
The event fields are separated by commas. Two consecutive commas with
nothing between them (,,), or a comma followed immediately by a semicolon (,;), indicates an empty field, as in the example below:
Standard Event Record Fields
All event records start with the following fields:
C-4
•
The CDR event type code. For a list of event type codes and
descriptions, refer to Table C-2, “CDR Event Types,” on page C-5.
•
The event date.
•
The event time.
•
The structure length. This field is required for compatibility
purposes, and always contains the value 0.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Event Types
The table below contains a list of the events that can be logged in the CDR
file, and indicates where to find details of the fields that are specific to that
type of event.
The event code identifies the event in the unformatted CDR file, and the event
name identifies the event in the formatted CDR file.
Table C-2
CDR Event Types
Event Code
Event Name
Description
1
CONFERENCE
START
The conference started.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-3, “Event Fields for Event 1 CONFERENCE START,” on page C-16.
Note: There is one CONFERENCE
START event per conference. It is always
the first event in the file, after the
conference summary record. It contains
conference details, but not participant
details.
2
CONFERENCE
END
The conference ended.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-8, “Event Fields for Event 2 CONFERENCE END,” on page C-23.
Note: There is one CONFERENCE END
event per conference, and it is always the
last event in the file.
3
ISDN/PSTN
CHANNEL
CONNECTED
An ISDN/PSTN channel connected.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-9, “Event fields for Event 3 ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL CONNECTED,”
on page C-23.
C-5
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
4
ISDN/PSTN
CHANNEL
DISCONNECTED
An ISDN/PSTN channel disconnected.
ISDN/PSTN
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
An ISDN/PSTN participant connected to
the conference.
PARTICIPANT
DISCONNECTED
A participant disconnected from the
conference.
5
7
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-10, “Event fields for Event 4 ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL
DISCONNECTED,” on page C-26.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-11, “Event fields for Event 5 ISDN/PSTN PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED,” on page C-26.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-12, “Event Fields for Event 7 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED,” on
page C-28.
10
DEFINED
PARTICIPANT
Information about a defined participant,
that is, a participant who was added to the
conference before the conference started.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-14, “Event Fields for Events 10,
101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT,” on page C-30.
Note: There is one event for each
participant defined before the conference
started.
15
C-6
H323 CALL
SETUP
Information about the IP address of the
participant.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-17, “Event fields for Event 15 H323 CALL SETUP,” on page C-36.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
17
H323
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
An H.323 participant connected to the
conference.
NEW
UNDEFINED
PARTICIPANT
A new undefined participant joined the
conference.
BILLING CODE
A billing code was entered by a participant
using DTMF codes.
18
20
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-18, “Event Fields for Events 17,
23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,” on
page C-37.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-19, “Event Fields for Event 18 NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT,” on
page C-39.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-21, “Event Fields for Event 20 BILLING CODE,” on page C-43.
21
22
SET
PARTICIPANT
DISPLAY NAME
A user assigned a new name to a
participant, or an end point sent its name.
DTMF CODE
FAILURE
An error occurred when a participant
entered a DTMF code.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-22, “Event Fields for Event 21 SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME,” on
page C-43.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-23, “Event Fields for Event 22 DTMF CODE FAILURE,” on page C-44.
C-7
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
23
SIP
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
A SIP participant connected to the
conference.
RECORDING
LINK
A recording event, such as recording
started or recording resumed, occurred.
26
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-18, “Event Fields for Events 17,
23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,” on
page C-37.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-24, “Event fields for Event 26 RECORDING LINK,” on page C-44.
28
SIP PRIVATE
EXTENSIONS
Contains SIP Private Extensions
information.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-25, “Event Fields for Event 28 SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS,” on
page C-45.
30
GATEKEEPER
INFORMATION
Contains the gatekeeper caller ID, which
makes it possible to match the CDR in the
gatekeeper and in the MCU.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-26, “Event Fields for Event 30 GATEKEEPER INFORMATION,” on
page C-46.
31
C-8
PARTICIPANT
CONNECTION
RATE
Information about the line rate of the
participant connection. This event is added
to the CDR file each time the endpoint
changes its connection bit rate. For more
information about the fields, see
Table C-27, “Event fields for Event 31 PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE,” on
page C-46.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
32
EVENT NEW
UNDEFINED
PARTY
CONTINUE IPV6
ADDRESS
Information about the IPv6 address of the
participant’s endpoint.
33
PARTY CHAIR
UPDATE
Participants connect to the conferences as
standard participants and they are
designated as chairpersons either by
entering the chairperson password during
the IVR session upon connection, or while
participating in the conference using the
appropriate DTM code.
For more information about the fields, see
see “Event fields for Event 33 - PARTY
CHAIR UPDATE” on page C-46.
100
101
USER
TERMINATE
CONFERENCE
A user terminated the conference.
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
A user added a participant to the
conference during the conference.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-29, “Event Fields for Event 100 USER TERMINATE CONFERENCE,” on
page C-47.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-14, “Event Fields for Events 10,
101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT,” on page C-30.
102
USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT
A user deleted a participant from the
conference.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-31, “Event Fields for Events
102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT
PARTICIPANT, USER RECONNECT
PARTICIPANT,” on page C-47.
C-9
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
103
USER
DISCONNECT
PARTICIPANT
A user disconnected a participant.
USER
RECONNECT
PARTICIPANT
A user reconnected a participant who was
disconnected from the conference.
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
A user updated the properties of a
participant during the conference.
104
105
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-31, “Event Fields for Events
102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT
PARTICIPANT, USER RECONNECT
PARTICIPANT,” on page C-47.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-31, “Event Fields for Events
102,103, 104 - USER DELETE
PARTICIPANT, USER DISCONNECT
PARTICIPANT, USER RECONNECT
PARTICIPANT,” on page C-47.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-14, “Event Fields for Events 10,
101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT,” on page C-30.
106
107
C-10
USER SET END
TIME
A user modified the conference end time.
OPERATOR
MOVE PARTY
FROM
CONFERENCE
The participant moved from an Entry
Queue to the destination conference or
between conferences.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-33, “Event Fields for Events 107
and 109 - OPERATOR MOVE PARTY
FROM CONFERENCE and OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY,” on page C-48.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-32, “Event Fields for Event 106 USER SET END TIME,” on page C-48.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
108
OPERATOR
MOVE PARTY
TO
CONFERENCE
The RMX User moved the participant from
an ongoing conference to another
conference.
For more information, see Table C-34,
“Event Fields for Events 108, 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO
CONFERENCE, OPERATOR ATTEND
PARTY TO CONFERENCE,” on
page C-48.
109
OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY
The RMX User moved the participant to
the Operator conference.
For more information, see Table C-33,
“Event Fields for Events 107 and 109 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY FROM
CONFERENCE and OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY,” on page C-48.
111
OPERATOR
BACK TO
CONFERENCE
PARTY
The RMX User moved the participant back
to his Home (source) conference.
For more information, see Table C-35,
“Event Fields for Event 111 - OPERATOR
BACK TO CONFERENCE PARTY,” on
page C-54.
112
OPERATOR
ATTEND PARTY
TO
CONFERENCE
The RMX User moved the participant from
the Operator conference to another
conference.
For more information, see Table C-34,
“Event Fields for Events 108, 112 OPERATOR MOVE PARTY TO
CONFERENCE, OPERATOR ATTEND
PARTY TO CONFERENCE,” on
page C-48.
1001
NEW
UNDEFINED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a NEW
UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT event.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-20, “Event Fields for Event 1001 NEW UNDEFINED PARTY
CONTINUE 1,” on page C-43.
C-11
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-2
Event Code
Event Name
Description
2001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a
CONFERENCE START event.
PARTICIPANT
DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a
PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED event.
DEFINED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a DEFINED
PARTICIPANT event.
DEFINED
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Additional information about a DEFINED
PARTICIPANT event.
2007
2010
2011
C-12
CDR Event Types (Continued)
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-4, “Event Fields for Event 2001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 1,” on
page C-18.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-13, “Event Fields for Event 2007 PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1,” on page C-29.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-15, “Event Fields for Events 2010,
2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on
page C-33.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-16, “Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,
Event 2102 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2106 - USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,”
on page C-35.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
2101
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a USER ADD
PARTICIPANT event.
USER ADD
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
Additional information about a USER ADD
PARTICIPANT event.
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1
Additional information about a USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT event.
2102
2105
2106
USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-15, “Event Fields for Events 2010,
2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on
page C-33.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-16, “Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,
Event 2102 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2106 - USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,”
on page C-35.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-15, “Event Fields for Events 2010,
2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER UPDATE
PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1,” on
page C-33.
Additional information about a USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT event.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-16, “Event Fields for Event 2011 DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,
Event 2102 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 2, Event 2106 - USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,”
on page C-35.
C-13
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-2
CDR Event Types (Continued)
Event Code
Event Name
Description
3010
PARTICIPANT
INFORMATION
The contents of the participant information
fields.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-36, “Event Fields for Event 3010 PARTICIPANT INFORMATION,” on
page C-54.
5001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 4
Additional information about a
CONFERENCE START event.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-5, “Event Fields for Event 5001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 4,” on
page C-21.
Note: An additional CONFERENCE
START CONTINUE 4 event will be written
to the CDR each time the value of one of
the following conference fields is modified:
• Conference Password
•
•
•
Chairperson Password
Info1, Info2 or Info3
Billing Info
These additional events will only contain
the value of the modified field.
6001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 5
Additional information about a
CONFERENCE START event.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-6, “Event Fields for Event 6001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5,” on
page C-22.
11001
CONFERENCE
START
CONTINUE 10
Additional information about a
CONFERENCE START event. This event
contains the Display Name.
For more information about the fields, see
Table C-7, “Event Fields for Event 11001 CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 10,”
on page C-22.
C-14
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
This list only includes events that are supported by the RMX. For a list of MGC
Manager events that are not supported by the RMX, see "MGC Manager Events
that are not Supported by the RMX” on page C-59.
C-15
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Event Specific Fields
The following tables describe the fields which are specific to each type of
event.
Some fields that were supported by the MGC Manager, are not supported by the
RMX. In addition, for some fields the RMX has a fixed value, whereas the MGC
Manager supported multiple values. For more information about the MGC
Manager fields and values, see the MGC Manager User’s Guide Volume II,
Appendix A.
Table C-3
C-16
Event Fields for Event 1 - CONFERENCE START
Field
Description
Dial-Out Manually
Indicates whether the conference was a dial-out
manually conference or not.
Currently the only value is:
0 - The conference was not a dial-out manually
conference, that is, the MCU initiates the communication
with dial-out participants, and the user does not need to
connect them manually.
Auto Terminate
Indicates whether the conference was set to end
automatically if no participant joins the conference for a
predefined time period after the conference starts, or if
all participants disconnect from the conference and the
conference is empty for a predefined time period.
Possible values are:
0 - The conference was not set to end automatically.
1 - The conference was set to end automatically.
Line Rate
The conference line rate, as follows:
0 - 64 kbps
6 - 384 kbps
12 - 1920 kbps
13 - 128 kbps
15 - 256 kbps
23 - 512 kbps
24 - 768 kbps
26 - 1152 kbps
29 - 1472 kbps
32 - 96 kbps
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-3
Event Fields for Event 1 - CONFERENCE START (Continued)
Field
Description
Line Rate (cont.)
33 - 1024 kbps
34 - 4096 kbps
Restrict Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Algorithm
The audio algorithm.
Currently the only value is:
255 - Auto
Video Session
The video session type.
Currently the only value is:
3 - Continuous Presence
Video Format
The video format.
Currently the only value is:
255-Auto
CIF Frame Rate
The CIF frame rate.
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
QCIF Frame Rate
The QCIF frame rate:
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
LSD Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
HSD Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T120 Rate
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-17
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-4
C-18
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Audio Tones
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Alert Tone
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Talk Hold Time
The minimum time that a speaker has to speak to
become the video source.
The value is in units of 0.01 seconds.
Currently the only value is 150, which indicates a talk
hold time of 1.5 seconds.
Audio Mix Depth
The maximum number of participants whose audio can
be mixed.
Currently the only value is 5.
Operator
Conference
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol.
Currently the only value is:
255 -Auto
Meet Me Per
Conference
Indicates the Meet Me Per Conference setting.
Currently the only value is:
1 - The Meet Me Per Conference option is enabled, and
dial-in participants can join the conference by dialing the
dial-in number.
Number of Network
Services
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Chairperson
Password
The chairperson password for the conference.
Chair Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
An empty field “” means that no chairperson password
was assigned to the conference.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-4
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Cascade Mode
The cascading mode.
Currently the only value is:
0 - None
Master Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Minimum Number
of Participants
The number of participants for which the system
reserved resources. Additional participants may join the
conference without prior reservation until all the
resources are utilized.
Currently the only value is 0.
Allow Undefined
Participants
Indicates whether or not undefined dial-in participants
can connect to the conference.
Currently the only value is:
1 - Undefined participants can connect to the conference
Time Before First
Participant Joins
Note: This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate
option is enabled.
Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse from
the time the conference starts, without any participant
connecting to the conference, before the conference is
automatically terminated by the MCU.
Time After Last
Participant Quits
Note: This field is only relevant if the Auto Terminate
option is enabled.
Indicates the number of minutes that should elapse after
the last participant has disconnected from the
conference, before the conference is automatically
terminated by the MCU.
Conference Lock
Flag
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-19
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-4
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Maximum Number
of Participants
The maximum number of participants that can connect to
the conference at one time.
The value 65535 (auto) indicates that as many
participants as the MCU’s resources allow can connect
to the conference, up to the maximum possible for the
type of conference.
Audio Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Audio Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Video Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Video Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Data Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Data Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 65535.
Message Service
Type
The Message Service type.
Currently the only value is:
3 - IVR
Conference IVR
Service
The name of the IVR Service assigned to the
conference.
Note: If the name of the IVR Service contains more than
20 characters, it will be truncated to 20 characters.
Lecture Mode Type
C-20
Indicates the type of Lecture Mode, as follows:
0 - None
1 - Lecture Mode
3 - Presentation Mode
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-4
Event Fields for Event 2001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Lecturer
Note: This field is only relevant if the Lecture Mode Type
is Lecture Mode.
The name of the participant selected as the conference
lecturer.
Time Interval
Note: This field is only relevant if Lecturer View
Switching is enabled.
The number of seconds a participant is to be displayed
in the lecturer window before switching to the next
participant.
Currently the only value is 15.
Lecturer View
Switching
Note: This field is only relevant when Lecture Mode is
enabled.
Indicates the lecturer view switching setting, as follows:
0 - Automatic switching between participants is disabled.
1 - Automatic switching between participants is enabled.
Audio Activated
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Lecturer ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 4294967295.
Table C-5
Event Fields for Event 5001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 4
Field
Description
Note: When this event occurs as the result of a change to the value of one of
the event fields, the event will only contain the value of the modified field. All
other fields will be empty.
Conference ID
The conference ID.
C-21
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-5
Event Fields for Event 5001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 4 (Continued)
Field
Description
Conference
Password
The conference password.
Chairperson
Password
The chairperson password.
Info1
Info2
Info3
The contents of the conference information fields.
These fields enable users to enter general information
for the conference, such as the company name, and the
contact person’s name and telephone number.
The maximum length of each field is 80 characters.
Billing Info
The billing code.
Table C-6
An empty field “” means that no chairperson password
was assigned to the conference.
Event Fields for Event 6001 - CONFERENCE START CONTINUE 5
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the conference encryption setting, as follows:
0 - The conference is not encrypted.
1 -The conference is encrypted.
Table C-7
C-22
An empty field “” means that no conference password
was assigned to the conference.
Event Fields for Event 11001 - CONFERENCE START
CONTINUE 10
Field
Description
Display Name
The Display Name of the conference.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-8
Event Fields for Event 2 - CONFERENCE END
Field
Description
Conference End
Cause
Indicates the reason for the termination of the
conference, as follows:
1 - The conference is an ongoing conference or the
conference was terminated by an MCU reset.
2 - The conference was terminated by a user.
3 - The conference ended at the scheduled end time.
4 - The conference ended automatically because no
participants joined the conference for a predefined time
period, or all the participants disconnected from the
conference and the conference was empty for a
predefined time period.
5 - The conference never started.
6 - The conference could not start due to a problem.
8 - An unknown error occurred.
9 - The conference was terminated by a participant using
DTMF codes.
Table C-9
Event fields for Event 3 - ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL
CONNECTED
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Channel ID
The channel identifier.
Number of
Channels
The number of channels being connected for this
participant.
Connect Initiator
Indicates who initiated the connection, as follows:
0 - RMX
1 - Participant
Any other number - Unknown
C-23
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-9
Event fields for Event 3 - ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL
CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Call Type
The call type, as follows:
68 - 56 KBS data call
72 - 1536kbs data call (PRI only)
75 - 56 KBS data call
77 - Modem data service
79 - 384kbs data call (PRI only)
86 - Normal voice call
Network Service
Program
The Network Service program, as follows:
0 - None
1 - ATT_SDN or NTI_PRIVATE
3 - ATT_MEGACOM or NTI_OUTWATS
4 - NTI FX
5 - NTI TIE TRUNK
6 - ATT ACCUNET
8 - ATT 1800
16 - NTI_TRO
Preferred Mode
The value of the preferred/exclusive field for B channel
selection (the PRF mode), as follows:
0 -None
1 -Preferred
2 -Exclusive
For more details refer to the Q.931 standard.
C-24
Calling Participant
Number Type
The type of calling number, as follows:
0 - Unknown, default
1 - International
2 - National
3 - Network specific
4 - Subscriber
6 - Abbreviated
Calling Participant
Number Plan
The calling participant number plan.
0 - Unknown
1 - ISDN/PSTN
9 - Private
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-9
Event fields for Event 3 - ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL
CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Calling Participant
Presentation
Indicator
The calling participant presentation indicator, as follows:
0 - Presentation allowed, default
1 - Presentation restricted
2 - Number not available
255 - Unknown
Calling Participant
Screening Indicator
The calling participant screening indicator, as follows:
0 - Participant not screened, default
1 - Participant verification succeeded
2 - Participant verification failed
3 - Network provided
255 - Unknown
Calling Participant
Phone Number
The telephone number used for dial-in.
Called Participant
Number Type
The type of number called, as follows:
0 - Unknown, default
1 - International
2 - National
3 - Network specific
4 - Subscriber
6 - Abbreviated
Called Participant
Number Plan
The called participant number plan, as follows:
0 - Unknown
1 - ISDN/PSTN
9 - Private
Called Participant
Phone Number
The telephone number used for dial-out.
C-25
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-10 Event fields for Event 4 - ISDN/PSTN CHANNEL
DISCONNECTED
Field
Description
Participant Name
The participant name.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Channel ID
The channel identifier.
Disconnect Initiator
Indicates who initiated the disconnection, as follows:
0 - RMX
1 - Participant
Any other number - Unknown
Disconnect Coding
Standard
The disconnection cause code standard.
For values and explanations, see the Q.931 Standard.
Disconnect
Location
The disconnection cause location.
For values and explanations, see the Q.931 Standard.
Q931
Disconnection
Cause
The disconnection cause value.
For values and explanations, see the Q.931 Standard.
Table C-11 Event fields for Event 5 - ISDN/PSTN PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED
C-26
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-11 Event fields for Event 5 - ISDN/PSTN PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Participant Status
The participant status, as follows:
0 -Idle
1 -Connected
2 - Disconnected
3 - Waiting for dial-in
4 -Connecting
5 - Disconnecting
6 - Partially connected. Party has completed H.221
capability exchange
7 - Deleted by a user
8 -Secondary. The participant could not connect the
video channels and is connected via audio only
10 - Connected with problem
11 - Redialing
Remote
Capabilities
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN video
participants.
The remote capabilities in H.221 format.
Remote
Communication
Mode
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN video
participants.
Secondary Cause
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN video
participants and only if the Participant Status is
Secondary.
The remote communication mode in H.221 format.
The cause for the secondary connection (not being able
to connect the video channels), as follows:
0 - Default
11 - The incoming video parameters are not compatible
with the conference video parameters
12 - H.323 card failure
13 - The conference video settings are not compatible
with the endpoint capabilities
14 - The new conference settings are not compatible
with the endpoint capabilities
C-27
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-11 Event fields for Event 5 - ISDN/PSTN PARTICIPANT
CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Secondary Cause
(cont.)
15 - Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes
or other discrepancy.
16 - Inadequate video resources
17 - When moved to a Transcoding or Video Switching
conference, the participant’s video capabilities are not
supported by the video cards
18 - Video connection could not be established
24 - The endpoint closed its video channels
25 - The participant video settings are not compatible
with the conference protocol
26 - The endpoint could not re-open the video channel
after the conference video mode was changed
27 - The gatekeeper approved a lower bandwidth than
requested
28 - Video connection for the SIP participant is
temporarily unavailable
29 - AVF problem. Insufficient bandwidth.
30 - H2.39 bandwidth mismatch
255 - Other
Table C-12 Event Fields for Event 7 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
C-28
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Call Disconnection
Cause
The disconnection cause. For more information about
possible values, see Table C-38, “Disconnection Cause
Values,” on page C-55.
Q931 Disconnect
Cause
If the disconnection cause is “No Network Connection”
or “Participant Hang Up”, then this field indicates the
Q931 disconnect cause.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-13 Event Fields for Event 2007 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Rx Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the general synchronization of
the MCU was lost.
Tx Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the general synchronization of
the participant was lost.
Rx Video
Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the synchronization of the
MCU video unit was lost.
Tx Video
Synchronization
Loss
The number of times that the synchronization of the
participant video was lost.
Mux Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Mux Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Codec Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Codec Unit
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Bridge Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Bridge Unit
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-29
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-13 Event Fields for Event 2007 - PARTICIPANT DISCONNECTED
CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
T.120 Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 MCS Board
ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
T.120 MCS Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
H.323 Board ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
H323 Unit ID
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Table C-14 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT
C-30
Field
Description
User Name
The login name of the user who added the participant to
the conference, or updated the participant properties.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Dialing Direction
The dialing direction, as follows:
0 - Dial-out
5 - Dial-in
Bonding Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-14 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
Description
Number Of
Channels
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The number of channels being connected for this
participant.
Net Channel Width
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Network Service
Name
The name of the Network Service.
An empty field “” indicates the default Network Service.
Restrict
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Only
Indicates the participant’s Audio Only setting, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an Audio Only participant
1 - The participant is an Audio Only participant
255 - Unknown
Default Number
Type
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The type of telephone number, as follows:
0 - Unknown
1 - International
2 - National
3 - Network specific
4 - Subscriber
6 - Abbreviated
255 - Taken from Network Service, default
Note: For dial-in participants, the only possible value is:
255 - Taken from Network Service
Net Sub-Service
Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
C-31
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-14 Event Fields for Events 10, 101, 105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT,
USER ADD PARTICIPANT,
USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT (Continued)
Field
Description
Number of
Participant Phone
Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
Number of MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The number of participant phone numbers.
In a dial-in connection, the participant phone number is
the CLI (Calling Line Identification) as identified by the
MCU.
In a dial-out connection, participant phone numbers are
the phone numbers dialed by the MCU for each
participant channel.
The number of MCU phone numbers.
In a dial-in connection, the MCU phone number is the
number dialed by the participant to connect to the MCU.
In a dial-out connection, the MCU phone number is the
MCU (CLI) number as seen by the participant.
Party and MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
No, one or more fields, one field for each participant and
MCU phone number.
The participant phone numbers are listed first, followed
by the MCU phone numbers.
Identification
Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
Meet Me Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The method by which the destination conference is
identified, as follows:
1 - Called phone number, IP address or alias
2 - Calling phone number, IP address or alias
The meet-me per method. Currently the only value is:
3 - Meet-me per participant
C-32
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-15 Event Fields for Events 2010, 2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Network Type
The type of network between the participant and the
MCU, as follows:
0 - ISDN/PSTN
2 - H.323
5 - SIP
H.243 Password
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Chair
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol used by the participant, as follows:
1 - H.261
2 - H.263
4 - H.264
255 - Auto
Broadcasting
Volume
The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant.
The value is between 1 (lowest) and 10 (loudest).
Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume
by 3 dB.
Undefined
Participant
Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined
participant, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an undefined participant.
2 - The participant is an undefined participant.
Node Type
The node type, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Terminal
C-33
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-15 Event Fields for Events 2010, 2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
Bonding Phone
Number
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The phone number for Bonding dial-out calls.
Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates
from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together, to
look like one large bandwidth channel.
Video Bit Rate
The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second.
A value of 4294967295 denotes auto, and in this case,
the rate is computed by the MCU.
IP Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The IP address of the participant.
An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address
was specified for the participant, and the gatekeeper is
used for routing. In all other cases the address overrides
the gatekeeper.
Signaling Port
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The signaling port used for participant connection.
H.323 Participant
Alias Type/SIP
Participant Address
Type
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants, the alias type, as follows:
7 - E164
8 - H.323 ID
13 - Email ID
14 - Participant number
For SIP participants, the address type, as follows:
1 - SIP URI
2 - Tel URL
C-34
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-15 Event Fields for Events 2010, 2101, 2105 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT
CONTINUE 1, USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1, USER
UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 1 (Continued)
Field
Description
H.323 Participant
Alias Name/SIP
Participant Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants:
The participant alias.
The alias may contain up to 512 characters.
For SIP participants:
The participant address.
The address may contain up to 80 characters.
Table C-16 Event Fields for Event 2011 - DEFINED PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2,
Event 2102 - USER ADD PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2, Event 2106 USER UPDATE PARTICIPANT CONTINUE 2
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the participant’s encryption setting as follows:
0 - The participant is not encrypted.
1 - The participant is encrypted.
2 - Auto. The conference encryption setting is applied to
the participant.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
C-35
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-17 Event fields for Event 15 - H323 CALL SETUP
C-36
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Connect Initiator
Indicates who initiated the connection, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Remote participant
Any other number - Unknown
Min Rate
The minimum line rate used by the participant.
The data in this field should be ignored. For accurate
rate information, see CDR event 31.
Max Rate
The maximum line rate achieved by the participant.
The data in this field should be ignored. For accurate
rate information, see CDR event 31.
Source Party
Address
The IP address of the calling participant.
A string of up to 255 characters.
Destination Party
Address
The IP address of the called participant.
A string of up to 255 characters.
Endpoint Type
The endpoint type, as follows:
0 - Terminal
1 - Gateway
2 - MCU
3 - Gatekeeper
4 - Undefined
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-18 Event Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
An empty field “” denotes an unidentified participant or a
participant whose name is unspecified.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Participant Status
The participant status, as follows:
0 -Idle
1 -Connected
2 - Disconnected
3 - Waiting for dial-in
4 – Connecting
5 - Disconnecting
6 - Partially connected. Party has completed H.221
capability exchange
7 - Deleted by a user
8 -Secondary. The participant could not connect the
video channels and is connected via audio only
10 - Connected with problem
11 - Redialing
Capabilities
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Remote
Communication
Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
C-37
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-18 Event Fields for Events 17, 23 - H323 PARTICIPANT CONNECTED,
SIP PARTICIPANT CONNECTED (Continued)
Field
Description
Secondary Cause
Note: This field is only relevant if the Participant Status
is Secondary.
The cause for the secondary connection (not being able
to connect the video channels), as follows:
0 - Default.
11 - The incoming video parameters are not compatible
with the conference video parameters
13 - The conference video settings are not compatible
with the endpoint capabilities
14 - The new conference settings are not compatible
with the endpoint capabilities
15 - Video stream violation due to incompatible annexes
or other discrepancy
16 - Inadequate video resources
17 - When moved to a Transcoding or Video Switching
conference, the participant’s video capabilities are not
supported by the video cards
18 - Video connection could not be established
24 - The endpoint closed its video channels
25 - The participant video settings are not compatible
with the conference protocol
26 - The endpoint could not re-open the video channel
after the conference video mode was changed
27 - The gatekeeper approved a lower bandwidth than
requested
28 - Video connection for the SIP participant is
temporarily unavailable
255 - Other
C-38
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-19 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Dialing Direction
The dialing direction, as follows
0 - Dial-out
5 - Dial-in
Bonding Mode
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Number of
Channels
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The number of channels being connected for this
participant.
Net Channel Width
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Network Service
Name
The name of the Network Service.
An empty field “” indicates the default Network Service.
Restrict
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Audio Only
Indicates the participant’s Audio Only setting, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an Audio Only participant
1 - The participant is an Audio Only participant
255 - Unknown
Default Number
Type
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The type of telephone number.
Note: Since undefined participants are always dial-in
participants, the only possible value is:
255 - Taken from Network Service
C-39
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-19 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT
Field
Description
Net Sub-Service
Name
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Number of
Participant Phone
Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
Number of MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The number of participant phone numbers.
The participant phone number is the CLI (Calling Line
Identification) as identified by the MCU.
The number of MCU phone numbers.
The MCU phone number is the number dialed by the
participant to connect to the MCU.
Party and MCU
Phone Numbers
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
No, one or more fields, one field for each participant and
MCU phone number.
The participant phone numbers are listed first, followed
by the MCU phone numbers.
Identification
Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
Meet Me Method
Note: This field is only relevant to dial-in participants.
The method by which the destination conference is
identified, as follows:
1 - Called phone number, IP address or alias
2 - Calling phone number, IP address or alias
The meet-me per method, as follows:
3 - Meet-me per participant
Network Type
C-40
The type of network between the participant and the
MCU, as follows:
0 - ISDN/PSTN
2 - H.323
5 - SIP
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-19 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT
Field
Description
H.243 Password
Not supported.
This field remains empty.
Chair
Not supported.
Always contains the value 0.
Video Protocol
The video protocol, as follows:
1 - H.261
2 - H.263
4 - H.264
255 -Auto
Broadcasting
Volume
The broadcasting volume assigned to the participant.
The value is between 1 (lowest) and 10 (loudest).
Each unit movement increases or decreases the volume
by 3 dB.
Undefined
Participant
Indicates whether are not the participant is an undefined
participant, as follows:
0 - The participant is not an undefined participant.
2 - The participant is an undefined participant.
Node Type
The node type, as follows:
0 - MCU
1 - Terminal
Bonding Phone
Number
Note: This field is only relevant to ISDN/PSTN
participants.
The phone number for Bonding dial-out calls.
Bonding is a communication protocol that aggregates
from two up to thirty 64 Kbps B channels together, to
look like one large bandwidth channel.
Video Bit Rate
The video bit rate in units of kilobits per second.
A value of 4294967295 denotes auto, and in this case,
the rate is computed by the MCU.
C-41
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-19 Event Fields for Event 18 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTICIPANT
Field
Description
IP Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The IP address of the participant.
An address of 4294967295 indicates that no IP address
was specified for the participant, and the gatekeeper is
used for routing. In all other cases the address overrides
the gatekeeper.
Signaling Port
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
The signaling port used for participant connection.
A value of 65535 is ignored by MCU.
H.323 Participant
Alias Type/SIP
Participant Address
Type
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants, the alias type, as follows:
7 - E164
8 - H.323 ID
13 - Email ID
14 - Participant number
For SIP participants, the address type, as follows:
1 - SIP URI
2 - Tel URL
H.323 Participant
Alias Name/SIP
Participant Address
Note: This field is only relevant to IP participants.
For H.323 participants:
The participant alias.
The alias may contain up to 512 characters.
For SIP participants:
The participant address.
The address may contain up to 80 characters.
C-42
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-20 Event Fields for Event 1001 - NEW UNDEFINED PARTY
CONTINUE 1
Field
Description
Encryption
Indicates the participant’s encryption setting as follows:
0 - The participant is not encrypted.
1 - The participant is encrypted.
2 - Auto. The conference encryption setting is applied to
the participant.
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Table C-21 Event Fields for Event 20 - BILLING CODE
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant who added the billing code.
Participant ID
The identification number, as assigned by the MCU, of
the participant who added the billing code.
Billing Info
The numeric billing code that was added (32 characters).
Table C-22 Event Fields for Event 21 - SET PARTICIPANT DISPLAY NAME
Field
Description
Participant Name
The original name of the participant, for example, the
name automatically assigned to an undefined
participant, such as, “<conference name>_(000)”.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Display Name
The new name assigned to the participant by the user, or
the name sent by the end point.
C-43
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-23 Event Fields for Event 22 - DTMF CODE FAILURE
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Incorrect Data
The incorrect DTMF code entered by the participant, or
an empty field “” if the participant did not press any key.
Correct Data
The correct DTMF code, if known.
Failure Type
The type of DTMF failure, as follows:
2 - The participant did not enter the correct conference
password.
6 - The participant did not enter the correct chairperson
password.
12 - The participant did not enter the correct Conference
ID.
Table C-24 Event fields for Event 26 - RECORDING LINK
C-44
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the Recording Link participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the Recording
Link participant by the MCU.
Recording
Operation
The type of recording operation, as follows:
0 - Start recording
1 - Stop recording
2 - Pause recording
3 - Resume recording
4 - Recording ended
5 - Recording failed
Initiator
Not supported.
Chapter C-CDR Fields - Unformatted File
Table C-24 Event fields for Event 26 - RECORDING LINK (Continued)
Field
Description
Recording Link
Name
The name of the Recording Link.
Recording Link ID
The Recording Link ID.
Start Recording
Policy
The start recording policy, as follows:
1 - Start recording automatically as soon as the first
participant connects to the conference.
2 - Start recording when requested by the conference
chairperson via DTMF codes or from the RMX Web
Client, or when the operator starts recording from the
RMX Web Client.
Table C-25 Event Fields for Event 28 - SIP PRIVATE EXTENSIONS
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The participant’s identification number as assigned by
the system.
Called Participant
ID
The called participant ID.
Asserted Identity
The identity of the user sending a SIP message as it was
verified by authentication.
Charging Vector
A collection of charging information.
Preferred Identity
The identity the user sending the SIP message wishes to
be used for the P-Asserted-Header field that the trusted
element will insert.
C-45
Polycom RMX 1500/2000/4000 Getting Started Guide
Table C-26 Event Fields for Event 30 - GATEKEEPER INFORMATION
Field
Description
Participant Name
The name of the participant.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by
the MCU.
Gatekeeper Caller
ID
The caller ID in the gatekeeper records. This value
makes it possible to match the CDR in the gatekeeper
and in the MCU.
Table C-27 Event fields for Event 31 - PARTICIPANT CONNECTION RATE
Field
Description
Participant Name
The participant name.
Participant ID
The identification number assigned to the participant by